BCG98 General Construction Training Package · 2006. 4. 5. · BCG31098 Certificate III in General Construction (Demolition) BCG31198 Certificate III in General Construction ... AMP

BCG98 General Construction

Training Package .

Volume 1 The contents of this volume refer only to the Endorsed Components of BCG98 General Construction

Training Package. This volume should not be read in isolation but in the context of the Training Package as a whole. Endorsed by the National Training Framework Committee on 8 October 1998.

Volume 2

– Building Surveying The contents of volume 2 refer only to the Endorsed Components of BCG98 General Construction

Training Package for Building Surveying including information for qualifications.

BCG50103 – Diploma of Building Surveying BCG60103 – Advanced Diploma of Building Surveying

Endorsed by the National Training Quality Council on February 2003

Qualifications BCG10198 Certificate I in Construction BCG20198 Certificate II in General Construction BCG30198 Certificate III in General Construction (Wall and Floor Tiling) BCG30298 Certificate III in General Construction (Wall and Ceiling Lining) BCG30398 Certificate III in General Construction (Solid Plastering) BCG30498 Certificate III in General Construction (Painting and Decorating) BCG30598 Certificate III in General Construction (Structural Cladding) BCG30698 Certificate III in General Construction (Bricklaying/Blocklaying) BCG30798 Certificate III in General Construction (Carpentry – Framework/Formwork/Finishing) BCG30898 Certificate III in General Construction (Roof Tiling) BCG30998 Certificate III in General Construction (Materials Handling) BCG31098 Certificate III in General Construction (Demolition) BCG31198 Certificate III in General Construction (Stonemasonry) BCG31298 Certificate III in General Construction (Concreting/Steelfixing) BCG31398 Certificate III in General Construction

© Australian National Training Authority (ANTA), 2003 This work has been produced with the assistance of funding provided by the Commonwealth Government through ANTA. • An individual may make a photocopy of all or part of the work for their personal use. • A Registered Training Organisation may make photocopies of all or part of the work

for the teaching purposes of that organisation, including for supply to its students provided that any consideration does not exceed the marginal cost of preparation, reproduction, assembly and delivery.

Except as permitted under the Copyright Act 1968, all other rights are reserved. Requests for permission may be directed to: Australian National Training Authority Level 11, AMP Place 10 Eagle Street BRISBANE, QLD 4000 Phone: (07) 3246 2300 Fax: (07) 3246 2490 This work is the result of wide consultations with Australian industry participants. It is a collaborative view and does not necessarily represent the view of ANTA or any specific body. For the sake of brevity it may omit factors which could be pertinent in particular cases. While care has been taken in the preparation of this Training Package, ANTA and the original developer do not warrant that any licensing or registration requirements specified here are either complete or up-to-date for your State or Territory. ANTA and the original developer do not accept any liability for any damage or loss (including indirect and consequential loss) incurred by any person as a result of relying on the information contained in this Training Package. This Training Package should not be regarded as professional advice and it should not be relied upon in any important matter without obtaining appropriate advice relevant to your circumstances.

Published by: Australian Training Products Ltd Level 25, 150 Lonsdale St Melbourne 3000 Phone: +61 3 96550600 Fax: +61 3 9639 4684 www.atpl.net.au e-mail: [email protected]

First published: December 1998 Stock Code Number: 2130002STD BCB98 General Construction Training Package – Volume 1 Printed by: Document Printing Australia Ltd, Melbourne, Australia AESharenet Code: P Print Version No: 2 September 2003

IMPORTANT Notice on use of current version Training Packages are not static documents. Changes are made periodically to reflect the latest industry practices.

Before commencing any form of training or assessment, you must ensure delivery is from the current version of the Training Package.

To ensure you are complying with this requirement:

• check the Print Version Number found just below the copyright statement on the imprint page of your current Training Package;

• access the ATP website (http://www.atpl.net.au) and check the latest Print Version Number, which is displayed in the sample of the Training Package;

• in cases where the Print Version Number is later than yours, the Print Version Modification History in the Training Package sample on the ATP website will indicate the changes that have been made.

The Modification History is also available on the website of the developer of the Training Package

The National Training Information Service (http://www.ntis.gov.au) also displays any changes in the Units of Competency and the packaging of qualifications

MODIFICATION HISTORY – ENDORSED MATERIALS

Please refer to the National Training Information Service for the latest version of Units of Competency and Qualification information (http://www.ntis.gov.au).

BCG98 General Construction Training Package Sheet: 1 of 1

Vers

ion

Dat

e of

Rel

ease

Aut

horis

atio

n:

Comments

2 25 September 2003 NTQC

Typographical errata plus inclusion of Diploma & Advanced Diploma – Building Surveyor sector qualifications as second volume

1.00

December 1998 NTFC Primary Release

Forms control: All endorsed training packages will have a version number displayed on the imprint page of every volume constituting that training package. Every training package will display an up-to-date copy of this modification history form, to be placed immediately after the contents page of the first volume of the training package. Comments on changes will only show sufficient detail to enable a user to identify the nature and location of the change. Changes to training packages will generally be batched at quarterly intervals. This modification history form will be included within any displayed sample of that training package and will constitute all detail available to identify changes.

Contents

Training Packages................................................................................ 1 The Endorsed Component ..................................................................... 2 What are Competency Standards.................................................... 2 Development of Competency Standards for General Construction.. 2 Customisation of Competency Standards........................................ 3 List of Competency Standards for General Construction ................. 4 General Construction Qualifications ................................................ 11 What are Qualifications ................................................................ 11 Components of Qualifications ....................................................... 12 Qualifications and Licensing Arrangements .................................. 13 Customisation of Packaging of Competency Standards ............... 14 Customisation by RTOs ................................................................ 14 New Apprenticeship Pathways ..................................................... 14 Training Package Outline .................................................................... 16 Certificate I in Construction .................................................................. 17 Certificate II in General Construction ................................................... 18 Certificate III in General Construction Wall and Floor Tiling ..................................................................... 19 Wall and Ceiling Lining ................................................................. 20 Solid Plastering ............................................................................ 21 Painting and Decorating ............................................................... 22 Structural Cladding ....................................................................... 23 Bricklaying/Blocklaying ................................................................. 24 Carpentry (Framework/Formwork/Finishing) ................................. 26 Roof Tiling .................................................................................... 28 Materials Handling ........................................................................ 29 Demolition .................................................................................... 30 Concreting/Steelfixing ................................................................... 31 General Construction ................................................................... 32 Assessment Guidelines .................................................................... 33 Network Contacts .............................................................................. 44

© Australian National Training Authority BCG98 version 2 (To be reviewed by 30 June 2003) Page 1

TRAINING PACKAGE FOR THE GENERAL CONSTRUCTION

SKILLS STREAM OF THE BUILDING AND CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY

TRAINING PACKAGES Training Packages provides the basic building blocks for Vocational Education and Training programs. They bring together through a national industry managed process standards, qualifications and assessment, creating a comprehensive toolkit for learning and assessment leading to nationally recognised qualifications. Training Packages support a new and expanded range of New Apprenticeship opportunities with most qualifications in the General Construction Training Package incorporating flexible pathways. All Training Packages consist of two components – endorsed and non-endorsed. The endorsed component includes

• Industry competency standards which are the competencies the building and construction industry needs its workers to have

• The fifteen General Construction national qualifications a person can receive when they are assessed as competent against the standards

• Assessment guidelines for assessing competence in the industry. The non-endorsed component includes a range of resources to support learning and assessment, and the professional development of teachers and trainers.

Non - EndorsedNon - Endorsed

National

CompetencyStandards

NationalQualifications

EndorsedEndorsed

AssessmentGuidelines

TRAINING PACKAGE

Learning Strategy ProfessionalDevelopment Materials Assessment Materials Assessment Materials

Page 2 © Australian National Training Authority BCG98 version 2 (To be reviewed by 30 June 2003)

THE ENDORSED COMPONENT What are …… Competency Standards Industry competency standards are nationally agreed, industry developed statements that describe the knowledge and skill necessary to perform the standard required in the workplace. Each competency standard is made up of Unit Title: The title of a general area of competency Unit Discriptor: Optional, assists with clarifying the unit title. The current General Construction competency standards do not have unit descriptors. Elements: Describe the outcome which contribute to a unit

Performance Criteria: Specify the required level of performance

Range Statement: Which expands and gives context to performance criteria and elements Evidence Guide: Assists the interpretation and assessment of unit. Indicates Resource implications, Key Competencies, context for assessments etc. It provides more information for assessors. Development of Competency Standards for General Construction The building and construction industry was one of the first industries to develop national competency standards. The first set of standards for Fitout and Finish and Structures skills streams were endorsed by the then National Training Board in 1992. Most of the earlier standards had a narrow focus and they were developed without Evidence Guides. The General Construction skills stream is the result of the amalgamation of two skills streams previously known in the industry as “Fitout and Finish” and “Structures”. These standards were subjected to a thorough review and the standards were revised to reflect a broader notion of competency. The current standards were developed with evidence guides, in accordance with the ANTA “Standards Best Practice Manual”. CTA has developed competency standards for the General Construction stream up to AQF level III.


Customisation of Competency Standards The building and construction industry has the most mobile workforce in the country. Due to the nature of the industry, building and construction workers are employed on a project basis for a limited period of time. Building and construction workers move from one project to another, often changing their employer. Mobility is the key word for employment within the building and construction industry. In this working environment, portability of skills is extremely important for both employers and employees. Therefore, customisation arrangements for competency standards and their packaging have been developed so that the original intent and the integrity of the standards are maintained to ensure portability of skills. National competency standards for the building and construction industry have been developed in such a way that flexibility required for different enterprises or industry users has been provided in the range of variables. The enterprises or other industry users may select what is relevant to them from the range of variables. Evidence guides for competency standards with a broad range of variables indicate the minimum range to be selected to demonstrate competence in a Competency Standard. This provides flexibility for different users to select what is relevant to them from the range of variables, and to demonstrate competence in what is relevant only. Elements of competency standards and performance criteria given in the competency standards indicate the performance levels acceptable to the industry for those units to be nationally consistent and portable across the industry. Therefore, any changes to the elements of competency or the performance criteria will change the intent and the integrity of the competency standard. Hence, modifications to elements or performance criteria of the competency standards, included in the Training Package, are not allowed.


Competency Standards Competency standards included in the Training Package for General Construction (September 1998)

Code Title BCG1000A Carry out interactive workplace communication

BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements

BCG1002A Plan and organise work

BCG1003A Read and interpret plans

BCG1004A Carry out measurement and calculations

BCG1005A Use hand and power tools

BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment

BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding

BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices

BCG1009A Carry out excavation and install support

BCG1010A Carry out concreting to simple forms

BCG1011A Handle construction materials and safe disposal of waste

BCG1012A Prepare for construction process (wall and floor tiling)

BCG1013A Prepare for construction process (Solid plastering)

BCG1014A Prepare for construction process (Dry wall plastering)

BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (Brick/Block laying)

BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry)

BCG1017A Prepare for construction process (demolition)

BCG1018A Prepare for construction process (steelwork)

BCG1019A Prepare for construction process (painting and decorating)


Code Title BCG2000A Assemble simple partition frames

BCG2001A Prepare surfaces

BCG2002A Oxy/LPG acetylene cutting

BCG2003A Carry out general demolition

BCG2004A Carry out levelling

BCG2005A Erect and strip formwork for concrete work

BCG2006A Carry out steelfixing

BCG2007A Operate elevated work platforms (EWP)

BCG2008A Use explosive power tools

BCG2009A Carry out concrete work

BCG2010A Remove/replace door and window furniture

BCG2011A Use static machines

BCG2012A Make set outs


Code Title BCG3001A Encapsulate and remove asbestos

BCG3002A Carry out general demolition (manual/mechanical)

BCG3003A Operate demolition plant and equipment

BCG3004A Operate crushing plant

BCG3005A Remove contaminants – belt picker

BCG3006A Operate loader

BCG3007A Dispatch crushings

BCC3008A* Conduct Skid Steer Loader operations

BCG3009A Construct & install non-load bearing internal partition wall

BCG3010A Install windows to wall framing

BCG3011A Carry out basic setting out

BCG3012A Construct & erect timber wall framing

BCC3013A* Conduct Forklift operations

BCG3014A Erect timber pitched roof framing

BCG3015A Erect timber roof trusses

BCG3016A Install sub floor framing

BCG3017A Install timber & sheet flooring

BCG3018A Erect steel roof trusses

BCG3019A Construct & erect steel wall framing

BCG3020A Construct timber roof structures-irregular roofs

BCG3021A Install door frames

BCG3022A Finish eaves

* These standards have been taken from the Training Package for Civil Construction


Code Title BCG3023A Install exterior cladding

BCG3024A Construct timber external stairs

BCG3025A Install external or internal doors

BCG3026A Install fitments

BCG3027A Construct wet area construction/installation

BCC3028A* Control traffic

BCG3029A Fix timber mouldings

BCG3030A Replace glass

BCG3031A Erect door jamb/frame (build in unit)

BCG3032A Fix timber raking moulds

BCG3033A Restore renovate windows and frames

BCG3034A Erect/dismantle formwork

BCG3035A Erect/dismantle slip form formwork

BCG3036A Tile a regular roof

BCG3037A Tile an irregular roof

BCG3038A Slate a roof

BCG3039A Repair & restore tile roofs

BCG3040A Carry out restoration of heritage roof tiling

BCG3041A Undertake dogging

BCG3042A Undertake rigging

BCG3043A Operate hoist

* This standard has been taken from the Training Package for Civil Construction


Code Title BCG3044A Apply decorative finishes

BCG3045A Apply paint by spray

BCG3046A Apply texture coatings

BCG3047A Erect ceiling framing (pitched roof)

BCG3048A Install glass blockwork

BCG3049A Fix stone steps and stairs

BCG3050A Renovate and restore stone work

BCG3051A Install and repair stone floors

BCG3052A Fix stone veneer cladding

BCG3053A Produce reconstituted stone

BCG3054A Lay terrazzo

BCG3055A Carry out cemetery monument fixings

BCG3056A Construct stone arches

BCG3057A Finish concrete

BCG3058A Transport concrete

BCG3059A Place concrete

BCG3060A Cure concrete

BCG3061A Apply reinforcement schedule

BCG3062A Carry out special finishes to concrete

BCG3063A Carry out tilt slab construction

BCG3064A Weld using manual metal arch welding process (MMAW)

BCG3065A Carry out monostrand post tensioning


Code Title BCG3066A Carry out stress bar post tensioning

BCG3067A Construct corbels & decorative brickwork

BCG3068A Construct battered masonry surfaces

BCG3069A Construct fire places and chimneys

BCG3070A Dress stone manually

BCG3071A Assemble fabricated components

BCG3072A Split stone manually

BCG3073A Finish stone

BCG3074A Carry out profile work

BCG3075A Machine stone

BCG3076A Inlay lead to stone

BCG3077A Lay & repair wall and floor tiles

BCG3078A Tile corners

BCG3079A Tile curved surfaces

BCG3080A Carry out decorative mosaic tiling

BCG3081A Apply/install waterproofing and damproofing

BCG3082A Tile pools and spas

BCG3083A Apply guilding to stone

BCG3084A Install framed ceiling (sheets & boards)

BCG3085A Install plasterboard, plasterglass, fibre cement/cornice to wall/ceiling

BCG3086A Install pre-cast decorative mouldings

BCG3087A Carry out firerated wall & ceiling construction


Code Title BCG3088A Install suspended ceilings (tiles, panels & strips)

BCG3089A Install cast plaster blockwork

BCG3090A Install acoustic thermal insulation

BCG3091A Apply float and set coats for hard plaster - flat surfaces

BCG3092A Apply solid render

BCG3093A Restore & renovate solid plasterwork

BCG3094A Construct plaster mouldings

BCG3095A Carry out conite construction

BCG3096A Apply paint by brush/roller

BCG3097A Match specified paint colour

BCG3098A Apply clear timber finish

BCG3099A Set and anchor stone facades

BCG3100A Prepare surfaces for painting and decorating

BCG3101A Apply wall paper

BCG3102A Install glazing

BCG3103A Apply industrial protective coatings

BCG3104A Install curtain walling

BCG3105A Install aluminium framework – glazed/panelled

BCG3106A Install pre cast cladding

BCG3107A Carry out veneer construction

BCG3108A Carry out solid brick construction


Code Title BCG3109A Construct masonry steps and stairs

BCG3110A Lay brick and blocks (wall & corner)

BCG3111A Lay multi thickness wall & piers

BCG3112A Construct masonry arch-semi circular & segmental

BCG3113A Construct curved wall

BCG3114A Construct masonry blockwork

BCG3115A Lay segmental/unit paving

BCG3116A Lay and repair marble wall and floor tiling

BCG3117A Fix shingles – roofs and facades

BCG3118A Erect and dismantle scaffolding - basic

BCG3119A Operate pulveriser

BCG3120A Fix linings and panelling

BCG3121A Apply waterproofing for wall and floor tiling

BCG3122A Erect and dismantle slip form formwork

General Construction Qualifications What are…. Qualifications Under the Australian Qualifications Framework (AQF) there are six levels of vocational education and training qualifications, ranging from AQF level 1 to VI. In the Building and Construction industry Certificate I in generally accepted as the ‘Vet in Schools’ level, and Certificate III at ‘trade’ level. A training package specifies which combinations of competency standards make up the qualifications for the industry. Competency standards in the General Construction stream have been packaged into 15 qualifications covering AQF levels 1 – 3. The qualifications under the General Construction Training Package are:


BCG10198 Certificate I in Construction BCG20198 Certificate II in General Construction BCG30198 Certificate III in General Construction (Wall and floor tiling) BCG30298 Certificate III in General Construction (Wall and Ceiling Lining) BCG30398 Certificate III in General Construction (Solid plastering) BCG30498 Certificate III in General Construction (Painting and Decorating) BCG30598 Certificate III in General Construction (Structural Cladding) BCG30698 Certificate III in General Construction (Bricklaying/Blocklaying) BCG30798 Certificate III in General Construction (carpentry – Framework/Formwork/Finishing) BCG30898 Certificate III in General Construction (Roof Tiling) BCG30998 Certificate III in General Construction (Materials Handling) BCG31098 Certificate III in General Construction (Demolition) BCG31198 Certificate III in General Construction (Stonemasonry) BCG31298 Certificate III in General Construction (Concreting/Steelfixing) BCG31398 Certificate III in General Construction NOTE* BCG50103 – Diploma of Building Surveying BCG60103 – Advanced Diploma of Building Surveying Qualification information is located within Volume 2. Certificate I was developed to assist transition from schools to vocational education and training (VET in Schools Program). Certificate I is common to Certificate II and all Certificate III qualifications. Certificate II is common for all Certificate III qualifications. However, the mix of core and elective competencies may vary according to the occupational outcome at Certificate III. Although most of the Certificate III qualifications listed above are straight forward, there are some qualifications such as Certificate III in Carpentry, Bricklaying/Blocklaying and Concreting/Steelfixing which have more than one pathway within one qualification. For an example, within the Carpentry qualification one can select the pathway to be a Framework, Finishing or Formwork Carpenter. Irrespective of the pathway to be taken, apprentices are required to complete all core competencies. Once they have achieved the core competencies, they can select the required electives depending on the pathway (Framework/Finishing/Formwork) they intend to follow. Similarly those apprentices following Certificate III (Bricklaying/Blocklaying) or Certificate III (Concreting/Steelfixing) can select the pathway that suits them best. Components of Qualifications The building and construction industry has decided to include core, elective and optional competency standards in packaging standards into qualifications aligned to AQF. The industry has decided to have a substantial core in each qualification to ensure all-important portability of skills.


Construction Training Australia on behalf of the building and construction industry is confident that this approach will provide national consistency and the portability required by the industry, whilst providing flexibility required by enterprises, apprentices and licensing authorities. This approach will also maximise the potential for choice through electives within the boundaries agreed for each qualification for competent performance. The packaging will also include cross-industry standards, especially in the areas of small business management and office management, including computer skills. These cross-industry standards, once developed will be included in the packaging as optional standards. Core All core competency standards listed within a qualification

must be achieved. The core competency standards will provide national consistency and portability of skills required.

Electives The electives will allow enterprises and apprentices to choose units that suit them. The employers and apprentices can draw electives from other Training Packages subject to the customisation arrangements described below.

Optional These competency standards represent cross-industry standards such as small business management and office skills. They are seen as important but not compulsory to achieve a particular qualification.

The General Construction Training Package will allow Employers and Apprentices to negotiate with Registered Training Organisations and select the elective and optional competency standards that suit their requirements best to supplement the core competency standards listed under each qualification. Construction Training Australia in conjunction with the construction industry, will periodically add competency standards as elective and optional when, the appropriate standards are developed. Qualifications and licensing arrangements There is no uniform licensing system in operation in the occupations covered by the qualifications included in the General Construction Training Package in all States and Territories. Individual States and Territories, where there are licensing arrangements, have their own systems in operation which are not duplicated elsewhere. For example in NSW there are more than 300 trade and sub-trade licensing categories where as in Queensland there are 80 plus trade and sub-trade licensing categories. In view of the diversity of licensing arrangements across States and Territories, it is not possible to have a national qualification arrangement that would mirror the


licensing categories in all States and Territories, where such licensing systems exist. Training pathways to achieve different licensing arrangements in different States and Territories have been provided through the flexibility arrangements within customisation of packaging of standards. Under the customisation arrangements, a person undertaking training under a given qualification`` can add units of competency from other packages in addition to the core and the minimum numbers of elective competencies stipulated for that qualification. Customisation of packaging of Competency Standards In general, opportunity for customisation has been provided through core and elective competency standards included in each qualification. The core units of competency will provide national consistency of qualifications whilst the elective units of competency will provide the flexibility required by different enterprises and/or apprentices. Users of the General Construction Package can incorporate additional units of competency from other Training Packages as electives. However, all users of General Construction Package should complete the entire core and the minimum number of electives as stipulated in one qualification package before drawing additional units of competency from another qualification package. For an example, imagine that a user of the Training Package for Certificate III in General Construction (Bricklaying/Blocklaying) wants to incorporate additional units of competency from Certificate III in General Construction (Solid plastering). In this case the person should draw additional units of competency from those listed under solid plastering in addition to the core and the minimum of 2 electives as stipulated for Bricklaying/Blocklaying. Any user who does not complete the core and the minimum number of elective stipulated for a particular qualification will not be entitled to have the particular qualification title. Customisation by RTOs Construction Training Australia would prefer Registered Training Organisations to refer any customised arrangement involving any component of the General Construction Training Package to CTA for their comment on national consistency and portability of such customised arrangements. New Apprenticeship Pathways Qualifications included in the General Construction Training Package can be achieved by a variety of pathways and delivery methods. Qualifications can be achieved either on-the-job or through a combination of on and off-the-job training. With the exception of Certificate I, the main objective of which is to facilitate VET in schools, all other qualifications can be achieved through contracted training. The General Construction Training Package has introduced five new qualifications at AQF III level that did not exist previously.


Having qualifications at AQF levels I, II and III facilitates traineeship and apprenticeship pathways. This provides multiple entry and exit points and has the potential to recognise more than one certificate with efficient use of learning strategies and pathways which include articulation arrangements. The diagram on the following page illustrates the formal linkages between different levels of qualifications. The articulation arrangements allow for horizontal and vertical movement between qualifications. Eg. Vertically between Certificates I, II and III and horizontally between Certificate III qualifications. On the whole, the General Construction Training Package will facilitate introduction of new apprenticeships in the building and construction industry.

Page

16

© A

ustr

alia

n N

atio

nal T

rain

ing

Aut

hori

ty

BC

G98

ver

sion

2 (T

o be

rev

iew

ed b

y 3

0 Ju

ne 2

003)

G

ENER

AL

CO

NST

RU

CTI

ON

TR

AIN

ING

PA

CK

AGE

OU

TLIN

E

C

ERTI

FIC

ATE

III

Wall & Floor Tiling

Wall & Ceiling Lining

Solid Plastering

Painting & Decorating

Structural Cladding

Bricklaying/Blocklaying

Carpentry

Roof Tiling

Materials Handling

Demolition

Stonemasonry

Concreting/Steelfixing

General Construction

CER

TIFI

CA

TE II

CER

TIFI

CA

TE I


Packaging of competency standards into qualifications

and their alignment to the AQF BCG10198 Certificate I in Construction Unit Number Unit Title Core/Elective

BCG1000A Carry out interactive workplace communication Core BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements Core BCG1002A Plan and organise work Core BCG1003A Read and interpret plans Core BCG1004A Carry out measurements and calculations Core BCG1005A Use hand and power tools Core BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment Core BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices Core BCG1011A Handle construction materials and safe disposal of waste Core

To achieve this qualification under Vocational Education Training in schools program, all nine core competency standards must be achieved.


BCG20198 Certificate II in General Construction Unit Number Unit Title Core/Elective

BCG1000A Carry out interactive workplace communication Core BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements Core BCG1002A Plan and organise work Core BCG1003A Read and interpret plans Core BCG1004A Carry out measurements and calculations Core BCG1005A Use hand and power tools Core BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment Core BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding Core BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices Core BCG1009A Carry out excavation and install support Core BCG1010A Carry out concreting to simple forms Core BCG1011A Handle construction materials & safe disposal of waste Core BCG1012A Prepare for construction process (wall and floor tiling) Elective BCG1013A Prepare for construction process (solid plastering) Elective BCG1014A Prepare for construction process (dry wall plastering) Elective BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/block laying) Elective BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry) Elective BCG1017A Prepare for construction process (demolition) Elective BCG1018A Prepare for construction process (steelwork) Elective BCG1019A Prepare for construction process (painting and

decorating) Elective

BCG2001A Prepare surfaces Core BCG2003A Carry out general demolition Core BCG2004A Carry out levelling Core BCG2007A Operate elevated work platforms (EWP) Core BCG2000A Assemble simple partition frames Elective BCG2002A Oxy\LPG acetylene cutting Elective BCG2005A Erect and strip formwork for concrete work Elective BCG2006A Carry out steel fixing Elective BCG2008A Use explosive power tools Elective BCG2009A Carry out concrete work Elective BCG2010A Remove/replace door and window furniture Elective BCG2011A Use static machines Elective BCG2012A Make set outs Elective

To obtain this qualification, all core competencies plus three out of seventeen elective competency standards must be achieved. Please refer to page 19 of this document for customisation arrangements.


BCG30198 Certificate III in General Construction (Wall and Floor Tiling) Unit Number Unit Title Core/Elective

BCG1000A Carry out interactive workplace communication Core BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements Core BCG1002A Plan and organise work Core BCG1003A Read and interpret plans Core BCG1004A Carry out measurements and calculations Core BCG1005A Use hand and power tools Core BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment Core BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding Core BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices Core BCG1009A Carry out excavation and install support Elective BCG1010A Carry out concreting to simple forms Core BCG1011A Handle construction materials & safe disposal of waste Core BCG1012A Prepare for construction process (wall and floor tiling) Core BCG1013A Prepare for construction process (solid plastering) Elective BCG1014A Prepare for construction process (dry wall plastering) Elective BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/block laying) Elective BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry) Elective BCG1017A Prepare for construction process (demolition) Elective BCG1018A Prepare for construction process (steelwork) Elective BCG1019A Prepare for construction process (painting and


BCG2001A Prepare surfaces Core BCG2003A Carry out general demolition Core BCG2004A Carry out levelling Core BCG2007A Operate elevated work platforms (EWP) Core BCG2000A Assemble simple partition frames Elective BCG2002A Oxy/LPG acetylene cutting Elective BCG2005A Erect and strip formwork for concrete work Elective BCG2006A Carry out steel fixing Elective BCG2008A Use explosive power tools Elective BCG2009A Carry out concrete work Elective BCG2010A Remove/replace door and window furniture Elective BCG2011A Use static machines Elective BCG2012A Make set outs Elective BCG3077A Lay and repair wall and floor tiling Core BCG3078A Tile corners Core BCG3079A Tile curved surfaces Core BCG3121A Apply waterproofing for wall and floor tiling Core BCG3080A Carry out decorative mosaic tiling Elective BCG3082A Tile pools and spas Elective BCG3116A Lay and repair marble wall and floor tiling Elective

To obtain this qualification all core competencies plus a minimum of two electives from 3000 series must be achieved. Please refer to page 19 of this document for customisation arrangements.


BCG30298 Certificate III in General Construction (Wall and Ceiling Lining) Unit Number Unit Title Core/Elective

BCG1000A Carry out interactive workplace communication Core BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements Core BCG1002A Plan and organise work Core BCG1003A Read and interpret plans Core BCG1004A Carry out measurements and calculations Core BCG1005A Use hand and power tools Core BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment Core BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding Core BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices Core BCG1009A Carry out excavation and install support Elective BCG1010A Carry out concreting to simple forms Elective BCG1011A Handle construction materials & safe disposal of waste Core BCG1012A Prepare for construction process (wall and floor tiling) Elective BCG1013A Prepare for construction process (solid plastering) Elective BCG1014A Prepare for construction process (dry wall plastering) Core BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/block laying) Elective BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry) Elective BCG1017A Prepare for construction process (demolition) Elective BCG1018A Prepare for construction process (steelwork) Elective BCG1019A Prepare for construction process (painting and


BCG2000A Assemble simple partition frames Core BCG2001A Prepare surfaces Core BCG2003A Carry out general demolition Core BCG2004A Carry out levelling Core BCG2007A Operate elevated work platforms (EWP) Core BCG2002A Oxy/LPG acetylene cutting Elective BCG2005A Erect and strip formwork for concrete work Elective BCG2006A Carry out steel fixing Elective BCG2008A Use explosive power tools Elective BCG2009A Carry out concrete work Elective BCG2010A Remove/replace door and window furniture Elective BCG2011A Use static machines Elective BCG2012A Make set outs Elective BCG3009A Construct & install non-load bearing internal partition wall Core BCG3084A Install framed ceilings (sheets and boards) Core BCG3085A Install plasterboard, plasterglass, fibre cement/cornice to

wall/ceiling Core

BCG3087A Carry out firerated wall & ceiling construction Core BCG3088A Install suspended ceilings (tiles, panels & strips) Core BCG3081A Apply/install waterproofing/damproofing Elective BCG3086A Install pre-cast decorative mouldings Elective BCG3089A Install cast plaster blockwork Elective BCG3090A Install acoustic thermal insulation Elective



BCG30398 Certificate III in General Construction (Solid Plastering) Unit Number Unit Title Core/Elective

BCG1000A Carry out interactive workplace communication Core BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements Core BCG1002A Plan and organise work Core BCG1003A Read and interpret plans Core BCG1004A Carry out measurements and calculations Core BCG1005A Use hand and power tools Core BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment Core BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding Core BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices Core BCG1009A Carry out excavation and install support Elective BCG1010A Carry out concreting to simple forms Core BCG1011A Handle construction materials & safe disposal of waste Core BCG1012A Prepare for construction process (wall and floor tiling) Elective BCG1013A Prepare for construction process (solid plastering) Core BCG1014A Prepare for construction process (dry wall plastering) Elective BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/block laying) Elective BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry) Elective BCG1017A Prepare for construction process (demolition) Elective BCG1018A Prepare for construction process (steelwork) Elective BCG1019A Prepare for construction process (painting and


BCG2001A Prepare surfaces Core BCG2003A Carry out general demolition Core BCG2004A Carry out levelling Core BCG2007A Operate elevated work platforms (EWP) Core BCG2000A Assemble simple partition frames Elective BCG2002A Oxy/LPG acetylene cutting Elective BCG2005A Erect and strip formwork for concrete work Elective BCG2006A Carry out steel fixing Elective BCG2008A Use explosive power tools Elective BCG2009A Carry out concrete work Elective BCG2010A Remove/replace door and window furniture Elective BCG2011A Use static machines Elective BCG2012A Make set outs Elective BCG3091A Apply float and set coats for hard plaster - flat surfaces Core BCG3092A Apply solid render Core BCG3093A Restore and renovate solid plasterwork Core BCG3086A Install pre-cast decorative mouldings Elective BCG3089A Install cast plaster blockwork Elective BCG3094A Construct plaster mouldings Elective BCG3095A Carry out conite construction Elective



BCG30498 Certificate III in General Construction (Painting and Decorating) Unit Number Unit Title Core/Elective

BCG1000A Carry out interactive workplace communication Core BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements Core BCG1002A Plan and organise work Core BCG1003A Read and interpret plans Core BCG1004A Carry out measurements and calculations Core BCG1005A Use hand and power tools Core BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment Core BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding Core BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices Core BCG1009A Carry out excavation and install support Elective BCG1010A Carry out concreting to simple forms Elective BCG1011A Handle construction materials & safe disposal of waste Core BCG1012A Prepare for construction process (wall and floor tiling) Elective BCG1013A Prepare for construction process (solid plastering) Elective BCG1014A Prepare for construction process (dry wall plastering) Elective BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/block laying) Elective BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry) Elective BCG1017A Prepare for construction process (demolition) Elective BCG1018A Prepare for construction process (steelwork) Elective BCG1019A Prepare for construction process (painting and

decorating) Core

BCG2001A Prepare surfaces Core BCG2007A Operate elevated work platforms (EWP) Core BCG2000A Assemble simple partition frames Elective BCG2002A Oxy/LPG acetylene cutting Elective BCG2003A Carry out general demolition Elective BCG2004A Carry out levelling Elective BCG2005A Erect and strip formwork for concrete work Elective BCG2006A Carry out steel fixing Elective BCG2008A Use explosive power tools Elective BCG2009A Carry out concrete work Elective BCG2010A Remove/replace door and window furniture Elective BCG2011A Use static machines Elective BCG2012A Make set outs Elective BCG3044A Apply decorative finishes Core BCG3045A Apply paint by spray Core BCG3046A Apply texture coatings Core BCG3096A Apply paint by brush/roller Core BCG3097A Match specified paint colour Core BCG3098A Apply clear timber finish Core BCG3101A Apply wall paper Core BCG3100A Prepare surfaces for painting and decorating Core BCG3030A Replace glass Elective BCG3092A Apply solid render Elective BCG3103A Apply industrial protective coatings Elective



BCG30598 Certificate III in General Construction (Structural Cladding) Unit Number Unit Title Core/Elective

BCG1000A Carry out interactive workplace communication Core BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements Core BCG1002A Plan and organise work Core BCG1003A Read and interpret plans Core BCG1004A Carry out measurements and calculations Core BCG1005A Use hand and power tools Core BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment Core BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding Core BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices Core BCG1009A Carry out excavation and install support Elective BCG1010A Carry out concreting to simple forms Elective BCG1011A Handle construction materials & safe disposal of waste Core BCG1012A Prepare for construction process (wall and floor tiling) Elective BCG1013A Prepare for construction process (solid plastering) Elective BCG1014A Prepare for construction process (dry wall plastering) Elective BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/block laying) Elective BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry) Core BCG1017A Prepare for construction process (demolition) Elective BCG1018A Prepare for construction process (steelwork) Elective BCG1019A Prepare for construction process (painting and


BCG2001A Prepare surfaces Core BCG2003A Carry out general demolition Core BCG2004A Carry out levelling Core BCG2007A Operate elevated work platforms (EWP) Core BCG2008A Use explosive power tools Core BCG2000A Assemble simple partition frames Elective BCG2002A Oxy/LPG acetylene cutting Elective BCG2005A Erect and strip formwork for concrete work Elective BCG2006A Carry out steel fixing Elective BCG2009A Carry out concrete work Elective BCG2010A Remove/replace door and window furniture Elective BCG2011A Use static machines Elective BCG2012A Make set outs Elective BCG3023A Install exterior cladding Core BCG3081A Apply/Install waterproofing and damproofing Core BCG3104A Install curtain walling Core BCG3105A Install aluminium framework - glazed/panelled Core BCG3010A Install windows to wall framing Elective BCG3102A Install glazing Elective BCG3106A Erect pre-cast cladding Elective



BCG30698 Certificate III in General Construction (Bricklaying/Blocklaying) Unit Number Unit Title Core/Elective

BCG1000A Carry out interactive workplace communication Core BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements Core BCG1002A Plan and organise work Core BCG1003A Read and interpret plans Core BCG1004A Carry out measurements and calculations Core BCG1005A Use hand and power tools Core BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment Core BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding Core BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices Core BCG1009A Carry out excavation and install support Elective BCG1010A Carry out concreting to simple forms Core BCG1011A Handle construction materials & safe disposal of waste Core BCG1012A Prepare for construction process (wall and floor tiling) Elective BCG1013A Prepare for construction process (solid plastering) Elective BCG1014A Prepare for construction process (dry wall plastering) Elective BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/block laying) Core BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry) Elective BCG1017A Prepare for construction process (demolition) Elective BCG1018A Prepare for construction process (steelwork) Elective BCG1019A Prepare for construction process (painting and


BCG2001A Prepare surfaces Core BCG2003A Carry out general demolition Core BCG2004A Carry out levelling Core BCG2007A Operate elevated work platforms (EWP) Core BCG2008A Use explosive power tools Core BCG2000A Assemble simple partition frames Elective BCG2002A Oxy/LPG acetylene cutting Elective BCG2005A Erect and strip formwork for concrete work Elective BCG2006A Carry out steel fixing Elective BCG2009A Carry out concrete work Elective BCG2010A Remove/replace door and window furniture Elective BCG2011A Use static machines Elective BCG2012A Make set outs Elective BCG3011A Carry out basic setting out Core BCG3021A Install door frames Core BCG3107A Carry out veneer construction Core BCG3108A Carry out solid brick construction Core BCG3109A Construct masonry steps and stairs Core BCG3110A Lay brick and blocks (wall and corner) Core BCG3111A Lay multi thickness wall and piers Core BCG3112A Construct masonry arch-semi circular and segmental Core BCG3113A Construct curved wall Core BCG3114A Construct masonry blockwork Core


BCG30698 Certificate III in General Construction (Bricklaying/Blocklaying) continued

BCG3048A Install glass blockwork Elective BCG3067A Construct corbels and decorative brickwork Elective BCG3068A Construct battered masonry surfaces Elective BCG3069A Construct fire places and chimneys Elective BCG3115A Lay segmental/unit paving Elective



BCG30798 Certificate III in General Construction (Carpentry – Framework/ Formwork/Finising) Unit Number Unit Title Core/Elective

BCG1000A Carry out interactive workplace communication Core BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements Core BCG1002A Plan and organise work Core BCG1003A Read and interpret plans Core BCG1004A Carry out measurements and calculations Core BCG1005A Use hand and power tools Core BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment Core BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding Core BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices Core BCG1009A Carry out excavation and install support Core BCG1010A Carry out concreting to simple forms Core BCG1011A Handle construction materials & safe disposal of waste Core BCG1012A Prepare for construction process (wall and floor tiling) Elective BCG1013A Prepare for construction process (solid plastering) Elective BCG1014A Prepare for construction process (dry wall plastering) Elective BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/block laying) Elective BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry) Core BCG1017A Prepare for construction process (demolition) Elective BCG1018A Prepare for construction process (steelwork) Elective BCG1019A Prepare for construction process (painting and


BCG2001A Prepare surfaces Core BCG2003A Carry out general demolition Core BCG2004A Carry out levelling Core BCG2005A Erect and strip formwork for concrete work Core BCG2007A Operate elevated work platforms (EWP) Core BCG2008A Use explosive power tools Core BCG2010A Remove/replace door and window furniture Core BCG2000A Assemble simple partition frames Elective BCG2002A Oxy/LPG acetylene cutting Elective BCG2006A Carry out steel fixing Elective BCG2009A Carry out concrete work Elective BCG2011A Use static machines Elective BCG2012A Make set outs Elective BCG3009A Construct and install non-load bearing internal partition

wall Core

BCG3010A Install windows to wall framing Core BCG3011A Carry out basic setting out Core BCG3012A Construct and erect timber wall framing Core BCG3014A Erect timber pitched roof framing Core BCG3016A Install sub floor framing Core BCG3017A Install timber and sheet flooring Core BCG3021A Install door frames Core BCG3022A Finish eaves Core BCG3023A Install exterior cladding Core BCG3024A Construct timber external stairs Core BCG3025A Install external or internal doors Core BCG3027A Construct wet area construction/installation Core BCG3029A Fix timber mouldings Core BCG3031A Erect door jamb/frame (build-in unit) Core BCG3120A Fix linings and panelling Core


BCG30798 Certificate III in General Construction (Carpentry – Framework/ Formwork/Finising) continued Unit Number Unit Title Core/Elective

BCG3015A Erect timber roof trusses Elective BCG3018A Erect steel roof trusses Elective BCG3019A Construct and erect steel wall framing Elective BCG3020A Construct timber roof structures-irregular roofs Elective BCG3026A Install fitments Elective BCG3032A Fix timber raking moulds Elective BCG3033A Restore renovate windows and frames Elective BCG3034A Erect/dismantle formwork Elective BCG3035A Erect/dismantle jump form formwork Elective BCG3047A Erect ceiling framing (pitched roof) Elective BCG3122A Erect/dismantle slip form formwork Elective



BCG30898 Certificate III in General Construction (Roof Tiling) Unit Number Unit Title Core/Elective

BCG1000A Carry out interactive workplace communication Core BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements Core BCG1002A Plan and organise work Core BCG1003A Read and interpret plans Core BCG1004A Carry out measurements and calculations Core BCG1005A Use hand and power tools Core BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment Core BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding Core BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices Core BCG1009A Carry out excavation and install support Elective BCG1010A Carry out concreting to simple forms Elective BCG1011A Handle construction materials & safe disposal of waste Core BCG1012A Prepare for construction process (wall and floor tiling) Elective BCG1013A Prepare for construction process (solid plastering) Elective BCG1014A Prepare for construction process (dry wall plastering) Elective BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/block laying) Elective BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry) Core BCG1017A Prepare for construction process (demolition) Elective BCG1018A Prepare for construction process (steelwork) Elective BCG1019A Prepare for construction process (painting and


BCG2001A Prepare surfaces Core BCG2003A Carry out general demolition Core BCG2007A Operate elevated work platforms (EWP) Core BCG2000A Assemble simple partition frames Elective BCG2002A Oxy/LPG acetylene cutting Elective BCG2004A Carry out levelling Elective BCG2005A Erect and strip formwork for concrete work Elective BCG2006A Carry out steel fixing Elective BCG2008A Use explosive power tools Elective BCG2009A Carry out concrete work Elective BCG2010A Remove/replace door and window furniture Elective BCG2011A Use static machines Elective BCG2012A Make set outs Elective BCG3036A Tile a regular roof Core BCG3037A Tile an irregular roof Core BCG3039A Repair and restore tile roofs Core BCG3038A Slate a roof Elective BCG3040A Carry out restoration of heritage roof tiling Elective BCG3118A Erect and dismantle scaffolding - basic Elective BCG3117A Fix shingles – roofs and facades Elective



BCG30998 Certificate III in General Construction (Materials Handling) Unit Number Unit Title Core/Elective

BCG1000A Carry out interactive workplace communication Core BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements Core BCG1002A Plan and organise work Core BCG1003A Read and interpret plans Core BCG1004A Carry out measurements and calculations Core BCG1005A Use hand and power tools Core BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment Core BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding Core BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices Core BCG1009A Carry out excavation and install support Elective BCG1010A Carry out concreting to simple forms Elective BCG1011A Handle construction materials & safe disposal of waste Core BCG1012A Prepare for construction process (wall and floor tiling) Elective BCG1013A Prepare for construction process (solid plastering) Elective BCG1014A Prepare for construction process (dry wall plastering) Elective BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/block laying) Elective BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry) Elective BCG1017A Prepare for construction process (demolition) Elective BCG1018A Prepare for construction process (steelwork) Elective BCG1019A Prepare for construction process (painting and


BCG2002A Oxy/LPG acetylene cutting Core BCG2003A Carry out general demolition Core BCG2004A Carry out levelling Core BCG2007A Operate elevated work platforms (EWP) Core BCG2008A Use explosive power tools Core BCG2000A Assemble simple partition frames Elective BCG2001A Prepare surfaces Elective BCG2005A Erect and strip formwork for concrete work Elective BCG2006A Carry out steel fixing Elective BCG2009A Carry out concrete work Elective BCG2010A Remove/replace door and window furniture Elective BCG2011A Use static machines Elective BCG2012A Make set outs Elective BCC3013A Conduct forklift operations Core BCG3041A Undertake dogging Core BCG3043A Operate hoist Core BCC3028A Control traffic Elective BCG3042A Undertake rigging Elective BCG3118A Erect and dismantle scaffolding - basic Elective



BCG31098 Certificate III in General Construction (Demolition) Unit Number Unit Title Core/Elective

BCG1000A Carry out interactive workplace communication Core BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements Core BCG1002A Plan and organise work Core BCG1003A Read and interpret plans Core BCG1004A Carry out measurements and calculations Core BCG1005A Use hand and power tools Core BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment Core BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding Core BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices Core BCG1009A Carry out excavation and install support Elective BCG1010A Carry out concreting to simple forms Elective BCG1011A Handle construction materials & safe disposal of waste Core BCG1012A Prepare for construction process (wall and floor tiling) Elective BCG1013A Prepare for construction process (solid plastering) Elective BCG1014A Prepare for construction process (dry wall plastering) Elective BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/block laying) Elective BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry) Elective BCG1017A Prepare for construction process (demolition) Core BCG1018A Prepare for construction process (steelwork) Elective BCG1019A Prepare for construction process (painting and


BCG2001A Prepare surfaces Core BCG2003A Carry out general demolition Core BCG2004A Carry out levelling Core BCG2007A Operate elevated work platforms (EWP) Core BCG2000A Assemble simple partition frames Elective BCG2002A Oxy/LPG acetylene cutting Elective BCG2005A Erect and strip formwork for concrete work Elective BCG2006A Carry out steel fixing Elective BCG2008A Use explosive power tools Elective BCG2009A Carry out concrete work Elective BCG2010A Remove/replace door and window furniture Elective BCG2011A Use static machines Elective BCG2012A Make set outs Elective BCC2006A Erect/dismantle fencing and gates Elective BCG3001A Encapsulate and remove asbestos Core BCG3002A Carry out general demolition (manual/mechanical) Core BCG3003A Operate demolition plant and equipment Core BCG3004A Operate crushing plant Elective BCG3005A Remove contaminants - belt picker Elective BCG3006A Operate loader Elective BCG3007A Dispatch crushings Elective BCC3008A Conduct skid steer loader operations Elective BCG3042A Undertake rigging Elective BCG3119A Operate pulveriser Elective

To obtain this qualification all core competencies plus a minimum of three electives from 3000 series must be achieved. Please refer to page 19 of this document for customisation arrangements.


BCG31298 Certificate III in General Construction (Concreting/Steelfixing) Unit Number Unit Title Core/Elective

BCG1000A Carry out interactive workplace communication Core BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements Core BCG1002A Plan and organise work Core BCG1003A Read and interpret plans Core BCG1004A Carry out measurements and calculations Core BCG1005A Use hand and power tools Core BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment Core BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding Core BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices Core BCG1009A Carry out excavation and install support Core BCG1010A Carry out concreting to simple forms Core BCG1011A Handle construction materials & safe disposal of waste Core BCG1012A Prepare for construction process (wall and floor tiling) Elective BCG1013A Prepare for construction process (Solid plastering) Elective BCG1014A Prepare for construction process (dry wall plastering) Elective BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/block laying) Elective BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry) Elective BCG1017A Prepare for construction process (demolition) Elective BCG1018A Prepare for construction process (steelwork) Core BCG1019A Prepare for construction process (painting and


BCG2001A Prepare surfaces Core BCG2003A Carry out general demolition Core BCG2004A Carry out levelling Core BCG2005A Erect and strip formwork for concrete work Core BCG2006A Carry out steel fixing Core BCG2007A Operate elevated work platforms (EWP) Core BCG2009A Carry out concrete work Core BCG2000A Assemble simple partition frames Elective BCG2002A Oxy/LPG acetylene cutting Elective BCG2008A Use explosive power tools Elective BCG2010A Remove/replace door and window furniture Elective BCG2011A Use static machines Elective BCG2012A Make set outs Elective BCG3057A Finish concrete Core BCG3058A Transport concrete Core BCG3059A Place concrete Core BCG3060A Cure concrete Core BCG3064A Weld using manual metal arch welding process (MMAW) Core BCG3034A Erect/dismantle formwork Elective BCG3061A Apply reinforcement schedule Elective BCG3062A Carry out special finishes to concrete Elective BCG3063A Carry out tilt slab construction Elective BCG3065A Carry out monostrand post tensioning Elective BCG3066A Carry out stress bar post tensioning Elective



BCG31398 Certificate III in General Construction Unit Number Unit Title Core/Elective

BCG1000A Carry out interactive workplace communication Core BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements Core BCG1002A Plan and organise work Core BCG1003A Read and interpret plans Core BCG1004A Carry out measurements and calculations Core BCG1005A Use hand and power tools Core BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment Core BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding Core BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices Core BCG1009A Carry out excavation and install support Core BCG1010A Carry out concreting to simple forms Core BCG1011A Handle construction materials & safe disposal of waste Core BCG1012A Prepare for construction process (wall and floor tiling) Elective BCG1013A Prepare for construction process (Solid plastering) Elective BCG1014A Prepare for construction process (dry wall plastering) Elective BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/block laying) Elective BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry) Elective BCG1017A Prepare for construction process (demolition) Elective BCG1018A Prepare for construction process (steelwork) Elective BCG1019A Prepare for construction process (painting and


BCG2001A Prepare surfaces Core BCG2003A Carry out general demolition Core BCG2004A Carry out levelling Core BCG2007A Operate elevated work platforms (EWP) Core BCG2008A Use explosive power tools Core BCG2009A Carry out concrete work Core BCG2000A Assemble simple partition frames Elective BCG2002A Oxy/LPG acetylene cutting Elective BCG2005A Erect and strip formwork for concrete work Elective BCG2006A Carry out steel fixing Elective BCG2010A Remove/replace door and window furniture Elective BCG2011A Use static machines Elective BCG2012A Make set outs Elective BCG3011A Carry out basic setting out Core BCC3013A Conduct forklift operations Core BCG3041A Undertake dogging Core BCG3043A Operate hoist Core BCG3009A Construct and install non-load bearing internal partition

wall Elective

BCG3021A Install door frames Elective BCG3042A Undertake rigging Elective BCG3057A Finish concrete Elective BCG3058A Transport concrete Elective BCG3059A Place concrete Elective BCG3060A Cure concrete Elective BCG3061A Apply reinforcement schedule Elective BCG3064A Weld using manual metal arch welding process (MMAW) Elective BCG3071A Assemble fabricated components Elective BCG3118A Erect and dismantle scaffolding - basic Elective



Assessment Guidelines What are Assessment Guidelines? Assessment guidelines describe the type of system by which the competence of an employee/learner may be assessed against endorsed industry/enterprise competency standards. The process of assessment is a central element to the development of a competency-based training (CBT) system. It ensures that persons working or seeking work within the Building and Construction industry have the skills and knowledge required to perform selected job functions. Similarly it provides a benchmark that ensures an employee’s/learner’s skills are recognised and acknowledged. Training Package Assessment Guidelines are based on principles agreed by Commonwealth, State and Territory Ministers of Education and Training through the operation of the Australian Recognition Framework. The Assessment Guidelines provide direction for the implementation of an industry relevant assessment system which is designed to ensure the validity, reliability and fairness of assessments conducted in both the workplace and institutional contexts


SECTION 1 Assessment System Overview 1.1 Benchmark for Assessment The benchmark for assessment, in accordance with national requirements, will be the endorsed industry competency standards for Building and Construction - Civil Construction and General Construction. 1.2. Role of Registered Training Organisations. The relevant State Training or Recognition Authority, in accordance with the Australian Recognition Framework, is required to implement the national core standards for the registration of Registered Training Organisations and for the maintenance of the system through the provision of monitoring and auditing processes. The requirements for assessment and the issuance of qualifications essentially refer to: • ensuring that the resources for assessment and issuance of qualifications meet

the requirements of the relevant endorsed Training Package • ensuring that assessments are conducted in accordance with the endorsed

components of the relevant endorsed Training Package. • providing quality assurance mechanisms to ensure that assessment is fair,

reliable, valid and provides for a consistency of outcomes. • the provision of appropriate information, advice and support services which

include an appeals system and dispute settling procedure. • the issuing of the relevant AQF qualification(s) or statement of attainment in

accordance with the requirements of the AQF guidelines, National Training Framework Training Committee Guidelines and the specific qualification requirements of the relevant endorsed Training Package(s).

Range of options for undertaking assessment. The Building and Construction industry streams of Civil Construction and General Construction have specific legislative and regulatory requirements in regards to load shifting operations, occupational health and safety and construction standards. Given the level of technical expertise required for assessors within the industry it may be appropriate that partnership arrangements are undertaken between Registered Training Organisations, enterprises and technically qualified


industry personnel. It should be noted that the Registered Training Organisation has responsibility for ensuring the integrity of the assessment process and this should be the guiding focus at all times. It is incumbent upon the relevant Registered Training Organisation to ensure that assessments are conducted are in a fair and equitable manner which includes provision for the language and literacy capabilities of the assessee. The range of options may include: • partnerships between enterprises, technically qualified industry personnel and

Registered Training Organisations whereby aspects such as evidence collection, assessor requirements, validation methods and the like are shared between the respective parties.

• enterprises undertaking the assessment process with the Registered Training

Organisation monitoring and validating the assessment outcomes. • enterprises becoming Registered Training Organisations. • enterprises engaging Registered Training Organisations to undertake all

assessment requirements. • combinations of the above. 1.3. Assessment Pathways The Building and Construction industry considers that to maintain a level of consistency and validity with assessment outcomes, all assessments must be consistent with the relevant units of competency. Therefore this benchmark for assessment will operate for both on and off-the-job assessments within the industry. The single assessment benchmark acknowledges that competency can be developed and assessed through a variety of structured and unstructured experiences, informal and formal training and the transference of knowledge and skills from other contexts and environments. To devise separate assessment benchmarks to encompass the myriad of ways in which competence may be gained and demonstrated is neither efficient or effective. The major consideration in any assessment process must be the attainment of the required standard of performance rather than how the competencies may have been acquired. Within the Civil Construction and General Construction streams of Building and Construction a number of learning pathways have traditionally operated. This encompasses formal apprenticeship and traineeship systems as well as skills gained solely from workplace experience. The industry is conscious of the multiple ways that persons have gained workplace competence and in accordance with the principles of Training Reform, requires an assessment process that is


non-discriminatory in acknowledging that competence. It is therefore of paramount importance that assessment instruments are in accordance with the level of language and literacy required by the assessee to achieve competence at the workplace. Assessment against the units of competence provides for the identification of the required skills and knowledge to be demonstrated and also details the appropriate context and range of evidence necessary to inform a valid assessment. The processes thereby ensuring that an assessee meets the specific legislative and regulatory requirements that operate within the industry. It should be noted that this does impact upon the range of assessment methodologies and evidence collection processes which assessors may utilise to determine competence. It is acknowledged by the industry that these will differ to account for varying contexts and individual/enterprise requirements. Those processes must however confirm, that the assessed competencies can be effectively displayed in a workplace environment.

‘Assessment is the process of collecting evidence and making judgements on whether competency has been achieved, the purpose of assessment is to confirm that an individual can perform to those standards expected in the workplace as expressed in the relevant endorsed industry/enterprise competency standards’.

Guidelines for Training Package Developers. (1997).

TrainingWorkplace ExperienceRecognition of PriorLearning (RPL)Recognition of CurrentCompetency (RCC)Related learningexperiences

Assessmentagainst Industry

CompetencyStandards

Pathways to RecognitionFigure 1

AQFCertification

orStatement

ofAttainment


Options for AQF Certification or Statement of Attainment through training include New Apprenticeships, which may be on-the-job only or a combination of on and off-the-job. New Apprenticeships would not be available in off-the-job only. 1.4. Recording Assessment Outcomes The responsibility for the recording, storing and retrieval of assessment outcomes rests with the Registered Training Organisation(s). It is acknowledged that individuals and enterprises may engage the services of different RTO’s over a period of time. It is therefore important that results of any assessment process must be documented and stored in accordance with the requirements of the Australian Recognition Framework. The Building and Construction industry recognises that individuals have an important role in ensuring that their competencies are recognised and recorded. Individuals should maintain a record of the competencies that they have achieved which provides a further measure of ensuring that when the required combination of standards have been met, an appropriate qualification against the Australian Qualifications Framework can be issued. 1.5. Reporting Assessment Outcomes In accordance with the Australian Qualifications Framework the minimum level of detail to be provided in a statement of attainment or qualification includes the AQF level, the AQF title of the qualification (if applicable) and the title(s) of the achieved unit(s) of competency. 1.6. Appeal and Reassessment Process The process of assessment carries a level of interpretation and procedural formality, which can create an environment, where disagreements may occur. Although clear understandings and informed views about the process of assessment will reduce the prospect of disagreements, an appeals and reassessment process is an essential element of any assessment framework. Although the responsibility for this function rests with the relevant Registered Training Organisation, it may be beneficial to consider workplace involvement within the appeals and reassessment process, particularly for on-the-job assessments. 1.7. External Audit of Assessment Process The Australian Recognition Framework outlines a comprehensive monitoring and audit process for the operation of Registered Training Organisations. Although the responsibility for this function rests with the relevant State/Territory Training/Recognition Authority, it may be beneficial to consider involvement of industry in the process through the relevant State/Territory Building and Construction ITAB.


SECTION 2 Assessor Qualifications and Training 2.1 Assessor Qualifications Assessors within the Building and Construction industry are the principal drivers in delivering a responsive, efficient and high quality assessment system. Within the assessment framework they have primary responsibility for: • determining the application of the assessment process, • utilising appropriate assessment strategies and instruments, • conducting the assessment process, • making accurate and informed judgements, and • informing and recording all relevant parties of the outcomes of the assessment

process. It is therefore fundamental that assessors must be competent and knowledgeable in the process of assessment. All Building and Construction assessors, must: • be competent against two units within the Competency Standards for

Assessment 1995 (Ministerial Council decision - appendix 1). Those standards include the Assessment Standard -Conduct Assessment in Accordance with an Established Procedure, and the Extension Unit - Plan and Review Assessment.

• be technically competent at least to the level being assessed either individually

or in a partnership arrangement. (See section 2.2). To ensure the integrity of the assessment process and to maintain industry confidence with the system, it is advisable that assessors have knowledge of the nature and impact of training reform within the Building and Construction industry including an overview of the process of assessment adopted for the industry. Assessor competence may be achieved through the completion of a recognised training program or an approved recognition of prior learning process. Regardless of the method used to infer competence, assessment must always be demonstrated against the endorsed industry assessor standards.


“Assessment against competencies in the Training package will be carried out in accordance with these endorsed guidelines. The guidelines include the necessary qualifications for those conducting assessments and provide for those situations where more than one person may contribute to the assessment and where the required technical and assessment competencies may not be held by any one person.” Updated Assessment Sections for the “Guidelines for Training Package Developers” (January 1998)

2.2 Using Qualified Assessors. In order to ensure that a level of quality and rigor is maintained within the assessment process, it is mandated that the assessor is ultimately responsible for the outcome of any assessment and therefore must ensure that the assessment has met all stipulated requirements. The assessor, in determining the level of competence or otherwise of a candidate, must be satisfied that the evidence collected adequately addresses the applicable industry/enterprise competency standards and that the assessment process has been undertaken in a valid, reliable and fair manner. In undertaking the assessment process consideration should also be given to those methods that, whilst maintaining the integrity and quality of the system, offer an approach that is innovative and flexible. This may be achieved by using various combinations of persons that may conduct the assessment.

• Location• Number of

assessments• Extent/depth of

assessments• Requiredtimeline• Equipment /

machinery / facilitiesrequired

• Level of assessortechnicalcompetencerequired

• Workplace/institutions requirements

• Implications of cost

Determination of appropriate person(s)to conduct assessment

Assessment againstindustry competencystandards and conductedand recorded inaccordance with theAustralian RecognitionFramework and theAssessment Guidelines ofthe Building andConstruction TrainingPackage for CivilConstruction andConstruction

• Operational experts• Enterprise endorsed

assessors• External assessor• Workplace supervisor• Assessment panel• Registered Training

Organisation

Competence is equal tothe benchmarkrequirements for aqualified Building andConstruction assessoras outlined in section2.1

Environment Assessor selection Assessment


Whilst some enterprises and Registered Training Organisations will opt for a single qualified assessor to undertake the assessment process, others may utilise a flexible approach when undertaking workplace or institutional assessments. A combination of persons to undertake the assessment process may be most appropriate where assessors may not be technically competent at the level or unit being assessed, or where it is cost prohibitive to have an assessor undertake all aspects of the assessment process, (e.g. remote location, length of assessment, large number of assessments, prohibitive timeline etc.). The use of multiple persons to undertake an assessment must however be auspiced by a Registered Training Organisation. A flexible approach to fulfilling the requirement for qualified assessors can potentially offer significant cost and time efficiencies to both enterprises and individuals.


SECTION 3 Guidelines for designing assessment instruments. It is viewed that the assessor and assessee are active participants in the assessment process. Where the assessment is undertaken in a workplace, the opportunity to participate in the assessment process should be afforded to the employer and other relevant persons.

3.1 The Process of Assessment. The process of assessment requires assessors to make informed judgements concerning an individual’s performance against National Building and Construction industry or enterprise-based competency standards. To fulfil this requirement there is a constant need for assessors to interpret and translate information contained within the competency standards to meet the varying contexts in which assessment will take place. The development of reliable, valid, flexible and fair assessment instruments are critical in meeting this challenge. The design of assessment instruments must therefore consider aspects such as the: • assessment context • assessment environment • assessment purpose • level of available resources • characteristics of the assessee • rigour and length of the assessment • level of evidence required • language and literacy capability of the assessee • language and literacy requirements of the required function / competency At all times assessors must ensure that sufficient evidence is gathered to provide an accurate, valid and fair assessment of an individual’s performance against the applicable competency standard(s).


3.2 Evidence Gathering An effective assessment process relies on the collection of sufficient information to make an informed judgement on the performance of an individual. Whilst there are no absolute rules about how much evidence is required or what evidence gathering methods should be used, there is a need to confirm the accuracy and consistency of any assessment of performance. Although processes for the gathering of evidence will vary, four primary approaches should be utilised. They include: • samples of performance (e.g. constructed through simulations, activities and

the like); • observation of performance in the workplace; • evidence of prior performance (e.g. recognition of prior learning, recognition of

current competencies); • supplementary information (e.g. questioning, tests, presentations, contingency

analysis and the like). In many instances, the most appropriate method of gathering evidence will be a combination of all four approaches although this would need to be considered in relation to factors such as time, cost and context.

Figure 4 Examples of Appropriate Evidence Gathering Methods or Techniques

Samples of performance evaluation of simulated product

evaluation of simulated process examination of finished products and processes skill tests aligned to work activity

Observation of performance in the workplace

evaluation of product evaluation of process management of changing context and requirements interaction with related work activities

Evidence of prior performance evaluation of qualifications content evaluation of previous work through portfolios, projects, articles, reports, work history, supervisor and referees’ reports etc.


3.3 Assessment Instrument Design In constructing valid and reliable assessment instruments a balance must be maintained between the specific needs of enterprises and individuals and that of ensuring the integrity of the industry/enterprise competency standards. It is the responsibility of the assessor to ensure that any instruments utilised will produce an outcome that can be directly aligned to the achievement of an industry/enterprise competency standard(s). The following flowchart outlines a process of designing assessment instruments that meet that criteria.

Analyse job role/function and alignment to appropriate units of competency

Examine competency standard units to establish evidence requirements

Collect and evaluate supportive evidence available from the assessee

Identify deficiencies (if any) between the evidence gathered and that which is required

Develop/Select assessment instruments appropriate to: evidence requirements, assessment context, assessee requirements, enterprise requirements

Ensure that the materials developed are valid, reliable, fair, flexible, safe, cost-effective and easily understood by

the assessee

Validate selected assessment instruments with persons independent of the assessment

Figure 5

Designing Assessment Instruments

in consultation with the assessee and w

here applicable the enterprise


Network Contacts

The following are the contact details for members of the building and construction ITC network

Construction Training Australia Chief Executive Officer: Ray Hutt

Address: PO Box 860, Hawthorn, VIC, 3122 Phone: (03) 9819 9677 Fax: (03) 9819 9681

E-mail: [email protected] web: www.nbcitc.com.au

ACT Building and Construction Industry Training Council Executive Director: Paul Stubing

Address: PO Box 882, Dickson, ACT, 2602 Phone: (02) 6241 3977 Fax: (02) 6241 3262

E-mail: [email protected]

Building and Construction Industry Training Council (Inc) Executive Director: Lyn Sherwood

Address: PO Box 206, Leederville, WA, 6007 Phone: (08) 9227 7660 Fax: (08) 9227 7652


Construction Training Council (NT) Executive Director: Tim Freed

Address: PO Box 312, Parap, NT, 0804 Phone: (08) 8941 1011 Fax: (08) 8941 2086


Construction Training Queensland General Manager: Greg Shannon

Address: PO Box 3294, South Brisbane, QLD, 4101 Phone: (07) 3846 5026 Fax: (07) 3846 5067


Construction Industry Training Board (SA) Chief Executive officer: Douglas Strain

Address: 81 Greenhill Road, Wayville, SA, 5034 Phone: (08) 8373 4744 Fax: (08) 8373 2696


Construction Industry Training Advisory Board (NSW) Chief Executive Officer: Douglas Greening

Address: PO Box 6322, Baulkham Hills Business Centre, NSW, 2153 Phone: (02) 9899 6935 Fax: (02) 9899 6448 Mobile: 018 462 116


Tasmanian Building and Construction Industry Board Executive Director: Peter Coad

Address: PO Box 105, Sandy Bay TAS 7006 Phone: (03) 6223 7804 Fax: (03) 6234 6327


BCG1000A Carry out interactive workplace communication

Australian National Training Authority BCG98 Page 1 of 3

BCG1000A: Carry out interactive workplacecommunication

ELEMENT OF COMPETENCY PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

1 Receive and convey information 1.1 Verbal/written instructions received and responded towith correct actions.

1.2 Instructions conveyed and work signage responded towith correct action.

1.3 Information conveyed in simple English so thatmessages are understood.

2 Carry out face-to-face routinecommunication

2.1 Routine instructions, messages and schedules aregiven or followed.

2.2 Workplace procedures carried out to company orsupervisor’s laid down procedures.

2.3 Relevant information assessed and analysed from arange of sources.

2.4 Information selected and sequenced correctly.

3 Work with others 3.1 Suggestions and information provided relevant toplanning/conduct of activities.

3.2 Communication carried out clearly, concisely andeffectively so messages are understood.

4 Participate in simple on-sitemeeting processes

4.1 Correct process for on-site meetings carried out to pre-determined or agreed procedures.

4.2 Negotiations conducted to achieve a constructiveoutcome.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to carrying out all communication requirements associated with working with other personsat a site location and carrying out tasks under supervision.

Verbal/written instructions include directions or instructions related to a simple job/task.

Signage may include but is not limited to:

• on-site direction signs• common site warning signs• facility or location signs• traffic signs

Carry out interactive workplace communication BCG1000A

Page 2 of 3 BCG98 Australian National Training Authority

Range of information sources may include:

• instructions• signage• work schedules• work bulletins• charts• memos• maps

On-site meeting process may take the form of formal or informal meetings and may include:

• notification (time, place, purpose)• item discussion• negotiation outcome

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the effective use of methods of communication relating to instructions,information sources and meeting procedures listed within the range of variables statement relevant to thework orientation.

(1) Critical Aspects of Evidence

It is essential that competence is observed in the following aspects:

• communications to include Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable to work place• operations and organisational policies and procedures• appropriate communications processes demonstrated prior to and during construction activities

(2) Pre-requisite Relationship of Units

Nil

(3) Underpinning Knowledge and Skills

KnowledgeA knowledge of:

• workplace safety requirements• types of on-site meetings and their procedures• how work schedules, charts, work bulletins and memos are used• how instructions are conveyed in the workplace

SkillsThe ability to:

• work safely to instructions• convey information in simple English to invoke correct actions

(4) Resource Implications

The following resources should be made available:

• suitable work area appropriate to the construction process• appropriate communication documentation relevant to the task

BCG1000A Carry out interactive workplace communication


(5) Method of Assessment

Competency shall be assessed while work is undertaken under direct supervision with regular checks,but may include some autonomy when working as part of a team.

Competency in this unit may be determined concurrently, based upon integrated project work.

Assessment may be by intermittent checking at the various stages of the job application in accordancewith the performance criteria.

(6) Context of Assessment

Competency shall be assessed in the workplace or simulated workplace environment in accordance withwork practices and safety procedures.

KEY COMPETENCIES

Collecting,analysing and

organising ideasand information

Communicatingideas and

information

Planning andorganisingactivities

Working withothers and in

teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG1001A: Carry out OH&S requirements


1 Plan and prepare for safe workpractices

1.1 Quality assurance requirements associated withcompany’s safety operations recognised and adheredto.

1.2 Appropriate personal protective equipment selected,correctly fitted and/or made ready for use.

1.3 Tools and equipment selected consistent with safework practice requirements of job, checked forserviceability and any faults reported to supervisor.

1.4 Appropriate barricades, hoardings and signageerected, where applicable, at required job location.

2 Use safe work practices to carryout work

2.1 Work carried out safely and in accordance withState/Territory OH&S legislation and company policy.

2.2 Safety hazards and workplace accidents/incidentsidentified in course of work and reported in accordancewith company policy.

2.3 Industry/site safety responsibilities known and applied.

2.4 Fire fighting equipment selected and operated correctlyaccording to type of fire.

2.5 Current site emergency and first aid procedures knownand followed.

2.6 Signals/sirens for blasting operations recognised andadhered to.

3 Assume responsibility for safety ofself and others

3.1 Appropriate protective equipment correctly selectedand used.

3.2 Safe manual handling techniques used and guidelinesfor lifting and placing followed.

3.3 All safety signs, symbols and alarms adhered to.

3.4 Safety procedures for pre-use check and operation ofspecified power tools/plant, machinery and equipmentfollowed.

3.5 Recommended safe practices in handling chemicaland potentially hazardous materials followed.

4 Work from ladder and workplatforms

4.1 Ladder and work platforms safely erected in plannedlocation.

Carry out OH&S requirements BCG1001A


4.2 Care taken to avoid overhead powerlines and otherobstructions.

4.3 Head and base of ladder or work platform supportsecured against accidental movement.

4.4 Work safely performed from ladder and work platform.

4.5 Appropriate fall arrest equipment utilised in accordancewith current Worksafe Australia guidelines.

5 Use 240v power supply safely 5.1 Position of power pole/box identified for safe placementof leads.

5.2 Framework support positioned to keep leads at correctheight and prevent hazards.

5.3 Power board visually checked for damage, water entryand stability. Area surrounding board checked forpotential hazards.

5.4 Leads checked for tags and visual damage. Earthleakage protection checked for serviceability.

5.5 Work safely performed using 240v power supply.

6 Adhere to emergency procedures 6.1 Emergency equipment able to be located and used asrequired.

6.2 Current worksite emergency/evacuation proceduresadhered to.

7 Carry out general housekeeping 7.1 Waste material disposed of safely in accordance withrequirements of site and regulatory legislation.

7.2 Unused equipment and materials safely and correctlycleaned, maintained and stored.

7.3 Requirements of site, regulatory bodies andOccupational Health and Safety requirementsobserved.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Quality Assurance requirements may include:

• working environment• adverse weather conditions• protection of work personnel• protection of public

Personal protective equipment may include but is not limited to:

• overalls• boots



• jacket• gloves• safety glasses/goggles• hard hat• cap• dust masks/respirator• gum boots• ear plugs/muffs

Regulatory legislation which may be State/Territory specific may include:

• OH&S• EPA• Dangerous goods

Manual handling techniques used in accordance with current Worksafe Australia Standards.

Emergency equipment and procedures include:

• fire fighting• medical and first aid• evacuation

Ladders and work platforms include:

• extension ladders• step ladders• trestle ladders• simple work platforms

Power connections include:

• ELCB systems• isolation transformer (safe-T-pack)• power pole/B4• switch board area

Safety responsibilities apply to:

• personal protection• safe interactive work practices (duty of care)• protection of public and environment (EPA)

Reporting of faults may be verbal or written.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by safely and effectively carrying out safe work practices within the rangeof variables statement relevant to the work orientation.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable to workplaceoperations

• demonstrate application of organisational policies and procedures including Quality Assurancerequirements where applicable

Carry out OH&S requirements BCG1001A


• carry out correct procedures prior to and during construction process• safe and effective operational use of tools, plant and equipment• carry out appropriate applications in accordance with regulatory and legislative requirements


Nil


KnowledgeA broad application of the knowledge of:

• workplace and equipment safety requirements• materials and MSDS• WPH&S Act• other relevant acts, regulations and codes of practice• company policy


• work safely to instructions• use power and hand tools• handle material• select material to MSDS requirements• communicate effectively



• suitable work area appropriate to the construction process• appropriate equipment, materials and documentation to comply with OH&S legislation and/or

company policies• hand and power tools, plant and equipment appropriate to the construction process







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG1002A: Plan and organise work


1 Identify work requirements 1.1 Instructions for work schedule and performance andquality assurance requirements received, understoodand clarified where necessary.

2 Plan process to complete work 2.1 Work identified, prioritised and sequenced to achieveeffective completion of work. Major constructionprocess/sequence identified.

3 Select tools and equipment 3.1 Personal protective equipment correctly identified andselected to suit job requirements.

3.2 Tools and equipment selected to suit job requirements.

3.3 Key functions of major construction plant andequipment identified.

4 Demonstrate safe and efficientsequence of work

4.1 Work performed safely in a logical and efficientsequence.

4.2 Worksite kept clean and clear of debris.

4.3 Tools and equipment safely located when not inimmediate use.

5 Modify plan 5.1 Workplace modified to overcome unforseendevelopments that occur as work progresses.

5.2 Modifications to work plan, based on experience, areidentified and incorporated into successive workactivities.

6 Report outcomes 6.1 Verbal report provided on completed activities.

7 Clean up 7.1 Unused materials safely stacked for removal.

7.2 Debris and waste material removed from job location.

7.3 Worksite left clean, safe and secure on completion.

7.4 Tools and equipment cleaned, maintained and stored.

Plan and organise work BCG1002A


RANGE OF VARIABLES

Work organisation sequence may range from receiving instructions, to carrying out task, to cleaning up task.

Work plan may be either written or verbal and may include the following:• preparation of work area• selections of tools and equipment• handling of materials, tools and equipment• housekeeping requirements

Work schedule may be carried out in a singular application or in a team situation.

Work schedule and performance may have to adhere to Quality Assurance policy and procedures.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by safe and effective preparation using any of the range of worksequences listed within the range of variables statement relative to the work environment.

(1) Critical Aspects and Evidence

It is essential that competence is observed in the following aspects:• indicate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable to workplace

operations including relevant State/Territory regulations and legislation• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures including Quality Assurance

requirements• carry out correct procedures prior to and during the application of construction process• communicate to enable efficient individual/organisational planning of work

(2) Pre-requisite Relationship of Units Nil



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• portable power tools• hand tools and equipment• materials appropriate to the task• materials handling• Quality Assurance


• work safely to instructions• use power tools and hand tools• handle material• select material• apply Quality Assurance





• general construction materials appropriate to the particular construction process• hand and power tools appropriate to the construction process• suitable work area appropriate to the construction process







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG1003A: Read and interpret plans


1 Identify types of drawings andtheir functions

1.1 Main types of plans and drawings used in constructionindustry identified.

1.2 Key functions of each type of drawing identified.

1.3 Key users of these drawings identified.

2 Recognise commonly usedsymbols and abbreviations

2.1 Commonly used symbols and abbreviationsrecognised.

2.2 Function of legend understood and explained.

3 Locate and identify key featureson a site plan

3.1 Key features and dimensions of site identified andlocated.

3.2 Orientation of site identified.

3.3 Access from roadways to worksite located andidentified.

3.4 Services identified.

4 Identify and locate key featuresfrom sectional details andelevations

4.1 Specific key features identified correctly from sectionaldetails and elevations.

4.2 Structural features and horizontal and verticalmeasurements located.

5 Recognise amendments 5.1 Title panel checked. Verification that drawing used islatest amendment.

6 Read and interpret specifications 6.1 Purpose of specifications identified.

6.2 Types of details identified from specifications.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Types of drawings include:

• site plans• elevations• floor plans• sectional plans/elevations• details and specification providing illustrations and dimensions

Read and interpret plans BCG1003A


Key features of site plans may involve:

• shape of site• proposed building/s• roads• easements• existing buildings/structures• services• dimensions

Key features of plans and elevations may involve:

• type of structure – structural members• shape of building/structure• type of construction• layout of rooms• service requirements• location of plant or machinery• vertical and horizontal measurements

Types of structures include:

• single storey buildings• double storey buildings• multi storey buildings• bridges• fabricated towers

Types of construction include but are not limited to:

• structural steel framed• light steel framed• timber framed• reinforced concrete• pre-cast concrete• solid brick• brick veneer

Services may include:

• drainage• sewerage• gas• water• electricity

Types of details include but are not limited to:

• structural steelwork• timber framework• brickwork• concrete work• plastering

Orientation of site includes:

• relationship to ‘north’• location of roads• relationship to roads and neighbouring sites



EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by effectively reading and interpreting drawings to locate or identifynominated features or functions in accordance with the performance criteria and the range listed within therange of variables statement.



• identify and understand various types of drawings• identify dimensions, symbols, abbreviations and key features• identify title panel and reference date as to up-to-date copy of drawings• indicate sound understanding of purpose of specifications in accordance with the work orientation.


Nil



• a range of drawings• materials relative to drawings/specifications• measurements and calculations• symbols, dimensions and terminology


• read and interpret drawings• measure accurately• communicate effectively



• Suitable range of drawings and specifications







Read and interpret plans BCG1003A


KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

BCG1004A Carry out measurements and calculations


BCG1004A: Carry out measurements and calculations


1 Obtain measurements 1.1 Accurate measurements obtained to job instructionusing rule, tape and/or square.

1.2 Quality Assurance requirements associated withcompany’s construction operations recognised andadhered to.

2 Perform simple calculations 2.1 Simple calculations involving length, perimeter, massand volume using four basic operations (+,-,x,/), carriedout.

3 Estimate approximate quantities 3.1 Measurements or quantities estimated (approximately)on site or from job instruction.

3.2 Information obtained correctly from job instruction.

3.3 Measurements correctly identified/recorded withouterror.

3.4 Quantities of materials suitable for work undertakenare calculated and recorded to job instructions.

3.5 Costs for a simple project estimated to within + or –10%.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to simple projects applicable to:

• timber frames• structural steelwork• concrete• brick/block work• joinery• tiling• sheeting/panelling• plastering• final finishes• fences• formwork• excavation work

Materials include all materials utilised in construction of commercial, industrial/domestic and civil constructionprojects, including hardware items.

Calculations to include:

• area

Carry out measurements and calculations BCG1004A


• perimeter• volume• mass• scales• ratios (ingredients/elements and triangulation)

Job instruction may involve:

• verbal direction/instruction• written instruction• provision of job drawing and details

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the effective calculation of measurements and calculations ofmaterials in accordance with the range listed in the range of variables statement, relevant to the workorientation.



• communicate effectively to enable accurate calculations and measurements• demonstrate effective use of measuring devices• accurate measurements taken and recorded• perform simple calculations to specifications• estimate quantities and costs to requirements


Nil



• drawings and specifications• materials relevant to the construction process• basic operations in simple geometry, measurement and calculations• costing relative to the construction process


• read and interpret drawings• measure and calculate manually• record measurements• operate electronic calculating devices• communicate effectively



• information on construction materials appropriate to the relevant construction process• suitable work area appropriate to the activity• suitable site plans/drawings and/or specifications

BCG1004A Carry out measurements and calculations


• measuring and calculating devices




Assessment may be intermittent checking at the various stages of the job application in accordance withthe performance criteria, or may be at the completion of each process.



KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG1005A: Use hand and power tools


1 Identify hand and power tools 1.1 Regular power tool applications in workshop operationsrecognised.

1.2 Types of hand and power tools and their functionsidentified.

1.3 Sources of power supply recognised.

1.4 OH&S requirements for using power tools recognisedand adhered to.

2 Select hand tools 2.1 OH&S requirements for using hand tools recognisedand adhered to.

2.2 Appropriate personal protective equipment selected,correctly fitted and used.

2.3 Hand tools selected consistent with needs of job.

2.4 Tools checked for serviceability and safety and anyfaults reported to supervisor.

2.5 Equipment selected to hold or support material forpower tools application where applicable.

3 Use hand tools 3.1 Material located and held in position for hand toolapplication.

3.2 Hand tools safely and effectively used according totheir intended use.

3.3 Hand tools safely located when not in immediate use.

4 Select power tools 4.1 Appropriate personal protective equipment selected,correctly fitted and used.

4.2 Power tools and leads/hoses selected consistent withneeds of job in accordance with conventional workpractice.

4.3 Power tools and leads/hoses visually checked forserviceability/safety in accordance with OH&Srequirements and any faults reported to supervisor.

4.4 Equipment selected to hold or support materials forpower tool application where applicable.

Use hand and power tools BCG1005A


5 Establish power supply to worklocation

5.1 Route identified for safe placement of leads/hosesclear of hazards.

5.2 Electric power leads run out to power supply andsupported overhead clear of traffic or covered ifpresenting possible trip hazard.

5.3 Electric power leads connected to supply andpowerboard or direct to power tool.

5.4 Air hoses run out to compressed air supply andcovered if presenting possible trip hazard.

5.5 Hose connected to power tool and air supply.

6 Use power tools 6.1 Material located and held in position for power toolapplication where applicable.

6.2 Power tools safely and effectively used in applicationprocesses.

6.3 Power tools safely located when not in use.

7 Clean up 7.1 Power tools cleaned, maintained and stored.

7.2 Power leads/hoses cleaned, visually checked andstored.

7.3 Equipment cleaned, maintained and stored.

7.4 Work area cleared and waste removed.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Hand tools include, but are not limited to:

• adjustable spanners• bars (crow and pinch)• bolt cutters• brooms• chisels• hacksaws• handsaws• hammers• measuring tapes• nips• picks/mattocks• pliers• sealant gun• shovel/spades• sledge hammers• spanners and wrenches• spirit level, straight edge• string lines



• trowels and floats• wire cutters• paint brushes/rollers• spatula/putty knives

Power supply to include:

• electricity• compressed air

Power tools include:

• drills• nail guns• staplers• screwdrivers• sanders• angle grinders• pneumatic wrenches• circular saw• jig saws• planers• routers

Personal protective equipment may include:

• overalls• boots• hard hat/cap• safety glasses/goggles• gloves• ear plugs/muffs• face masks/respirators

OH&S requirements may include:

• workshop/worksite safe working practices• use of tools and equipment• use of power tools• safe handling and storage of materials


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the safe and effective operation of particular power and hand toolslisted within the range of variables statement relevant to the work orientation.


It is essential that competence is observed in the following aspects:• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable to workplace

operations• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures including Quality Assurance

requirements• adopt and carry out correct procedures prior to and during use of hand tools and power tools• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of tools and equipment• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective operations

Use hand and power tools BCG1005A



Competency in this unit may be determined concurrently based upon integrated project work using thefollowing units:

• BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements• BCG1006A Use plant and equipment• BCG1004A Carry out measurements and calculations• BCG1011A Handle construction materials and safe disposal of waste• BCG1012A-BCG1019A Prepare for the construction process (relative to work orientation)



• workplace and equipment safety requirements and OH&S legislation• portable power tools• hand tools and equipment• materials• materials handling whilst operating tools


• work safely to instructions• apply appropriate hand-eye co-ordination in the use of tools• handle/hold materials during operation of tools• select appropriate tools for material usage• communicate effectively



• general construction materials• hand and power tools appropriate to the construction process• plant and equipment appropriate to the construction process• suitable work area appropriate to the construction process• appropriate OH&S safety resources








KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG1006A: Use small plant and equipment


1 Identify plant and equipment, theiroperations and safetyrequirements

1.1 Types and function of plant/equipment used inconstruction process identified.

1.2 Method of operation of plant/equipment identified andunderstood, relative to manufacturer'srecommendations.

1.3 OH&S requirements for guarding and cut off switchesidentified.

1.4 OH&S requirements for personal protective equipmentassociated with using machines identified.

2 Select plant and equipment 2.1 OH&S requirements for operating and using plant andequipment recognised and adhered to.


2.3 Plant and equipment selected consistent with needs ofjob.

2.4 Plant and equipment checked for serviceability/safetyand faults reported to supervisor.

3 Use plant and equipment 3.1 Plant and equipment safely and effectively used.

3.2 Site hazards identified in use of plant and equipmentand correct procedures used to eliminate or minimiserisk.

3.3 Plant and equipment safely located when not inimmediate use.

4 Clean up 4.1 Plant and equipment cleaned, maintained and stored.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Plant and equipment includes but is not limited to:

• air compressor and hoses• concrete mixer• industrial wet and dry vacuum cleaner• pallet trolley• rollers• compactors• pumps and hoses

Use small plant and equipment BCG1006A


• brick/masonry saw• terrazzo grinders• ladders• trestles and planks• wheelbarrows


• overalls• boots• hard hat/cap• safety glasses/goggles• gloves• ear plugs/muffs• face masks/respirators

OH&S requirements are to be in accordance with State/Territory legislatory regulations which may include:

• workshop/worksite safety practices• control of noise and dust• use of ladders and working platforms• control of exhaust emission• isolation of work areas

Reporting of faults may be written or verbal.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the safe and effective operation of particular plant and equipmentlisted within the range of variables statement relevant to the work orientation.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures including Quality Assurancerequirements

• carry out correct procedures prior to and during application of processes• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of tools, plant and equipment• demonstrate and show understanding of manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations

(2) Pre-Requisite Relationship of Units

Nil



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• portable power tools applicable to the construction process• hand tools and a range of plant and equipment• materials handling relevant to plant and equipment use• workplace communication processes




• work safely to instructions• use power tools, hand tools, plant and equipment applicable to the construction process• communicate effectively



• hand and power tools appropriate to the construction process• plant and equipment appropriate to the construction process• suitable work area appropriate to the construction process• appropriate OH&S safety resources



Competency in this unit may be determined concurrently, based on integrated project work.




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG1007A: Erect and dismantle restricted heightscaffolding


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 OH&S requirements for tasks and workplaceenvironment recognised and adhered to.

1.2 Location and scope of scaffolding/equipmentdetermined from job drawings or supervisor’sinstructions.


1.4 Tools and equipment selected consistent with jobrequirements, checked for serviceability and any faultsreported to supervisor.

1.5 Scaffolding/equipment components selected consistentwith requirements of job.

2 Erect safety barriers 2.1 Safety barriers erected, where applicable, to isolate sitework area.

2.2 Relevant signage installed where required to OH&Srequirements where required.

3 Erect scaffolding 3.1 All work undertaken safely and to supervisor’sprescribed procedures.

3.2 Erection site prepared to meet job requirements.

3.3 Necessary signage prepared to meet job requirements.

3.4 Scaffolding/equipment erected to plan in accordancewith safe work practices, OH&S and manufacturersrequirements.

4 Dismantle scaffold 4.1 Work undertaken safely and to reverse procedures forerecting.

4.2 Scaffolding/equipment dismantled in accordance withsite procedures and critical structural safetyrequirements.

5 Clean up 5.1 Site cleaned and cleared of all tools, excess materialand waste and left in safe condition.


Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding BCG1007A


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the erection of scaffolding up to 4m in height which must be constructed in accordancewith:

• AS4576 Guidelines for Scaffolding, and• AS1576.1 Scaffolding Part 1 – General Requirements

The range of scaffolding equipment associated with this unit includes:

• standing prefabricated tower scaffolds• tube and fitting scaffolds to 4 metres height• fall protection devices• catch platforms• bracket scaffolds


• overalls• jacket• boots• hard hat• safety glasses• gloves• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks

Tools and equipment may include:

• spanners• shovels• hammers• picks• crow bars• ladders

Work is to be undertaken in accordance with State/Territory regulatory and legislative requirements forOccupational Health and Safety.

Work undertaken with supervision in a team.

Supervision instruction may involve:

• verbal direction/instruction• written instruction• provision of sketch/drawing and details

Reports of faults may be verbal or written.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the safe and effective erection and dismantling of different types ofrestricted height scaffolding listed within the range of variables statement relevant to the work orientation.






requirements• carry out correct procedures prior to and during application of construction process• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of scaffolding tools and equipment• erect scaffolding plumb and brace for stability• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective erection and dismantling

operations


Pre-requisites for this unit are:

• BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• scaffolding and basic working platforms• hand tools• materials• materials handling• vertical and horizontal concepts


• work safely to instructions• use hand tools• handle material• select material• communicate effectively



• construction materials appropriate for scaffolding• hand tools and equipment appropriate to the construction process• suitable work area appropriate to the construction process• information on OH&S requirements




Assessment may be by intermittent checking at the various stages of the job application in accordancewith the performance criteria, or may be at the completion of the process.

Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding BCG1007A




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG1008A: Use simple levelling devices


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 OH&S requirements recognised and adhered to inaccordance with application tasks and workplaceenvironment.

1.2 Requirements of job identified from drawings orinstructions.



1.5 Quality Assurance requirements recognised andadhered to in accordance with company’s constructionoperations.

2 Set up and use levelling device 2.1 Heights to be transferred, identified from giveninstructions or drawings.

2.2 Work assembled and filled with water to required levelwith air bubbles removed.

2.3 Height transferred to required locations to a toleranceof + or - 5mm over 3 metres.

3 Transfer heights with straightedge and spirit level

3.1 Heights to be transferred identified from giveninstructions/drawings/given marked level.

3.2 Height transferred to required location to + or - 5mmover 3 metres.

4 Maintain given level or specifiedslope with boning rods

4.1 Heights of each end of line to be boned established togiven levels.

4.2 End of boning rods securely fixed to required heights.

4.3 Heights of intermediate points sighted and markedwith boning rods to a tolerance of + 10mm.

5 Clean up 5.1 Tools and equipment cleaned, maintained and stored.

RANGE OF VARIABLESThis unit applies to using simple levelling devices to carry out basic exercises in transferring levels and/ormaintaining a line of a slope.

Use simple levelling devices BCG1008A


Levelling and lining devices include:

• water level• spirit level• boning rods

Heights or levels may be given by:

• drawing/sketch indicating mark• verbal or written instruction indicating level or mark• datum/survey peg fixed into ground• chalk or nail mark on paved/concrete surface• mark on vertical surface

Associated tools and equipment include:

• string line• wooden/steel pegs• straight edge• hammer• chalk line


• overalls• boots• hard hat/cap• safety glasses• dust jacket• masks/respirators

Work may be carried out under supervision and in a team situation or individually.


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by carrying out the effective application of the different types of levellingdevices listed within the range statement relative to the work orientation.





• carry out correct procedures prior to and during application of levelling and boning processes• demonstrate safe and effective handling and operational use of levelling device• indicate care in accurately transferring levels to other locations• interactive communication with others to ensure safe and effective levelling operations.


Nil





• workplace and equipment safety requirements• hand tools• measurement and calculation• Quality Assurance• range of levelling devices• horizontal/vertical concepts


• work safely to instructions• measure• use hand tools• communicate effectively


The following resources should be made available:• general construction materials appropriate to levelling• hand tools appropriate to levelling and lining• equipment appropriate to the activity processes• suitable work area appropriate to the activities• suitable plans/drawings and specification



Competency in this unit should be determined concurrently, based on integrated project work.

Assessment may be by intermittent checking at the various stages of the job application in accordancewith the performance criteria, or may be at the completion of each process.



KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG1009A: Carry out excavation and install support


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’sconstruction operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements recognised and adhered to inaccordance with application tasks and workplaceenvironment.


1.4 Tools and equipment requirements identified tosupervisor’s instructions, consistent with needs of job.

2 Locate excavation and erectsafety equipment

2.1 Excavation located from instruction.

2.2 Site pegs installed, service markers identified andexcavation limits marked.

2.3 Safety barricades, signs and lights erected in positionsas required by OH&S requirements.

3 Select tools and equipment 3.1 OH&S requirements associated with use of tools andequipment recognised and adhered to.

3.2 Personal protective equipment items selected inaccordance with excavation method and conditionsand correctly fitted and used.

3.3 Hand tools and equipment selected consistent with theneeds of the job, checked for serviceability and anyfaults reported to supervisor.

4 Dig excavations by hand 4.1 Temporary drainage system established to divertsurface and subsurface water to storm water drainagesystem. Surface holes and depressions filled.

4.2 Excavations safely dug with hand tools under direction.

4.3 Service markers or taped areas identified.

4.4 Damage or interference with underground services(power, water, gas, telephone) avoided duringexcavation process.

4.5 Excavations cleaned out with hand tools, free fromloose material.

Carry out excavation and install support BCG1009A


5 Assist machine excavationoperations

5.1 Machine operator assisted with excavation by verbaland trimming support, ensuring it is to line and depth.

5.2 Excavation cleaned out by hand to job requirementsand instructions.

6 Install excavation support 6.1 Excavation works carried out in accordance withregulatory authority's requirements.

6.2 Trench/excavation support installed to instruction toOH&S regulations.

7 Clean up 7.1 Site cleaned and cleared of unwanted excavatedmaterial.

7.2 Tools cleaned, maintained and stored.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to excavations carried out by hand and assisting excavator operators with their operation.

This unit applies to trench/excavation depth not exceeding 1.5m excavation and includes but is not limited to:

• post holes• pits• pad excavations• trenches• levelling of work area

OH&S requirements are to be in accordance with State/Territory legislation and regulations.

Regulatory authorities are those under State/Territory legislation governing:

• water• sewerage• gas• electricity• telephone

Work is to be undertaken in a team situation or individually under supervision.

Reporting of faults may be written or verbal.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by carrying out the safe and effective excavation and/or support of atleast two different types of excavations from those listed within the range of variables statement, relevant tothe work orientation.







• carry out correct procedures prior to and during excavation processes• identify and understand instruction relevant to the location of excavation• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of tools and equipment• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective operations.



• BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• hand tools and equipment• materials handling• measurement and calculations• workplace communications• regulatory authority's requirement for excavation/support• range of inground services and relevant markers/identifiers


• work safely to instructions• use hand tools and equipment• handle material• measure relevant to excavation process• communicate effectively



• general construction materials for excavation support• hand tools appropriate to excavation processes• plant and equipment appropriate to the excavation process• work area appropriate for the excavation activities• appropriate OH&S safety resources to suit excavation location




Carry out excavation and install support BCG1009A





KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG1010A: Carry out concreting to simple forms


1 Select tools and equipment 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements recognised andadhered to in accordance with company’s constructionoperations.



1.4 Tools and equipment selected to instructionsconsistent with job requirements, checked forserviceability and any faults reported to supervisor.

2 Erect and strip simple formwork 2.1 Design of formwork identified fromdrawings/supervisors instructions.

2.2 Formwork safely erected on commencement andstripped on completion under direction of supervisor.

2.3 Stripping agent applied to erected formwork, whereappropriate.

2.4 Timber components denailed following stripping offormwork.

2.5 All components cleaned, stacked and stored for re-useor bundled for removal.

3 Place and tie reinforcement 3.1 Reinforcing components safely handled and carried torequired position.

3.2 Reinforcing bars, rods, stirrups and mesh positionedunder supervisor’s directions.

3.3 Bar chairs and spacers located in place, checkingminimum edge cover under direction of supervisor.

4 Place concrete 4.1 Formwork/excavation cleaned of excess material anddebris prior to concrete placement.

4.2 Concrete safely transported by wheelbarrow andplaced under direction.

4.3 Pump line/shute controlled and concrete placed asdirected.

4.4 Concrete spread as directed to specified levels.

Carry out concreting to simple forms BCG1010A


4.5 Concrete consolidated under direction and screeded tofinished levels as directed.

4.6 Surface of concrete finished as directed to specifiedfinish.

5 Clean up 5.1 Formwork components removed from site.

5.2 Pour site and surrounds cleared of concrete spills andother debris and surface left in safe condition.

5.3 Worksite cleared of debris and unused materials.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to placing concrete to simple forms and excavations which includes:

• post holes• trench foundations• pad foundations• slabs• pathways• simple concrete aprons• channels• garden edges

Concrete placement methods include:

• shovel• wheelbarrow• shute• pump line


• overalls• boots• hard hat/cap• safety glasses/goggles• gum boots• face masks• waterproof pants and jacket

Concrete finishes include:

• wood floated• steel floated• broom brushed

Formwork in this unit applies to edging forms where structural components would include:

• edge boards• pegs



• struts• bracing

Work is to be undertaken in a team situation or individually under supervision.


Excess material and debris includes:

• excavated loose soil• off cut timber• paper• rags• sticks• nails

OH&S requirements are in accordance with State/Territory legislation.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the safe installation of formwork, reinforcement and concrete usingany two of the simple forms listed within the range of variables statement relevant to the work orientation.





• carry out correct procedures prior to and during construction processes• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of tools, plant and equipment• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective operations


Pre-requisites in this unit are:




• workplace and equipment safety requirements• hand tools and equipment• materials• materials handling• measurement• transporting, placing concrete• levelling equipment• simple formwork and reinforcement componentry• select and handle materials appropriate to concreting processes

Carry out concreting to simple forms BCG1010A



• work safely to instructions• measure relative to the concreting process• use power tools and hand tools• use simple levelling equipment• communicate effectively• select and handle materials appropriate to concreting processes



• general construction materials relevant to forming, reinforcing and placement of concrete• hand tools and power tools appropriate to construction process• tools and equipment appropriate to construction process• suitable work area appropriate to concreting process• information relevant to OH&S requirements







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

BCG1011A Handle construction materials and safely dispose of waste


BCG1011A: Handle construction materials and safelydispose of waste


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 OH&S requirements associated with application tasksand workplace environment recognised and adheredto.


1.3 Quality Assurance requirements associated withcompany’s construction operations recognised andadhered to.

1.4 Tools and equipment for handling materials/goods,non-toxic waste, selected consistent with jobrequirements, checked for serviceability and any faultsreported to supervisor.

2 Correctly manual handle, sort andstack construction material

2.1 Common construction materials recognised andselected for sorting and stacking/stockpiling tosupervisor’s instructions and/or specifications.

2.2 Handling characteristics of materials identified andappropriate handling techniques applied.

2.3 Specific handling requirements for hazardous materialsapplied.

2.4 Materials stored, stacked/stockpiled and protected,clear of trafficways, so they are easily identified,retrieved and not damaged.

2.5 Appropriate signage and barricades erected whereapplicable to isolate stored materials from workplacetraffic or access.

2.6 Correct manual handling techniques used.

3 Prepare for mechanical handlingof materials

3.1 Materials stacked/banded for mechanical handling inaccordance with type of material and plant/equipmentto be used.

3.2 Dogman/rigger assisted with loading, unloading,moving, locating and/or installing materials.

3.3 Materials safely handled with assistance of pallettrolley, forklift or hoist.

Handle construction materials and safely dispose of waste BCG1011A


4 Handle and remove waste safely 4.1 Waste materials handled correctly and safely accordingto MSDS and requirements of regulatory authorities.

4.2 Hazardous material identified for separate handling.

4.3 Non-toxic materials removed using correct procedures.

4.4 Dust suppression procedures used to minimise healthrisk to work personnel and others.

5 Clean up 5.1 Tools and equipment cleaned, maintained, and stored.

5.2 Unused materials safely stacked/stockpiled stored.

5.3 Waste materials disposed of safely.

5.4 Site cleaned and cleared of debris and unwantedmaterial.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Tools and equipment includes but is not limited to:

• brooms• hoses• shovels• rakes• wet and dry industrial vacuum cleaners• wheelbarrows• pallet trolley• materials hoists• forklifts

Construction materials include but are not limited to:

• bricks and concrete masonry• mortar components – cement, coarse aggregate, sand• timber• structural steel sections/components• concrete• scaffolding components, pipe sections• plywood and particle board• metal sheeting• steel reinforcement• insulation• glass• paints and sealants• plaster sheeting

Protection of stacked/stored materials may include:

• covering• tying or banding

BCG1011A Handle construction materials and safely dispose of waste


• barricades• signs• locked away (hazardous materials)

Dust suppression procedures may include:

• spraying with water• covering• use of vacuum cleaner

Waste material and debris include but are not limited to:

• banding straps• packing pieces• broken or damaged goods• cardboard• plastic• paper• loose material

Removal of materials to include processes of recycling and salvage where applicable.

OH&S requirements to be in accordance with State/Territory legislation and regulations.

Work to be undertaken as part of a team or individually under supervision of appropriately certificatedpersons where applicable.


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the effective handling and storing/stacking of appropriate constructionmaterials listed within the range of variables statement, relevant to the work orientation.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations and State/Territorylegislation applicable to workplace operations


• carry out correct procedures prior to and during application of materials handling processes• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of tools and equipment• demonstrate safe application in the process of cleaning up• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective operations


Nil



• workplace and equipment safety requirements including relevant codes and regulation• hand tools and equipment

Handle construction materials and safely dispose of waste BCG1011A


• materials• materials handling• Quality Assurance• range of communication mediums (verbal and non-verbal)


• work safely to instructions• use hand tools• handle materials• select material• measure• communicate effectively



• general construction materials relative to construction processes• plant and equipment appropriate to handling processes• hand tools appropriate to handling processes• suitable work area appropriate to construction process• MSDS information







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

BCG1013A Prepare for construction process (solid plastering)


BCG1013A: Prepare for construction process (solidplastering)


1 Plan for construction process 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’sconstruction operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 Preparation and planning requirements identified fromdrawings/work location and/or supervisor's instructions.

1.3 OH&S requirements identified and adhered to inaccordance with application tasks and workplaceenvironment.

1.4 Safety hazards identified and correct proceduresadopted to minimise risk to self and others.

1.5 Materials selected to supervisor’s instructions safelyhandled and stored/located ready for application.


1.7 Tools and equipment selected consistent with the jobrequirements, checked for serviceability and any faultsreported to supervisor.

1.8 Fixing/fasteners selected consistent with the jobrequirements where applicable and checked forserviceability.

2 Prepare materials selected forconstruction process

2.1 Activities for material preparation identified fromspecifications or supervisor’s instructions.

2.2 Material preparation carried out to satisfy requirementsof application process.

3 Prepare work area suitable forconstruction process

3.1 Activities to be carried out in work area identified fromsurface to be covered, method of application andaccess to surface.

3.2 Work area prepared for construction process tosupervisor’s instructions.

4 Use tools, plant and equipmentappropriate for constructionprocess

4.1 Regular hand and power tools suitable for applicationprocess identified to job requirements.

4.2 Hand and power tools used safely and effectively tocarry out processes where applicable.

Prepare for construction process (solid plastering) BCG1013A


5 Prepare background of brick,concrete or blockwork for solidplastering

5.1 Structure identified and surface wire brushed toremove loose material and holes. Depressionspatched with suitable material to supervisor’sinstructions.

5.2 Materials for splash coat proportioned and mixed toinstructions ready for application to wet surface.

6 Clean up 6.1 Materials stacked/stored for re-use or disposal.

6.2 Work area cleared.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the preparation and construction processes carried out in preparing for applying solidplastering to surfaces.

Background surfaces for application of solid plastering include:

• concrete• concrete blockwork• brickwork• stonework• polystyrene• expanded metal or birdwire

Construction process includes:

• application of solid plaster• preparation of surfaces• finish of surfaces• workplace preparation


• overalls• waterproof pants and jacket• boots• gum boots• gloves• dust masks/respirators• hard hat/cap• safety goggles

Tools and equipment may include but are not limited to:

• measuring tape/rule• brushes• broom• screed boards• scaffolding• spirit level• straight edges



• concrete mixer• shovels• wheelbarrows• power leads• hoses

Material preparation may include:

• locating loose materials for mixing• preparing brackets for fixing to steelwork• cutting expanded metal or birdwire for placement

Work area preparation may include:

• cleaning of area• erecting restricted height scaffolding• setting up concrete mixer• establishing temporary water and power supply

Patching materials include but are not limited to:

• sand and cement• plaster• cornice adhesive• caulking compounds

Work is to be undertaken either as part of a team or individually, under supervision with instruction being aspart of supervisor’s directions either verbal or written.


OH&S requirements to be in accordance with State/Territory legislative regulations.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by carrying out the safe and effective preparation for solid plasteringapplications in accordance with performance criteria using any of the range of materials and processes listedwithin the range of variables statement.




requirements• carry out correct procedures prior to and during application of construction processes• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of tools, plant and equipment• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations


• BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding





• workplace and equipment safety requirements• drawings and specifications• portable power tools• hand tools and equipment• materials relative to solid plastering• materials handling• measurement relative to solid plastering• fixing and fasteners consistent with solid plastering requirements• workplace communications


• work safely to instructions• use power tools and hand tools• handle material• select material• communicate effectively• measure relative to process


The following resources should be made available:• general construction materials relevant to solid plastering• hand tools and power tools appropriate to solid plastering process• plant and equipment appropriate to solid plastering process• suitable work area appropriate to solid plastering activities







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG1012A: Prepare for construction process (wall andfloor tiling)


1 Plan for the construction process 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’sconstruction operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 Preparation and planning requirements identified fromdrawings/work location and/or supervisor’s instructions.



1.5 Materials selected to supervisor’s instructions andsafely handled and stored/located ready for application.



1.8 Fixing/fasteners selected consistent with jobrequirements, where applicable, and checked forserviceability.





3.1 Activities to be carried out in work area identified fromtype of tile, surface to be covered, method ofapplication and access to surface.

3.2 Work area prepared for the application process tospecifications or supervisor’s instructions.

4 Use tools, plant and equipmentappropriate for construction process


4.2 Hand and power tools used safely and effectively tocarry out processes.

Prepare for construction process (wall and floor tiling) BCG1012A


5 Prepare underlay/sheeting for floorand walls

5.1 Assistance with underlay preparation provided underinstructions and supervision.

5.2 Surface finished flat/level with joints flush and sealed.


6.1 Structure identified and surface wire brushed toremove loose material and holes. Depressions andgaps filled with suitable patching material tosupervisor’s instructions.


7 Prepare for render surface for tiling 7.1 Horizontal/vertical surrounds prepared for tiling processin accordance with type of tile and specified finish,where applicable.

7.2 Materials for render coat proportioned and mixed toinstructions ready for application.

7.3 Rendered surface scratched and dried to instructions inaccordance with specifications.




8.4 Waste disposed of using appropriate method to EPArequirements.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the preparation and construction processes carried out in preparing for the tiling of walland floor surfaces.

Types of tiles include:

• ceramic• marble• stone• granite• terra cotta

Construction processes include:

• use of underlay material• rendering to provide flat surface• preparing of surfaces• workplace preparation



Tools and equipment include but are not limited to:

• hammers• saws• measuring ruler/tape• power saw• power drills and screwdriver• cement sheet cutters• spirit levels• concrete mixers• shovels• wheelbarrows• wire brushes• brooms• power sander

Underlay materials include:

• plasterboard• fibro cement

Fixing and fasteners include but are not limited to:

• plasterboard nails• clouts• soft sheet nails• self tapping screws• wall board adhesive

Surrounds for tiling include:

• extruded metal sections• timber moulding


• plaster• sand and cement• cornice adhesive• fillers (pre-mixed and mix)• caulking compounds

Work is to be undertaken under supervision with instructions being as part of supervisor's directions,consistent with job specifications.



EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by carrying out the safe and effective preparation for tiling applications inaccordance with the performance criteria using any of the processes and range of materials listed within therange of variables statement.

Prepare for construction process (wall and floor tiling) BCG1012A






• carry out correct procedures prior to and during application of construction processes• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of tools and equipment• give particular attention to specified finish of surfaces ready for tiling• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations





• workplace and equipment safety requirements• drawings and specifications• portable power tools• hand tools and equipment• materials relative to wall and floor tiling• fixing and fasteners consistent with wall and floor tiling requirements• workplace communications• materials handling• measurement relative to wall and floor tiling


• work safely to instructions• use power tools and hand tools• handle material• select material• measure relative to the process• communicate effectively



• general construction materials relevant to wall and floor tiling preparation activities• hand and power tools appropriate to wall and floor tiling processes• plant and equipment appropriate to twall and floor tiling processes• suitable work area appropriate to wall and floor tiling activities









KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG1013A: Prepare for construction process (solidplastering)



1.2 Preparation and planning requirements identified fromdrawings/work location and/or supervisor's instructions.



1.5 Materials selected to supervisor’s instructions safelyhandled and stored/located ready for application.



1.8 Fixing/fasteners selected consistent with the jobrequirements where applicable and checked forserviceability.





3.1 Activities to be carried out in work area identified fromsurface to be covered, method of application andaccess to surface.




4.2 Hand and power tools used safely and effectively tocarry out processes where applicable.




5.1 Structure identified and surface wire brushed toremove loose material and holes. Depressionspatched with suitable material to supervisor’sinstructions.





RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the preparation and construction processes carried out in preparing for applying solidplastering to surfaces.

Background surfaces for application of solid plastering include:

• concrete• concrete blockwork• brickwork• stonework• polystyrene• expanded metal or birdwire


• application of solid plaster• preparation of surfaces• finish of surfaces• workplace preparation


• overalls• waterproof pants and jacket• boots• gum boots• gloves• dust masks/respirators• hard hat/cap• safety goggles


• measuring tape/rule• brushes• broom• screed boards• scaffolding• spirit level• straight edges



• concrete mixer• shovels• wheelbarrows• power leads• hoses


• locating loose materials for mixing• preparing brackets for fixing to steelwork• cutting expanded metal or birdwire for placement


• cleaning of area• erecting restricted height scaffolding• setting up concrete mixer• establishing temporary water and power supply


• sand and cement• plaster• cornice adhesive• caulking compounds

Work is to be undertaken either as part of a team or individually, under supervision with instruction being aspart of supervisor’s directions either verbal or written.



EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by carrying out the safe and effective preparation for solid plasteringapplications in accordance with performance criteria using any of the range of materials and processes listedwithin the range of variables statement.




requirements• carry out correct procedures prior to and during application of construction processes• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of tools, plant and equipment• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations







• workplace and equipment safety requirements• drawings and specifications• portable power tools• hand tools and equipment• materials relative to solid plastering• materials handling• measurement relative to solid plastering• fixing and fasteners consistent with solid plastering requirements• workplace communications


• work safely to instructions• use power tools and hand tools• handle material• select material• communicate effectively• measure relative to process


The following resources should be made available:• general construction materials relevant to solid plastering• hand tools and power tools appropriate to solid plastering process• plant and equipment appropriate to solid plastering process• suitable work area appropriate to solid plastering activities







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

BCG1014A Prepare for construction process (dry wall plastering)


BCG1014A: Prepare for construction process (dry wallplastering)



1.2 Preparation and planning requirements identified fromdrawings/work location and/or supervisor’s instructions.



1.5 Materials selected to supervisor’s instructions, safelyhandled and stored/located ready for application.



1.8 Fixing/fasteners selected consistent with jobrequirements and checked for serviceability.

2 Prepare materials selected orconstruction process


2.2 Fasteners/fixing prepared for installation to instruction.

2.3 Material preparation carried out to satisfy requirementsof construction process.


3.1 Activities to be carried out in work area identified fromsurfaces to be lined and height to be accessed.





Prepare for construction process (dry wall plastering) BCG1014A


5 Assist with sheet materialinstallation

5.1 Sheet materials identified from stack and safelydistributed to required location.

5.2 Assistance provided with cutting sheets to jobrequirements.

5.3 Assistance provided with placing and fixing sheets tojob requirements.

6 Clean up 6.1 Materials stacked/stored for re-use or removal.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the preparation processes carried out to support the installing of plaster sheeting andcornicing to walls and ceilings which includes:

• plasterboard• plasterglass• water resistant plasterboard

Background support of plaster sheeting includes:

• timber framework• light steel framework• metal furring channels• timber battens


• fixing of battens/furring channels• worksite preparation• fixing of sheeting• fixing of cornice• finish of surface

Fixing and fasteners include but are not limited to:

• nails• plasterboard nails• clouts• self tapping screws• wallboard adhesive• cornice adhesive

BCG1014A Prepare for construction process (dry wall plastering)



• measuring tape/rule• hammer• saws• power drills and screwdrivers• adhesive gun• cutting knife• scrapers• saw stools and planks• steel floats• power leads


• cutting corner bead to length• identifying and marking sheets for location• fixing material and fasteners located ready for use


• clearing area• preparing saw stools and planks

Work is to be undertaken as part of a team under supervision with instructions being as part of supervisor’sdirections either verbal or written.



EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by carrying out the safe and effective preparation for dry wall plasteringapplication in accordance with the performance criteria using any of the range of materials and processeslisted within the range of variables statement.





• carry out correct procedures prior to and during application of construction process• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of tools, plant and equipment• adopt and use correct procedures in handling plaster sheets• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective installation processes




Prepare for construction process (dry wall plastering) BCG1014A




• workplace and equipment safety requirements• drawings and specifications• portable power tools• hand tools and equipment• materials relative to dry wall plastering• materials handling• measurement relative to dry wall plastering• fixing and fasteners consistent with dry wall plastering requirements• workplace communication


• work safely to instructions• use power tools and hand tools• handle material• select material• communicate effectively• measure relative to the process



• construction materials relevant to dry wall plastering• hand tools and power tools appropriate to dry wall plastering process• equipment appropriate to dry wall plastering process• suitable work area appropriate to dry wall plastering activities







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/block laying)


BCG1015A: Prepare for construction process(brick/block laying)



1.2 Job requirements identified from drawings andsupervisor’s instructions.









2.3 Correct manual handling techniques used to movematerials to location of placement.

2.4 Components distributed and stacked to suit job locationand construction sequence


3.1 Activities to be carried out in work area identified fromtype of brick/block, planned layout of construction andaccess to brick/block laying location.




Prepare for construction process (brick/block laying) BCG1015A



5 Mortar mix 5.1 Materials for mortar selected to instruction.

5.2 Additives for mortar selected to mix requirements.

5.3 Specified proportions of materials for mortar mixturemixed accurately to instruction.

5.4 Mortar materials mixed to a workable consistency.

6 Assist with brick/block work 6.1 Bricks/blocks selected, visually checked to ensurespecification met including colour matchingsurrounding area and distributed to location.

6.2 Surface brushed/scraped/washed clean of surplusmortar material on completion of laying process.

7 Clean up 7.1 Materials stacked/stored for re-use or removal.




RANGE OF VARIA BLES

This unit applies to the preparation processes carried out to support the laying of brickwork or blockwork.

Construction processes includes:

• worksite preparation• preparation for brick/block laying• lay bricks/blocks• finish brickwork/blockwork face

Tools and equipment include but are not limited to:

• hammer• bolster• shovel• measuring tape/rule• concrete mixer• angle grinder• masonry saw• power leads• hoses• scaffolding• brushes and brooms• wheelbarrows• mortar boards



Masonry units may include:

• wire cut bricks• pressed bricks• concrete blocks• hollow concrete blocks

Materials in addition to bricks/blocks include:

• cement and sand• brick/block reinforcement• steel lintels• mortar additives (workability and damp proofing)• metal wall ties

Materials preparation may include:

• cutting bricks• locating lintels ready for placement• distributing vents• cutting and distributing reinforcement• preparing materials for batching for mortar


• cleaning strip footings or slab• setting up concrete mixer• locating mortar boards• establishing temporary water and power supply• preparing access for supply of mortar• erecting scaffolding

Specifications for bricks/blocks should be part of Quality Assurance requirements and include:

• size• shape• sharp arises (where applicable)• colour

Work is to be undertaken as part of a team under supervision with instructions being part of supervisor’sdirections, either verbal or written.



EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by carrying out the safe and effective preparation for the laying ofbricks/blocks in accordance with the performance criteria using any of the listed range of variables with eitherbrickwork or blockwork.

Prepare for construction process (brick/block laying) BCG1015A


(1) Critical Aspects of E vidence




• carry out correct procedures prior to and during application of construction processes• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of tools, plant and equipment• adopt and use correct procedures to handle and place materials• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective worksite operations



(3) Underpinning Kno wledge and Skills


• workplace and equipment safety requirements• drawings and specifications• portable power tools• hand tools and equipment• materials handling• measurement relative to brick/blockwork• accessories associated with brickwork/blockwork construction• workplace communications


• work safely to instructions• read drawings• use power tools and hand tools• handle material• select material• measure relative to the construction process• communicate effectively



• construction materials relevant to brick/block work• hand tools and power tools appropriate to brick/block work processes• plant and equipment appropriate to brick/block work processes• suitable work area appropriate to construction process









KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG1016A: Prepare for construction process(carpentry)



1.2 Preparation and planning requirements identified fromdrawings and/or supervisor’s instructions.






1.8 Fixing/fastenings selected to instructions consistentwith job requirements.





3.1 Activities to be carried out in work area identified fromdrawing details of proposed construction andsupervisor’s instructions.

3.2 Work area prepared for construction process tosupervisor’s instruction

4 Use tools and equipmentappropriate for constructionprocess


4.2 Hand and power tools used safely and effectively toinstruction to carry out construction processes.

Prepare for construction process (carpentry) BCG1016A


5 Select materials and cutcomponents

5.1 Material obtained from stack to instruction.

5.2 Correct manual handling techniques used to move andplace materials.

5.3 Materials safely moved to work area.

5.4 Docking/drop saw used to accurately cut one ormultiple components to same length to instruction.

6 Distribute components 6.1 Cut components distributed and stacked to suit joblocation and sequence.

7 Clean up 7.1 Unused material stacked/stored for re-use or removal.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the preparation processes associated with carpentry construction work based on theconstruction of timber partition framing.


• workplace preparation• materials preparation• assembling of partitions• erecting and fixing of partitions


• overalls• jacket• boots• gloves• safety goggles/glasses• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators• hard hat/cap


• measuring tape/rule• hammer• docking saw• jigs/stops• saw stools



• work bench• clamps• squares

Safety hazards may include but are not limited to:

• restricted access• location of power leads• dust• off cut material• lighting• limited storage space


• stacking of material• measuring and marking• cutting and distributing


• cleaning of area• setting up for docking saw• material storage

Fixing/fasteners may include:

• nails• screws• bolts• masonry anchors• drive/masonry nails

Work is to be undertaken as part of a team under supervision with instruction being part of a supervisor’sdirections, either verbal or written.



EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by carrying out the safe and effective preparation of materials and workarea for the installation of partition framing in accordance with the listed range of variables.





• correct procedures carried out prior to and during application of construction process• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of tools, plant and equipment• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations

Prepare for construction process (carpentry) BCG1016A






• workplace and equipment safety requirements• portable power tools• hand tools and equipment• materials relevant to construction process• materials handling• measurement relative to construction process• drawings and specifications• fixing and fasteners consistent with construction requirements• workplace communication• Quality Assurance


• work safely to instructions• interpret drawings• use power tools and hand tools• handle material• select material• measure relative to processes• communicate effectively



• construction materials relevant to proposed construction• hand and power tools appropriate to construction processes• plant and equipment appropriate to construction processes• suitable work area appropriate to proposed activity



Competency in this unit should be determined concurrently, based on integrated project work.






KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG1017A: Prepare for construction process(demolition)


1 Plan for demolition process 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’sconstruction operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 Job requirements identified from drawings/supervisor’sinstructions.

1.3 OH&S requirements for demolition tasks andworkplace environment recognised and adhered to.


1.5 Protection of public and environment identified fromdemolition plan/instructions.

1.6 Appropriate personal protective equipment selectedaccording to job requirements, and correctly fitted andused.

1.7 Tools and equipment selected to instructionsconsistent with the job requirements, checked forserviceability and any faults reported to supervisor.

1.8 Protective equipment and materials selected toinstructions, consistent with job requirements.

2 Prepare materials for demolitionprocess

2.1 Materials for protection of others, public andenvironment selected to instructions.

2.2 Material preparation carried out to satisfy requirementsof protective barriers and construction.

3 Prepare work area for demolitionprocess

3.1 Activities to be carried out in work area identified fromsupervisor’s instructions

3.2 Protective barriers to be erected/constructed identifiedfrom drawing details and/or instructions.

3.3 Barriers, dust blankets and/or safety fencingerected/installed to instructions.

4 Use tools and equipment forconstruction processes

4.1 Regular hand and power tools suitable for applicationprocesses identified from demolition plan/supervisor’sinstructions.

4.2 Hand and power tools used safely and effectively inconstruction processes.

Prepare for construction process (demolition) BCG1017A


5 Set up plant and equipment forinitial demolition processes

5.1 Location of plant and equipment identified fromdrawings/instructions.

5.2 Plant and equipment located and established inposition ready for operation.

6 Clean up 6.1 Unused materials stacked/stored.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the preparation processes carried out prior to and during the demolition of a building.

Construction processes include:

• preparation for protective barriers• erection of safety fences• erection of solid panelled fencing/hoarding• installation of dust blankets• worksite preparation

Demolition sites include:

• buildings on part of a block• buildings occupying all of a block• interiors of buildings


• overalls• jacket• waterproof pants and jacket• boots• gum boots• hard hat• safety goggles/glasses• ear plugs/muffs• gloves• dust masks/respirators

Tools may include but are not limited to:

• hammers• hand and power saws• shovels• fencing bars• staplers• chisels• picks



• brooms• cutting knife

Material item may include:

• timber• blanket sheeting• plywood• steel fencing

Plant and equipment may include but are not limited to:

• air compressor and hoses• pneumatic picks, rockbreakers• wheelbarrows• ladders

Work is to be undertaken as part of a team under supervision with instructions being part of supervisor’sdirections, either verbal or written.



EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by carrying out safe and efficient preparation and construction processesin preparing for the demolition of a building using any of the listed range of variables.



• demonstrate compliance with OH&S regulations applicable to workplace operations• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures including Quality Assurance

requirements• carry out correct procedures prior to and during construction and demolition processes• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of tools, plant and equipment• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations



• BCG1001A Carry Out OH&S requirements• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• portable power tools• hand tools and equipment• materials

Prepare for construction process (demolition) BCG1017A


• materials handling• use of plant and equipment• drawings and written instructions• workplace communication


• work safely to instructions• use power tools and hand tools• handle material• select material• communicate effectively



• demolition site• hand and power tools appropriate to construction process• plant and equipment appropriate to construction and demolition processes• appropriate materials for construction activities






Competency shall be assessed in the workplace or simulated workplace environment in accordancewith work practices and safety procedures.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG1018A: Prepare for construction process(steelwork)


1 Plan for construction process 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements for company’sconstruction operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 Job requirements identified from drawings/worklocation and/or supervisor’s instructions.






1.8 Fixing/fastenings selected to instructions consistentwith job requirements.


2.1 Activities for material preparation identified fromspecifications and/or supervisor’s instructions.



3.1 Activities to be carried out in work area identified fromdrawing details of proposed construction andsupervisor’s instructions.

3.2 Work area prepared for construction process tosupervisor’s instruction.

4 Use tools and equipmentappropriate for constructionprocess

4.1 Regular hand and power tools suitable for applicationprocesses identified to job requirements.

4.2 Hand and power tools used safely and effectively toinstruction to carry out construction processes.

Prepare for construction process (steelwork) BCG1018A



5.1 Materials obtained from stack/store to instruction.

5.2 Correct manual handling techniques used to move andplace material.

5.3 Materials safely moved to work area.

5.4 Abrasive 'cut off' saw used to accurately cut one off ormultiple components to the same length to instruction.

5.5 Sharp edges of cut material ground off for safety inhandling and preparation for joining.

6 Distribute components 6.1 Cut components distributed and stacked to suit joblocation and sequence of work application.

7 Clean up 7.1 Unused and offcut materials stacked/stored for re-useor disposal.



7.4 Waste disposed of using appropriate method to EPAand OH&S requirements.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the preparation processes associated with structural steel work based on the constructionof metal fabricated components.


• worksite preparation• materials preparation• constructing fabricated components• assembling of fabricated components

Fabricated units incorporating the assembly of components include but are not limited to:

• frame structure• support stands for equipment• structural columns and beams• framework for ducting• communications towers


• workplace procedures• safety requirements• control of handling• quality of materials• specifications of work



OH&S requirements are to be in accordance with State/Territory legislation and regulations and may include:

• worksite environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• emergency procedures

Hazards may include but are not limited to:

• pathway obstacles• off-cut material• movement of other work personnel


• coveralls• safety boots• gloves• hard hat/cap• safety glasses/goggles• ear plugs/muffs

Materials would involve rolled steel sections.


• measuring tape/rule• squares• abrasive cut off saw• power grinders• trolleys• clamps• support stands• vertical drills• block and chain• work bench

Fittings and fastenings may include but are not limited to:

• bolts and nuts• self tapping screws


• measuring and marking• cutting to lengths• grinding of edges• drilling of holes• stacking of material


• clearing area• setting up equipment• material storage

Prepare for construction process (steelwork) BCG1018A


Work is to be undertaken as part of a team under supervision with instructions being part of a supervisor’sdirections, either verbal or written.


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by carrying out the safe and effective preparation of materials toconstruct a nominated fabricated structural steel unit in accordance with the listed range of variables.





• carry out correct procedures prior to and during application of construction preparation processes• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of tools, plant and equipment• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations






• workplace and equipment safety requirements• portable power tools• hand tools and equipment• materials relevant to steelwork• materials handling• measurement relevant to steelwork construction• drawings and specifications• fixing and fasteners consistent with steelwork requirements• workplace communication


• work safely to instructions• interpret drawings• use power tools and hand tools• handle material• select material• measure relative to the processes• prepare materials for steelwork• communicate effectively





• construction materials relevant to steelwork• hand tools and power tools appropriate to steelwork processes• plant and equipment appropriate to steelwork processes• suitable work area appropriate to steelwork activity







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG1019A: Prepare for construction process (paintingand decorating)


1 Plan for construction process 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’s paintingand decorating operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 Preparation and planning requirements identified fromdrawings and/or plans.

1.3 OH&S requirements determined and adhered to inaccordance with application tasks and workplaceenvironment.





1.8 Fixing/fasteners selected consistent with jobrequirements and checked for serviceability.



2.2 Fasteners/fixing prepared for installation to instruction.



3.1 Activities to be carried out in work area identified fromsurfaces to be finished and height to be accessed.

3.2 Work area prepared for construction process tosupervisors instructions.


4.1 Regular hand and power tools suitable for applicationprocess identified with job requirements.


Prepare for construction process (painting and decorating) BCG1019A


5 Assist with initial preparation ofsurfaces for painting anddecorating

5.1 Sound surfaces prepared by either sanding or washingdown using sugar soap, solvents or detergent.

5.2 Unsound surfaces prepared by scraping and/orsanding

6 Assist with preparing surfaces forfinal finish

6.1 Stopping/filling material applied to a flush and evenfinish.

6.2 Sanded surface prepared by hand.

6.3 Primer/sealer/undercoats applied to surface by brushand/or roller.

7 Clean up 7.1 Materials stacked /stored for re-use or disposal.


7.3 Tools and equipment cleaned and stored.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the work undertaken in a team environment for the preparation and subsequent coating ofgeneral building surfaces.


• worksite preparation• surface preparation• application of prime and intermediate coatings


• scrapers• filling• knives/blades• putty knives• duster brushes• hand sanders• mechanical sanders• paint stirrers• drop sheets• wire brushes• hammer• nail punches• paint pots/buckets• brush-ware accessories• roller frames• covers• buckets



• roller accessories• ladders• step ladders• trestles• planks• hop-ups• aluminium mobile scaffold

Materials may include:

• preparatory products• paints – solvent-borne (alkyd, urethane, urethane/alkyd, urethane oil or modified alkyd resins) and

latex (PVA, PVA/acrylic, acrylic and styrene acrylic)

Surfaces to be painted may include common profiles encompassing:

• ply• building boards (including MDF and particle board)• fibre cement products, iron and steel• zinc coated and zinc alloy coated steel products• masonry products• clay bricks• concrete blocks• in-situ-concrete• cement render• set plaster• plaster glass products• paper-faced gypsum plaster board• previously coated/treated surfaces

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the safe and effective preparation of materials using the processeslisted within the range of variables statement.





• carry out correct procedures carried out prior to and during application of construction process• use tools, plant and equipment safely and effectively• Communication processes comply with preparation of surfaces for final finish – painting and

decorating



Prepare for construction process (painting and decorating) BCG1019A




• workplace and equipment safety requirements• portable power tools• hand tools and equipment• materials relevant to painting and decorating• materials handling• measurement and calculation• interpreting plans• fixing and fasteners consistent with painting and decorating requirements• workplace communication requirements


• work safely to instructions• use power tools and hand tools• handle material• select material• communicate effectively• measure relative to the process



• general construction materials relevant to painting and decorating• hand tools and power tools appropriate to painting and decorating process• plant and equipment appropriate to painting and decorating process• suitable work area appropriate to painting and decorating process







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

BCG2000A Assemble simple partition frames


BCG2000A: Assemble simple partition frames




1.3 Material requirements identified from instructions/jobdrawings and specifications.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected to carry out processesconsistent with job requirements, checked forserviceability and any faults reported to supervisor.

1.6 Fixing/fastenings selected to specifications and jobrequirements.


2.1 Materials obtained from store or stack to quantity andspecification requirements.

2.2 Required lengths accurately marked or machine stopsset to requirements of cutting list.

2.3 Docking/drop saw used to accurately cut one ormultiple components to length.

2.4 Cut components distributed and stacked to suit joblocation and sequence of construction.

3 Assemble frames/partitions 3.1 Locations for frame member connectionsmarked/prepared to designed measurement spacings.

3.2 Fixing/fastenings installed securing each junction offrame members tight together, flush on partition faceand within + or – 2mm of set-out marks.

3.3 Frame/partition assembled and secured square tospecification.

3.4 Pre-assembled frames/partitions distributed toappropriate location to instructions.

3.5 Components of frames/partitions impractical to pre-assemble distributed to location as directed bysupervisor.

Assemble simple partition frames BCG2000A


4 Clean up 4.1 Area cleaned free of debris.

4.2 Waste and unwanted material disposed of safely.

4.3 Unused materials stored/stacked.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the assembling of simple partition wall frames.

Material sections used for construction of frames include:

• timber• light steel• aluminium


• safe working operations• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• attention to specifications

OH&S requirements to be in accordance with State/Territory legislation and regulations and may include:

• workplace environment• protective clothing• working platforms• use of tools and equipment• hazard control• handling of materials


• overalls• boots• gloves• safety goggles/glasses• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators• hard hat/cap• jacket


• measuring tape/rule• hammer• docking saw/drop saw• jigs/stops• power drills/screwdrivers• saw stools• clamps• squares• pop riveter

BCG2000A Assemble simple partition frames


• nail gun

Types of fixings/fasteners to be used dependent of type on material being joined may include:

• nails• screws• self tapping screws• pop rivets

Work is to be undertaken as part of a team under indirect supervision, with instructions being verbal or writtenas part of supervisor's directions.

Report of faults may be verbal or written.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the safe and effective preparation and assembly of partition framesusing any two of the separate types of different materials listed within the range statement.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulation applicable to workplaceoperations

• show compliance with organisational policies and procedures including Quality Assurancerequirements

• adopt and carry out correct procedures prior to and during application of assembling processes• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of tools, plant and equipment• show particular attention to accuracy of marking, cutting and assembling members• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work operations



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry)



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• drawings and specifications• portable power tools• hand tools and equipment• materials relevant to frame assembly• materials handling• measurement and calculation• fixing and fasteners consistent with framework requirements• workplace communication

Assemble simple partition frames BCG2000A



• work safely to instructions• interpret drawings and specifications• use power tools and hand tools• handle material• select material• measure relative to the process• communicate effectively



• construction materials relevant to frame construction• hand tools and power tools appropriate to frame assembly process• plant and equipment appropriate to frame assembly process• suitable work area appropriate to frame assembly process• plans and specifications appropriate to construction activity


Competency shall be assessed while work is undertaken under limited supervision with regular checks,but may include some autonomy when working as part of a team.





KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG2001A: Prepare surfaces



1.2 Preparation requirements identified from drawings workarea and instructions/specifications extract.

1.3 OH&S requirements recognised and adhered to inaccordance with the application tasks and workplaceenvironment.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected to carry out processesconsistent with requirements of job, checked forserviceability and any faults reported to supervisor.

1.6 Safety hazards identified and correct procedures usedto minimise risk to self and others in accordance withOH&S workplace operations.

1.7 Materials appropriate to job application selected, safelyhandled and stored/located ready for application.

2 Prepare work area for applicationprocesses

2.1 Hazards and attachments safely removed whereapplicable or arranged for removal from area.

2.2 Work area prepared for preparation applicationprocesses in accordance with finish materialmanufacturer’s specifications.

3 Prepare surface bysanding/grinding

3.1 Correct abrasive disk/sheet or wheel selected inaccordance with surface condition and work to beundertaken and fitted to sander/grinder.

3.2 Sander/grinder used and applied safely to surface inaccordance with manufacturer’s specifications andrelevant OH&S requirements.

3.3 All loose or protruding material removed by sander/grinder and brushing so that surface is prepared tospecification.

4 Patch holes 4.1 Method of patching hole determined from type ofmaterial surface, size of hole, compatibility of materialsand planned specified finish.

4.2 Patching materials selected to suit material surfaceand, where applicable, mixed to requirements of

Prepare surfaces BCG2001A


manufacturer’s specifications.

4.3 Color patching materials checked to ensure to colormatching surrounding area, where applicable.

4.4 Material applied to job and material manufacturer’sspecifications using appropriate application method.

4.5 Where applicable to type of patching material, patchedareas, sanded to provide flush, flat finish to surface.

4.6 Surface brushed/scraped/washed clean of surplusmaterial in accordance with type of patching materialand material surface

4.7 Patched areas sealed by application of prime or sealingcoat, where applicable, to suit requirements ofspecified finishes.

5 Stop and fill surface 5.1 Correct stopping material selected for specifiedsurface, where applicable.

5.2 Imperfections prepared and material applied to a flushand even finish, where applicable to proposedadditional surface application processes.

5.3 Excess filler removed without damaging or markingsurface.

5.4 Surface fine-sanded and cleaned free of dust, whereapplicable for proposed applied finishes.

6 Clean up 6.1 Area cleaned free of debris.

6.2 Waste and unwanted material disposed of safely usingappropriate method to Environment Protection Act(EPA) requirements.

6.3 Unused materials stored.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the preparation of different material surfaces for the application of applied surface finishesor the abutting or attaching of a construction to that surface.

Surface preparation will vary in accordance with the types of materials to be applied to finish or seal surfaceand the type of construction which is to abut or be attached to the surface.

Surface preparation for application finishes includes the preparation for:

• wall and floor tiling• terrazzo• segmental paving



• pre-cast cladding• waterproofing/damproofing• painting• solid plastering• wall papering• clear timber finishes• stone veneer• sheet plastering or lining material

Surface preparation for construction applications of abutting or attaching to surfaces includes the preparationfor:

• curtain walling fixing• brick or block laying• timber partition walls• light steel partition walls• formwork construction• stair installation• attachment of steel brackets or fabricated units• aluminium framework fixing• roof tiling and slating

Material surfaces include:

• timber• plasterboard/plasterglass• masonry• brick• metal (ferrous and non-ferrous)• concrete• solid plaster

Surfaces may be new or established material surfaces including both painted and unpainted surfaces.


• overalls• waterproof pants and jacket• boots• gumboots• gloves• hard hat/cap• safety goggles• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators

Tools include but are not limited to:

• scrapers• paint brushes• wire brushes• brooms• sponges• sanding blocks• shovels• power sanders• power grinders• filling blades



• chisels• hammers

Equipment includes but is not limited to:

• electrical leads• elevated work platforms• trestles• planks• ladders• buckets• sanders• hose and water spray


• workplace environment• protective clothing and equipment• working platforms• use of tools and equipment• control of hazardous substances• hazard control


• clearing area• setting up equipment for operation• erecting scaffolding• disconnecting and removing attachments from or against walls

Patching materials include but are not limited:

• cellulose/plaster proprietary fillers• plaster• sand and cement• cornice adhesive• putty• plastic wood• fibreglass• caulking compounds• sheet material

Waste and debris may include:

• spilt patching material• cleared or scraped old paint• discarded abrasive discs/sheets• cardboard• paper• dirt and dust• disused containers

Work is to be undertaken either as part of a team or individually under indirect supervision with instructionsbeing verbal or written as part of supervisor’s directions.

Instructions and reporting of faults may be verbal or written.



EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the safe and effective preparation of at least three separate types ofmaterial surfaces from those listed within the range of variables statement relevant to the work orientation.





• adopt and carry out correct procedures prior to and during application of preparation• processes• interactively communicate with supervisor to clarify directions and procedures where applicable• demonstrate finished patching of holes is flush and straight with surface within tolerances applicable

to work orientation• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of tools, plant and equipment• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations• prepare surface to specification or instruction requirements


Prerequisites for this unit are:

• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• portable power tools• hand tools and equipment• materials relevant to patching and preparation of surfaces• materials handling• measurement and calculation• drawings and written instructions• workplace communication


• work safely to instructions• interpret drawing and instructions• use power tools and hand tools• handle material• select material• measure relative to the process• communicate effectively





• general construction and patching materials relevant to surface preparation• hand tools and power tools appropriate to application processes• plant and equipment appropriate to application processes• suitable work area appropriate to surface preparation process


Competency shall be assessed while work is undertaken under indirect supervision with regular checks,but may include some autonomy when working as part of a team.

Competency should be assessed through direct observation of application to tasks and questioningrelated to underpinning knowledge.




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG2002A: Oxy/LPG acetylene cutting


1 Set up 1.1 OH&S requirements for oxy acetylene tasks andworkplace environment recognised and adhered to.

1.2 Quality Assurance requirements for company’sconstruction operations recognised and adhered to.


1.4 Equipment selected in accordance with applicationtasks, checked for serviceability and any faultsreported to supervisor.

1.5 Hazards identified and removed and correct fireextinguisher made readily accessible prior tocommencing operations.

1.6 Regulators attached to both oxy and acetylene bottlesusing current safety procedures in accordance withmanufacturer’s specifications and OH&S regulations.

1.7 Equipment tested for leaks and corrective actionundertaken or faults reported to supervisor.

1.8 Correct pressures and cutting tips used in accordancewith material to be cut and manufacturer’sspecifications.

1.9 Lines correctly purged prior to lighting up tomanufacturer’s recommendations.

1.10 Material marked accurately and, where applicable andwhere required, clamped ready for cutting.

2 Cut material 2.1 Torch correctly and safely lit according tomanufacturer’s specifications and recommendations.

2.2 Setting of flame correctly adjusted for cutting tomanufacturer’s recommendations.

2.3 Correct cutting position adopted.

2.4 Material safely and correctly cut to set out mark.

3 Shut down 3.1 Correct closing down procedures used to switch offtorch and shut off gas supply.

4 Clean up 4.1 Debris and unwanted materials removed safely fromworksite.

Oxy/LPG acetylene cutting BCG2002A


4.2 Equipment cleaned, maintained and stored.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the use of oxy acetylene equipment to carry out basic cutting of steel which includes:

• cutting up waste for salvage• cutting reinforcement steel• cutting holes in plate


• use of oxy acetylene equipment• safety hazards and hazard control• protective clothing and equipment• handling of materials


• work procedures• safety requirements• control of handling• use of plant and equipment


• coveralls• boots• hard hat/cap• leather apron• safety goggles• leather gloves

Equipment may include but is not limited to:

• cylinders• regulators• gas tubing• cutting blowpipe• flint lighters• measuring tape/rule• clamps• support stands


• flammable materials• pathway obstacles• off cut material

Debris and unwanted material may include:

• off cut material• empty containers• cardboard• paper



Work is to be undertaken under supervision.


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated safely and effectively cutting material in accordance with the range listedwithin the range of variables statement.





• adopt and carry out correct procedures prior to setting up oxy acetylene equipment and during thecutting process

• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of tools, plant and equipment• demonstrate correct procedures in setting up and shutting down oxy acetylene equipment• give particular attention to safety and elimination of hazards• demonstrate safe handling of material• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe operations• demonstrate effective cutting to produce designed cut material






• workplace and equipment safety requirements including relevant OH&S legislation and regulations• oxy acetylene equipment• hand tools and equipment• materials relative to oxy-acetylene cutting procedures• manual handling• measurement• drawings, sketches and instructions


• work safely to instructions• interpret relative drawings and instructions• use power tools and hand tools• select material• measure relative to cutting processes• communicate effectively

Oxy/LPG acetylene cutting BCG2002A




• construction materials relative to oxy-acetylene cutting• oxy-acetylene equipment appropriate to cutting operations• hand tools and related equipment appropriate to cutting process• suitable work area appropriate to application activities



Assessment may be by direct observation of application to tasks or by questioning related tounderpinning knowledge.




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG2003A: Carry out general demolition


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 OH&S requirements recognised and adhered to inaccordance with demolition tasks and workplaceenvironment.

1.2 Site plan/work plan/sketch accurately interpreted andjob requirements identified.

1.3 Appropriate personal protective equipment selected inaccordance with job requirements, correctly fitted andused.

1.4 Tools, plant and equipment selected consistent with jobrequirements, checked for serviceability and any faultsreported to supervisor.

1.5 Appropriate barricades, hoardings and signage erectedwhere applicable for protection of public and isolationand identification of site.

1.6 Disconnection of all previously existing servicesconfirmed through supervisor and regulatoryauthorities.

1.7 Scaffolding erected to OH&S regulations, whererequired.

1.8 Body harness safely used and correctlyanchored/secured while working at heights.

2 Demolish building /structure 2.1 Designated area safely and sequentially demolishedunder instruction in a team situation.

2.2 Demolition procedures carried out with safe processesof dismantling/demolishing and removing materialsfrom location.

2.3 Materials safely handled using appropriate handlingtechniques in accordance with type of material andOH&S requirements.

2.4 Safety measures introduced to reduce dangeroussituations of fire risk, dust and created hazards.

2.5 Materials for salvaging identified, safely handled andstacked ready for transport.

3 Clean up 3.1 Site cleared free from all waste and debris.

3.2 Equipment and tools cleaned, maintained and stored.

Carry out general demolition BCG2003A


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the demolition of buildings and structures using hand tools and equipment.Work is undertaken in a team situation under supervision where instruction is part of supervisor’s directioneither verbal or written.

Types of buildings and structures include:

• single and double storey commercial buildings• single and double storey residential buildings• partition walling• small buildings• retaining walls and fences

Types of construction include:

• brickwork• blockwork• brick veneer• timber framed• light steel framed


• operation of demolition sites• safety of public• protective clothing• protective equipment• safety hazards and hazard control• working from scaffolding• use of tools and equipment


• overalls• jacket• boots• hard hat• safety glasses/goggles• gloves• dust masks/respirators• ear plugs/muffs• body harness

Tools, plant and equipment may include but is not limited to:

• pinch bars• crow bars• picks• shovels• sledge hammers• wheelbarrows• scaffolding• brooms• pneumatic picks, rock breakers• air compressors• power saws and leads



Previous existing services may include:

• electricity• water• gas• telephone

Safety measures to reduce dangerous situations may include but are not limited to:

• removal of combustible material• use of dust suppression blankets• spraying water• maintaining clearways for traffic• removal of demolished material before serious build up• hazardous materials removed singularly

Waste and debris separate from main demolished materials may include but are not limited to:

• loose material• small material items• empty containers• cardboard• paper


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by working with a team and carrying out the demolition of at least one ofthe types of buildings listed within the range of variables statement.


It is essential that competence is observed in the following aspects:• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable to demolition

and workplace operations• show compliance with organisational policies and procedures within the context of demolition work• adopt and carry out correct procedures prior to and during demolition process• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of tools, plant and equipment• indicate careful attention given to maintaining safety and carrying out measures to minimise risks• display correct and safe handling techniques with handling materials• interactively communicate with others and supervisor to ensure safe and effective demolition

operations


Pre-requisites for this unit are:• BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1007A Erect dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG1017A Prepare for construction process (demolition)

Competency in this unit may be determined concurrently, based upon integrated project work using theseunits of competence.

Carry out general demolition BCG2003A




• workplace and equipment safety requirements• demolition operations• protection of public and environment• hand and power tools• plant and equipment• materials relevant to demolition work• materials handling• measurement• drawings, sketches and instructions• workplace communications• State/Territory regulatory authority requirements for general demolition• scaffolding


• work safely to instructions• use power tools and hand tools• use plant and equipment• handle material• measure• demonstrate application of State/Territory regulatory authority requirements for general demolition• communicate effectively



• demolition site or simulated site situation• construction materials relevant to support work for demolition• hand tools and power tools appropriate to general demolition process• plant and equipment appropriate to general demolition process


Competency shall be assessed while work is undertaken under direct supervision with regular checks,but may include some autonomy when working as part of a team, in order to achieve outcomes withintime constraints.

Assessment should be by direct observation of application to tasks and questioning on underpinningknowledge.






KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG2004A: Carry out levelling


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 OH&S requirements associated with application tasksand worksite environment recognised and adhered to.

1.2 Requirements of job identified from drawings and/orinstructions.

1.3 Relevant reduced levels obtained from givendrawings/sketches and/or instructions


1.5 Levelling equipment and tools selected consistent withneeds of job, checked for serviceability and any faultsreported to supervisor.

2 Maintain given level or specifiedslope with boning rods

2.1 Heights of each end of line to be boned are establishedto levels from given drawings and/or instructions.

2.2 End boning rods securely fixed to required heights.

2.3 Heights of intermediate points sighted with boning rodsand marked where applicable, to + 10mm.

3 Set up and use levelling devices 3.1 Heights to be transferred/established are identifiedfrom given drawings/sketches and/or instructions.

3.2 Level correctly set up for use in accordance torecommendations from manufacturer’s operatingmanual.

3.3 Levels shot and heights marked and/or recorded to jobrequirements to +/- 1mm over 10m.

4 Clean up 4.1 All equipment and tools cleaned, maintained andreturned to store.

4.2 Levelling equipment placed and secured inmanufacturer’s provided container.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the use of levelling equipment to read and record levels in accordance with a given level,and to the use of boning rods to maintain or mark a set slope or level line.

Work is to be undertaken working with a partner under limited supervision.

Carry out levelling BCG2004A


Levelling equipment or devices include but are not limited to:

• dumpy level• automatic level• tilting level• rotating laser level• boning rods

Work applications are simple levelling tasks such as:

• shooting levels for concrete slabs• recording ground levels at respective corners of a setout• recording slab or pad levels for placement of steel columns• recording or checking levels in shallow drainage excavation• boning for alignment on ground or in drainage excavation

Heights or levels may be given by:

• drawing/sketch indicating mark• verbal or written instruction indicating level or mark• datum/survey peg fixed into ground• chalk or nail mark on paved/concrete surface

OH&S requirements to be in accordance with State/Territory legislation and regulations which may include:

• worksite environment and safety• use of tools and equipment• use of laser equipment• protective clothing and equipment


• overalls• boots• jacket• hard hat• safety glasses/goggles• dust masks• gloves

Associated equipment and tools may include but are not limited to:

• staff• measuring tape/rule• string line• wooden/steel pegs• laser target and staff• hammer

Reporting of faults and given instructions may be verbal or written.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by carrying out safe and effective nominated levelling and boningexercises using any two of the types of levels listed within the range of variables statement related to thework orientation.







• adopt and carry out correct procedures prior to and during levelling and boning processes• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of tools, plant and equipment• indicate particular attention to accurately reading and recording staff readings• show particular care of equipment in handling, setting up and storing on completion• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective site operations


Competency in this unit may be determined concurrently with other work orientation units based uponintegrated project work.


• BCG1004A Carry out measurements and calculations• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• hand tools• levelling equipment• use of levelling devices• measurement and calculation• drawings, sketches and instructions• workplace communications

SkillsThe ability to:• work safely to instructions• use levelling equipment• use hand tools• communicate effectively• read and record measurements• measure accurately



• levelling equipment appropriate to levelling processes• appropriate tools and associated equipment to support leveling processes• suitable work area appropriate to levelling activities• suitable plans/drawing and specifications/instructions

Carry out levelling BCG2004A



Competency shall be assessed while work is undertaken under supervision with regular checks, but mayinclude some autonomy when working as part of a team.

Assessment should be by direct observation of tasks and questioning related to underpinningknowledge.




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG2005A: Erect and strip formwork for concretework



1.2 OH&S requirements associated with application tasksand workplace environment recognised and adheredto.

1.3 Location(s) of required formwork established fromworking drawings and instructions.

1.4 Formwork components/materials selected toinstructions consistent with job requirements.



1.7 Fixing/fasteners selected to instruction and usedconsistent with construction requirements of job.

2 Assist with the erection offormwork

2.1 Work area cleared and surface prepared to instructionfor safe erection of formwork.

2.2 Assistance provided with set-out of formwork torequirements of drawings and specifications.

2.3 Assistance provided with assembling and erection offormwork to specifications.

2.4 Block outs and cast in-services installed to specifiedlocations.

2.5 Debris, sawdust and other waste material safelyremoved from completed formwork.

2.6 Release agent applied to formwork face tomanufacturer’s specifications.

3 Strip formwork 3.1 Edge boxing and bracing/strutting support removedcarefully, safely and sequentially.

3.2 Timber components safely denailed, cleaned andstored/stacked for re-use or removal form site.

3.3 Steel components cleaned, oiled and stored/stacked tomanufacturer’s recommendations for maintenance.

Erect and strip formwork for concrete work BCG2005A


3.4 Damaged formwork components discarded afterstripping.

4 Clean up 4.1 Loose debris and waste material removed anddisposed of safely.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to assisting with the construction, erection or modification of formwork for concrete work inan on-site environment including:

• slab on ground• retaining walls

Work is undertaken as part of a team under supervision where instructions would be part of supervisor’sdirections, either verbal or written.

Formwork systems may include:

• timber• steel• composite construction


• overalls• jacket• hard hat• safety goggles• safety boots• gloves• ear muffs


• tool belts• hammer• power saw• builders' line• form oil applicator• mop• spanners• measuring tape• impact gun• pinch bars• hand saws• cutting knife• brooms• shovels


• work procedures



• safety requirements• control of handling• use of plant and equipment• specifications of concrete work


• protective clothing and equipment• worksite environment and safety• use of tools and equipment• emergency procedures

Fixing and fasteners may include:

• nails• screws• self tapping screws• bolts• patented clips• brackets

Assisting with setting out may involve:

• measuring with a tape• making marks• marking material square

Assisting with assembling and erecting may involve but is not limited to:

• cutting material• holding material for fixing• fixing material• lifting form into place• assembling system components• tightening connections• holding of blockouts or cast-in services for securing

Debris and other waste may include:

• off cut material• cardboard• paper


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the safe and effective erection and dismantling of at least two separatetypes of material systems from those listed within the range of variables statement appropriate to the workorientation.




Erect and strip formwork for concrete work BCG2005A



• carry out correct procedures prior to and during construction process• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of tools and equipment• provide effective assistance to setting out and assembling and erecting formwork• demonstrate particular attention and care in stripping formwork• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations



• BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1010A Carry out concrete work to simple forms



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• formwork for concrete• portable power tools• hand tools and equipment• materials related to formwork construction• materials handling• measurement and calculation• drawings/specifications• levelling equipment• fixing and fasteners


• work safely to instructions• use power tools and hand tools• handle formwork materials• select materials appropriate to construction of formwork• measure relative to construction of formwork• fix material• communicate effectively• use simple levelling equipment



• construction materials relevant to construction of formwork• hand tools and power tools appropriate to construction and stripping processes• plant and equipment appropriate to construction processes• suitable work area appropriate to concreting process









KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG2006A: Carry out steelfixing


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’s concreteoperations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements for application tasks andworkplace environment recognised and adhered to.

1.3 Reinforcement, type of fixing and locations identifiedfrom instructions/reinforcement schedule, job drawingsand specifications.

1.4 Formwork/excavation checked for completion andconformity to receive reinforcement.



1.7 Delivered reinforcement checked for correct type andquantities against reinforcement schedule/detailsshown in job detail drawings.

2 Prepare for reinforcementplacement

2.1 Reinforcement bars cut and bent to required set-outand drawing details.

2.2 Bars tied to designed configuration from drawings.

2.3 Reinforcement sheets cut to required sizes, whereapplicable.

2.4 Stiffening rods attached to panels to instructions asrequired to facilitate handling processes.

2.5 Bar chairs/spacers located to requirements ofreinforcement schedule and job drawings.

3 Place and fix reinforcement 3.1 Fabric reinforcement sheets placed into correctposition in accordance with engineer's drawings andschedule.

3.2 Reinforcement bars located according to specificationand positioned in accordance with engineer's drawingsand schedule.

3.3 Reinforcement correctly placed using bar chairs,ligatures and spacers according to engineers'specification and schedule.

Carry out steelfixing BCG2006A


3.4 Reinforcement fabric and/or bars tied and/or welded incorrect placement in accordance with engineer'sdrawings, job specification and AS1554.3.

3.5 Cast-in items secured to reinforcement to engineer'sspecifications.

3.6 Ends of protruding reinforcement covered andprotected in accordance with specifications.

4 Inspect reinforcement prior toconcrete pour

4.1 Location and position of ties and/or welded fabric/barreinforcement checked for accuracy and spacingbefore concrete placement.

5 Clean up 5.1 Area cleared to specification.

5.2 Waste material removed and placed into job wastebins or rubbish stockpiles.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the fabrication and placement of steel reinforcing to concrete forms and excavations forfootings on site.

Forms for concrete structural members and footing excavations may include:

• beam footings• beams• slab on ground• suspended slabs• columns• stairs• pads• walls

Reinforcing may include:

• deformed bars• plain rods• mesh sheets of plain bars• mesh sheets of deformed bars


• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• respirators• hard hat




• bolt cutters• wire nippers• tie wire spool• measuring tape/rule• reinforcement benders• mesh guillotine• range of general hand and power tools


• preparation of reinforcing• placement and support• concrete coverage• control of handling


• protective clothing and equipment• cutting and handling of material• working from scaffolding• using tools and equipment• worksite environment and safety• handling of materials

Welding of reinforcement fabric and/or bars to be in accordance with:

• AS1554.3 – 1983 Welding of Reinforcing Steel

Instructions and reporting of faults may be verbal or written, with instructions being part of a supervisor’sdirections.

Work is to be undertaken in a team situation under supervision.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by the safe and effective placement of reinforcing to at least three (3) ofthe separate types of structures/members/footings listed within the range of variables.


It is essential that competence be observed in the following aspects:


• show compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of fixing steel reinforcing• check materials for conformity with specifications and job requirements• Identify and follow assembly location and placement sequence• demonstrate safe and effective use of tools and equipment and handling of materials• place and tie/weld reinforcement to specification• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective operations in fixing reinforcing

Carry out steelfixing BCG2006A




• BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG2005A Erect and strip formwork for concrete work



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• formwork for concrete• portable power tools, hand tools• plant and equipment• materials relevant to steelfixing• materials handling• measurement and calculation• drawings and specifications• reinforcement schedule• appropriate steelfixing procedures and legislative requirements


• work safely to instructions• interpret drawings and specifications/instructions• use power tools and hand tools• handle materials• select materials• measure relative to the process• communicate effectively



• reinforcement materials appropriate to construction process• hand tools and power tools appropriate to steelfixing process• plant and equipment appropriate to steelfixing process• suitable formwork or excavation appropriate to construction process


Competence should be assessed through direct observation of tasks and questions related tounderpinning knowledge.

Competence should be assessed under general guidance checking at various stages of the process andat completion of the activity against performance criteria and specifications.


Competency may be assessed in the workplace or simulated workplace setting.



Assessment shall be while tasks are undertaken either individually or as part of a team under limitedsupervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 2 1 1 1



BCG2007A: Operate elevated work platforms (EWP)


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 OH&S requirements associated with operatingelevating work platforms and workplace environmentrecognised and adhered to.

1.2 Workplace operations plan identified in accordancewith job requirements and surrounding activities andenvironment.


1.4 Equipment selected consistent with job requirementsand checked for serviceability to manufacturer’sspecifications.

1.5 Safety hazards identified and correct procedures usedto minimise risks to self and others.

1.6 Materials selected in accordance with job drawingsand/or specifications/supervisor’s instructions.

2 Conduct routine checks ofplatform

2.1 Power source determined where applicable andconnected to platform equipment to manufacturer'sspecifications.

2.2 Routine pre-operational equipment checks carried outin accordance with checklist from operator's manual.

2.3 Equipment switched on in accordance with start upprocedures and controls checked for correct operationand ease of movement.

2.4 Emergency safety devices checked to instructions fromoperator's manual.

2.5 Work location checked for level ground and floorsurface to determine stabilising and safe working arearequirements.

3 Locate equipment in place forwork application

3.1 Platform located in position for work application andstabilisers engaged to set equipment base level intoplace.

3.2 Barricades and signage erected to isolate safe workingarea where applicable.

3.3 Tools, equipment and materials placed intobucket/platform to job application requirements.

Operate elevated workplatforms (EWP) BCG2007A


4 Elevate platform to work location 4.1 Controls operated to manufacturer’s recommendationsand platform elevated to work position.

4.2 Power switched off and locking devices engaged tooperator's manual.

4.3 Work carried out to job specification and safetyrequirements of operator's manual.

5 Lower platform and shut down 5.1 Controls operated to manufacturer's recommendationsand platform lowered to down position.

5.2 Shut down procedures carried out to operator's manualand equipment switched off.

6 Clean up 6.1 Waste material removed and disposed of safely.

6.2 Unused materials sealed and stored/stacked.

6.3 Tools and equipment removed, cleaned, maintainedand stored.

6.4 Stabilisers disengaged, equipment stored and securedand unit removed from location.

6.5 Routine post-operational checks carried out inaccordance with checklist from operator's manual andany faults reported to supervisor.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to mobile hydraulic and mechanical platforms not exceeding 11 metres in lift capacity whichmay be operated from ground, pavement or floor surfaces.

Elevating work platforms include but are not limited to:

• scissor type• extending arm (cherry picker)

Work applications may include but are not limited to:

• painting• erecting signs• fixing steelwork• minor repair work to buildings


• operation of mechanical equipment• protective clothing and equipment• worksite environment and safety• handling of materials• emergency procedures




• coveralls• safety boots• hard hat/cap• gloves• safety glasses/goggles• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirator


• obstacles in pathway or on face of walls• limited space• other activities within vicinity• weather conditions

Work is to be undertaken in a team situation under supervision where instructions would be part ofsupervisor's directions. Instructions and reporting of faults may be verbal or written.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the safe and effective operation of any of the EWP's listed within therange of variables statement relevant to the work orientation.





• carry out correct procedures prior to, during and after use of elevating work platform• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of plant, tools and equipment• demonstrate safe and effective work application while in set elevated position• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations


Competency in this unit may be determined concurrently with other units relevant to the work orientation,based upon integrated project work.





• workplace and equipment safety requirements relative to EWP’s• a range of EWP's• operation and maintenance of equipment

Operate elevated workplatforms (EWP) BCG2007A


• use of hand and power tools• drawings and specifications• communication processes – verbal and signalling• materials and material fixing


• work safely to instructions• interpret drawings and specifications• use hand tools• use plant and equipment• fix materials• communicate effectively



• appropriate elevating work platform• plant and equipment appropriate to EWP• hand tools and materials appropriate to work application from EWP• suitable work area appropriate to operation of EWP• appropriate operation and manufacturer's specification manual







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

BCG2008A Use explosive power tools (EPT)


BCG2008A: Use explosive power tools (EPT)


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements for company’sconstruction operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements associated with application tasksand workplace environment recognised and adheredto.

1.3 Job requirements assessed to determine access andappropriate fastener and charge to suit material andbase to be fixed.

1.4 Explosive power tools, attachments and equipmentselected consistent with requirements of job, checkedfor serviceability and any faults reported to supervisor.


1.6 Safety hazards identified and correct procedures usedto minimise risk to self and others.

1.7 Scaffolding erected, where applicable, to OH&Srequirements.

1.8 Explosive power tool operations carried out inaccordance with manufacturer's recommendations andAS1873.

2 Set out for fasteners 2.1 Material or base set out for location of fasteners inaccordance with detailed drawings and specifications.

2.2 Minimum distances from edge of material adhered to inaccordance with AS1873.

2.3 Material located and temporarily held or fixed intodesigned position of detailed drawings.

3 Use explosive power tools 3.1 Fastener selected to requirements of job.

3.2 Charge selected to assessed requirements formaterial, base and penetration.

3.3 Attachments and/or accessories installed to explosivepower tool in accordance with manufacturer'sspecifications.

3.4 Explosive power tool checked for operation tomanufacturer's specifications.

Use explosive power tools (EPT) BCG2008A


3.5 Fastener and charge located in explosive power tool tomanufacturer's specification.

3.6 Personal protective equipment fitted and worn inaccordance with AS1270, AS1337 and manufacturer'srecommendations.

3.7 Explosive power tool operated safely and fastener fixedinto place.

3.8 Fastening penetration checked and determined forappropriate depth into material.

3.9 Power regulating device adjusted for conditions whererequired.

3.10 Misfire procedures carried out where required tomanufacturer's recommendations and AS1873.

4 Clean up 4.1 Temporary holding/fixing removed without damage tomaterial.

4.2 Explosive power tool cleared, attachments removedand tool and attachments cleaned.

4.3 Charges stored in designated container in accordancewith AS1873 and used charges recorded.

4.4 Unused fasteners, explosive power tool andattachments stored in carry case to manufacturer'srecommendations.

4.5 Area cleared and waste material disposed of safely.

5 Maintain explosive power tool andkit

5.1 Safety features of tool checked for serviceability inaccordance with manufacturer’s operating manual.

5.2 Tool cleaned and lubricated to manufacturer'srecommendation.

5.3 Periodic maintenance service carried out tomanufacturer's specifications.

5.4 Log book checked and maintenance recorded tomanufacturer's recommendations.

5.5 Diminished stocks of charges and fastenersreplenished to designed effectiveness of power tool kit.



RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to both direct action and indirect action explosive powered fastening tools used to fastenmaterials or fix fasteners to bases of:

• concrete• masonry• steel

Use of these tools is to be in accordance with relevant State/Territory legislation requirements and:

• AS1873-1978 Explosive-Powered Hand Held Fastening Tools, Fasteners and Explosive Charges


• workplace operations and work procedures• safety requirements• quality of materials• application relevant to specifications of work


• workplace environment and safety• use of explosive power tools• isolation of working areas• use of tools and equipment• protective clothing and equipment• working from scaffolding• emergency procedures

Personal protective equipment is to incorporate requirements of:

• AS1270~1998 Acoustics – Hearing Protection• AS1337~1984 Eye Protection for Industrial Application

In addition to ear plugs/muffs and safety glasses/goggles, other personal protective equipment may include:

• gloves• boots• hard hat• overalls• dust mask/respirator


• Obstacles close to operation location• Other activities within vicinity• Limited space


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by carrying out the safe and effective operational use of an EPT inapplications to the various types of bases listed within the range of variables statement relative to the workorientation and appropriate legislation requirements.

Use explosive power tools (EPT) BCG2008A




• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable to explosivepower tools and workplace operations


• carry out correct procedures prior to and during application of fixing/fastening process• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of explosive power tools and equipment• show correct interpreting of manufacturer's manual and reporting procedures• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations


Competency in this unit may be determined concurrently with other relevant units based upon integratedproject work relative to the work orientation.





• workplace and equipment safety requirements including relevant OH&S statutory regulations• explosive power tools• hand tools and equipment• materials relevant to the operation of explosive power tools (EPT's)• measurements and calculations• drawings and specifications• Quality Assurance• operational procedures in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and relevant Australian

Standards• maintenance of equipment• fixing of materials


• work safely to instructions• use hand and power tools• measure relative to fixing of materials• demonstrate operational procedures for EPT• communicate effectively• identify drawing details relevant to operation of EPT• maintain accurate records



• explosive power tool and complete kit• general construction materials relevant to operation applications of EPT• hand and power tools and supportive equipment appropriate to operation applications of EPT



• suitable work area appropriate to operation applications of EPT• manufacturer’s manual of operations and copy of AS1873


Competency shall be assessed while work is undertaken under direct supervision.





KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 1 2 1 1



BCG2009A: Carry out concrete work


1 Plan work 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements for company’sconcrete operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements with application tasks andworkplace environment recognised and adhered toincluding identification of hazardous material.


1.4 Tools and equipment selected, to carry out processesconsistent with job requirements, checked forserviceability and any faults reported to supervisor.

1.5 Procedures and the individual's role is identifiedthrough the supervisor in team operation to placeconcrete.

2 Carry out concrete placement 2.1 Assistance provided with undertaking of relevantconcrete tests.

2.2 Concrete transported correctly with wheelbarrow anddischarged into formwork using correct manualhandling techniques.

2.3 Concrete placed to instruction minimising spillage.

2.4 Concrete compacted to specification and instructionusing immersion vibrator or other specified method.

2.5 Concrete screeded to specified levels/grades as perinstructions.

2.6 Concrete finished to instruction to specified surfacefinish.

2.7 Curing process identified and applied to instruction.

2.8 Concrete surface adequately covered with appropriatematerial to support curing process and protect fromdamage.

3 Clean up site 3.1 Site cleaned free of debris.



Carry out concrete work BCG2009A


RANGE OF VARIABLES

Concrete work includes placement of concrete into:

• foundation• slab on ground• simple retaining walls

Work is undertaken as part of a team under supervision.


• shovels and rakes• wooden floats• steel floats• bull floats• immersion vibrator or vibrating table• tarpaulins/covers• curing agent applicator• steam generator• wheelbarrow• concrete kibble• tamping rods• screed boards• edging tool• brooms


• workplace operations and work procedures• quality of material• control of placement, compaction and finish of concrete• use and maintenance of tools, plant and equipment• specifications of work


• protective clothing and equipment• workplace environment and safety• working platforms• use of tools and equipment• emergency procedures

Relevant concrete tests include:

• slump test for water content• preparing cylinders for compaction testing

Waste material and debris may include:

• concrete spillage• excess concrete• pieces of timber• empty containers• cardboard and paper




• safety goggles/glasses• respirators• ear muffs and safety boots• gum boots• water proof pants and jacket

Concrete may be transported to formwork and placed by the following methods:

• directly from pre-mix truck• crane and kibble• wheelbarrow

Concrete may be finished by:

• steel float• bull floats• wood float• broom

Concrete may be cured by:

• atmospheric conditions• applied moisture• steam or applied agents

Instructions would be part of supervisor’s directions. Instructions and reporting of faults may be verbal orwritten.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the safe and effective placement and finish of concrete using any ofthe conditions and types of structures listed within the range of variables statement relevant to the workorientation.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable to concrete workand workplace operations


• carry out correct procedures prior to and during application of concreting process• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of tools, plant and equipment• interactively communicate to support team and ensure safe and effective workplace operations• give particular attention to placement and compaction processes


Competency in this unit may be determined concurrently, based upon integrated project work using thefollowing units of competence:

• BCG2005A Erect and strip formwork for concrete work• BCG2006A Carry out steelfixing

Carry out concrete work BCG2009A


Pre-requisites for this unit in addition to BGC2005A and BGC2006A are:

• BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1010A Carry out concrete work to simple forms



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• concrete construction• hand tools and equipment• materials relating to the concreting process• materials handling• measurement relevant to concrete work• drawings/specifications• transporting, placing concrete• levelling equipment• simple formwork and reinforcement componentry


• work safely to instructions• use power tools and hand tools• handle materials• select equipment appropriate to concreting process• measure relative to concreting process• communicate effectively• use simple levelling equipment



• hand tools and power tools appropriate to concreting process• plant and equipment appropriate to concreting process• suitable prepared formwork with placed reinforcement appropriate to concreting process


Competency shall be assessed while work is undertaken under direct supervision with regular checks,but may include some autonomy when working as part of a team, in order to achieve outcomes withintime constraints.

Assessment shall be by direct observation of tasks and questioning related to underpinning knowledge.






KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG2010A: Remove/replace door and window furniture


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements recognised andadhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements for removing and replacingdoor/window furniture recognised and adhered to.

1.3 Door and window furniture requirements assessed inaccordance with finish schedule to specifications.

1.4 Personal protective equipment selected, correctly fittedand used.

1.5 Tools and equipment selected consistent with jobrequirements, checked for serviceability and any faultsreported.

1.6 Safety hazards identified and correct procedures usedto reduce hazards to self and others.

2 Remove doors, shutters andfurniture

2.1 Ladders or scaffolding erected, where required, toOH&S regulations.

2.2 Fly wire screens and fittings carefully removed andstored safely.

2.3 Window furniture carefully removed and located orstored safely.

2.4 Window shutters and sashes, where applicable andpractical, carefully removed and handled safely tolocation for finishing.

2.5 Door furniture carefully removed and located or storedsafely.

2.6 Doors carefully removed, identified and handled safelyto location for finishing.

3 Replace doors, shutters andfurniture

3.1 Doors carefully handled and located back into originalplace.

3.2 Door furniture fitted and fixed back into place tospecifications without marking door or surrounds.

3.3 Where removed window shutters and sashes locatedback into original place.

3.4 Window furniture fitted and fixed back into place tospecifications without marking window surfaces orsurrounds.

Remove/replace door and window furniture BCG2010A


3.5 Fly wire screens carefully replaced and secured inposition without damage to surrounds.

4 Clean up 4.1 Area cleared.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the practical application finishes to doors and windows requiring removal thereof or theremoval of furniture.

Door furniture includes:

• hinges• locks• latches• handles• closers• safety chains

Window furniture includes:

• catches• handles• stays• hinges• locks• brackets

Hinges and brackets may be designed to be painted over or kept in own natural finished state.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by removing furniture from both a nominated door and a nominatedwindow for the purpose of painting, replacing and refitting doors/shutters, where applicable.



• compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable to workplace operations• compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes for removing and/or painting of

doors and windows• identification of location and details of door and window to be removed/refurbished• selection and use of appropriate processes, tools and equipment• safe and effective procedures used to remove furniture and door• appropriate attention given to locating furniture safely for replacing• safe and effective procedures used to replace door and replace respective furniture• identification of typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify





• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• doors and windows• door and window furniture• tools and equipment


• work safely• organise work• use tools and equipment



• installed door• installed window


Competency shall be assessed while tasks are undertaken under indirect supervision.

Assessment may involve:

• observation of the application process• inspection of the completed work• questioning related to underpinning knowledge


Competency should be assessed in the normal or simulated workplace environment.

Assessment should be while tasks are undertaken under indirect supervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 1 2 - - 1 1



BCG2011A: Use static machines


1 Identify static machines, theiroperation and safetyrequirements

1.1 Types and functions of static machines used inoffsite production identified.

1.2 Method of operation of machines identified andunderstood.

1.3 OH&S requirements for guarding and cut off switchesidentified.

1.4 OH&S requirements for personal protectiveequipment associated with using machines identified.

1.5 Quality Assurance requirements of company’smachining operations recognised and adhered to.

2 Prepare machine for use 2.1 OH&S requirements for preparing and using staticmachines recognised and adhered to.


2.3 Machine set up to required operating process andsetting with fences/guides locked to position.

2.4 Safety guards/shields checked and adjusted whererequired to National OH&S standards.

3 Operate machine 3.1 Machine start up procedure carried out tomanufacturer’s recommendations.

3.2 Material fed to machine, where applicable, inaccordance with manufacturer’s recommendationsand safe handling procedures.

3.3 Material set up and fixed into place where applicablefor mobile machine in moving table operations inaccordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.4 Machine operated in accordance with designedcapacity and purpose and to manufacturer’sspecifications and OH&S requirements.

3.5 Machine shut down procedure carried out tomanufacturer’s recommendations.

4 Maintain machine andattachments

4.1 Machines maintained through regular servicing tomanufacturer’s operating manual.

Use static machines BCG2011A


4.2 Faults identified and reported to responsiblesupervisor.

4.3 Minor faults identified and corrected whereapplicable.

4.4 Cutters/blades and attachments fitted and secured tomanufacturer’s specifications.

5 Clean up 5.1 Machine cleaned and waste material disposed ofsafely.

5.2 Cutters, blades and attachments cleaned, checkedand stored.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the use of static machines which are those fixed to a set location for their operation.

Static machines include but are not limited to:

• rip saws• band saws• docking saws• vertical and horizontal drills• dimensional saws• thicknessers• buzzers• spindle moulders• morticers• multi borers• table sanders• grinders• polishers• multi functional cutter/grinder/polisher• shapers• diamond saws• travelling beam saws• multi bladed saws

Quality assurance requirements may include:

• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials used in machining operations• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of machines• attention to specifications of work


• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• safety switches on machinery• maintenance of machines• use of tools and equipment



• handling of and feeding of materials• guarding on machinery• safe use of machines


• boots• safety glasses/goggles• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators• gloves• cap

Tools and equipment for maintenance and setting up may include but are not limited to:

• oil cans• grease guns• spanners• feeler gauges• packers• wedges• screwdrivers• measuring tape/rule• hammer• spirit level• squares

Reporting of faults should be in accordance with organisation’s workplace procedures and may be verbal orwritten.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the safe and efficient setting up and operating of at least three (3)separate types of machines from those listed in the range of variables statement.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable to workplace andmachine operations

• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures including Quality Assurancerequirements within the context of carrying out machining operations

• identify and appropriately apply manufacturer’s recommendations in use of machine• identify and correct apply guarding requirements in operating machine• carry out correct setting up procedures prior to use in accordance with carrying out machine

operations• carry out correct start up procedures• demonstrate safe and effective operational use of machine• carry out correct shut down/switch off procedures• give attention to procedures for cleaning and maintaining of machine to requirements• use of safe and correct procedures to place or remove cutters and blades

Use static machines BCG2011A


(2) Prerequisite Relationship of Units


• BCG 1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG 1006A Use small plant and equipment


KnowledgeA Knowledge of:

• workplace and equipment safety requirements including relevant statutory regulations• types of machines and their operation• safety considerations for operating of machinery• maintenance of machines• cutter, blades and associated accessories• tools and equipment• materials• materials handling


• work safely to instructions• set up for machine operation• operate machine• use hand tools and equipment• handle material• stack material• communicate effectively



• workshop location• access to a range of static machines• materials appropriate to work orientation machinery




• observation of application work• questioning related to underpinning knowledge

Assessment may be by intermittent checking at the various stages of the job application in accordancewith the performance criteria, or may be at the completion of each task associated with setting up andusing machine.


Competency shall be assessed in the normal or simulated workplace environment in accordance withwork and safety procedures.



KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 - 1 2 2

BCG2012A Make set-outs


BCG2012A: Make set-outs


1 Plan and prepare for set-out 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’sconstruction operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements determined and adhered to inaccordance with application tasks and workplaceenvironment.

1.3 Design and dimensions of unit determined fromwritten instructions and drawings.

1.4 Type of set out to be undertaken, determined.

1.5 Material selected consistent with set-outrequirements and prepared for marking.

1.6 Tools and instruments selected to carry outprocesses consistent with set-out requirements

2 Make set-out for unit 2.1 Overall dimensions of unit and lines representingmaterial thickness accurately marked on set out.

2.2 Details of cross sectional dimensions of integralmembers accurately marked on set-out, whereapplicable.

2.3 Methods of joining marked on set-out whereapplicable.

2.4 Set-out of cross sectional members of profiles cutaccurately to form template shapes whereapplicable.

2.5 Set-out identified by marking description/code ofunit onto completed set-out.

3 Store set-out 3.1 Set-out stored in identifiable and retrievablelocation.

3.2 Area cleared and waste removed.

3.3 Tools and instruments cleaned and stored.

Make set-outs BCG2012A


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the making of set-outs to produce a product in accordance with the relevant workorientation.

Units to be set out are to be standard or basic type units of stock material produced by an organisation inany of the following production areas:

• timber joinery• aluminium joinery• fitments• shopfronts• stairs• stonework• glasswork• pre-cast concrete work

Setouts include:

• full size dimensional illustrations• full size sectional plans and elevations• profiles of sections• machining details• lettering or decorative features


• workplace operations and procedures• attention to specifications of work• making of set outs and templates


• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials

Tools and instruments may include but are not limited to:

• measuring tape/rule• squares• scribers• dividers/steel wing compasses• straight edge• curved templates• set squares• T squares

Written instructions and drawings include:

• elevation and plan drawings• provided specifications• isometric drawings• sketches• typed or hand written notes• verbal instructions

BCG2012A Make set-outs


Material for setouts include:

• plywood• particleboard• paper• cardboard• zinc sheet• aluminium sheet• plastic sheet

Preparation of material for set-out include:

• cutting sheet material to practical size• taping paper to backing base• sanding off previous setout or marks

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by making a set -out complete and accurate in detail whereby from whichall parts/components of a unit can be produced and marked.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures including Quality Assurancerequirements within the context of making set-outs

• indicate understanding of interpreting drawings and instructions• select and use appropriate processes, tools and instruments for set-out task• accurately set-out detailed set out information• demonstrate correct use of instruments and tools in setting out angles and curves• demonstrate accurate cutting of set-out shape, where applicable



• BCG 1003A Read and interpret drawings• BCG 1004A Carry out measurements and calculations



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawings and specifications• set outs relevant to work orientation• measuring and marking• use of drawing/drafting equipment• organisation’s Quality Assurance requirements• manufacturing processes• tools and instruments• set-out materials

Make set-outs BCG2012A



• understand and interpret information from drawings and instructions• use basic instruments and tools• prepare for work application• apply sound measuring and marking techniques• set-out material• record or mark identifying information• communicate effectively



• workplace space to carry out processes• set-out bench and set-out material• measuring and marking instruments• tools and equipment for holding and cutting


Competency shall be assessed while work is undertaken under indirect supervision.

Assessment may be by intermittent checking at the various stages of the job application in accordancewith the performance criteria, or may be at the completion of the set-out process.


Competency shall be assessed in the normal or simulated workplace environment and in accordancewith work and safety procedures.

Guidelines will be in line with statutory agreements and enterprise specific policies and procedures.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 - 2 1 -

BCG3001A Encapsulate and remove asbestos


BCG3001A: Encapsulate and remove asbestos


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 OH&S requirements for removal of asbestos anddecontamination processes recognised and adheredto.

1.2 Area of encapsulation defined from job drawings andasbestos removal plan.

1.3 Location of decontamination chamber identified inaccordance with asbestos removal plan and OH&Srequirements.

1.4 Personal protective equipment selected inaccordance with asbestos removal requirements andcorrectly fitted and used.

1.5 Tools and equipment selected consistent with jobrequirements, checked for serviceability and anyfaults reported to supervisor.

1.6 Temporary water, electrical and drainage pointslocated in accordance with job drawings.

2 Set up decontaminationchamber

2.1 Decontamination chamber located to proposed siteand assembled to manufacturer’s requirements.

2.2 Services connected to contamination chamber torespective authority requirements.

2.3 Decontamination procedure tested and authorityapproval gained in accordance with OH&Sregulations.

3 Encapsulate and sealasbestos area

3.1 Area of asbestos removal encapsulated inaccordance with removal plan and hygienist'srequirements.

3.2 Negative air pressure maintained to hygienist'srequirements.

3.3 Encapsulated area inspected for air tightness.

3.4 Approval to proceed with asbestos removal gainedfrom hygienist.

4 Remove asbestos material 4.1 Asbestos removed from structure in correct manner(water jet/spray/demolish) according to asbestosremoval plan and hygienist's approval.

Encapsulate and remove asbestos BCG3001A


4.2 Removed asbestos placed into removal bags/bins,sealed and removed from site to authorityrequirements.

5 Carry out decontaminationprocess

5.1 Decontamination chamber used to manufacturer’sand authority’s requirements.

5.2 Decontamination of all asbestos removal workerscarried out according to OH&S procedures and tooccupational hygienist’s satisfaction.

5.3 Personal protective equipment removed, maintainedto manufacturer’s specified standard and stored.

6 Gain clean air approval 6.1 Approval to demobilise asbestos removal equipmentgained from hygienist on final clear air readings.

7 Remove asbestos removalequipment

7.1 Asbestos removal equipment, scaffold, andencapsulation material removed from area to OH&Srecommendations.

7.2 Encapsulation material disposed of to authorityrequirements.

7.3 Tools and equipment cleaned, maintained andstored.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to asbestos removal sites under direction of occupational hygienist which includes:

• demolition sites• buildings

Operation of chamber and decontamination of workers to be carried out in accordance with State/TerritoryOH&S legislation and regulations for asbestos removal operations.


• sledge hammer• hammers• pinch bars• fencing bars• shovels• screwdrivers• hoses and spray fittings• brooms

Reporting of faults should be in accordance with company procedures and asbestos removal plan and maybe verbal or written.

All work is to be undertaken in a team operation in accordance with OH&S regulations for asbestos removaloperations.

BCG3001A Encapsulate and remove asbestos


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by encapsulating and removing asbestos from a nominated removal site.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable to asbestosremoval operations

• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of removalof asbestos

• select and apply appropriate processes to encapsulate the designed area of asbestos removal• appropriately apply and check air pressure to ensure area maintained to design requirements and

approval obtained to proceed• select and use appropriate tools, equipment and procedures to remove asbestos from structure• selection and use of appropriate placement and sealing process to remove asbestos from site• identify approval to demobilise asbestos removal equipment• appropriate applications to remove all equipment and encapsulated material• demonstrate safe and effective procedures used to clean, maintain and store tools and equipment• appropriate decontamination processes for removal workers and personal protective equipment• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate to ensure all operations carried out safely and effectively


Pre-requisites to this unit are:

• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1017A Prepare for construction process (demolition)• BCG3002A Carry out general demolition (manual/mechanical)



• workplace and equipment safety requirements including relevant regulations, codes and standards• asbestos removal safety requirements• tools and equipment• maintenance of equipment• materials handling


• work safely• prepare for work application• use tools and equipment• clean equipment• communicate effectively

Encapsulate and remove asbestos BCG3001A




• decontamination chamber• services• tools and equipment• specialist personal protective clothing


Competency shall be assessed while tasks are undertaken and may be by direct observation ofapplication to tasks or by questioning related to underpinning knowledge.

Assessment may be by intermittent checking at the various stages of each task application or at thecompletion of each task in accordance with the performance criteria.



Assessment should be while tasks are undertaken either individually or as part of a team.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 3 1 3



BCG3002A: Carry out general demolition (manual/mechanical)


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 OH&S requirements for manual and mechanicaldemolition work recognised and adhered to.

1.2 Safety and protection requirements for work,personnel, public and the environment identified anddetermined.




1.6 Mechanical plant and equipment established on site totheir operating locations.

2 Remove hazardous materials 2.1 Materials identified for separate handling techniques inaccordance with their material characteristics.

2.2 Hazardous materials removed safely in accordancewith demolition method statement.

3 Demolish structure using manualoperations

3.1 Structure demolished sequentially according todemolition method statement, AS2601-Demolition ofStructures and OH&S regulations.

3.2 Tools and equipment used safely to carry out manualdemolition operations.

3.3 Safe working area maintained in accordance with joband OH&S requirements.

3.4 Scaffolding erected, where required, in accordancewith job requirements and OH&S regulations.

4 Demolish structure usingmechanical plant

4.1 Mechanical plant used safely to carry out demolitionoperations.

4.2 Direction and assistance provided to plant operatorsduring demolition process.

4.3 Noise maintained below maximum levels inaccordance with AS2436-Demolition of Buildings 1-Noise Control and OH&S regulations.

Carry out general demolition (manual/mechanical) BCG3002A


4.4 Dust and airborne debris maintained within safe levelsin accordance with AS2985, AS3640 and OH&Sregulations.

5 Remove materials fromdemolished area

5.1 Materials removed from demolition area according todemolition method statement.

5.2 Re-useable and recyclable materials salvaged andstored for later removal.

6 Clean up 6.1 Debris and waste materials removed on completion ofdemolition process.

6.2 Debris and waste materials place in stock piles or jobrubbish bins or directly removed from site according todesign requirements.


6.4 Personal protective equipment removed, inspected,maintained and stored.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to all general demolition work involving both manual operations and use of mechanical plant.

Manual operations may include:

• all demolition processes• use of hand tools• use of pneumatic tools and equipment• separation of materials• removal of nails and fasteners, etc.• removal of demolished area materials

Plant and machinery include:

• excavator• dozer• front end loader• skidsteer loader


• coveralls• jacket• waterproof pants and jacket• boots• gumboots• hard hat• safety glasses/goggles• ear plugs/muff• gloves• dust masks/respirators



• body harness


• protective clothing and equipment• workplace environment and safety• protection of public and environment• handling of materials• noise and dust control• emergency procedures

Direction and assistance may include:

• indicating hazards• clearing waste/hazards• providing signals• fitting attachments

Removal of materials may involve:

• wheelbarrow• front end loader• skidsteer loader


• sledge hammers• shovels• fencing bars• pinch bars• picks• hammers• air compressor• pneumatic picks, rock breakers• wheelbarrows• brooms• ladders

Dust and airborne debris control must be in accordance with:

• AS2985-1987 Workplace Atmospheres – Method for sampling and gravimetric determination of respirable dust

• AS3640-1989 Workplace Atmospheres – Method for sampling and gravimetric determination of inspirable dust

Reporting of faults should be in accordance with company’s workplace procedures and may be verbal orwritten.

Debris and waste materials may include:

• loose materials• empty containers• cardboard• paper

Plant and machines run by operators with appropriate credentials and in accordance with Worksafe AustraliaStandards for Users and Operators of Industrial Equipment.

Carry out general demolition (manual/mechanical) BCG3002A


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by working with a team and safely carrying out the demolition process toa nominated project.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable to demolitionoperations

• show compliance with organisational policies and procedures within the context of the demolition of abuilding

• select and use appropriate safe techniques in demolishing building• correctly identify hazardous materials and appropriate methods applied in handling• Demonstrate safe and effective handling of materials in the process of removal and separating for

recycling/reuse• demonstrate effective maintenance of noise and dust control• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with other to ensure safe and effective operations on site



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG1011A Handle construction materials and safe disposal of waste• BCG1017A Prepare for construction process (demolition)• BCG2003A Carry out general demolition



• workplace and equipment safety requirements including relevant statutory regulations, codes andstandards

• construction of buildings• plant and machinery operations• tools and equipment• scaffolding• materials• demolition• basic signalling


• work safely• use tools and equipment• operate basic plant and equipment• prepare for work application• solve problems• communicate effectively





• demolition location• tools, plant, and equipment appropriate to the processes• demolition plan


Competency shall be assessed while tasks are undertaken.


• observation of application process• questioning related to underpinning knowledge

Assessment may be intermittent checking at the various stages of each task application or at thecompletion of each task in accordance with the performance criteria.



Assessment should be while tasks are undertaken either individually or as part of a team.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 2 2 2 1



BCG3003A: Operate demolition plant and equipment


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 OH&S requirements for the worksite environment andthe operation of demolition plant and equipmentrecognised and adhered to.

1.2 Plant and equipment requirements for carrying out theprocesses determined consistent with the jobrequirements.


1.4 Plant and equipment selected consistent withdetermined requirements and checked forserviceability.

2 Carry out daily maintenance 2.1 Daily maintenance and periodic servicing carried out tomanufacturer's specification and operator's manual.

2.2 Faults identified and corrected or reported tosupervisor.

2.3 Record of servicing and maintenance maintained tocompany's requirements.

3 Locate plant and equipment 3.1 Plant and/or equipment located in position according tojob and safety plan requirements.

3.2 Attachments of fittings to plant or equipment carried outin accordance with planned operations andmanufacturer's recommendations and specifications.

3.3 Safe working area isolated, where applicable, inaccordance with OH&S requirements.

4 Operate plant and equipment 4.1 Plant and/or equipment operated correctly inaccordance with manufacturer's specifications oroperator's manual.

4.2 Plant used correctly to carry out demolition processesand relevant safety requirements.

4.3 Equipment used correctly to carry out demolitionprocess to relevant safety requirements.

4.4 Start up, shut down and communication procedurescarried out in accordance with manufacturer's and/orsite specific requirements.

Operate demolition plant and equipment BCG3003A


5 Maintain safe working area 5.1 Safe working area around plant and equipmentmaintained in accordance with job and OH&Srequirements.

6 Shut down plant and equipment 6.1 Plant shut down and positioned safely according to jobsafety requirements and operator's manual.

6.2 Attached equipment, where applicable, removed,cleaned and stored for re-use in accordance with jobprocedures.

6.3 Tools cleaned, maintained and stored.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Plant and equipment used in demolition work includes:

• crawler excavator• bobcat• skidsteer loader• compressor• jackhammer• concrete/rock breaker

Attached equipment may include:

• air hoses• hose fittings• brackets• buckets


• inspection of plant and equipment• pre-start up and post-start up checks• maintenance and servicing• manual handling techniques• operating procedures• safety of personnel, public and environment• safe working area• emergency equipment and procedures


• coveralls• boots• gloves• hard hat• ear plugs/muffs• jacket• dust masks/respirators• safety glasses/goggles

Plant and machinery run by operators with appropriate credentials and in accordance with Worksafe AustraliaStandards for Users and Operators of Industrial Equipment.




EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by safely working with mechanical plant and/or operators to demolish anominated project efficiently and safely, operating at least three of the items listed within the range ofvariables statement.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable to demolitionoperations and operating plant and equipment

• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context ofoperating plant and equipment

• select appropriate plant and equipment to carry out required tasks• demonstrate safe and effective use of plant and equipment in application of demolition tasks• apply correct procedures in start up and shut down of operating plant• adopt correct procedures for the maintenance and servicing of plant and equipment• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary actions taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective operations carried out



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use plant and equipment• BCG1017A Prepare for construction process (demolition)• BCG2003A Carry out general demolition

This unit may be concurrently assessed with

• BCG3002 Carrying out general demolition (manual/mechanical)




• construction of buildings• mechanical plant• plant and machine operations• tools and equipment• servicing equipment• demolition


• work safely• use tools and equipment• operate basic plant and equipment• prepare for work application

Operate demolition plant and equipment BCG3003A


• solve problems• communicate effectively



• demolition location• plant and equipment appropriate to demolition processes• demolition plan


Competency should be assessed while tasks are undertaken.


• observation of the application process• questioning related to underpinning knowledge

Assessment may be by intermittent checking at the various stages of each task application or at thecompletion of each task in accordance with the performance criteria.



KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 1 3 1 2 3



BCG3004A: Operate crushing plant


1 Plan and prepare crushingoperation

1.1 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andoperating crushing plant recognised and adhered to.

1.2 Quality Assurance requirements of company’scrushing plant operations recognised and adhered to.

1.3 Crushing plant daily schedule, size and type ofmaterials to be crushed are defined from company’ssupply schedule.

1.4 Communication methods determined and defined -signals, radio, fail-safe and emergency stops.

1.5 Crushing plant personnel directed in daily operationsin accordance with daily schedule.

1.6 Personal protective equipment selected, correctlyfitted and used in accordance with AS1270 andAS1336.

2 Inspect and maintaincrushing plant

2.1 Crushing plant visually inspected for correctoperational condition.

2.2 Daily/periodic maintenance carried out in accordancewith plant maintenance schedule and manufacturer'sinstructions.


3 Test crushing plant operation 3.1 Crushing plant and equipment operated and testedfor correct operation.

4 Operate crushing plant 4.1 Uncrushed materials directed into hopper.

4.2 Feed of uncrushed materials maintained according tocrushing plant operation manual.

4.3 Noise maintained below the maximum levels inaccordance with AS2436-Demolition of Building 1-Noise Control and OH&S regulations.

4.4 Dust and airborne debris maintained to safe levels inaccordance with AS2985, AS3640 and OH&Sregulations.

5 Maintain safety procedures 5.1 Crushing plant stopped, cleared of blocked materialsand restarted in accordance with plant safety planand manufacturer's instructions.

Operate crushing plant BCG3004A


5.2 Crushing plant settings maintained in accordancewith manufacturer’s instructions.

5.3 Safe operations maintained at all times in accordancewith crushing plant safety plan.

6 Control quality 6.1 Crushed material quality maintained using reversibleconveyor system to plant specifications.

7 Shut down plant 7.1 Crushing plant shut down safely in accordance withplant safety/operation plan.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to crushing plants set up on site to crush material.

Material crushed may be:

• concrete• stone• bricks


• Safe working operations• Maintenance of plant and equipment• Quality of material• Attention to specifications


• noise control• dust control• safety procedures for shut down• operating and emergency procedures• protective clothing• protective equipment• working platforms


• coveralls• jacket• boots• gloves• waterproof pants and jacket• safety glasses/goggles• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators• hard hat

Hearing and eye protection devices are to be in accordance with:

• AS1270-1988 Acoustics – Hearing Protectors



• AS1336-1997 Recommended Practices for Occupational Eye protection

Dust and airborne debris control must be in accordance with:

• AS2985-1987 Workplace Atmospheres – Method for sampling and gravimetric determination of respirable dust

• AS3640-1989 Workplace Atmospheres – Method for sampling and gravimetric determination of inspirable dust

Work is to be undertaken to legislative and regulatory requirements in accordance with Worksafe AustraliaStandard for Users and Operators of Industrial Equipment.


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by carrying out all requirements in the operating of a crushing plant.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable toworkplace and crushing plant operations

• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context ofoperating a crushing plant

• identify and correctly apply requirements to daily crushing schedule• appropriately check all settings, switches and operating factors of crushing plant• safely and effectively set up for crushing plant operation• safely and effectively operate crushing plant operations including feed control• safe and appropriate procedures applied in start up and shut down of operating plant• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective operations of crushing plant



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use plant and equipment• BCG2003A Carry out general demolition




• crushing schedules• plant operation• materials• tools and equipment• Quality Assurance• maintenance and servicing

Operate crushing plant BCG3004A



• work safely• identify instructions• use tools and equipment• prepare for work application• solve problems• communicate effectively


The following resources should be made available

• crushing plant• support plant for supply• material supply



Assessment in accordance with the performance criteria may involve:

• observation of the application process• questioning related to underpinning knowledge• inspection related to the product



Assessment should be while tasks are undertaken under direct supervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 3 1 3 2

BCG3005A Remove contaminants - belt picker


BCG3005A: Remove contaminants - belt picker


1 Prepare for crushing plantoperation

1.1 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andcrushing plant operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 Quality Assurance requirements for company’scrushing plant operations recognised and adhered to.


1.4 Crushing plant operations, size and type of materialsto be crushed are defined from daily schedule.

2 Inspect and maintain conveyor 2.1 Conveyor belts and rollers inspected for correctoperation to manufacturer’s specifications.

2.2 Belt picker platform maintained according to plantmaintenance schedule, manufacturer's instructionsand OH&S regulations.

3 Remove foreign materials 3.1 Foreign materials removed from crushed materialsduring crushing plant operation according to materialquality specifications.

3.2 Belt picker platform and/or working area safelymaintained to crushing plant safety plan and OH&Sregulations.

4 Shut down conveyor/beltpicking area

4.1 Belt picking area/conveyor system shut down inaccordance with crushing plant maintenance manual.

5 Clean up 5.1 Belt picking area and conveyors cleared of wastematerial.

5.2 Waste materials placed in plant waste bins in a safemanner.

5.3 Personal protective equipment removed, maintainedand stored.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to crushing plant operations in the removal of unwanted material.


• protective clothing

Remove contaminants - belt picker BCG3005A


• handling techniques• protective equipment• operating and emergency procedures• safety procedures for shut down• dust control• working platforms• noise control


• uniformity of crushings• material• foreign material• disposal of waste


• gloves• coveralls• jacket• boots• waterproof pants and jacket• safety glasses/goggles• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators• hard hat


• AS1270-1988 Acoustics – Hearing Protectors• AS1336-1997 Recommended Practices for Occupational Eye Protection

Work is to be undertaken to OH&S regulatory requirements.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by carrying out the duties required of a belt picker working with crushingplant operations.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable toworkplace and crushing plant operations

• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context ofoperating a crushing plant

• identify and correctly apply requirements to daily crushing schedule• appropriately inspect and maintain of conveyor belt and rollers• appropriately inspect and maintain belt pickers platform• demonstrate safe and effective procedures to remove foreign materials from conveyor line• demonstrate safe and appropriate procedures in the start up and shut down of conveyor system• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with operator to ensure safe and effective operation of crushing plant

BCG3005A Remove contaminants - belt picker




• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1011A Handle construction materials and safe disposal of non-toxic waste• BCG2003A Carry out general demolition




• plant operation• materials• tools and equipment• Quality Assurance• maintenance and servicing


• work safely• identify instructions• use tools and equipment• prepare for work application• solve problems• communicate effectively



• crushing plant• conveyor system



Assessment in accordance with the performance criteria and may involve:• observation of application process• questioning related to underpinning knowledge




Remove contaminants - belt picker BCG3005A


KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 1 2 1



BCG3006A: Operate loader



1.1 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andcrushing plant operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 Daily crushing plant operations, size and type ofmaterials to be crushed are defined from crushingschedule.


2 Inspect and maintain loader 2.1 Front end loader checked for correct operation priorto start up in accordance with manufacturer'sspecification.

2.2 Routine maintenance of front end loader carried outto manufacturer's specifications.


3 Load uncrushed material 3.1 Uncrushed material removed from stockpiles andloaded into crushing plant hopper in accordance withsafety plan.

3.2 Correct uncrushed material feed maintained tocrushing plant operator's requirements.

4 Maintain quality control andsafe working area

4.1 Appropriate quality standard of selection ofuncrushed materials to be loaded, maintained asrequired by engineer's specification.

4.2 Loading/hopper area maintained safely in accordancewith crushing plant safety plan and OH&S regulations.

5 Shut down loader 5.1 Front end loader safely turned off and parked inaccordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to front end loaders, articulated or otherwise, working as a loader for on site crushing plants.


• safety check of front end loader• pre start up and post start up checks• maintenance and servicing

Operate loader BCG3006A


• operating procedures• safety of personnel, public and environment• safe working area• protective equipment


• coveralls• jacket• boots• gloves• waterproof pants and jacket• safety glasses/goggles• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators• hard hat


• AS1270-1988 Acoustics – Hearing Protection• AS1336-1997 Recommended Practices for Occupational Eye Protection

Loaders to be operated by operators with appropriate credentials and in accordance with Worksafe AustraliaStandard for Users and Operators of Industrial Equipment.


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by operating a loader for crushing plant operations.



• Demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable toworkplace and crushing plant operations

• Show compliance with organisational policies and procedures within the context of supportingoperations of a crushing plant

• Identify and correctly apply requirements to daily crushing schedule• Appropriately inspect and carry out routine maintenance and start up procedures to front end

loader• Correctly select material in accordance with crushing schedule• Safely and effectively operate front end loader in moving material from stock pile to hopper• Safely and effectively maintain safe working area around loading and hopper area• Safely and effectively shut down and park loader at completion of work• Identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• Interactively communicate to ensure safe and effective operations with crushing plant operation



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG2003A Carry out general demolition






• crushing schedules/instructions• plant operation• tools and equipment• maintenance and servicing


• work safely• identify instructions• use tools and equipment• operate basic plant and equipment• prepare for work application• communicate effectively



• crushing plant• front end loader• material supply



Assessment may be intermittent checking at various stages of each task application or at thecompletion of each task in accordance with the performance criteria.

Assessment may involve:• observation of application process• questioning related to underpinning knowledge




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 1 3 1 3



BCG3007A: Dispatch crushings


1 Plan daily operation 1.1 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andcrushing plant operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 Quality Assurance requirements company’s crushingplant operations recognised and adhered to.

1.3 Telephone/written orders for crushed material receivedand confirmed.

1.4 Daily crushing plant operations co-ordinated to alignwith crushed material order requirements.

2 Dispatch material 2.1 Crushed materials dispatched to order requirements.

3 Control truck movements 3.1 Trucks controlled around crushing plant in a safemanner according to plant safety plan.

4 Direct loader operations 4.1 Loading of correct crushed materials into trucksdirected according to material orders received.

5 Inspect material 5.1 Dispatched material inspected for quality in accordancewith plant quality requirements and compliance withrespective order.

6 Write dispatch documentation 6.1 Crushing plant dispatch forms filled in correctly andprocessed according to organisations standardprocedures.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to dispatcher operating with a crushing plant on a demolition site.


• protective clothing• safe working environment• control of traffic• protective equipment• emergency procedures


• compliance with order• quality and quantity of material• efficient loading techniques• control of documentation

Dispatch crushings BCG3007A


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by dispatching crushings associated with crushing plant operations.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable to worksiteand crushing plant operations

• show compliance with organisational quality policies and procedures within the context ofoperating a crushing plant

• identify daily crushing plant operations and material order requirements• accurately and efficiently record and confirm received orders• accurately record and efficiently control movement of trucks and dispatching of crushed material• inspect and confirm dispatched material to ensure quality and compliance to respective order• accurately record and process dispatch forms to organisation's requirements.• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective operations in dispatching

crushings



• BCG1002A Plan and organise work• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG2003A Carry out general demolition



• worksite safety requirements• control of traffic• materials• crushing plant operation• documentation• recording information


• work safely• interpret documentation• control traffic• identify material• record dispatch operations• organise documentation• communicate effectively



• crushing plant operation





Assessment may involve:• observation of the dispatching process• questioning related underpinning knowledge




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 3 2 2 1

BCC3008A Conduct Skid Steer Loader operations


BCC3008A: Conduct skid steer loader operations


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 Operator evaluates work activity and associated risksin accordance with OH&S and site requirements.

1.2 Operator develops plan to eliminate, avoid/neutraliseall identified risks in accordance with safetyregulations, legislation and site specific instructions.

1.3 Operator identifies, evaluates and complies with allQuality Assurance requirements associated withactivity.

1.4 Operator evaluates work activity and determinesmost productive operating techniques.

1.5 Hazards recognised on worksite and, if applicable,public roads.

1.6 High risk situations for operators identified withouterror and ways of reducing risks described correctly.

1.7 Machine driven in accordance with traffic regulations,OH&S and site plans and procedures, with risks andhazards evaluated.

1.8 Operations conducted in all weather conditions, byday and night if appropriate within safetyrequirements.

1.9 Permits obtained where required.

1.10 Work with other equipment and personnel carried outin accordance with authorised safety procedures andworksite practices.

2 Conduct pre operational checks 2.1 Tracks/tyres adjusted/changed/inflated using safehandling procedures and in accordance withoperator's manual and site conditions.

2.2 Main causes of fire described and explained withouterror.

2.3 Uses of fire extinguishers identified and describedwithout error.

2.4 Start-up park, shut-down and communicationsprocedures carried out in accordance withmanufacturer's and/or site specific requirements.

2.5 Skid steer loader controls and functions, includingbucket, brakes and manoeuvreability, checked forserviceability and any faults reported.

Conduct Skid Steer Loader operations BCC3008A


3 Read and interpret plans 3.1 Work schedules/methods devised consistent with jobrequirements.

3.2 Information written on survey pegs is correctlydescribed and machine operations requirementsexplained.

3.3 Procedure to establish depth and grade to site plansdescribed correctly.

3.4 Locations of services are identified, verified andmarked from plans and drawings.

3.5 Features (such as structures, designated parkingareas, haul roads or unstable ground) identified fromsite drawings/plans.

3.6 Levels on survey pegs identified and clarified tosupervisor's satisfaction.

4 Operate skid steer loader 4.1 Planning processes to help production described andexplained correctly.

4.2 Safe grip and productivity maintained in variedconditions.

4.3 Topsoil stripped to job specifications. Excavation andboxing carried out using job specifications.

4.4 Material mixed to job specifications.

4.5 Landfilling/spreading and landscaping carried out tojob specifications.

4.6 Benched cut and levelled to specified tolerances. Cutand fill carried out to job specifications.

4.7 Excavations around existing underground servicesconducted to job specifications without damage topipes/cables.

4.8 Trenches/drains excavated to width and depth as perplans and/or job specifications and State/Territorylegislation.

4.9 Back filling of trenches conducted to jobspecifications.

5 Apply concepts of road anatomy 5.1 Road construction stages identified without error.

5.2 Correct descriptions and explanations given forvarious parts of a road.

5.3 Correct description and explanation given or drainageprovisions.

5.4 Types of drains correctly identified without error.



6 Apply knowledge of soil and rocktypes and their characteristics

6.1 Main soil types identified without error.

6.2 Work methods required to undertake tasks in varioussoil conditions demonstrated correctly.

6.3 Effects of compaction on different soils explainedwithout error.

6.4 Reaction of different soils to increasing moisturecontent correctly described.

6.5 Effects of stabilising additives correctly described.

6.6 Rock types correctly identified without error.

6.7 Work methods and techniques required to undertaketasks in various rock types demonstrated correctly.

6.8 Appropriate machines and attachments correctlyselected.

7 Lift, carry and place materials 7.1 Loads handled to industry safety standards, sitehazards recognised and avoided.

7.2 Rough terrain negotiated safely.

7.3 Material lifted and transported without damage,according to specified safety requirements.

7.4 Material moved ensuring the safety of operators andpersonnel.

7.5 Load moved in accordance with hand and audiblesignals (if applicable).

7.6 Machine positioned correctly relative to type of haulvehicle and job specification/requirements.

7.7 Trucks and wagons loaded according toindustry/regulatory standards of safety and efficiency.

7.8 Loads positioned to ensure stability of material andavoidance of hazards on site.

8 Carry out operator maintenance 8.1 Inspection and fault finding conducted in accordancewith manufacturer's specifications and/or siterequirements.

8.2 Appropriate replacement parts and materials selectedaccording to job requirements and manufacturer'smanual.

8.3 Worn/defective parts removed safely according tomanufacturer's manual and appropriate OH&Sregulations.



8.4 Routine operational servicing, lubrication andhousekeeping tasks carried out to manufacturer'sand/or site requirements.

8.5 Minor maintenance carried out to manufacturer'sand/or site requirements. Tools and equipmentselected according to requirements of job andmanufacturer’s manual.

8.6 Operator provides support if required duringpreparation for and conduct of major maintenancetasks in accordance with site requirements, ifrequired.

8.7 Operator maintenance work accurately recorded inline with company policy and industry guidelines.

8.8 Items which may affect future safety of the machineare reported in accordance with company policy andprocedures.

8.9 Performance of machine constantly monitored toenable timely repair of equipment.

8.10 Appropriate requirements applied for specialservicing during adverse conditions.

8.11 Equipment safely parked and shut down as permanufacturer's manual and/or site requirements, priorto service/maintenance activities.

9 Select, remove and fitattachments

9.1 Existing attachment removed according tomanufacturer's manual/regulatory authority'sinstructions.

9.2 Required attachment fitted according tomanufacturer's manual/regulatory authority'sinstructions.

9.3 Attachment tested to ensure correct fitting andoperation as specified in manufacturer's manual.

9.4 Attachment used in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations.

9.5 Removed attachments cleaned and stored indesignated location.


10 Clean up 10.1 Waste material handled/disposed of safely inaccordance with requirements of site regulatorybodies, OH&S, MSDS and EPA.



RANGE OF VARIABLES

Daily task details may include:

• worksite inspection• defects on machine attended to/reported• nature and scope of task determined• potential hazards identified• routine maintenance attended to• attachments/replaceable parts checked for wear/security

Legislative/regulative adherence shall include:

• Occupational Health and Safety requirements as determined by State/Territory legislation• duty of care recognised• environmental appraisal conducted• EPA requirements adhered to

Safe operating procedures should include:

• recognising, identifying and preventing hazards associated with:� uneven/unstable terrain� trees� overhead service lines� bridges� surrounding buildings� obstructions� structures� facilities� dangerous materials� recently filled trenches

• observing safe parking practices including:� access ways are clear� equipment/machinery is away from overhangs/refuelling sites� safe distance from excavations� securing against unauthorised movement

• observing site speed limits• working safely around overhead/underground services• working safely around other machines and personnel

Skid steer loader tasks may include:

• loading dump trucks, wagons, hippers, grizzlys and chutes• stockpiling• mixing materials• stripping/spreading topsoil• laser levelling• backfilling• trench excavation• lifting materials• laying pipes• cutting batters and drains

Surfaces may include but are not limited to:

• haul roads• formed/prepared roads



• access roads• pads• stockpiles• prepare for rehabilitation• dumps• dam walls• drainage• bundwall• benches• batters

Materials may include but are not limited to:

• clays• silts• stone• gravel• mud• sand• topsoil• bituminous mixes• pipes (steel, plastic, concrete)

Implements may include but not limited to:

• bucket• backhoe• trencher• auger• sweeper



On-site meeting process may include:

• notification (time, place, purpose)• task discussion• procedural activities negotiated

Specific work organisation activities include:

• understanding soil and rock types and operational requirements for the varying moisture reactions• undertaking civil works• undertaking operator maintenance• using laser control equipment• appropriate reporting procedures• understanding emergency procedures and appropriate responses• preparation of work area• selection of tools and equipment• handling of materials, tools and equipment



• housekeeping requirements• work schedule in singular application or in team situation to given instructions• work schedule and performance may have to adhering to Quality Assurance policy and procedures• manual handling techniques used in accordance with current Worksafe Standards

Emergency equipment and procedures can include:




Drawings to include:

• site plans• cross sectional plans• structural detail and specification providing illustrations and dimensions• civil construction• tunnels, bridges, culverts, earthworks and other types of construction

Civil works may include:

• road works• sub division• earthworks• contours• batters• dams• rehabilitating final landform and interpreting associated survey pegs• drainage

Weather conditions includes:

• visibility day and night• prevailing winds• dust

Communications includes:

• two-way radios• reporting defects either verbally or in writing• hand signals• site specific instructions

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the safe and efficient operation of a skid steer loader to workplacespecifications and industry productivity levels on a range of tasks as identified in the range of variablesstatement.




It is essential that competence is fully observed in the critical aspects of:

• operational safety, including compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations as perState/Territory legislation

• interpreting and communicating operational information• interactive communication to perform safely in a range of environments• start-up, park, shut-down procedures and walk around inspections• smooth and efficient operating procedures to enable proficiency in performing tasks to job

specifications• implements to ground at shutdown and park• understanding emergency procedures and appropriate responses• undertaking operator maintenance• appropriate reporting procedures• ability to transfer skills to changing circumstances/environmental conditions


This unit of competency is dependent upon acquiring the relevant pre-requisite competencies inbasic industry and basic stream skills.



• site and equipment safety requirements including appropriate State/Territory legislation,regulations and codes

• equipment characteristics, technical capabilities and limitations• operational and maintenance procedures• problem solving techniques• basic diagnostic techniques


• apply eye-hand co-ordination• access, interpret and apply technical information• maintain equipment records• use relevant hand tools• apply problem solving techniques• apply basic diagnostic techniques• work in restricted spaces• work wearing personal protective equipment• operate skid steer loader in accordance with site/manufacturer's specifications• communicate effectively



• general construction materials relevant to the appropriate construction activity• plant and equipment appropriate to the civil construction activity• suitable work area appropriate to the civil construction activity• suitable plans/drawings and specifications as appropriate




Competency should be assessed through direct observation and questions related to underpinningknowledge.

Competency in this unit may be determined concurrently, based upon project work.

Competency shall be assessed while work is undertaken under general guidance, checking atvarious stages of the process and at the completion of the activity against the performance criteriaand specifications.


Competency shall be assessed in the normal or simulated workplace environment and in accordancewith safe work procedures.

Assessment shall include those aspects that are consistent with the work environment of this unit.

Competency shall be assessed while work is undertaken autonomously, within a team environment.

Assessment may be intermittent checking at various stages of the job application with theperformance criteria, or may be at the completion of the process.

Guidelines will be in line with statutory requirements, enterprise specific policies and procedures andcodes of practice.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

BCG3009A Construct and install non-load bearing internal partition wall


BCG3009A: Construct and install non-load bearinginternal partition wall



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andconstruction and installation of internal partition wallsrecognised and adhered to.

1.3 Materials and quantities identified from drawings andspecifications.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected to carry out processesconsistent with requirements of job checked forserviceability and any faults reported to supervisor.

2 Construct non-load bearingpartition timber wall frames

2.1 Location of partition walls set out on floor todimensions from drawings.

2.2 Wall plates set out and cut to length within –2mm andpositioned to set-out from drawings.

2.3 Wall plates fixed into place and alignment tospecification.

2.4 Studs cut to length, positioned to spacings and fixed asspecified.

2.5 Noggings marked, cut to length, positioned and fixedas specified.

2.6 Wall frame squared to + or – 3mm over diagonalmeasurement, and braces fixed flush with studs, whereapplicable.

2.7 External edges of top plates to be joined fixed flushand external corners straight and plumb to within + or –2mm over 2.4 metres.

2.8 Walls straightened to line within + or – 2mm.

3 Erect and mantle a full heightdemountable partition

3.1 Location set out for position of partition according todetails from drawings and specifications.

3.2 Erection sequence followed as specified bymanufacturer in accordance with demountable design.

Construct and install non-load bearing internal partition walls BCG3009A


4 Erect a half-panel glass partition 4.1 Base channel positioned to location before fixing to jobspecification.

4.2 Alignment of panels carried out to maintain line + or –1mm.

4.3 Erection carried out and completed to manufacturer’sand job specifications.

5 Clean up 5.1 Area cleaned to job specification.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the construction and installation of both fixed framed and demountable partitions.

Non-load bearing partitions include:

• full height single panel• full height demountable panel• half panel and half glass

Materials for framed structure include:

• timber• light steel• aluminium


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of material• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to specifications

OH&S requirements to be in accordance with State/Territory legislation and regulations may include:

• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• workplace environment and safety• handling of materials• hazard control


• boots• gloves• safety glasses/goggles• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators




• measuring tape/rule• hammers• docking saw/drop saw• jigs/stop• power drills/screwdrivers• saw stools• clamps• squares• pop riveter• nail guns• spanners• power saws• masonry drills• Air compressor and hoses• power leads

Fasteners for assembling partition frames include:

• nails• screws• self tapping screws• pop rivet’s

Fasteners used to fix partitions to structure may include but are not limited to:

• nails• screws• self tapping screws• wall plugs• masonry anchors• coach screws

Bracing of framed partitions only applies to partitions not of full height and not connected to any structuralwall.

Demountable partition systems assembled and connected in accordance with manufacturer’s specific design.


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated setting out, constructing and installing a partition wall to a design of oneof the types listed within the range statement.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable toworkplace operations

• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context ofinstalling partition walls

• identify location, design and details of proposed partition• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment.

Construct and install non-load bearing internal partition walls BCG3009A


• adopt safe and effective procedures to construct/assemble and install partition wall• demonstrate attention given to assembling of partitions to ensure all junction of members flush to

face of partition• demonstrate attention given to fixing securely to specifications• apply processes effectively to complete partition to designed alignment, plumb and finish• identification of typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work procedures



• BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry)• BCG2000A Assemble simple partition frames



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• partition and wall construction• working drawing and specifications• setting out procedures• materials• tools and equipment• fixing and fasteners• calculation of material requirements


• work safely• read and interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• set out work• use tools and equipment• fix materials• communicate effectively• calculate material quantities



• level work area appropriate to construction and installation processes• tools and equipment appropriate to construction process• material appropriate to the partition installation• drawings and specifications appropriate to activity



Assessment may involve:• Observation of the application process• Questioning related to underpinning knowledge



Assessment may be by intermittent checking at various stages of each task application or at thecompletion of each task in accordance with the performance criteria.



Assessment should be while tasks are undertaken either individually or as part of a team operation.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 1 2 1 2



BCG3010A: Install windows to wall framing



1.2 OH&S requirements for installing of timber andaluminium window frames to framed walls recognisedand adhered to.

1.3 Windows for installation checked for conformity againstdrawings and specifications.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected to carry out processesconsistent with requirements of job and checked forserviceability.

1.6 Materials for packing selected and cut to practical sizesless than width of wall studs.

2 Install timber or aluminiumwindow frame

2.1 Window opening size checked to be greater thanoverall window frame, to clearance on width for plumbfitting of window frame and on height for fitting of silland head to level.

2.2 Reveals butt joined at corners and fixed securely toaluminium frames to specification.

2.3 Sill trimmer of opening, checked for level and packersplaced at ends to level, where required.

2.4 Window frame positioned and fixed into place so thathead/sill are level and stiles plumb and out of windingto specification.

2.5 Window head and sill fixed level to + or – 1mm andfaces and edges of stiles plumb to + or – 1mm.

2.6 Fixing of window frame to wall frame to be through/tostuds in accordance with specified fixing.

2.7 Reveals or frame finished flush with face of inside walllining.

2.8 Window frame located to suit perpends and storey rodfor brick veneer construction, where applicable, to + or– 2mm.

3 Clean up 3.1 Waste and unwanted material disposed of safely.


Install windows to wall framing BCG3010A


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to timber and aluminium window frames installed to timber or metal wall framing.

Wall framing includes:

• single wall, load bearing• inner wall, brick veneer construction• partition, non load bearing


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to specifications of work


• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• working platforms


• boots• safety glasses/goggles• ear plugs/muffs• gloves


• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level• squares• nail bag• chisels• hand saws• saw stools• power saws• power drills• nail gun• air compressor and hoses• power leads

Materials for packing may include:

• plywood• hardboard• particle board

Fixing methods to wall framing may include:

• nails



• screws• self tapping screws

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by installing both a timber window frame and an aluminium window frameto a framed wall. In one situation the wall frame is to be of timber construction and the other of metal.




• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context ofinstalling windows into wall frames

• identify location and details of window frames to be installed• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• give particular attention to window frame being plumb and level to specifications• carry out fixing of window frame through packing material between stiles and studs• demonstrate safe and effective procedures to prepare and install each window• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• Interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective installation processes



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices• BCG2004A Carry out levelling



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawing and specifications• wall frame construction• window construction• materials• installation procedures• tools and equipment• fixing and fasteners


• work safely• read and interpret drawings• organise work• use tools and equipment• fix materials• communicate effectively

Install windows to wall framing BCG3010A



The following resources should be provided:

• workplace location with wall framing and openings• windows units appropriate to installation process• tools and equipment appropriate for installation processes• drawings and specifications



Assessment may involve:• observation of application process• inspection of installed unit• questioning related to underpinning knowledge




Assessment should be while tasks are undertaken individually or while working with a partner underminimal supervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 1 1 1



BCG3011A: Carry out basic setting out



1.2 OH&S requirements for setting out processes ondeveloped/undeveloped sites recognised andadhered to.

1.3 Building/structure to be set out identified in detailsfrom site drawings.



1.6 Materials for pegs and hurdles selected and cut todetermined lengths.

2 Identify and indicate siteboundaries

2.1 Survey pegs at corners of site located and identified.

2.2 String lines set accurately into position to identifyboundaries of site in accordance with site plan andsurvey pegs.

3 Set out first line for building 3.1 Measurements of building line from boundary orexisting building determined from site drawings.

3.2 Approximate position and length of line plus 1.5mclearance at each end determined for hurdle location.

3.3 Pegs and hurdles installed so that hurdlesapproximately level across and between one anotherwith adequate provision to mark footing width onhurdle.

3.4 Location for line accurately marked with nails onhurdles and line set taut into position to truealignment with boundary.

4 Set out right angled corner 4.1 Corner of building determined on set building line totrue measurement from adjacent boundary andmarked with peg.

4.2 Right angle set up to line from corner peg using the 3,4, 5, principle.

Carry out basic setting out BCG3011A


4.3 Hurdles installed to approximate level of other hurdlesand line set taut to right angled alignment.

5 Install other building lines 5.1 Hurdles for remaining building lines installed toappropriate locations approximately level withestablished hurdles.

5.2 Measurement for remaining building lines accuratelymarked and nailed on hurdles to dimensions from sitedrawings.

5.3 String lines set taut into position to nailed locations onhurdles.

6 Check for square 6.1 Diagonals of main rectangle checked to ensuresquare and where discrepancy more than 5mm overminimum diagonal length of 5m, lines adjusted toprovide square relationship within 5mm.

7 Clean up 7.1 Unused materials stored/stacked.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the setting out of buildings or structures with straight lines and square corners.

It applies to the set out of regular plan shaped buildings which may be of the following construction:

• timber framed• brick veneer• block veneer• steel framed• solid brick• solid stone


• workplace operations and procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to specifications and measurements


• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment


• boots



• hard hat• safety glasses• ear plugs/muffs• dust mask/respirator• jacket


• measuring tape/rule• sledge hammer• hammers• power saw• hand saw• nail bag• string lines

Site boundaries may be marked by:

• survey pegs• fence built on line• building built on line

Fence built on boundary may need to be checked for:

• true line of boundary• centre of fence line• face of fence

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the performance of setting out, and establishing hurdles/profiles andbuilding lines for a nominated 'L' shaped building on a building block.




• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context ofsetting out the location of a building

• identify location and details of building and site for set out• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• use accurate and effective procedures to establish initial building line• give attention to accuracy in setting line up square to initial line• apply accurate and appropriate procedures to establish hurdles/profiles for all building lines• give attention to ensure hurdles/profiles approximately level• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• set-out completed to all requirements and accurate measurements• interactively communicate with working partner to ensure safe and effective work procedures



• BCG1003A Read and interpret plans• BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/blocklaying)• BCG2004A Carry out levelling

Carry out basic setting out BCG3011A




• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawing and specifications• tools and equipment• measuring• levelling• setting out procedures• construction of hurdles/profiles


• work safely• organise work• read and interpret drawings• use tools and equipment• measure accurately• communicate effectively



• building site and appropriate drawings for activity• tools and equipment appropriate for setting out process• materials appropriate for setting out processes




• observation of the application process• inspection of completed set out• questioning related to underpinning knowledge




Assessment should be while tasks are undertaken either individually or while working with a partner.

KEY COMPETENCIES



Planning andorganising


Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

Usingtechnology




information activities teams ideas andtechniques

3 2 3 1 1 3 1

BCG3012A Construct and erect timber wall framing


BCG3012A: Construct and erect timber wall framing



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andconstruction and erection of timber wall framingrecognised and adhered to.

1.3 Materials and quantity requirements determined fromjob drawings and specifications in accordance withAS1684-1992.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected to carry out processesconsistent with the requirements of job, checked forserviceability and any faults reported to supervisor.

2 Set out wall plates 2.1 Location of walls set out to dimensions from jobdrawings and marked on floor joists, flooring or slab.

2.2 Material selected for straightness of wall plates toensure as straight as practical.

2.3 Wall plates marked and cut to length as pairs allowingfor wall junction and joints to job assemblyrequirements and specifications.

2.4 Top and bottom plates temporarily nailed together andplaced in location position ready for setting out.

2.5 Position of studs and openings set out on wall plates todimensions from job drawings, specifications forspacing and to suit brickwork if required.

26 Door and window openings set out to schedule of doorand window widths with allowance for clearance of +10mm each side.

3 Set out and prepare studs andtrimmers

3.1 Walls constructed and erected in accordance withrequirements of Section 4 AS1684.

3.2 Trenching/housing in wall plates for studs carried outwhere required to allow for irregular plate thickness.

3.3 Stud length determined in accordance with specifiedceiling height.

3.4 Opening and intermediate studs selected forstraightness and cut to length to specification.

Construct and erect timber wall framing BCG3012A


3.5 Studs for door and window openings set out to heightsfor door and window sizes with clearance allowance athead of +10mm.

3.6 Studs for wall frames checked for straightness andbows/springs to one face of wall.

3.7 Housing, notching, drilling of studs to accommodatetrimmers, lintels and services carried out torequirements of AS1684.

3.8 Trimmers and short studs marked and cut to lengths tospecifications.

3.9 Standard spacing size noggings cut to length.

4 Construct walls 4.1 Wall plates, studs, trimmers and short studsassembled and fixed in accordance with Section 6 -AS1684.

4.2 Lintels, headers and ledgers above opening in wallsinstalled in accordance with Section 4 - AS1684.

4.3 Noggings installed on flat in rows at 1.350m maximumcentres or closer if cladding required and staggered notmore than their own width.

4.4 Walls squared and braced with braces fixed to walls inaccordance with AS1684 and manufacturer'sspecifications.

4.5 Wall framing around chimneys constructed to clearbrickwork/blockwork by minimum 25mm.

5 Erect walls 5.1 Walls erected into location and temporarily braced intovertical position.

5.2 Top wall plate junctions joined in accordance withspecifications.

5.3 Bottom wall plate fixed to location and line tospecifications.

5.4 Walls plumbed to + or – 2mm over 2.4 metres with wallbracing permanently fixed to specification.

5.5 Corners blocked, where required, to tie junction studstogether to specifications.

6 Clean up 6.1 Area cleared free of debris.

6.2 Waste and unwanted materials disposed of safely.





RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to walls constructed of stress graded, seasoned or unseasoned timber which may beprefabricated or built on site.

All work to be carried out in accordance with AS1684-1992 National Timber Framing Code.






• boots• safety glasses/goggles• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators


• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level• squares• nail bag• chisels• hand saws• saw stools• power saws• nail gun• air compressor and hoses• power leads

Top wall plates may be joined by:

• halving• lapping• metal connections

Floor bases for wall installation include:

• timber joists of sub floor framing• steel joists of sub floor framing• sheeting on sub floor framing• concrete slab



Wall bracing materials include:

• timber• metal tension straps• metal angle sections• plywood• fibre cement sheet• hardboard

Waste and debris may include:

• off cut materials• nails• empty containers• timber packing and strapping• cardboard paper

Work to be undertaken in a team situation.


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by setting out, constructing and erecting walls for a nominated buildinginvolving door and window openings and at least one internal wall.




• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context ofconstructing and erecting timber walls

• identify location and details of wall construction for proposed building• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• accurately set out and mark wall plates in compliance to AS1684• give particular attention to setting out for door and window frames and clearance allowance• use safe and effective procedures to set out, prepare material, assemble and fix components for

each wall• adopt safe and effective procedures to erect walls and brace assembled structure• give particular care and attention given to plumbing walls and fixing bracing• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective operations with wall erection• complete wall framing construction and erection processes to specifications



• BCG1002A Plan and organise work• BCG1003A Read and interpret drawings• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices• BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry)• BCG2000A Assemble simple partition frames






• working drawing and specifications• AS1684 - National Timber Framing Code• materials• wall construction and bracing methods• tools and equipment• plant and equipment• fixing and fasteners• calculation of material requirements


• work safely• read and interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• interpret documentation from a wide range of sources• set out material• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively• calculate material quantities


• prepared floor structure or slab for proposed activity• tools and equipment appropriate for construction processes• suitable materials appropriate for construction activity• drawings and specifications of proposed activity











KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 2 2 1 2 2

BCC3013A Conduct forklift operations


BCC3013A: Conduct forklift operations


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 Operator evaluates work activity and associated risksin accordance with OH&S requirements.

1.2 Operator develops plan to eliminate, avoid/neutraliseall identified risks in accordance with safety regulations,legislation site specific instruction.

1.3 Operator identifies, evaluates and complies with allQuality Assurance requirements associated withactivity.

1.4 Operator evaluates activity and determines mostproductive operating techniques.

1.5 Hazards recognised on worksite and, if applicable,public roads.

1.6 High risk situations for operators identified without errorand ways of reducing risks described correctly.

1.7 Machine driven in accordance with traffic regulations,OH&S and site plans and procedures with risks andhazards evaluated.

1.8 Operations conducted in all weather conditions by dayand night if appropriate, within safety requirements.

1.9 Permits obtained where required.

1.10 Work with other equipment and personnel carried outin accordance with authorised safety procedures andworksite practices.

2 Conduct pre-operationalchecks

2.1 Tracks/tyres adjusted/changed/inflated using safehandling procedures and in accordance with operator'smanual and site conditions.

2.2 Main causes of fire described and explained withouterror.

2.3 Uses of fire extinguishers identified and describedwithout error.

2.4 Start-up park, shut-down and communicationsprocedures carried out in accordance withmanufacturer's and/or site specific requirements.

2.5 Forklift controls and functions, including forks and otherattachments, brakes and manoeuvreability, checkedfor serviceability and any faults reported.

Conduct forklift operations BCC3013A


3 Operate forklift 3.1 Planning processes to help production described andexplained correctly.

3.2 Safe grip and productivity maintained in variedconditions.

3.3 Load lifted according to site operating procedures.Load weight and dimension is within limits as specifiedon manufacturer’s data plate.

3.4 Characteristic of load taken into account to ensureappropriate loading and unloading procedures arefollowed.

3.5 Hazardous cargo identified and standard procedurestaken into account when operating with hazardousloads.

3.6 Contact with obstacles or vehicle avoided. Path ofmovement clear whilst moving.

3.7 Speeds maintained to limits designated in zones andadjusted to account for obstacles and hazards.

3.8 All parts of the body remain inside driver'scompartment whilst moving.

4 Attach, secure, lift, carry andplace materials

4.1 Approach to load is smooth, square and central withoutretracking.

4.2 Forks placed so load is as close to the heel as possiblewithout jolting or damaging load. Load sits evenly onforks prior to lifting. Load lifted with forks parallel to theload.

4.3 Forks bear weight of load evenly before removal fromstack or vehicle.

4.4 Obstacles in path of movement negotiated withoutdamage or spilling of load.

4.5 Bottom of pallet or load is as low as possible accordingto site conditions. Mast has backward tilt whilst carryingload.

4.6 Approach to set down point is smooth, square andcentral without retracking.

4.7 Load lowered and stacked avoiding contact withvertical face of stack or vehicle. Loads loweredsmoothly without jolting or damaging loads.

4.8 Load stacked no more that 50mm from the wall orexisting stack and the wall or existing stack does notbear the load.

4.9 Weight of stack load is settled evenly on existing stackprior to forks being withdrawn.



4.10 Stack is square and stable before reversing away.Forks clear of underside of load before beingwithdrawn.

4.11 Path of movement checked by operator for obstaclesand hazards prior to reversing. Forklift reversed outsquarely until forks clear load before driving off.

5 Carry out operatormaintenance

5.1 Inspection and fault finding conducted in accordancewith manufacturer's specifications and/or siterequirements.

5.2 Appropriate replacement parts and materials selectedaccording to job requirements and manufacturer'smanual.

5.3 Worn/defective parts removed safely according tomanufacturer's manual and appropriate OH&Sregulations.

5.4 Routine operational servicing, lubrication andhousekeeping tasks carried out to manufacturer'sand/or site requirements.

5.5 Minor maintenance carried out to manufacturer’sand/or site requirements. Tools and equipmentselected according to requirements of job andmanufacturer’s manual.

5.6 Operator provides support if required duringpreparation for and conduct of major maintenancetasks in accordance with site requirements.

5.7 Operator maintenance work accurately recorded in linewith company policy and industry guidelines.

5.8 Items which may affect future safety of machine arereported in accordance with company policy andprocedures.

5.9 Performance of machine constantly monitored toenable timely repair of equipment.

5.10 Appropriate requirements applied for special servicingduring adverse conditions.

5.11 Equipment safely parked and shut down as permanufacturer's manual and/or site requirements, priorto service/maintenance activities.

6 Select, remove and fitattachments

6.1 Existing attachment removed according tomanufacturer's manual/regulatory authority'sinstructions.

6.2 Required attachment fitted according to manufacturer'smanual/regulatory authorities instructions.



6.3 Attachment tested to ensure correct fitting andoperation as specified in manufacturer’s manual.

6.4 Attachment used in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations.

6.5 Removed attachments cleaned and stored indesignated location.


7 Clean up 7.1 Waste material handled/disposed of safely inaccordance with requirements of site regulatory bodies,OH&S, MSDS and EPA.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

Daily task details may include:

• worksite inspection• defects on machine attended to/reported• nature and scope of task determined• potential hazards identified• routine maintenance attended to• attachments/replaceable parts checked for wear/security

Legislative/regulative adherence shall include:

• Occupational Health and Safety requirements as determined by State/Territory legislation• duty of care recognised• environmental appraisal conducted• EPA requirements adhered to

Safe operating procedures should include:

• recognising, identifying and preventing hazards associated with:� uneven/unstable terrain� trees� overhead service lines� bridges� surrounding buildings� obstructions� structures� facilities� dangerous materials� recently filled trenches

• observing safe parking practices including:� access ways are clear� equipment/machinery is away from overhangs/refueling sites� safe distance from excavations� securing against unauthorised movement

• observing site speed limits• safe loading procedures• working safely around overhead/underground services• working safely around other machines and personnel• speeds restricted to limits designated in zones and adjusted to account for obstacles and hazards



• contact with obstacles avoided• no part of operator's body to project outside driver's compartment• forks 100mm - 150mm from the ground whilst moving• mast vertical or with a slight backward tilt• forklift brought to a gradual halt approximately 150mm in front of an obstacle• forklift brought to a gradual halt without sliding or harsh braking

Forklift types may include:

• petrol• diesel• electric

Implements may include but are not limited to:

• fork• job• top lift attachment• side lift attachment• slippers• ram• rotating head• side loading attachment• scrap grapple• tyre grab• lumber grapple• rotary roll/drum clamp






• understanding soil and rock types and operational requirements for the varying moisture reactions• undertaking civil works• undertaking operator maintenance• using laser control equipment• appropriate reporting procedures• understanding emergency procedures and appropriate responses• preparation of work area• selection of tools and equipment• handling of materials, tools and equipment• housekeeping requirements• work schedule in singular application or in team situation to given instructions• work schedule and performance adhering to Quality Assurance policy and procedures• manual handling techniques used in accordance with current Worksafe Standards







Civil works may include:

• road works• sub division• earthworks• contours• batters• dams• drainage

Weather conditions include:

• visibility day and night• prevailing winds• dust

Communications include:

• two-way radios• reporting defects either verbally or in writing• hand signals• site specific instructions

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the safe and efficient operation of a forklift to workplace specificationsand industry productivity levels on a range of tasks as identified in the range of variables statement.


It is essential that competence is fully observed in the critical aspects of:

• operational safety, including compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations as perState/Territory legislation

• interpreting and communicating operational information• interactive communication to perform safely in a range of environments• start-up, park, shut-down procedures and walk around inspections• smooth and efficient operating procedures to enable proficiency in performing tasks to job

specifications• implements to ground at shutdown and park• understanding emergency procedures and appropriate responses• undertaking operator maintenance• appropriate reporting procedures• ability to transfer skills to changing circumstances/environmental conditions




This unit of competency is dependent upon acquiring the relevant pre-requisite competencies inbasic industry and basic stream skills.



• site and equipment safety requirements and including appropriate State/Territory legislation,regulations and codes

• equipment characteristics, technical capabilities and limitations• operational and maintenance procedures• problem solving techniques• basic diagnostic techniques


• apply eye-hand co-ordination• access, interpret and apply technical information• maintain equipment records• use relevant hand tools• apply problem solving techniques• apply basic diagnostic techniques• work in restricted spaces• work wearing personal protective equipment• operate forklift in accordance with site/manufacturer's specifications• communicate effectively



• general construction materials relevant to the appropriate construction activity• plant and equipment appropriate to the civil construction activity• suitable work area appropriate to the civil construction activity• suitable plans/drawings and specifications as appropriate













KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 2 2 2 2



BCG3014A: Erect timber pitched roof framing



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment androof framing construction processes recognised andadhered to.

1.3 All construction, cross sectional dimensions andspacings to be in accordance with AS1684 - 1992.

1.4 Material and quantity requirements determined fromjob drawings and specifications.



1.7 Delivered materials checked to ensure conformity todetermined quantity requirements.

2 Set out and prepare for erection 2.1 Set out checked or roof set out on top plates forposition of members + or – 3mm to designedconstruction from drawings and specifications.

2.2 Pitch and plumb cut for common rafter determinedfrom drawings and specifications.

2.3 Height above birdsmouth on rafter determined, withbirdsmouth no more than one third depth of rafter.

2.4 Template for marking plumb cut and birdsmouthaccurately made.

2.5 Plumb cut for hip and valley rafters determined frompitch of roof.

2.6 Length of common rafter calculated correctly for pitchof roof in accordance with dimensions for ½ span ofroof/run of rafter.

2.7 Pattern rafter set out and cut to length allowing foroverhang. Length within + or – 2mm and plumb cut to +or – 1mm.

2.8 Material for common rafters selected with bows up,marked to length with plumb cut and birdsmouth andcut accurately allowing for roof overhang.

Erect timber pitched roof framing BCG3014A


2.9 Main ridge boards marked and cut to length within + or– 2mm from set out.

2.10 Ridge boards requiring abutment joints scarfed or buttjointed and fixed and supported in accordance withAS1684.

2.11 Ridge boards for minor spans marked and cut to lengthwithin + or - 2mm from set out.

2.12 Ridge boards marked for rafter positions from wallplates within + or – 2mm.

2.13 Shortenings for creeper rafter length determined andshortenings applied to determine all creeper rafterlengths.

2.14 Longest creeper rafter length determined andshortenings applied to determine all creeper rafterlengths.

2.15 Creeper rafters marked and cut to length allowing foroverhang.

3 Erect roof 3.1 Roof constructed and erected in accordance withSection 4, AS1684-1992.

3.2 All component members securely fastened together inaccordance with Section 6, AS1684-1992.

3.3 Main ridge board and two end sets of rafters erectedinto position, fixed with birdsmouth hard against wallplates and temporarily braced with ridge level within +or – 3mm over 3 metres.

3.4 Jack rafters, where applicable, located and fixed intoposition with birdsmouth hard against wall plate.

3.5 Ridge boards supported in position by struts inaccordance with maximum spacing as per AS1684.

3.6 Intermediate sets of common rafters located and fixedinto position to level line at ridge within + or - 2mm.

3.7 Hip rafters measured, marked, cut to length and fixedinto place maintaining birdsmouth height above wallplate.

3.8 Flying/broken hips measured, marked, cut to lengthand located and fixed into position.

3.9 Valley rafters measured, marked, cut to length andlocated and fixed into position maintaining centre linealignment with roof surface within + or - 3mm.

3.10 Creeper rafters located and fixed into position



maintaining alignment of roof surface.

3.11 Hip and valley rafters supported by struts under purlinsor tie bolt and truss system at same spacings ascommon rafters.

3.12 Scotch valley constructed with pitching board ofsufficient width to provide adequate bearing for valleycreepers and securely fastened at each rafter crossing.

3.13 Common rafters restrained from lateral deflection byfixing securely to adjacent ceiling joists, supportingunder purlins and with full bearing at upper end ridgeboard.

3.14 Deep rafters restrained from deflecting laterally by solidblocking or herringbone strutting.

4 Install under purlins 4.1 Under purlins installed in single lengths where possibleand fixed in straight runs at right angles to direction ofrafters.

4.2 Face and edge cuts for purlins abutting hips andvalleys determined in accordance with pitch of roof.

4.3 Materials for purlins measured, marked and cut tolength.

4.4 Under purlins to be joined are spliced/halved, lappedand nailed together over a point of support whererequired.

4.5 Under purlins fixed within middle third of common rafterspan or equally spaced if more than one required.

5 Install roof strutting 5.1 Roof struts, strutting beams and scissor rafters/tie boltand truss system for stiffening and supporting roofmembers installed to specifications and in accordancewith AS1684.

5.2 Struts measured, marked, cut to length and fixed intoposition.

5.3 Roof struts, strutting beams and scissor rafters locatedimmediately above a stud or load is distributed over topplate by blocking.

6 Install collar ties 6.1 Collar ties fitted to each alternative pair of raftersimmediately above under purlins or if under purlins notused, two thirds of roof rise from top of top plate.

7 Install wind bracing 7.1 Roofs which are not adequately braced by hips/valleyssecurely braced against longitudinal wind forces bycrossed metal strap bracing or internal brace.



8 Construct eaves 8.1 Gable ends trimmed for overhang and finished withbarge board to line + or – 2mm over any 3 metres oflength to specifications.

8.2 Overhang of rafters marked and cut to line andplumb/angle.

8.3 Fascia fitted and fixed to roof structure overhang to lineand level + or – 2mm over any 3 metres of length tospecifications.

8.4 Open eaves lined/sheeted on upper or underside ofrafters with noggings or cleats fixed to permit fixing ofoutside lining as necessary to top lined eaves.

8.5 Boxed eaves constructed with soffit bearers fixed towall frame or supported by hangers from rafters to lineand level + or - 2mm over any 3 metres of length.

8.6 Soffit bearers fixed to wall frames located clear of topof masonry walls to allow for frame shrinkage.

9 Clean up 9.1 Area cleaned and waste material disposed of safely.

9.2 Unused material stored/stacked.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the erection and construction of timber pitched and supported roof framing and eavesfinishes and applies to all pitched roofs including:

• gable• hip• hip and valley, and• combinations thereof

All work is to be undertaken in accordance with AS1684 – 1992 National Timber Framing Code.







• working platforms and scaffolding




• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level• squares• nail bag• chisels• hand saws• saw stools• power saws• nail gun• air compressor and hoses• power leads• scaffolding• string lines

Plumb cuts and lengths of common rafters may be determined by a variety of methods which include:

• use of steel square and fence• use of Hancock’s Roofing Book• full size setout• scale geometric drawing

All members of timber pitch roof structures should be selected and used with bows/springs upwards.


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by setting out, cutting and erecting a pitched roof for a nominated roofstructure incorporating hips, valley/s and a gable end.




• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context oferecting a timber pitched roof

• identify and give attention to details of roof structure, ceiling framing and pitch of roof• correctly calculate lengths and shortenings for common rafters and creepers• correctly determining bevels for all roof member cuts from pitch of roof• demonstrate correct setting out and cutting of pattern rafter• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• use of safe and effective procedures to cut, erect and fix key structural members of roof• accurately measure and mark lengths of hip and valley rafters



• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to erect all roof members and support roof inaccordance with AS1684

• give attention to accurate setting out and cutting of overhangs to form eaves and gable ends• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work procedures• complete roof structure to specifications



• BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry)• BCG3012A Construct and erect timber wall framing• BCG3013A Erect ceiling framing (pitched roof)



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawing and specifications• wall and ceiling framing• materials• tools and equipment• Building Code of Australia and AS 1684 – National Timber Framing Code• roof pitches and roofing calculations• calculation of material requirements• scaffolding


• work safely• organise work• read and interpret drawings and specifications• interpret documentation• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively• calculate material quantities



• wall and ceiling framed structure completed ready for roofing application• suitable materials appropriate for roof construction application• tools and equipment appropriate for erection and construction processes• drawings and specifications of proposed construction activity











KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 2 2 2 3 2



BCG3015A: Erect timber roof trusses



1.2 OH&S requirements for the erection of timber rooftrusses, recognised and adhered to.

1.3 Job requirements identified from site location,drawings, specifications and AS4440-1997Installation of Nail Plated Timber Trusses.

1.4 Trusses and material requirements identified from jobdrawings and specifications.


1.6 Tools and equipment selected to carry out processesconsistent with job requirements and checked forserviceability.

1.7 Delivered roof trusses checked for conformity toquantity order and specifications for span and pitch.

1.8 Walls checked to ensure: plumb within 2mm over 2.4metres, level and to line within +/- 2mm over any 3metres, straight to within +/- 2mm over any 3 metres,strengthened to resist point loads in accordance withAS1684 – National Timber Framing Code,temporarily braced for straight, where applicable, andremedied where required.

1.9 Walls braced and tied where required to providestraightened support for stacking of trusses on walls.

1.10 Trusses lifted by crane where applicable, usingcorrect lifting gear and techniques to eliminatepossible damages in handling and placement.

2 Erect timber roof trusses 2.1 Erection of timber roof trusses carried out inaccordance with job drawings and specifications andAS4440.

2.2 Location of all trusses checked on set-out or set outon wall plates to spacings within +/- 3mm to planlayout and specifications.

2.3 End trusses erected into position checked for straightand plumb and temporarily braced.

2.4 Line fixed between trusses at apex for alignment ofintermediate trusses.

Erect timber roof trusses BCG3015A


2.5 Roof trusses erected with apexes aligned to centreline within 2mm.

2.6 Roof trusses erected and fixed to external wall platesto set-out locations with galvanised nail plateconnectors to specifications.

2.7 Trusses supported on two points only unlessotherwise designed.

2.8 Trusses tied to erected trusses near apex bytemporary spreaders to hold at designed spacing andplumb.

2.9 Hip ends constructed by fitting and fixing hip trussesand jack truss over truncated truss/es to endstandard truss, to specifications.

2.10 Valleys constructed by fixing saddle trusses to line onerected adjacent roof trusses to form abutting roofsurfaces to specifications.

2.11 Dutch hip ends constructed by fitting and fixing hiptrusses and jack trusses/rafters to dutch hip girdertruss to specifications.

2.12 All trusses installed straight and plumb and fixed totruss structure and wall plates to specifications.

2.13 Creeper rafters, where required, set out, cut, locatedand fixed to specifications.

2.14 Roof bracing provided through hip construction,valley construction, diagonal metal tension bracing ora combination of these to specifications.

2.15 Roof battens installed to provide lateral restraint totruss top chord and consistent with roof claddingmanufacturers' specifications.

2.16 Roof battens fixed to line, maintaining alignment oftop chords of trusses.

2.17 Lateral ties provided to bottom chords of trusses atpanel points in accordance with specifications toprovide stability and alignment to bottom chordswhere required.

2.18 Where bottom chord of truss used to provide lateralsupport for internal walls, partition brackets installedto manufacturer's and job specifications.

2.19 Tie members (binders) installed to specificationswhere necessary to provide lateral bracing toexternal walls.



2.20 Ceiling battens installed to line and spacing toprovide lateral restraint to truss bottom chords,consistent with ceiling system manufacturersspecifications.

3 Construct gable and eavesstructure

3.1 Scaffolding erected, where applicable, to jobrequirements and OH&S regulations.

3.2 Outriggers or trimmers fitted to raking truss for gableoverhang to specifications.

3.3 Overhang cut to line and barge boards cut, fitted andfixed to line within +/- 2mm over any 3 metres tospecifications.

3.4 Overhang for eaves marked and cut to line of eavesdimension to specification for fascia finish.

3.5 Fascia set out, cut, fitted and fixed to roof structureoverhang to level and line within +/- 2mm over any 3metres and specifications for fixing.

3.6 Open eaves lined/sheeted on upper or underside ofrafters with noggings or cleats fixed to permit fixing ofoutside linings as necessary to top lined eaves.

3.7 Boxed eaves constructed with soffit bearers fixed towall frame or supported by hangers from top chords.

3.8 Soffit bearers fixed to wall frames located clear of topof masonry walls to allow for frame shrinkage.

4 Clean up 4.1 Area cleared and waste material disposed of safely.



RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the erection of timber fabricated trusses, designed to the plan, pitch of roof and roof loadbearing factors governing a proposed building.

All erection and construction application to be in accordance with: AS4440 – 1997 Installation of Nail PlatedTimber Trusses

Timber installation to be to timber walled framing or timber wall plates to requirements of: AS1684 – 1992National Timber Framing Code

Roof types include:

• gable• hip• hip and gable



• hip and valley• dutch gable• dutch hip

Truss types include:

• standard• girder• truncated• truncated girder• hip• jack• saddle• raked




• workplace environment and safety• fall safe protection• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• working platforms and scaffolding


• safety glasses/goggles• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators• gloves


• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level• squares• nail bag• chisels• hand saws• saw stool• power saws• power drills• nail gun• air compressor and hoses• power leads• builders line• tin snips



Metal connectors may include but are not limited to:

• triple grip brackets• girder brackets• angle brackets• speed brace• internal wall brackets

Fixing connections may include:

• nails• threaded nails• clouts• coach screws• bolts

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by erecting a trussed roof structure to a nominated roof planincorporating both hip and gable ends and involving valley construction.




• indicate compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context oferecting a roof of timber roof trusses

• identify roof structure and details of respective roof trusses and specified fixing• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks• give attention to accuracy in setting out and aligning trusses• use safe and effective procedures to locate and fix all trusses and creepers in place• apply correct procedures to tie together, brace and fix all holding down connectors.• adopt safe and effective procedures to finish gable and eaves structure• identify of typical faults and problems that occur and the necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work procedures• complete of truss roof installation to specifications



• BCG1017A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry)• BCG3012A Construct and erect timber wall framing



• design and principle of truss roofs• types of roof trusses• truss roof construction• methods of installing truss roofs• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawing and specifications



• wall framing• materials• tools and equipment• Australian Standards 1684, 4440• fixing and fasteners• measuring and marking• crane operations• worksite communication


• work safely• organise work• read and interpret drawings and specifications• interpret documentation• set out work• use tools and equipment• fix materials• communicate effectively• calculate material quantities



• workplace location with erected walls ready for roof structure• trusses and materials required to erect and install roof• tools and equipment appropriate to the erection and construction processes• drawings and specifications relative to installation activity




• observation of the application process• questioning related underpinning knowledge





KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 2 2 0 1 1



BCG3016A: Install sub floor framing



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andconstruction of sub floor framing recognised andadhered to.

1.3 Materials and quantity requirements identified from jobdrawings, specifications and in accordance withAS1684-1992 for timber construction.



1.6 Termite protections installed as required in accordancewith AS3660.1 and for AS1684.

1.7 Damp proof barriers installed to specifications andAS2904.

2 Install timber bearers 2.1 Bearer material selected with bows/springs up, markedand cut to lengths for joining and specifications whererequired.

2.2 Bearers located and fixed in a straight and parallel linein accordance with AS1684, job drawings andspecifications.

3 Install timber floor joists 3.1 Location for floor joists set out to spacings from jobdrawings and specifications.

3.2 Material lengths for floor joists selected withbows/springs placed upwards, where applicable.

3.3 Outside floor joists selected for straightness, located,fitted and fixed to line and level to specifications andAS1684.

3.4 String lines used to determine levels and alignment oftops of floor joists over bearer positions.

3.5 Floor joists prepared, located and securely fixed tobearers to line and level in accordance with AS1684and specifications.

Install sub floor framing BCG3016A


3.6 Block or herringbone strutting installed to deep floorjoists in accordance with AS1684.

3.7 Trimmed openings constructed using half housingjoints, mortice and tenon joints or metal connections tospecifications and AS1684.

4 Install steel bearers andjoists/ladder frames

4.1 Bearers positioned on supporting structure/piers,marked and cut to length, where applicable.

4.2 Bearers installed straight and level using approvedpacking to job specifications.

4.3 Joists installed straight and level to specified spacingand fixing.

4.4 Ladder frames positioned on bearers to specifiedspacing and fixed to specification.

4.5 Continuous angle trim fixed to end of ladder frames tomanufacturers' and job specifications.

5 Install bearers and 'drop-in'joists

5.1 Bearers set out according to length of drop in joists.

5.2 Bearers cut to length as required, located and packedover supports to achieve level plane.

5.3 Drop-in joists positioned and fixed to bearers tospecification.

6 Install site assembledbearers and joists (longspan)

6.1 Bearers positioned to the required spacings and cut tolength.

6.2 Bearers located to specifications.

6.3 'C' section joists set out to required spacings and fixedto specification.

6.4 Bearers packed using approved packing to achievelevel plane.






RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to timber and/or steel sub floor framing construction.

Subfloor framed construction may include:

• timber bearer and joists• steel beams for bearers• steel bearers and joists• steel ladder frames

Sub floor types of construction support includes:

• square or round timber stumps• concrete stumps• masonry base with piers• steel posts on concrete pedestals/base

All timber floor construction to be carried out to requirements of AS1684-1992 National Timber FramingCode.




• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• working platforms and scaffolding


• safety goggles, glasses• ear plugs/muffs• boots• gloves• respirators/dust masks


• measuring tape/rule• hammers• power drills• levelling equipment• squares• nail bags• chisels• hand saws• saw stools• power saws• nail gun



• string lines• air compressor and hoses• power leads

Termite protections to be in accordance with AS3660.1-1995 Protection of Buildings from SubterraneanTermites – New Buildings.

Damp proof barriers to be in accordance with AS 2904-1995 Damp Proof Courses and Flashings

Timber construction connections may include:

• nails/spikes• bolts and nuts• metal rods• metal connections

Steel construction connections may include:

• bolts• screws• self tapping screws• welding• patent metal connecting plates

Structure may be to receive structural strip or sheet/panel flooring or flooring boards.


Work is to be undertaken in accordance with OH&S statutory regulations where welding and/or craneoperations are involved in construction process.

Work may be undertaken working with a partner or in a team.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by installing bearers and joists or ladder frames for sub floor framing to anominated building project.




• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the contextinstalling sub floor framing

• identify location and details of sub floor framing members, sizes, spacings, and establishedbearer base

• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to prepare bearers and joists and to fix to position• give attention to timber construction details to conform to AS1684 requirements• give attention to ensure installation to line and level• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure work carried out safely and effectively• complete sub floor frame installation to specifications




Pre-requisites for this unit are:• BCG1003A Read and interpret drawings• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1011A Handle construction materials and safe disposal of non-toxic waste• BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry)• BCG2004A Carry out levelling



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawings and specifications• AS1684 - National Timber Framing Code• types of sub floor construction• materials• fixing and fasteners• tools and equipment• measuring and leveling• calculation of material requirements


• work safely• organise work• read and interpret drawings and specifications• interpret documentation from a wide range of sources• use tools and equipment• set-out material• communicate effectively• calculate material quantities• carry out measuring and leveling



• established sub floor base for proposed construction• tools and equipment appropriate to construction processes• construction materials appropriate to construction processes• drawings and specifications of proposed activity




• observation of application processes• questioning related to underpinning knowledge







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 2 2 1 1 1

BCG3017A Install timber and sheet flooring


BCG3017A: Install timber and sheet flooring



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment, andinstalling flooring recognised and adhered to.

1.3 Materials and quantity requirements determined fromjob drawings and specifications.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected to carry out processesconsistent with the requirements of job, checked forserviceability and any faults reported to supervisor.

2 Straighten and prepare floorjoists

2.1 Tops of floor joists straightened to line and flat planewithin + or – 1mm across joists over any 2.4 metreslength.

2.2 Blocks/trimmers fitted and fixed around doorways toprovide support where required to specifications.

2.3 Trimmers cut, fitted and fixed to specifications whererequired, to support sheet flooring joints.

3 Set out and fix first board 3.1 First board location determined in accordance withroom layout and type of floor finish. Clearance to wallto be in accordance with fitted floor, AS1684.

3.2 First board laid and fixed to line parallel to wall, tospecifications.

3.3 Boards cut square to length with staggered butt jointsin centre of joists.

3.4 Boards matched in colour and grain for end joining,where specified.

4 Laying floor boards 4.1 Flooring boards assembled to cramp with butt jointstight and practical number of boards no more than 5.

4.2 Boards cramped with tight tongue and grooves but notover-tight.

4.3 Boards for spaced decking laid to line andspecifications.

Install timber and sheet flooring BCG3017A


4.4 Boards nailed down with nails to line of joists and inaccordance with specification for width of boards andAS1684.

4.5 Nails used to be a minimum length of 2.5 times boardthickness and 2.8mm minimum thickness for handdriven or 2.5mm minimum thickness if driven by a nailgun.

4.6 Gun driven, T-headed nails driven with T-head at rightangles to board's direction

4.7 Nails punched to minimum 2mm below surface.

5 Lay sheet flooring 5.1 Sheet layout designed for long dimensions at rightangles to floor joists and sheet ends staggered.

5.2 Non-tongued and grooved sheets fixed with endscentrally on noggings between floor joists.

5.3 Sheet locations marked and adhesive applied to joiststo manufacturer’s and job specifications, whererequired.

5.4 Sheets cut and fitted as required to manufacturer's andjob specifications.

5.5 Sheets laid with joints tight and fixed with nails at150mm maximum centre to centre at edges andmaximum 300mm at intermediate joists or by screwsas specified by sheet manufacturer.

5.6 Nails a minimum length of 2.5 times thickness of sheetand 2.8mm minimum if driven by nail gun.

5.7 Nails punched, where required to minimum 2 mmbelow surface.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to timber flooring boards, decking and composite material sheeting used to provide afinished floor surface.

Applies to timber flooring boards which includes:

• tongue and grooved• square edged• round edged• end matched



Applies to sheet flooring which includes:

• plywood• particle board• Mdf board• fibro cement sheeting






• safety goggles/glasses• ear plugs/muffs• boots• respirators/dust masks


• measuring tape/rule• hammers• power drills• straight edge• squares• nail bags• chisels• hand saws• saw stools• power saws• power drills• power planer• nail gun• string line• air compressor and hoses• power leads• nail punch• floor cramps

Clearances from wall and fixing of flooring to be in accordance with AS1684-1992 National Timber FramingCode

Flooring may be laid to:

• timber floor joists• steel floor joists or ladder frames• timber battens/joists fixed to concrete slab

Install timber and sheet flooring BCG3017A


Straightening of top of timber joists to line and level may involve:

• packing with non compressible material• planing of joists

Fixing of boards may include:

• nails• screws• self tapping screws

Sheet fixing may include:

• screws• nails• adhesives

Sheets should be fixed to manufacturer's recommendations, where specifications provided.

Reporting of faults may be in accordance with company’s workplace procedures and may be written orverbal.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the performance of installing two separate floors to nominated areas,one of tongued and grooved flooring boards and the other of sheet flooring.




• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context ofinstalling flooring to sub floor framing

• identify location and details of flooring materials to be installed• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to prepare joists and cut, join and fix material to lay

floor• ensure all joints tight• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective operations in laying of flooring


Pre-requisites for this unit are:• BCG1003A Read and interpret drawings• BCG1004A Carry out measurement and calculations• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use plant and equipment• BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry)• BGC3016A Install sub-floor framing





• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawing and specifications• Quality Assurance for laying of flooring• materials• tools and equipment• fixing and fasteners• adhesives• calculation of material requirements


• work safely• organise work• read and interpret drawings and specifications• use tools and equipment• use fixing and fasteners• use adhesives• communicate effectively• calculate material quantities



• established sub-floor frame• tools and equipment appropriate for application processes• materials appropriate to proposed flooring applications• drawings and specifications for flooring processes



Assessment may involve:• observation of the application processes• questioning related to underpinning knowledge





KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 2 1 1 1



BCG3018A: Erect steel roof trusses



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment anderection of steel roof trusses recognised and adheredto.

1.3 Trusses and material requirements identified andchecked for conformity in accordance withconstructed walls, drawings and specifications.



1.6 All design, construction, cross sectional dimensionsand spacings are in accordance with AS4600-1996Cold Formed Steel Structures.

1.7 Zinc coating of members repaired after welding bycleaning and coating with appropriate paint system.

1.8 Walls checked to ensure set plumb, level, straightand square unless otherwise designed.

1.9 Temporary bracing located to wall positions tomaintain alignment of wall, where applicable.

2 Erect steel roof trusses 2.1 Location of roof trusses set out on wall plates to planlayout and specifications.

2.2 Roof trusses erected and fixed to set out positions inaccordance with detailed drawings and specifications.

2.3 Trusses fixed in place with apexes to line and heightline of top chords above wall plates to + or - 2mmover any 3 metre length.

2.4 Ceiling trimming and creeper rafter members fixed tospacings to specifications, where designed.

2.5 Where bottom chord of truss used to provide lateralsupport for internal walls, provision is made for freevertical movement of truss.

2.6 Roof bracing provided through hip construction, valleyconstruction, diagonal metal tension bracing or acombination of these, and fixed to specification.

Erect steel roof trusses BCG3018A


2.7 Roof battens installed to provide lateral restraint totruss top chord and consistent with roof claddingmanufacturer's specifications and spacings.

2.8 Ceiling battens installed to designed spacing forceiling lining to provide lateral restraint to trussbottom chords consistent with ceiling systemmanufacturer's specifications.

2.9 Roof frame temporarily earthed during erection andconnection to permanent earthing system uponcompletion.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the erection of steel roof trusses constructed of cold formed sections from zinc coated oraluminium/zinc coated steel to AS1397-1993 Steel Sheet and Strip – Hot Dipped Zinc Coated or AluminiumZinc Coated.

Trusses may be fixed to steel or timber wall plates.






• boots• safety goggles/glasses• ear plugs/muffs• respirators/dust masks• gloves• hard hat




• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spanners• squares• power drills• nail bags• screwdrivers• clamps• string lines• power leads• power screwdrivers

Connections to wall plates include but are not limited to:

• metal plates• self tapping screws• screws• bolts• metal brackets• slotted brackets for truss movement

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the performance of erecting and installing a steel roof truss structureto a nominated roof plan.




• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context oferecting a roof structure of steel roof trusses

• identify roof structure and details of respective roof trusses and specified fixing• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• give attention to accurate setting out and fixing of truss connections• adopt and use safe and effective procedures used to locate and fix all trusses in place• apply correct procedures applied to brace roof structure and carry out temporary and permanent

earthing• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communication with others to ensure safe and effective work procedures• complete roof truss erection process to specification



• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG2006A Carry out steel fixing• BCG3019A Construct and erect steel wall framing



• workplace and equipment safety requirements

Erect steel roof trusses BCG3018A


• working drawing and specifications• steel wall framing• steel truss construction• materials• tools and equipment• fixing and fasteners• temporary bracing• measuring relative to erection of trusses


• work safely• organise work• read and interpret drawings and specifications• use tools and equipment• carry out fixing processes• set out work• communicate effectively



• erected walls ready for the erection of trusses and construction of roof• tools and equipment appropriate to erection and construction processes• trusses and allied materials appropriate to erection and construction processes• drawings and specifications applicable to proposed activity









KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 2 2 1 1 1

BCG 3019A Construct and erect steel wall framing


BCG3019A: Construct and erect steel wall framing



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andconstruction and installing of steel wall framingrecognised and adhered to.

1.3 Material requirements determined from job drawingsand specifications.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected to carry out processesconsistent with job requirements and checked forserviceability and safe operation.

1.6 All design, construction, cross sectional dimensionsand spacing are in accordance with drawings andmanufacturer's and job specifications and AS4600-1996 Cold Formed Steel Structures.

2 Construct and erect walls 2.1 Location of walls set out to dimensions from jobdrawings and marked on base or sub floor framestructure.

2.2 Lengths of wall plates determined in accordance withwall junction and method of joining.

2.3 Wall frame members set out to lengths and cut andprepared in accordance with specifications forassembly.

2.4 Frames assembled by welding using metal inert gasMIG, carbon welding, self drilling/self tapping screwsor by blind rivets.

2.5 Zinc coating of members repaired after welding bycleaning and coating with appropriate paint system.

2.6 Top and bottom plates joined to job andmanufacturer’s specifications with splice plates atends to maintain continuity and alignment.

2.7 Studs installed in single lengths at not more than600mm spacings with multiple studs placed no morethan 40mm from concentrated ceiling or roof load.

2.8 Lintels installed over openings in accordance with joband manufacturer's specifications.

Construct and erect steel wall framing BCG3019A


2.9 Noggings installed at not more than 1350mm centresbetween rows to specified fixing.

2.10 Walls braced with diagonal tension strap bracing,diagonal noggings or full panel bracing, fixed to joband manufacturer’s specifications.

2.11 Walls erected, temporarily braced in location andfixed to base to line and position in accordance withspecifications.

2.12 Service holes in structural members for plumbing andelectrical services provided with plastic/rubber bushesor grommets.

2.13 Walls set plumb, level, straight and square unlessotherwise designed.

3 Install insulation and sarking 3.1 Insulation and sarking installed to ensure thatopenness of steel frame does not contribute to thecollection of moisture within enclosed spaces.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to wall framing constructed of cold formed sections from zinc coated or aluminium/zinccoated steel and assembled either on-site or off-site.

Cold formed sections are to be in accordance with AS1397-1993 Steel Sheet and Strip - Hot Dipped ZincCoated or Aluminium Zinc Coating




• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• use of welding equipment




• boots• safety goggles/glasses• ear plugs/muffs• respirators/dust masks• gloves


• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit Level• squares• nail bag• screwdrivers• hacksaws• saw stools• power saws• power drills• power grinder• clamps• string lines• power leads

Base or sub floor framed construction may include:

• reinforced concrete slab• steel bearers and joists• steel ladder frames• timber bearers and joists• structural sheet flooring fixed to sub floor structure

Fixing of wall frames to base or sub floor framed structures may involve:

• screws• self tapping screws• masonry nails• nails• masonry plugs• masonry anchors• explosive driven nails• masonry nail

Timber sections may be incorporated into wall structure as noggings and/or added support for fixing atopenings.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the performance of assembling and/or erecting steel wall framing for anominated building involving door and window openings.



Construct and erect steel wall framing BCG3019A



• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context ofconstructing and erecting steel wall framed structures

• identify location and details of wall construction for proposed building• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out construction work• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to prepare material and assemble and fix

components for each wall• adopt and use safe and effective procedures used to erect walls and brace assembled structure• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work procedures• secure junctions of wall frame members and wall frames.• complete assembling and erection processes to specification


Pre-requisites for this unit are:• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG2006A Carry out steel fixing



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawing and specifications• steel wall framing• materials• tools and equipment• fastening methods for light steel materials• calculation of material requirements• temporary bracing• measurement and calculations


• work safely• organise work• set out work• read and interpret drawings and specifications• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively• calculate material quantities• use fixings and fasteners



• prepared floor structure ready for wall erection processes• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to construction processes• construction materials appropriate to proposed steel wall framing processes• drawings and specification applicable to proposed activity











KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 2 2 1 1 1

BCG3020A Construct timber roof structures - irregular roofs


BCG3020A: Construct timber roof structures - irregularroofs



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andapplication processes recognised and adhered to.

1.3 All construction, cross sectional dimensions andspacings to be in accordance with AS1684-1992 androof structural design.

1.4 Materials and quantities determined from jobdrawings and specifications.



1.7 Delivered materials checked to ensure conformity todetermined quantity requirements.

2 Set out and preparemembers for roof erection

2.1 Set out location of roof members checked or roof setout on top plates to spacings +/- 3mm to designedconstruction from drawings and specifications.

2.2 Pitch and plumb cut for common rafter as determinedfrom drawings and specifications.

2.3 Plumb cuts and edge cuts for all pitched membersdetermined in accordance with roof design and pitchof roof surfaces.

2.4 Length of common rafter calculated correctly to pitchof roof and run of rafter.

2.5 Pattern rafter set out and cut to length allowing foroverhang. Length within + or – 2mm and plumb cutto +/- 1 mm.

2.6 Materials for common rafters selected with bows up,marked to length with plumb cut, edge cut ifapplicable, birdsmouth/footcut and cut accuratelyallowing for roof overhang.

2.7 Ridge boards, where applicable, marked to lengthfrom top plate set out and cut to length within +/-2mm.

Construct timber roof structures - irregular roofs BCG3020A


3 Erect pyramidal or conicalroof

3.1 Scaffolding erected, where required, to OH&Srequirements.

3.2 Initial rafters located into position and fixed into placeto specifications.

3.3 Temporary bracings/ties fixed into place whererequired to maintain stability to structure or initiallyerected rafters.

3.4 Additional rafters located into designed positions andfixed to specification.

3.5 Trimmers and/or trimming rafters set out and cut tolength, located in designed positions and fixed tospecifications.

3.6 Lateral/collar ties cut to length, located and fixed todesign requirements and specifications.

4 Erect roof to splayed planend

4.1 Common rafters, ridge and jack rafter erected intoposition and fixed to specifications and Section 6,AS1684.

4.2 Set out made and developed to determine face andedge cuts to each hip rafter.

4.3 Lengths of hips measured from long point tobirdsmouth and bevel gauges set to respective faceand edge cuts from set out.

4.4 Hip rafters set out and cut accurately to length within+/- 2mm maintaining birdsmouth height above wallplate.

4.5 Hip rafters located and fixed into designed position tospecifications.

4.6 Shortenings and face and edge cuts determined forcreeper rafters in accordance with respective hiprafters and spacing of rafters.

4.7 Creeper rafters set out and cut accurately torespective lengths within +/- 2mm in accordance withapplicable shortenings and face and edge cuts.

4.8 Creeper rafters located and fixed to designedpositions and specifications.

4.9 Roof support of underpurlins, strutting/underpurlinsupport and collar ties installed in accordance withroof design and AS1684.

5 Construct dormers in roofsurfaces

5.1 Dormer locations and roof design identified from jobdrawings and specifications.



5.2 Roof constructed with trimming between rafters athead and foot of dormer openings in accordance withroof design and specifications.

5.3 Dormer roof intersection set out on roof surface todesign requirements and specifications.

5.4 Scotch valleys constructed with pitching board ofsufficient width to provide adequate bearing for valleycreepers and securely fastened to roof surface tospecifications.

5.5 Roof members set out and cut accurately to length torequirements of roof design and specifications.

5.6 Dormer roof constructed with all members locatedand fixed in accordance with roof design andspecifications.

6 Complete eaves and bargeends

6.1 Gable ends trimmed for overhang and finished withbarge board to line + or – 2mm over any 3 metreslength, to specifications.

6.2 Overhang of rafters measured, marked and cut to linein accordance with roof design and specifications.

6.3 Fascia fitted and fixed to roof structure overhang toline and level for –2mm over any 3 metres length, tospecifications.

6.4 Eaves constructed and finished to job drawings andspecifications.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the construction of pitched roofs on irregular plan shapes which include:

• skewed or splayed ends• conical roofs• pyramidal roofs• dormer windows

All work undertaken in accordance with AS1684-1992 National Timber Framing Code.

Roof surfaces may be equal pitch or unequal pitch.



Roofs above dormer windows may be pitched wholly onto roof surface or onto walls protruding above roofsurfaces.Roof types may include:

• gable• hip• hip and valley• combination thereof






• boots• safety goggles/glasses• ear plugs/muffs• respirators/dust masks


• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level• squares• nail bag• chisels• hand saws• saw stools• power saws• nail gun• air compressor and hoses• power leads• scaffolding• string lines

All members of timber pitched roof structures should be selected and used with bows/springs upwards.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by erecting an irregular roof structure to a nominated roof plan.






• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context oferecting a timber pitched roof

• identify and give attention to details of roof structure, ceiling framing and pitch of roof• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply correct set out procedures to determine all plumb and edge cuts for all pitched members• demonstrate correct setting out procedures and cutting of common rafter/s• use safe and effective procedures to cut, erect and fix key structural members of roof• accurately measure and mark lengths of hips and valley rafters• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations• complete roof structure to specifications


Pre-requisites for this unit are:• BCG3012A Construct and erect timber wall framing• BCG3013A Erect ceiling framing (pitched roof)• BCG3014A Erect timber pitched roof framing



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawings and specifications• timber pitched roof construction• wall and ceiling framing• materials• tools and equipment• AS1684-1992 National Timber Framing Code• fixing and fasteners• calculation of material requirements• scaffolding


• work safely• organise work• set out measurements• read and interpret drawings and specifications• use tools and equipment• interpret documentation• erect scaffolding• calculate material quantities• communicate effectively





• wall and ceiling framed structure appropriate to roof construction• suitable materials appropriate to proposed roof construction• hand/power tools, plant and equipment appropriate to proposed construction processes• drawings and specifications of proposed construction activity


Competency should be determined concurrently based upon integrated project work.





Competency may be assessed in the workplace or simulated work environment.


KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 2 2 1 1 1



BCG3021A: Install door frames



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andinstalling door frames recognised and adhered to.

1.3 Requirements for installation of door frame identifiedfrom drawings and specifications and in accordancewith AS1909-1984 Installation of Timber Doorsets.

1.4 Doors correctly identified for location and measurementfrom drawings, specifications and door schedule.

1.5 Materials and door frame correctly selected andchecked against drawings and specifications.



2 Prepare floor joists for timberdoor frame

2.1 Door opening in wall frame checked against doorframe size to ensure clearance for installation to plumband level.

2.2 Floor joists prepared so that support blocks fixedsecurely and joist levelled across opening for doorframe.

2.3 Joists reduced to suit designed level of sill and in linewith face of internal lining, where specified.

3 Prepare door frame for floorslab

3.1 Timber door frame prepared for connection to concreteslab to specifications, in accordance with installationwith a sill or without.

3.2 Floor slab prepared for door frame connection, tospecifications.

4 Install door frame 4.1 Door frame installed to opening with sill margin abovefloor level to specified measurement, where applicable.

4.2 Sill and head checked for level.

4.3 Suitable packing used to pack between stiles and wallframe for fixing to specifications.

Install door frames BCG3021A


4.4 Stiles installed with face and edges plumb and straightto +/-1mm and parallel.

4.5 Frame secured to specifications, flush with face ofinternal lining and fixed through packing located asspecified.

4.6 Temporary bracing removed from door frame withoutdamage to frame, where applicable.

4.7 Storm/wind moulds fixed firmly to stiles and head tospecifications, if applicable.

5 Clean up 5.1 Area around door frame cleaned.



RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to timber and metal door frames installed to timber or metal wall framing.

Floor structure may be of:

• timber sub floor framing• steel sub floor framing• reinforced concrete slab

Door frames can be fitted to concrete slab with or without sill.

Preparation for door frames may include:

• fix temporary bracing• fix flashing to sill• cut sill to suit external lining• fit steel dowels to base of timber stiles

Preparation of concrete floor slab may include:

• drilling of holes for steel dowels• silicone or sealant placed for underneath of sill

Securing to wall frame may be by:

• nails or screws to timber framing• screws to metal framing

Suitable packing material includes:





• quality of door frame• control of handling procedures• procedures for fixing• specified finish


• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• safety hazards• working platforms


• boots• safety glasses/goggles• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators• gloves


• measuring tape/rule• hammer• spirit level• squares• nail bag• chisels• hand saws• saw stools• power saws• power drill including impact drill• nail gun• air compressor and hoses• power leads

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the performance of installing a door frame to each of two separatebase structures, with one to a timber sub floor frame and the other to a concrete slab.




• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context ofinstalling external door frames

• identify location and details of door frames and building structure• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment

Install door frames BCG3021A


• adopt and apply safe and effective procedures in preparing door frame and opening forinstallation

• adopt and apply safe and effective procedures in installing door frame to position and finish• give attention to use of packing material and fixing of frame through packed locations to AS1902-

1984 Installation of Timber Doorsets• identify of typical faults and problems that occur and the necessary action taken to rectify• complete installation of door frame to specification



• BCG1002A Plan and organise work• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1008A Use simple leveling devices• BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry)• BCG2004A Carry out leveling



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawing and specifications• wall frame construction• door frame construction• materials• installation procedures• measuring and levelling• tools and equipment• fixing and fasteners


• work safely• read and interpret drawings• organise work• set out work• use tools and equipment• use fixings and fasteners



• workplace location with structural frame and opening• tools and equipment appropriate to installation processes• door frame and allied materials appropriate to installation process• drawings and specification relevant to proposed activity




• observation of application process



• questioning related to underpinning knowledge• inspection of installed door frame




Assessment should be while tasks are undertaken under minimal supervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 2 2 1 1 1



BCG3022A: Finish eaves



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andconstructing and finishing of eaves recognised andadhered to.

1.3 Materials selected and checked against jobrequirements in accordance with drawings andspecifications.



2 Erect scaffold 2.1 Scaffolding erected to job and OH&S requirements.

3 Construct framework andline eaves

3.1 Framework structure for eaves identified and set outto drawings and specifications.

3.2 Timber framework members set out, marked and cutto lengths in accordance with methods of joining andproposed framework structure.

3.3 Boxed eaves constructed with soffit bearers fixed towall frame or supported by hangers from rafters toline and level +/- 2mm over any 3 metres.

3.4 Boxed eaves structure installed clear of top ofmasonry walls in veneer construction to allow forframe shrinkage and settlement.

3.5 Eaves structure installed with all members fixedsecurely to specifications, including backblocking andtrimmers.

3.6 Open eaves lined/sheeted on top of rafters tospecifications for fixing and joining of material.

3.7 Eaves cladding/sheeting material marked and cut toshape to suit fascia groove and jointing methods.

3.8 Sloping soffits lined/sheeted to underside of rafters tospecifications for fixing and joining of material.

3.9 Eaves lining fitted, joined and fixed in accordancewith type of material, to specifications.

Finish eaves BCG3022A


3.10 Edge beading, where applicable, fitted and fixed tospecifications to finish eaves.

4 Clean up 4.1 Scaffolding safely dismantled andcomponents/materials removed and stacked.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the construction and finish of eaves to pitched roof structured buildings.

Eaves designs include:

• boxed eaves• concealed gutters• verandahs• sloping soffits• open eaves

Material finishes include:

• cement sheeting• timber lining boards• timber battens• lined on top rafters• lined to soffit of rafters










• measuring tape/rule• hammer• spirit level• squares• nail bag• chisels• hand saws• saw stools• power saws• power drill• nail gun• air compressor and hoses• power leads• scaffolding• string lines

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by constructing and finishing at least two separate eaves designs of thoselisted within the range of variables statement.




• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context offitting out and finishing of eaves

• identify design details and materials to be used for eaves finish• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• erect scaffolding safely and correctly in accordance with OH&S requirements for Restricted

Height scaffolding• demonstrate safe and effective procedures used to construct framework for eaves• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to fit and fix materials to finish eaves• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work procedures• give attention to alignment and level of constructed framework



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry)• BCG 2004ACarry out levelling



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawings and specifications

Finish eaves BCG3022A


• roof construction• wall framing construction• materials• tools and equipment• calculation of material requirements• methods of fixing materials• measuring and levelling


• work safely• organise work• read and interpret drawings• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively• calculate material quantities• measure and level in accordance with eaves construction• construct framework



• roof structure completed with fascia• tools and equipment appropriate to construction and finishing processes• scaffolding appropriate to activity• materials appropriate to proposed eaves construction and finishes• drawings and specifications of proposed activities









KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 2 2 1 1 1

BCG3023A Install exterior cladding


BCG3023A: Install exterior cladding



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andcladding buildings recognised and adhered to.




1.6 Delivered materials checked for conformity to quantityrequirements and specifications.

1.7 Scaffolding erected to job and OH&S requirements,where applicable.

2 Straighten and prepareexterior walls

2.1 Timber frame checked for straightness and studstrimmed or packed to tolerance + or – 1mm acrossstuds over any 2.4 metre length.

2.2 Additional row/s of nogging fitted and fixed to line,flush with wall face and plumb within + or –2mmvertical alignment over 2.4 metres.

2.3 Sub-floor structural members checked for flush withwall face and trimmed back where required.

3 Fix timber plinth, flashingand insulation

3.1 Location of timber plinth, where required, determinedin accordance with cladding material, sub floorstructure and specifications.

3.2 Material for plinth marked and cut to length tospecification with mitred joints made at fixinglocations to frame.

3.3 Plinth fixed to specification to level and line within + or- 2mm tolerance over any 3 metre length.

3.4 Flashing, where applicable, prepared to length,positioned and secured to specifications.

3.5 Wall insulation, where required, cut, lapped and fixedto specifications.

Install exterior cladding BCG3023A


4 Set out and prepare forhorizontalpanelling/weatherboards

4.1 Cover for weatherboards/panelling determined fromrecommended lap, type and profile of board oreffective covering of interlocking panelling and heightof wall.

4.2 Weatherboard or panelling stops, where applicable,cut to length, fitted and fixed into place tospecifications.

4.3 Locations of each board or starting board marked onframe or stop to determined or specified position.

4.4 Board or panelling designed in set tins out for samecover appearance at top of wall.

4.5 Wall face checked for conformity to specifiedflashings at doors and windows.

5 Fix horizontalpanelling/weatherboards

5.1 Panelling/boards cut to full length where practical tofit length of wall faces.

5.2 Joining of timber boards made by butt joints at centreof studs to tolerance of -1mm with joint flush to faceand line.

5.3 Joining of other material panelling and boards madeby use of manufacturer's recommended joiningprofiles fitted to specification, maintaining alignment.

5.4 Panelling/boards cut, fitted and fixed tomanufacturer's and job specifications to line and level+ or - 2mm over any 3 metre length.

5.5 Material, subject to splitting, predrilled for fixing at endjunction or butt joints to avoid splitting.

5.6 Junction at eaves finished to drawing details andspecifications.

5.7 Internal and external corners finished tomanufacturer's recommendations and jobspecifications.

5.8 Timber weather boards, where specified, preparedwith specified primer to cover overlaps and end joints.

6 Fix vertical panelling/boards 6.1 Starting position of first panel/board determined inaccordance with specified design and finished effectagainst windows, doors and corners.

6.2 Panelling/boards cut to full length, where practical, tofit height of wall.

6.3 Abutting joints of panelling/boards made tomanufacturer's specification requirements coveringflashing.



6.4 Panelling/boards cut, fitted and fixed tomanufacturer’s recommendations and jobspecification maintaining plumb to tolerance + or -2mm over 2.4m unless otherwise specified.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the cladding of exterior surfaces of framed wall structures using:

• timber weatherboards• tongue and grooved timber boards• vinyl weatherboards and cladding• aluminium weatherboards• metal panelling• fibre cement sheet panels and planks• tempered hardboard strips


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to specification of work






• measuring tape/rule• hammer• spirit level• squares• nail bag• chisels



• hand saws• saw stools• power saws• power drill• power planer• nail gun• air compressor and hoses• power leads• scaffolding• string lines• chalk line• tin snips

Panelling or boards, where suitable for application, may also be fixed at an angle onto face of wall.

Wall insulation with cladding may involve double sided aluminium foil sheeting.

Fixing of cladding will differ in accordance with timber or steel framing and type of material being fixed.

Fasteners for fixing may include but are not limited to:

• nails• screws• self tapping screws• patented clips

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by installing at least two (2) types of material finishes of those listed inthe range of variables statement, to nominated external wall surfaces. One is to be of horizontal boards andthe other of sheeted material.




• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context ofinstalling external cladding

• identify location and details of materials and wall framing involved with installation• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• use safe and effective procedures to fix, fit and install wall cladding finish• give attention to flashing connections and finish at junctions with walls, doors and window frames• identification of typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations• complete wall cladding to specifications



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry)





• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawings and specifications• materials• wall frame construction• window and door frames• tools and equipment• fasteners and fixing• calculation of material requirements• methods of fixing materials• measuring and leveling• scaffolding


• work safely• organise and set out work• use tools and equipment• calculate material quantities• measure and level in accordance with external cladding processes• erect scaffolding• communicate effectively



• workplace location with framed wall/s ready with door and /or window frames installed• scaffolding appropriate to proposed activities• tools and equipment appropriate to installation processes• materials appropriate to proposed cladding processes• drawings and specifications relevant to proposed activities











KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 2 2 1 1 1



BCG3024A: Construct timber external stairs




1.3 Design of stair and method of joining identified fromjob drawings and specifications and in accordancewith Building Code of Australia and AS1657.

1.4 Materials and quantities determined from jobdrawings and specifications.



1.7 Safety hazards identified and correct proceduresused to minimise risk to self and others.

2 Set out and prepare material 2.1 Exit and ground finish levels determined from jobdrawings and site location.

2.2 Rise, going and pitch of stairs determined from jobdrawings, site location, rise measurements andrequirements of Building Code of Australia.

2.3 Full size set out of stairs made to determined rise,going and pitch of stairs to provide actual location oflandings, strings, treads and newels.

2.4 Location of stair and newels determined from jobdrawings and pitch of stairs or full size set out.

2.5 Location of newels and footings set out to layout ofdesigned stairs, job drawings and specifications orfull size set out, where applicable.

2.6 Materials for strings selected and set out to pitch ofstairs with rises not to exceed 125mm space betweentreads.

2.7 Strings cut square to length and shape in accordancewith set out and junction with newels.

2.8 Material for newels selected and set out to design ofstairs, storey rods and job drawings or from full sizeset out.

Construct timber external stairs BCG3024A


2.9 Newels cut square to length and housed out toprovide tight fit for strings and bearers, whereapplicable, to specifications.

2.10 Material for treads set out and cut square to length torequirements of stair design and Building Code ofAustralia.

3 Assemble and erect stair 3.1 Footings with metal post support prepared torequirements of job drawings and specifications,where applicable.

3.2 Metal angle brackets screwed/bolted to strings to setout locations for tread support to requirements ofdetail drawings and specifications.

3.3 Newels erected into position and temporarily bracedto plumb position.

3.4 Strings located and fixed into position tospecifications.

3.5 Tie bolts, located and secured to specification, tomaintain stair width, where applicable.

3.6 Landing bearers and joists placed and fixed intoposition to specifications.

3.7 Stair attached to building in accordance with detaileddrawings and specifications.

3.8 Treads and decking fixed into location to detaileddrawings and specifications.

3.9 Bracing and lateral ties fixed to newels tospecifications to maintain rigidity of stair structure,where applicable.

4 Fit and fix handrailing andbalustrade

4.1 Material for handrailing and balustrade marked andcut to length.

4.2 Handrailing fitted and fixed into place to specificationsat not less than 865mm above nosing line on a flightand 1m above a landing deck.

4.3 Balustrade fitted and fixed into place to specificationsand requirements of Building Code of Australia.

5 Finish stairs 5.1 Arises and sharp edges removed and finished tospecification.

5.2 Non-slip strips adhered to treads, where required, inaccordance with specifications.



6 Clean up 6.1 Area cleared and waste disposed of safely.



RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to all timber constructed external stairs which may involve one or more flights in its structureand could incorporate fabricated steel posts as an alternative to timber for newels.

All construction to be carried out in accordance with structural requirements as laid down in the Building Codeof Australia and AS1657-1992 Fixed Platforms, Walkways, Stairways and Ladders – Design, Constructionand Installation.


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to specification of work






• measuring tape/rule• hammer• spirit level• squares• nail bag• chisels• hand saws• saw stools• power saws• power drill• power planer• nail gun• air compressor and hoses• power leads• string lines



• shovels• fencing bars• spanner• steel square and fence• bevels

Connections for timber construction include but are not limited to:

• nails/spikes• bolts and nuts• coach screws• steel tie rods• metal brackets

Connections for steel construction may include:

• bolts• welding• patented metal connecting plates

Balustrade construction may be of:

• parallel railing fixed to face of newels• handrail and balusters fixed to face of newels• handrailing morticed into newels

Methods of fixing stair members to masonry walls may include but are not limited to:

• masonry anchors• metal angle brackets• wall plug and coach screw

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the safe and effective assembly and erection of timber external stairscovering one flight and a landing including handrail or balustrade, to a nominated project.




• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context ofconstructing and installing timber external stairs

• identify location and of external timber stair construction• carry out accurate calculations to determine actual rise for each step and pitch of stairs• prepare accurate set out of stair in order to mark all stair components• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to construct stair• accurate setting out of each stair member in accordance with determined stair construction or full

size set out• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to prepare stair components, assemble and fix to

position in accordance with the Building Code of Australia and specifications• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• complete stair construction to location and specification• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations





• BCG1003A Read and interpret plans• BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry)• BCG2004A Carry and leveling• BCG3016A Install sub floor framing



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawings and specifications• building Code of Australia• stair construction• leveling and measuring• calculations related to stair construction• materials• tools and equipment• fixing and fasteners


• work safely• organise work• read and interpret drawings• use tools and equipment• measure and level relevant to stair construction• set out material and location• calculate stair measurement details and quantities• communicate effectively



• work location ready for stair construction and installation• plant and equipment appropriate to construction processes• construction materials appropriate to proposed construction• hand and power tools appropriate to construction process• drawings and specifications and documentation applicable to proposed construction




• observation of application process• questioning related to underpinning knowledge• inspection of completed construction







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 2 2 1 1 1



BCG3025A: Install external or internal doors



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andinstalling external and internal doors, recognised andadhered to.

1.3 Installation of doors carried out in accordance withAS1909-1984 Installation of Timber Doorsets, whereapplicable.

1.4 Materials and doors checked for conformity againstdrawings, specifications and door schedule.



2 Prepare door opening forjamb unit

2.1 Frame opening size checked to be greater than doorjamb size to clearances allowing for plumbing ofstiles, thickness of floor covering and level head.

2.2 Door opening prepared to specifications so thatpacking is located against hinged side stud to plumb.

2.3 Floor across door opening checked for level anddifferences noted.

3 Install hinged door unit 3.1 Jamb stiles marked and cut to length allowing fordoor height, clearances, floor covering and floor level.

3.2 Hinges fitted to door and jamb stile prepared forhinges allowing for 3mm clearance at head.

3.3 Door jamb assembled and fixed to specifications withstile and head edges flush.

3.4 Jamb hinge stile fixed into position, plumb and flushwith wall lining to specification.

3.5 Door hung and jamb fixed into position, plumb, flushwith wall lining, out of winding and with 3mm parallelclearance to specifications.

3.6 Architraves marked, cut, fitted and fixed tospecifications with mitres closed and specified marginuniform around door jamb.

Install external or internal doors BCG3025A


3.7 Door furniture fitted to manufacturer's specificationsand door stop fitted and fixed to specification.

4 Install door to fixed doorframe

4.1 Door checked for fitting to door frame with clearancesof 3mm all round and specified floor clearance

4.2 Door planed and fitted to specified clearances forinstallation, where applicable.

4.3 Hinges fitted and fixed to hinge edge of door tospecification.

4.4 Hinge positions marked from door to frame, checkedout and fitted and door installed and aligned withframe stiles, to specification.

4.5 Closing edge of door splayed back no more than2mm where required to prevent binding with frame.

5 Install split jamb, pre-hungdoor unit

5.1 Jamb stiles and architraves marked and cut to lengthallowing for clearances, floor covering and level offloor.

5.2 One side of door unit installed with stiles floor butted,jambs out of winding, door plumb and free fromwinding and parallel clearance around door tospecifications.

5.3 Architraves fitted and fixed against wall lining tospecifications.

5.4 Packing placed between jamb stiles and studs andfixed to manufacturer’s specifications.

5.5 Other side of unit positioned with stiles and headreveals located, aligned across face with butt jointsparallel to fixed side.

5.6 Architraves fitted and fixed against wall lining and unitfixed to specifications.

5.7 Door furniture fitted to manufacturer's specificationsand door stop fitted and fixed to specification.

6 Install bi-fold or internalsliding door

6.1 Door jambs measured and adjusted to level.

6.2 Track cut to door opening size and fixed centrally andparallel to head lining.

6.3 Brackets and doors fixed to manufacturer’sspecifications so that door is centrally placed inopening and operates freely.

6.4 Architraves fitted and fixed to specifications.



6.5 Door furniture fitted to manufacturer's specificationsand stop guide, where applicable, fitted and fixed tospecifications.

7 Install flywire door 7.1 Door installed with hinges set as specified.

7.2 Clearance 3mm maintained all around without bindingor wind.

7.3 Door furniture and closer fitted to manufacturer'sspecifications.

8 Install cavity sliding door 8.1 Wall frame opening prepared with opening sizecorresponding to manufacturer's specifications.

8.2 Door unit fixed in wall opening with closing jambplumb and cavity sliding unit aligned with jambsparallel and head level.

8.3 Door frame installed so that door moves freely, iscentral and fitted plumb against closing jamb.

8.4 Door edge and split jamb installed parallel.

8.5 Door furniture fitted to manufacturer’s specificationsand stop/guide, where applicable fitted and fixed tospecifications.

9 Fix pelmet and architrave’s 9.1 Pelmet constructed to specified requirements.

9.3 Architraves marked, cut, fitted and fixed tospecifications with head sections level and marginsparallel.

10 Hang sliding door 10.1 Height requirements determined and bottom edge ofdoor grooved to manufacturer's specifications.

10.2 Door jamb prepared and assembled allowing forclearances and coverage where applicable andinstalled to specifications.

10.3 Door guides positioned and fixed to specifications,parallel with edges of door and abutting carcass stile.

10.4 Track mounting board, door races and double runnerfitted to job and manufacturer’s specifications andcover strip fitted evenly, where applicable.

11 Fit trim and door hardware 11.1 Top trim fitted parallel to track and side trim fittedplumb and flush with top trim.

11.2 Door hardware fitted and fixed neatly in accordancewith specifications.



11.3 Door hung into position and adjusted where requiredto operate to specification and finish flush or parallelwith jamb.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to full height internal doors installed to:

• doorways• built-in robes• walk-in pantries• cupboards

It applies to all external hinged and installed sliding doors

Types of sliding doors include:

• face sliding• internal between jamb stiles






• safety glasses/goggles• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators


• measuring tape/rule• hammer• spirit level• Squares• chisels



• hand saws• saw stools• power saws• power drills• power planer• nail gun• air compressor and hoses• power leads• straight edge• wedges• screwdrivers• power screwdrivers• hand planes

Methods for fixing and fastening include but are not limited to:

• nailing• use of nail gun• screws• self tapping screws

Packing material should be non compressible which includes:


Types of doors include:

• flush panel• framed and panelled• glazed

Door furniture varies in accordance with manufacturer's design and client's choice but the range includes:

• handles• grips• locks• latches• push plates• closers

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by installing one of each of the types of door units categorised in thecompetency unit.




• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context ofinstalling full height doors to buildings

• identify location and details of door units to be installed• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to prepare and install each door unit



• install each door to designed floor clearance• adopt and apply appropriate and efficient procedures to install each door unit to designed

operation and finish• carry out installation of door furniture to door schedule and without damage to material surfaces• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1008A Use simple leveling devices• BCG3009A Construct and install non-lead bearing internal partition wall• BCG3021A Install door frames



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• AS1909-1984 Installation of Timber Doorsets• working drawings and specifications• construction of doors• installation of doors• materials• tools and equipment• fixing and fasteners• measuring and levelling• door hardware and furniture• Quality Assurance


• work safely• read and interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• use tools and equipment• use fixings and fasteners• measure and level relevant to installation processes



• workplace locations ready for installation of doors• door units appropriate to installation processes• door hardware and furniture applicable to installation processes• tools and equipment appropriate to installation processes• drawings, specifications and documentation applicable to proposed activities




• observation of application process



• inspection of installed unit• questioning related to underpinning knowledge





KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 2 2 1 1 1



BCG3026A: Install fitments



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment forpreparing and installing fitments identified andadhered to.

1.3 Drawings and specifications interpreted so that unitsare correctly located and material requirements andmethod of installation are identified.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected to carry out processesconsistent with job requirements and, checked forserviceability.

2 Select and prepare materialsfor installing fitments

2.1 Fitments and materials selected and checked forconformity against drawings and specifications.

3 Install fitments 3.1 Location of fitment set out and prepared to installationrequirements from drawings and specifications.

3.2 Fitment located into place, fitted where applicable andinstalled level and plumb within +/- 1mm.

3.3 Fitments installed to specifications so that visual gapsand spaces are no greater than 1mm.

3.4 Bench tops positioned, secured and aligned parallelto face and end of fitment units, to specifications.

3.5 Units fixed securely into position to specifications.

3.6 Finish to walls or floor carried out to specifiedrequirements.

4 Clean up 4.1 Area surrounding unit cleaned.



Install fitments BCG3026A


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the fitting and fixing of fitments to walls and floors of buildings.

Types of fitments include:

• vanity cabinet• medicine cabinet• laundry cupboard• kitchen units• shelving units• wall units• bar units• robes• cabinets• cupboards

Wall structure for fixing of fitments may be:

• timber wall frame• metal wall frame• brickwork• blockwork• concrete

Floor structure for fixing of fitments may be:

• flooring boards on sub floor structure of steel or timber• structural sheeting on sub floor structure• reinforced concrete slab








• measuring tape/rule• hammer



• spirit level• squares• chisels• hand saws• saw stools• power drills including impact masonry drills• nail gun• air compressor and hoses• power leads• spanners• explosive power tools• hand plane• power plane

Preparation of location to installation requirements may include:

• packing or planing of studs• locating studs behind sheet plastered walls• marking level or plumb line• positioning and fixing plugs to masonry or concrete wall• checking of levels floor• positioning and fixing plugs to concrete floor

Fitting of fitments prior to fixing into place may include:

• planing edge to fit wall or floor surface• packing surface to fit level or plumb• marking fixing locations to fitment

Methods of fixing may include:

• nails• screws• bolts• adhesives• drive pins• patented fasteners• masonry anchors

Finish to walls or floor may include timber moulding fixing.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by installing at least two (2) of the types of fitments listed within the rangeof variables statement.




• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of installing fitments• identify location, flashing and fixing details from drawings or specifications• give attention to accuracy in fitting and fixing fitment to level and plumb• give attention to handling of fitment and secure fixing into place

Install fitments BCG3026A


• protect face surfaces from damage during installation and follow up trades• use safe and effective procedures to install fitment to specification• identify typical faults and problems that occur and the necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective installation operations



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry)• BCG2000A Prepare surfaces• BCG2004A Carry out levelling• BCG2008A Use explosive power tools



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawing and specifications• wall and floor construction• types of fitments• materials• tools and equipment• fixing and fasteners• methods of fixing• levelling and measuring


• work safely• read and interpret drawings• organise work• use tools and equipment• use fixings and fasteners• measure and level relative to installing fitments• communicate effectively



• workplace location for installation process• tools and equipment appropriate to installation processes• fitments and associated materials appropriate to proposed activity• drawings and specifications relevant to proposed activity


Competency in this unit should be assessed through direct observation and questions related tounderpinning knowledge.

Competency should be assessed under general guidance checking at various stages of the processand at the completion of the activity against performance criteria and specifications.




Competency should be assessed in the workplace or simulated workplace setting.

Assessment should be while tasks are undertaken either individually or as part of a team underlimited supervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 1 2 2 2



BCG3027A: Construct wet area construction/installation


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements with company’sconstruction operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andcarrying out wet area construction/installation identifiedand adhered to.

1.3 Type of construction and support materials andflashings identified from job drawings andspecifications.

1.4 All work carried out in accordance with AS3740-1994Waterproofing of Wet Areas Within ResidentialBuildings.



2 Set out 2.1 Fitment or fixture checked for specific measurementsin accordance with drawings and specifications.

2.2 Construction/installation set out to specified locationand dimensions.

3 Prepare for bath installation 3.1 Studs checked out to required depth to receive lip ofbath.

3.2 Dwarf timber walls constructed to specifications forsupport of bath to height and level.

3.3 Nogging and short studs, where required, fitted andfixed flush to wall face to specifications, for fixingsurround sheeting.

3.4 Water resistant plasterboard or fibre cement sheetingand flashing fitted and fixed to specifications ifrequired.

4 Prepare for shower baseinstallation

4.1 Wall plates and studs checked out to required depth toreceived shower base.

4.2 Flooring installed to specification.

4.3 Nogging and short studs, where required, fitted andfixed flush to wall face to specifications for fixing

Construct wet area construction/installation BCG3027A


surround sheeting.

4.4 Corner flashing installed to Building Code of Australiaand local council regulations.

4.5 Water resistant plasterboard or fibre cement sheetingand flashing, fitted and fixed to specifications ifrequired.

4.6 Waterproofing applied to specifications and inaccordance with Building Code of Australia andAS3740.

5 Install vanity unit 5.1 Flashing for vanity unit fitted to vanity top in accordancewith specifications, Building Code of Australia andAS3740

5.2 Vanity unit located level in position and fixed tospecifications.

6 Install sink unit 6.1 Flashing for sink unit fitted to unit top in accordancewith specifications, Building Code of Australia andAS3740.

6.2 Sink unit located level in position and fixed tospecifications.

6.3 Fibre cement sheet, where required, cut to size, fittedand fixed to wall, to specifications.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

Wet area construction areas include:

• bathrooms• laundries• showers• ensuites• kitchens• food preparation

This unit applies to fixtures and fitments fitted into or against walls and may include:

• precast baths• shower bases• vanity units• sink units• trough units



Vanity and sink units may have basins designed centrally or fitted to back of bench tops


• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• respirators/dust masks• ear muffs/plugs


• spanners• measuring tape/rule• Level• hammer• hand saw• power saw• power drill• chisels• power leads• nail gun• air compressor and hoses• screwdrivers• power planer• explosive power tool


• condition of supplied unit• quality control of handling• quality of materials• skill application• specification finish



Methods of fixing include but are not limited to:

• nailing• use of nail gun• screws• clouts

Waterproofing agents may be membrane type or liquid.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by installing supporting framework, fixtures and flashings associated withwet area construction for a bath, a shower base and a sink unit.

Construct wet area construction/installation BCG3027A





• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of wet area

construction/installation• ensure all noggings, trimmers and dwarf walls installed to line level and plumb• calculate and maintain allowances for linings and finishes• remove minimum material from structural members when checking out to accommodate fixtures• install all fitments with falls to waste outlets• install flashings in accordance with Building Code of Australia and AS3740• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations• complete installation to specifications



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices• BCG1014A Prepare for construction (dry wall plastering)• BCG2001A Prepare surfaces• BCG2008A Use explosive power tools



• workplace and equipment safety requirements including relevant statutory regulations and codes• capillary action• electrolysis and corrosion of dissimilar metals• Building Code of Australia and relevant Australian Standards including AS3740 – 1994

Waterproofing of wet areas within residential buildings• waterproofing and flashing• drawing and specifications• fitment and fixtures• materials• tools and equipment• fixing and fasteners• measuring and leveling


• work safely• organise work• interpret drawings and specifications• interpret documentation from a wide range of sources• use tools and equipment• use fixings and fasteners• measure and level relevant to installation processes



• communicate effectively• carry out calculations



• workplace location ready for installation• tools and equipment appropriate to construction and installation processes• fitments and fixtures applicable to proposed activities• materials appropriate to installation processes• drawings, specifications and documentation relevant to proposed activity


Competency in this unit should be assessed through direct observation of application to tasks andquestions related to underpinning knowledge.




Assessment shall be while tasks are undertaken either individually or working with a partner underindirect supervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 1 2 1 2 2 2

BCC3028A Control traffic


BCC3028A: Control traffic


1 Plan and prepare traffic controlprocedure

1.1 Areas of responsibility relating to traffic controllerscorrectly identified and described.

1.2 Responsibilities and authority of a site supervisorcorrectly identified and described.

1.3 Legislated powers delegated to a traffic controllercorrectly identified and described.

1.4 Appointment process for traffic controllers correctlyidentified and described.

1.5 Uniform and personal protective requirements for trafficcontrollers correctly identified.

1.6 Mandatory signage requirements for traffic controloperations correctly identified.

1.7 Maximum speed limit for traffic control operationscorrectly identified.

1.8 Additional signage requirements for different trafficcontrol options correctly identified.

1.9 Traffic control options for intersections with varioustraffic volumes on side road correctly identified.

1.10 Procedures to deal with substandard traffic controllerperformance correctly identified.

1.11 Procedures to deal with offenders correctly identified.

2 Establish traffic controloperations

2.1 Work schedule, maximum traffic delays, signals andsite communications determined and adhered to.

2.2 Appropriate line of sight signals used to communicateeffectively with other controllers where two-way radiosare unavailable.

2.3 Workplace Health and Safety requirements adhered to.

2.4 Site supervisor consulted and traffic controlrequirements determined.

2.5 Traffic control equipment selected in accordance withsite and road traffic requirements.

2.6 Site and traffic variables correctly identified.

2.7 Safe location for stopping traffic selected.

2.8 Adequate escape route available at location selected.

Control traffic BCC3028A


2.9 Location selected to ensure adequate sight distancebetween traffic controller and motorist for approachingtraffic speed.

2.10 Reference point to establish safe stopping zoneselected and/or marked.

2.11 Traffic guidance scheme required by site supervisorconfirmed.

2.12 Proposed positions for advance warning signs andtraffic control devices checked against road trafficauthority requirements.

2.13 Speed limit for site complies with MUTCDrequirements.

2.14 Supervisor advised of discrepancies with trafficguidance scheme.

3 Assist in setting out the trafficguidance scheme

3.1 Fully charged battery connected to hand held radio.

3.2 Radio controls adjusted for optimum transmission andreception.

3.3 Radio contact verified.

3.4 Radio messages clearly and concisely transmitted.

3.5 Radio contact periodically checked.

3.6 Spare, charged battery kept readily available.

3.7 Batteries placed on charge as required or after workcompleted.

3.8 Work crew assisted to place advance warning signs asrequired.

3.9 Appropriate traffic control sign correctly positioned oneach approach, according to road traffic authorityrequirements.

3.10 Traffic cones placed to delineate traffic control position.

3.11 Traffic controlled effectively to protect work crew whoare placing traffic control devices around work area.

3.12 Verbal and non-verbal communications with the publicto promote good public relations.

3.13 Supervisor advised of changing traffic patternsrequiring modifications to the guidance scheme.

4 Direct traffic 4.1 Workplace Health and Safety and relevant code of



practice requirements adhered to.

4.2 Correct position for controlling traffic adopted.

4.3 Procedure for controlling traffic with a STOP/SLOW orSTOP bat/banner adhered to.

4.4 Approved signals used to stop approaching trafficsafely.

4.5 Motorists advised of delays, work area drivingconditions and requirements as necessary when safeto do so.

4.6 Work area traffic monitored.

4.7 Relevant, recognised signals used correctly to directtraffic through controlled area.

4.8 Approaching traffic monitored and adjustments madeto maintain a safe and effective traffic flow.

5 Close down traffic controloperations

5.1 Appropriate documentation accurately completed torecord required information and descriptions.

5.2 Traffic Controller's Incident Report form correctlycompleted, where applicable.

5.3 Traffic controlled effectively to protect work crew whoare removing traffic control devices from work area.

5.4 Traffic cones used to delineate traffic control pointremoved.

5.5 Appropriate traffic control sign/s removed oradequately covered.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the controlling of traffic with civil construction works associated with public access roads.It is to be carried out in accordance with the relevant State/Territory legislative regulations for traffic control.

Controlling of traffic under a range of environments, including:

Terrain - flat to steep range roadsWeather - bright sun, low sun, windy, raining, foggyRoad surfaces - dry, wet, dusty, loose gravel, sealed and slipperyVehicle type - large, heavy, articulated, fast moving vehicleLocality - rural, urban, residentialTime of day - daytime, night-time, dawn, dusk

Task details may include:

• worksite inspection, nature and scope of task determined• potential hazards identified• appropriate information, verbal or written, ascertained



Legislative/regulative adherence may include:

• obligations under Workplace Health and Safety Act 1995 and requirements of relevant compliance andadvisory standards

• personal protective equipment and the traffic controller uniform• traffic control requirements for site determined through consultation with site supervisor• traffic control equipment needed to suit site and traffic control operations in accordance with the road

traffic authority and site operation requirements• the criteria to be considered when selecting a suitable traffic control position that meets site and road

traffic authority requirements• Traffic Guidance Scheme examined and selected control location discussed with supervisor• effects of site factors affecting braking distance and traffic flow

Civil construction works includes:

• road works• earth works• dam construction• bridges• tunnelling


• Road Traffic Authority• State Roads Authority• Traffic Regulations Act• Code of Practice – traffic controller, where available




• personal protective equipment and traffic controller uniform fitted and used correctly• oncoming traffic faced while standing just outside travelled path• vehicle capable of stopping safely is selected• bat/banner sign held upright near path of vehicle to be stopped, with STOP banner facing the driver.

Hand held banner sign held and maintained above shoulder height• words TRAFFIC CONTROLLER on vest are not obscured by bat/banner sign• traffic controller looking at driver and right hand raised into a STOP signal with palm facing towards traffic• bat/banner sign waved from side to side to attract driver’s attention• position where vehicle required to stop indicated to driver• after first vehicle has stopped traffic controller moves out and stands in line with driver's side headlight

and extends bat/banner sign beyond driver's side of vehicle, with STOP banner facing the traffic that isrequired to stop

• traffic controller watches for traffic approaching from behind and moves towards driver of first vehicle, ifrequired and if safe to do so

• Driver told reason for and length of delay as well as speed required when signalled to move on• traffic controller watches for traffic approaching from behind and moves back towards position in front of

driver's side headlight, remaining in that position while holding bat upright or hand held banner sign aboveshoulder height, with STOP banner facing traffic required to stop

• check made to ensure the traffic approaching from other direction has stopped, traffic has passed out ofcontrolled area and travelled path is clear of machinery/plant/workers



• traffic controller moves back to outside travelled path, while continuing to hold STOP banner to face firstdriver

• traffic controller checks visually to ensure no vehicles approaching along left hand side of stationaryqueue of traffic



Communications include:

• include two-way radios• hand signals/paddles• site specific instructions

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the safe and effective controlling of traffic using any of the conditionsand processes listed within the range of variables statement.

(1) Critical Aspect and Evidence

It is essential that competence by observed in the following aspects.

• compliance with Occupation Health and Safety codes and acts consistent with State/Territorylegislative requirements

• compliance with organisational policies and procedures including Quality Assurancerequirements

• interpreting and communicating activity information• interactive communication to perform safely in a range of environments• understanding emergency procedures and appropriate responses• ability to transfer skills to changing circumstances/environmental conditions• vehicles and pedestrian traffic within site monitored to ensure safety of workers and the public• traffic monitored and adjustments made for changing conditions, and an even traffic flow

maintained through site• procedures to deal with emergency vehicles identified• traffic control operations performed effectively to protect work crew removing traffic control

devices from work area


This unit of competency is dependent upon acquiring the relevant pre-requisite competencies inbasic industry and basic stream skills



• safety requirements including appropriate State/Territory legislation, regulations, codes and acts• activity procedures• possible hazards and problems with traffic control• emergency procedures• basic signalling




• apply eye-hand co-ordination• access, interpret and apply technical information• maintain equipment records• use communication means• solve problems• work under public scrutiny• work in restricted spaces• communicate effectively



• traffic controller equipment appropriate to the particular activity• suitable work area appropriate to the particular activity











KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 2 2 2 2



BCG3029A: Fix timber mouldings



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andfitting and fixing of timber mouldings recognised andadhered to.

1.3 Materials for fixing out selected and checked forconformity against drawings and specifications.



2 Fit and fix nosing to windows 2.1 Location of nosing set out to specifications with marginparallel with sill.

2.2 Nosing marked and cut to length specified.

2.3 Stop mitre fitted flush and true without gap, whereapplicable.

2.4 Nosing return end finished to specification andpositioned equal distance from each side architrave.

2.5 Nosing fixed to specifications free of marks on finishedsurface.

3 Cut and fix architraves towindow and doorframes/jambs

3.1 Architrave edge scribed and fitted to wall to within1mm, where applicable.

3.2 Architraves marked, cut to length, positioned and fittedto specifications.

3.3 Mitre joints fitted flush to face and true without gap.

3.4 Margin for architrave maintained parallel with sill,where applicable, and with stiles and head of frame.

3.5 Architraves fixed into place to specification.

4 Cut and fit scotia mould towindows

4.1 Scribed joint cut and fitted true without gap for internalangle joint between scotia lengths.

4.2 Scotia return end cut to profile shape and length as

Fix timber mouldings BCG3029A


detailed for location in drawings/specifications.

4.3 Scotia fixed to specifications with surface and returnend free from marks.

5 Construct and install pelmets 5.1 Pelmets constructed so that mitres fitted on face andedge, arises removed and material free from marks.

5.2 Details of measurements of pelmet determined fromactual door/window frame and/or drawings andspecifications.

5.3 Pelmet sections marked to length, cut, fitted andassembled to specifications with mitres true withoutgaps.

5.4 Pelmet fitted and secured to location to specificationsin accordance with manner of removal/lifting.

6 Fit and fix skirting 6.1 Skirting prepared with scribes cut and fitted and scribefixed against wall lining.

6.2 Other scribe joints cut and fitted to form internal cornerjoints between skirting lengths.

6.3 Mitre cuts set out, marked and cut and stopped endsfitted without error.

6.4 Lengths of skirting marked accurately in accordancewith end joints and cut accurately.

6.5 Scribes and mitres fitted to specification with joints truewithout gaps.

6.6 Skirtings fitted to wall and floor to line, flush with walland within 1mm of floor.

6.7 Skirting fixed to wall through lining and framework tospecifications.





RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to all timber mouldings used to provide a finish between walls and:

• floors• windows• door frames/jambs



• built-in cupboards• built-in robes• fitments• stairs




• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• working platforms and scaffolding• use of adhesives




• measuring tape/rule• hammer• spirit level• squares• chisels• hand saws• saw stools• power saws• power drills• power planer• nail gun• air compressor and hoses• power leads• hand plane• coping saw

Finishes to window sills include:

• nosing and scotia• architrave mitred• architrave reversed and butted

Mouldings on architraves and skirtings include:

• splayed• bullnosed• ornate period profile

Fix timber mouldings BCG3029A


Method of fixing may include:

• Nails• Screws• Adhesives• Nailgun

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by fixing at least one separate moulding of those listed within the range ofvariables statement, to each of the element situations shown in the standard.




• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of thefitting and fixing of timber mouldings

• identify location and details of each moulding to be installed• select and use of appropriate processes, tools and equipment• give attention to accuracy in measuring, marking and cutting of mouldings• use safe and effective procedures to cut, fit and fix mouldings• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• complete installation of mouldings to specifications• interactive communication with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations



• BCG1002A Plan and organise work• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1016A Prepare for construction (carpentry)

Some elements of this unit could be concurrently assessed with:

• BCG3025A Install external or internal doors• BCG3010A Install windows to wall framing• BCG3026A Install fitments• BCG3028A Fix linings and panelling



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawings and specifications• Quality Assurance• materials• tools and equipment



• fixing and fasteners• calculation of material requirements• methods of finishing with timber mouldings• adhesives• measuring and levelling


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• use tools and equipment• use fixings and fasteners• calculate material quantities• measure accurately• communicate effectively



• workplace location with lined room/s and installed doors and windows• tools and equipment appropriate to cutting, fitting and fixing processes• timber mouldings appropriate to finishing processes• drawings and specifications relevant to proposed activities




• observation of the application process• questioning related to underpinning knowledge• inspection of the installed mouldings





KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 1 3 1 1



BCG3030A: Replace glass



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andpreparing for and replacing glass to windowsrecognised and adhered to.

1.3 Materials checked against specifications orinstructions in accordance with actual job.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected to carry outprocesses consistent with job requirements andchecked for serviceability.


2 Remove damaged glass 2.1 Basic scaffold or ladder set up to job and OH&Srequirements, where applicable.

2.2 Timber or metal beading, where applicable, carefullyremoved avoiding damage to bead or frame.

2.3 Damaged glass safely removed from frame or sashand placed in waste container.

2.4 Splayed putty, where applicable, carefully removedavoiding damage to frame and rebate.

2.5 Rebate for glass cleaned free of anyresidue/pins/brads without damage.

3 Replace glass 3.1 Frame sanded and primer applied to rebate areas asspecified.

3.2 New glass scored and snapped safely and correctlyto accurate measurement with 4mm allowance.

3.3 Putty or silicone firmly applied to rebate and glasspressed in firmly and evenly into bedding.

3.4 Glass fixed into place to specification.

3.5 Timber bead fixed securely to wooden frame or metalbead screwed securely to metal frame to designedfinish, where applicable.

Replace glass BCG3030A


3.6 Putty applied to fill and smoothed with a flat blade toan even splayed finish aligned to rebate, whereapplicable.

3.7 Excess putty or silicone carefully removed.

4 Repair surface finish 4.1 Damaged surface/holes stopped off and surfacesanded to finish.

4.2 Paint surface repaired and finished to match existingcolour.

5 Clean up 5.1 Window and area cleaned.



RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to windows with wooden and metal frames and glass up to 4mm thickness.

Fixing and finishing of glass to frame may include:

• pins/brads and splayed putty• timber bead nailed into place• metal bead screwed into place


• measuring tape/rule• screwdrivers• chisels• glass cutters• hammers• putty knife• brushes• trestles• plank• straight edge• hacking knife• step ladders


• quality of materials• handling and cleaning techniques• installing of glass• specification finish




• Protective clothing and equipment• Working platforms• Handling of materials• Safety hazards


• Safety goggles/glasses• Boots• Gloves• Masks• Overalls

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by replacing the glass in a window frame or sash.



• demonstrate compliance with OH&S regulations applicable to workplace operations• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of repairing windows• identy location and details of waterproofing materials and application• selection and use of appropriate processes, tools and equipment• use safe and effective procedures to handle materials• use safe and effective procedures to prepare frame for installation of glass• identify typical faults and problems that occur and the necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective operations• complete installation and finish of surface edges to specifications



• BCG 1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG 1011A Handle construction materials and waste• BCG 2001A Prepare surfaces



• workplace and equipment safety requirements including relevant statutory regulations, codesand standards

• window and sash construction• materials and characteristics• methods of fixing glass• tools and equipment• fittings and fasteners• ladders and basic scaffolding

Replace glass BCG3030A



• work safely• organise work• use tools and equipment• work from ladders and elevated platforms• measure and mark accurately• cut glass• fix beading• communicate effectively



• workplace location• tools and equipment appropriate to removal and installation processes• appropriate materials for proposed activity• specifications relative to proposed activity


Competence should be assessed while tasks are undertaken.


• observation of application process• inspection of completed work• questioning related to underpinning knowledge





KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 2 2 2 1

BCG3031A Erect door jamb/frame (built-in unit)


BCG3031A: Erect door jamb/frame (built-in unit)



1.2 OH&S requirements for of building door frames intomasonry walls and workplace operations recognisedand adhered to.

1.3 Hand of door swing determined from job drawings anddoor schedule.

1.4 Size of openings and thickness of wall determined fromjob drawings.

1.5 Type and size of door jamb/frame determined fromdoor schedule.



1.8 Door jamb/frame identified and checked for sizeincluding height allowance for floor finish.

1.9 Stiles of door jamb adjusted and cut to length, whererequired.

2 Set out and prepare doorjamb/frame

2.1 Door frame location set out on slab in accordance withdimensions from job drawings.

2.2 Appropriate 'spreaders' located and temporarily fixedbetween door jamb stiles.

2.3 Appropriate brace attached to door jamb/frame tomaintain frame 'square'.

2.4 Built in attachments fixed to jamb/frame in accordancewith specifications.

3 Install door jamb/frame 3.1 Door jamb/frame erected/positioned in correct locationaccording to set out.

3.2 Base of door jamb/frame fixed to floor using specifiedfixing method in accordance with job specifications.

3.3 Door jamb/frame levelled, plumbed both ways andbraces fixed to frame and surrounds to maintain inposition.

Erect door jamb/frame (built-in unit) BCG3031A


4 Clean up 4.1 Waste materials removed from job area and placedinto job waste bins or rubbish stockpile.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to both timber and metal door jambs and door frames built into solid or cavity brickwork orblockwork construction.

For clarification, door frames incorporate a sill in their structure whilst door jambs consist only of a head andstiles.





Built in attachments fixed to frame may involve:

• strips fitted for cavity construction• brackets/straps for wall ties• steel dowels fitted to base of stiles (no sill)


• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators


• measuring tape/rule• hammer• hammer drill• explosive power tools• spirit level• saw stool• square• hand saw• power saw• power leads• hand plane

BCG3031A Erect door jamb/frame (built-in unit)


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by setting out, fixing and bracing a door jamb/frame into place, inpreparation for being built-in within the constructing of a masonry or a concrete wall.




• select and use appropriate processes, tool and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of erecting door

jamb/frame for built in construction• identify and select left or right handed frame• determine finished floor height from drawings and specifications• carry out accurate measurement to ensure frame/jamb located correctly• door framed plumb with stile edges parallel• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations• complete erection process with frame/jamb braced into place to specifications



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry)• BCG2004A Carry out levelling• BCG2008A Use explosive power tools• BCG3021A Install door frames



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• drawings and specifications• door frames and jambs• masonry construction• bracing for stability• materials• tools and equipment• measure and levelling• installation procedures


• work safely• read and interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• set out work• use tools and equipment• carry out levelling and bracing• fix materials• communicate effectively

Erect door jamb/frame (built-in unit) BCG3031A




• workplace location with completed slab floor• tools and equipment appropriate for application processes• door frame/jamb and associate material appropriate to installation processes• drawings and specifications relevant to proposed activity


Competency should be assessed through direct observation of application to tasks and questionsrelated to underpinning knowledge.




Assessment should be while tasks are undertaken either individually or working with a partner underindirect supervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 2 2 2 2



BCG3032A: Fix timber raking moulds



1.2 OH&S requirements for application tasks andworkplace environment, recognised and adhered to.

1.3 Materials and quantities to carry out tasks, determinedfrom job drawings and specifications.



2 Setout and develop bevelcuts and moulds

2.1 Standard mould and relevant sections checked forconformity against drawings, specifications andquantity order.

2.2 Set out made to plan and elevation using standardmould, plan shape and designed rake to determineadjoining moulds.

2.3 Set out developed to determine face and edge cuts formoulding.

3 Run moulds to designedshapes and required lengths

3.1 Patterns made to, or cut directly from setout to producerequired shapes of adjoining moulds.

3.2 Materials selected to overall size and required lengthfor adjoining mould and checks/cuts ends for square.

3.3 Pattern applied and materials accurately set out todesigned shape.

3.4 Materials dressed to smooth finish to produce mouldingaccurate to setout lines and shape.

4 Cut and fix moulding intoplace

4.1 Location of moulding set out to position in accordancewith drawings and specifications.

4.2 Bevel gauges set to required face and edge cuts fromsetout for each respective moulding and location.

4.3 Length measured and bevel gauges applied toaccurately mark respective moulding for joint cuts.

Fix timber raking moulds BCG3032A


4.4 Scribed joints, cut and fitted true without gap forinternal angle joint between moulding lengths.

4.5 Moulding lengths cut accurately to set out marks andfitted to provide true joint without gaps.

4.6 Long lengths joined by splayed joint to specifications.

4.7 Moulding fitted to set out location to line and fixed tospecifications.

5 Clean up 5.1 Moulding and joints sanded to smooth finish tospecifications.

5.2 Area cleared and waste materials disposed of safely.



RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to all timber moulding applications where joining occurs at wall intersections and involveschange of levels and moulding running at a slope or rake.

Junctions of walls may be at right angles or of obtuse or acute angles.

The term 'standard' mould applies to the original designed shape of moulding for the project which may beapplied on a rake or level.

Raking mould may be for handrailing or dado level, picture railing or cornice.






• safety glasses/goggles• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators




• measuring tape/rule• hammer• spirit level• squares• bevels• chisels• hand saws• saw stools• power saws• power drills• power planer• nail gun• air compressor and hoses• power leads• power router• portable work bench• coping saw• hand plane

Types of moulding profile may include:

• splayed• bullnosed• multi-curved• ornate period profile

Method of fixing of moulding may include:

• nailing• use of nail gun• screws• self tapping screws

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by fixing at least one separate type of moulding from those listed in therange of variables statement, to each of the element situations shown in the standard.




• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context offitting and fixing timber mouldings

• identify location and details of each moulding to be installed• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• carry out accurate setting out to develop face and edge cuts and moulding shape• produce developed moulding accurately to design shape• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to accurately cut, fit and fix mouldings• identify typical faults and problems that occur and the necessary action taken to rectify• complete installation of moulding to specification

Fix timber raking moulds BCG3032A



In addition to basic industry skill pre-requisites for this unit are:

• BCG3028A Fix linings and panelling• BCG3029A Fix timber mouldings



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawings and specifications• Quality Assurance• materials• moulding of timber• wall framing structure• tools and equipment• calculation of material requirements• measuring and leveling• geometry applications• fixing and fasteners


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• measure accurately• set out work• use tools and equipment• calculate material quantities• fix material• communicate effectively



• suitable work area appropriate to proposed activities.• plant and equipment appropriate to application tasks• construction materials appropriate to proposed activities• hand and power tools appropriate to installation processes• communication of documentation relevant to the proposed activity


Competency may be determined concurrently based upon integrated project work.


• observation of application process• questioning related to underpinning knowledge• inspection of installed mouldings







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 1 3 3 2 1 1

BCG3033A Restore/renovate windows and frames


BCG3033A: Restore/renovate windows and frames


1 Select and prepare materialsand equipment



1.3 Scope of work and materials required to carry out tasksdetermined from examination of damaged unit andspecifications of repair work.

1.4 Materials to renovate windows checked against scopeof work, drawings and specifications.



2 Restore and renovate curvedwindow frame

2.1 Set out made of unit to be repaired/replaced, whereapplicable, to determine shape and dimensions of allmembers.

2.2 Semi-elliptical jamb or other form of arch/circularwindow constructed with ribs shaped to size, rebatedand moulded to specified shape within +/- 1mm.

2.3 Rail joints made to specification to fit overall size offrame to set out.

2.4 Radiating bars fitted to ribs and boss fitted to bottomrail to specifications and set out.

2.5 Key joint fitted and wedged tight to form joint to set outand specifications.

2.6 Frame assembled and surfaces finished tospecifications.

3 Restore and renovate acasement window

3.1 Window constructed to rod set out with all jointscorrect.

3.2 Frame fixed square and true with sash clearance inframe to 3mm all round.

4 Restore and renovate adouble hung window

4.1 Joints for junction of frame members marked out andcut to set out rod for window.

Restore/renovate windows and frames BCG3033A


4.2 Double hung window frame constructed with all jointsassembled and fixed tight to specifications andtemporarily braced for square.

4.3 Sash material set out from set out rod to form sashesto fit frame.

4.4 Joints made and sashes assembled to specifications,square and out of winding.

4.5 Sashes dressed and fitted to window frame and fixed inaccordance with specifications for assembly and sashoperation.

4.6 All furniture fitted correctly to manufacturer'sspecifications.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to timber constructed windows and may involve the replacement of part or all of a windowframe and/or sash.








• measuring tape/rule• hammer



• straight edge• squares• chisels• hand saws• work bench• drop/docking saw• power drills• power planer• power leads• power router• clamps

Methods of fixing joints may include but are not limited to:

• glueing and cramping• wedging• use of screws• nailing• use of dowels

Double hung windows may be operated by:

• sash balances• weights and cords

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by restoring and renovating window units, either whole or part thereof asreferred to in the range of variables.




• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context ofrepairing or renovating window frames and sashes

• identify location and details of window/frame and building structure• give attention to accurate measuring and setting out processes to carry out renovations• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply safe and effective procedures in repairing or renovating window/frame to specifications and

finish• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• complete repair or renovation work to specifications


In addition to basic industry and basic stream skills appropriate to the work orientation the followingpre-requisite is required for this unit:

• BCG3010A Install windows to wall framing

Restore/renovate windows and frames BCG3033A




• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawings and specifications• window frame and sash construction• wall construction• materials• tools and equipment• fixing and fasteners• set outs• measuring and marking


• work safely• read and interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• set out work• use tools and equipment• construct material joints• fix materials



• suitable work area appropriate to work application• tools and equipment appropriate to application processes• materials relevant to application of task• drawings and specifications relevant to the proposed activities




• observation of the application process• questioning related to underpinning knowledge• inspection of completed work







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 2 2 1 2 2



BCG3034A: Erect/dismantle formwork


1 Select system, plan andprepare for work


1.2 OH&S requirements for erecting and dismantlingformwork and workplace environment recognised andadhered to.

1.3 Location and requirements of formwork constructionidentified from job drawings of structural concretemembers.

1.4 Selection of formwork system determined inaccordance with job requirements and availablestructural support.

1.5 Material/system quantity requirements determined inaccordance with formwork required and specificationsfor formwork construction.

1.6 Appropriate personal protective equipment selectedcorrectly fitted and used.


1.8 Key set out points/lines/profiles/grids placedaccurately to requirements of job drawings.

2 Prepare for formworkerection

2.1 Formwork shutters constructed to designed formrequirements and specified dimensions.

2.2 Formwork support system sequentially erectedaccording to initial set out and AS3610-1995Formwork for Concrete.

2.3 Scaffolding and/or handrailing erected whereapplicable to OH&S regulations and job requirements.

2.4 Bracing of formwork support placed to jobrequirements and specifications to maintain rigidityand stability.

2.5 Support system set to correct height level and line towithin +/- 2 mm over any 3 metre length.

3 Erect formwork 3.1 Formwork for beams, drop panels, cantilevers etc.fabricated, positioned and fixed into place, tospecifications.

Erect/dismantle formwork BCG3034A


3.2 Formwork for walls assembled, erected and fixed intoplace, plumb within +/- 2mm over 2.4 metres and toline within +/- over any 3 metre length.

3.3 Soffit formwork cut to length, fabricated, positionedand fixed into place to specifications.

3.4 Edge boxing to formwork fixed in correct position andbraced to plumb alignment.

3.5 Cast-ins, inserts and penetration blocks installed tolocations to specified requirements.

4 Install metal decking as slabsoffit

4.1 Sheets prepared, where required, to manufacturer'sand/or job specifications.

4.2 Metal decking installed to area and secured whererequired in accordance with manufacturer's and jobspecifications.

4.3 Intermediary support provided to metal decking whererequired, in accordance with design specifications.

4.4 Support to decking adjusted to ensure to specifiedsoffit alignment.

5 Inspect formwork 5.1 Erected formwork and formwork support systeminspected for safety and quality of work in accordancewith AS3610 supp1.

5.2 Loose dirt, sawdust and other waste materialremoved safely with due care to welfare of sitepersonnel and public.

5.3 Release agent applied to formwork in accordancewith specifications.

5.4 Formwork and support system supervised duringconcrete pour.

6 Stripping of formwork 6.1 Approval to remove formwork support systemobtained from appropriate site authority.

6.2 Edge boxing and braces carefully removed, denailed,cleaned and stored/stacked.

6.3 Support system backed off to appropriate height toloosen soffit decking.

6.4 Formwork safely and sequentially removed, denailedand relocated or stored.

7 Back prop formwork 7.1 Appropriate back propping system, where applicable,selected and installed according to AS3610 andengineer's requirements.



8 Clean up 8.1 All stripped formwork components removed fromwork area.

8.2 Loose debris and waste material removed and placedinto job waste bins or rubbish stockpiles.

8.3 Formwork components re-used, denailed, whereappropriate, cleaned and stored correctly.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to all types of above ground constructed or systemised formwork to form reinforced concretestructure.

All formwork construction to be in accordance with AS3620-1995 Formwork for Concrete.

Formwork types include:

• columns• walls• beams• floor slabs• beams and slab• drop panels• stairways and landings

Formwork materials may include:

• timber• steel• plywood• hardboard• composite materials• metal decking

Support systems may include:

• timber props• timber bearers• telescopic props• steel sectional bearers• steel frames


• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• hard hats• respirators/dust masks


• spanners• measuring tape/rule



• form oil sprayer mop• floor centres• telescopic props• levelling equipment• string lines• scaffolding• nail guns• power saws• power drills• air compressor and hoses• power leads• general hand tools

Preparation of metal decking sheets may include:

• cutting• folding up ends• forming tray ends


• work procedures• safety requirements• control of handling• quality of materials• detail to measurement• soundness of construction• specification finish


• protective equipment• working platforms• handling materials• working from scaffolding• safety hazards• working with cranes• use of plant and equipment


Work to be carried out in a team situation and in accordance with all relevant legislatory regulations.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by erecting and dismantling formwork for a suspended slab, column,beam and wall proposed structures.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable toworkplace and formwork operations

• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of erecting anddismantling formwork

• plan and sequence work in a logical manner



• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• construct and position formwork conforming to dimensions as specified in drawings and

documentation• select and use appropriate applications to ensure support structure rigid and stable• give attention to accurate measurement, alignment and level and/or plumb of formwork• clean and coat forms with release agent in preparation for placement of reinforcement• avoid damage to forms when stripping through appropriate handling of materials• identify common faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective processes carried out



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices• BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry)• BCG2005A Assist with erecting and stripping of formwork



• workplace and equipment safety requirements including relevant statutory regulations and codes• types of formwork• formwork construction• understanding of hydraulic pressure on formwork by concrete when placed• Australian Standard 3160 – 1995 Formwork for Concrete• company's quality system and role of individual within that system• drawings and specifications• tools and equipment• materials• Fixing and fasteners• calculation of material requirements• measuring and levelling


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• set out work• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively• calculate material quantities• measure and level relative to formwork• fix materials



• workplace location for installation of formwork• plant, equipment and tools appropriate to construction and erection processes• materials/system formwork appropriate to formwork construction• drawings and specifications of concrete structural members and proposed formwork




Competency should be through direct observation of application to tasks and questioning related tounderpinning knowledge.





KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 2 3 2 2

BCG3035A Erect/dismantle jump form formwork


BCG3035A: Erect/dismantle jump form formwork


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements for company'sconstruction operations recognised and adhered to.


1.3 Design of formwork structure identified from site andengineering detailed drawings.



2 Set out 2.1 Set out points and lines located according to engineer'sdrawings, survey datum points and site plan.

2.2 Formwork positioning located to predetermined set out.

3 Assemble core form system 3.1 Internal pre-fabricated system wall form shutterserected and fixed into locations to engineer's drawings.

3.2 Concrete nib walls poured to heights consistent withengineer's requirements.

3.3 Erected shutters fitted to nib walls.

3.4 Shear key feet installed to manufacturer'sspecifications.

3.5 Platforms and assembly fitted into core tomanufacturer’s specifications.

3.6 Structural steel systems gridwork and hydraulic hoselines fitted to manufacturer's specifications.

3.7 Wall form shutters suspended and system claddingand platforms fitted and completed to manufacturer’sspecifications and engineer's requirements.

3.8 Temporary lighting and emergency electrical workcarried out according to specifications and authorityrequirements.

4 Locate and installpenetrations

4.1 Locations and dimensions of penetrations set out inline with designated tolerance from engineeringdrawings.

Erect/dismantle jump form formwork BCG3035A


4.2 Penetration, block outs constructed where required toengineering drawings.

4.3 Penetrations installed to requirements of engineeringdrawings.

5 Install reinforcement 5.1 Reinforcement bars and/or mesh installed and fixed toconform to engineer's specifications.

6 Close shutters 6.1 External prefabricated system wall shutters erectedand fixed into located to engineer's and manufacturer'sspecification.

7 Place concrete 7.1 Concrete placed and consolidated within the systemwall form shutters to engineer's requirements.

7.2 Concrete cured to engineer's specification.

8 Strip shutters 8.1 Shutters loosened and stripped according tomanufacturer's requirements.

9 Jump system 9.1 Formwork system electrically/hydraulically jacked intonew position according to engineering drawing andmanufacturer's specifications.

9.2 Trailing platforms installed to engineer's specifications.

9.3 Stairs and access ways installed according to drawingsand engineer's specifications.

10 Dismantle system 10.1 System dismantled in accordance with manufacturer'sand engineer's specifications.

10.2 Safe working area maintained to OH&S regulations.

11 Clean up 11.1 Waste materials removed and placed into job wastebins or rubbish stockpiles.

11.2 System components cleaned, maintained tomanufacturer's specified condition and stored.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to systemised formwork constructed and operated to engineer’s specifications for jumpformwork.

Applications of jump formwork include:

• cores• walls• silos




• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• working platforms and scaffolding• working with hydraulic equipment


• boots• safety glasses/goggles• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators• gloves• hard hat


• measuring tape/rule• hammer• spirit level• nail bag• levelling equipment• chisels• hand saws• saw stools• power saws• power drills• air compressor and hoses• power leads• spanners• pneumatic wrenches

Formwork to be in accordance with AS3610-1995 Formwork for Concrete.

Reporting of faults should be in accordance with worksite operational procedures and may be verbal orwritten.

Erect/dismantle jump form formwork BCG3035A


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the performance of working with a team to carry out the safe andeffective erecting/dismantling of jump form formwork to engineer’s design and industry standards on adesigned project.




• show compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use of appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of erecting and

operating jump formwork to form concrete• give attention to accurate setting out for location of formwork• adopt and use safe and effective procedures in the assembling of shutters• give attention to specification details in erecting formwork and structural steel support• apply correct procedures in connecting hydraulic hose lines• give attention to assembling and installing all platforms, walkways and stairs supporting formwork

operation.• apply correct procedures in setting up blockouts and placing reinforcement to specifications• give appropriate attention in team operation to the processes of pouring concrete and jumping

formwork to next location.• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective worksite operations



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG2004A Carry out levelling• BCG3034A Erect and dismantle formwork




• systemised formwork construction• jump formwork design• understanding of hydraulic pressure on formwork by concrete when placed• safe handling and storage of chemicals and flammable liquids• AS3610 – Formwork for concrete• materials and components• company’s quality system and the role of the individual within that system• understanding of electrical/hydraulic jacking systems• plant, tools and equipment• reinforcement in concrete• worksite communication




• work safely• interpret drawings, specifications and documentation• organise work• use tools plant and equipment• select and identify materials relative to task• handle materials• fit and secure materials• measure accurately• communicate effectively



• worksite location developed to base slab• materials and components appropriate to proposed activity• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to construction and installation processes• appropriate communication of documentation relevant to the activity and tasks


Competency in this unit may be determined concurrently based upon integrated project work.


Competency should be assessed under general guidance checking at various stages of theprocesses and at the completion of each activity against the performance criteria and specifications.




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 2 3 2 2



BCG3036A: Tile a regular roof


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements for company’s rooftiling operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andpreparing for and tiling a roof recognised and adheredto.

1.3 Quantities of timber, sarking materials, mortar, tiles,fixings and adhesives determined from job drawingsand specifications.

1.4 All work to comply with AS2049, AS2050, AS4046 andmanufacturer’s specifications.



1.7 Roof surface checked to ensure complete and readyfor tiling.

2 Prepare roof face 2.1 Fall safety devices installed to roof perimeter to OH&Sregulations.

2.2 Scaffolding erected to OH&S regulations, whereapplicable.

2.3 Elevator assembled to manufacturer's specificationsand used in accordance with OH&S regulations.

2.4 Roof surface set out, sarked where required andbattened to manufacturer's recommendations forspecified tile and job specifications.

2.5 Tiles loaded onto roof, supported and evenlydistributed.

3 Secure tiles 3.1 Tiles spread, secured and cut to manufacturer'sspecifications.

3.2 Hip and ridge tiles bedded using correct mortar mix toAS2701 ensuring alignment is maintained.

3.3 Valleys, hips, ridges, and gables pointed with likecolour mortar to a flush, smooth finish.

Tile a regular roof BCG3036A


4 Clean up 4.1 Roof and guttering cleaned free of waste.

4.2 Waste material disposed of safely.

4.3 Unused material stored stacked.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the fixing and securing of terra cotta or concrete tiles to regular roofs which includes:

• gable• hip• hip and valley roofs• combinations thereof• constructed to regular shaped plans of right angles corners• all roof surfaces to a common pitch

Types of terra cotta tiles include but are not limited to:

• Marseille – modern French• Swiss• Spanish• Turin

Types of concrete tiles include but are not limited to:

• Elebane• Villa• Centurian• Chateau• Shingle• Ranch• Macquarie• Mitchell

All roof tiling to be in accordance with:

• AS2049–1992 Roof Tiles• AS2050–1995 Installation of Roof Tiles• AS4046–1992 Methods of Testing Roof Tiles

Mortar for bedding and pointing to be in accordance with:

• AS2701– 994 Methods of Sampling and Testing Mortar for Masonry Construction










• measuring tape/rule• hammer• square• nail bag• chisels• hand saws• tile cutters• power saws• power drills• pinchers• elevator• ladders• power leads• trowels• concrete mixer• buckets• shovel• string lines• chalk lines• nail gun• air compressor and hoses• bedding frame• broom

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by setting out, installing and fixing roof tiles to a hip and valley roof with agable end.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of tiling a regular roof

Tile a regular roof BCG3036A


• inspect roof framing to ensure all structural members valley gutters are in place and fastened• install fall safety devices to regulatory requirements• set out and fix sarking and battens to even gauge• inspect roof evenly in preparation for laying• accurately cut tiles to line for finishes to gable ends and valleys to specifications.• lay and secure tiles in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective tiling operations• give attention to bedding and pointing to ensure ridges and hips finished to line and specifications







• relevant Australian Standards• roofing tiles and their characteristics• roof tiling procedures• specifications and drawings• mortar composition and additives• roof structure• materials• tools and equipment• elevators and their operation• calculation of material requirements• measuring and marking


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• install safety devices• set out roof• use tools and equipment• mix mortar to specifications• calculate material quantities• fix materials• communicate effectively



• completed roof structure ready for tiling• tools and equipment appropriate for installation processes• roof tiles and associated materials required to tile roof



• specifications for application of roof tiles(5) Method of Assessment




Competency may be assessed in the workplace or simulated work setting.


KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 2 3 2 2



BCG3037A: Tile an irregular roof



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andpreparing for and tiling a roof, recognised and adheredto.

1.3 Quantities of timber, sarking material, mortar, tiles,fixings and adhesives determined to job drawings andspecifications.

1.4 All work to comply with AS2049, AS2050, AS4046 andmanufacturer's specifications.



1.7 Roof surface checked to ensure roof constructioncomplete and all flashings and gutterings in place.

2 Prepare roof face 2.1 Fall safety devices installed to roof perimeter to OH&Sregulations.

2.2 Scaffolding erected to OH&S regulations whereapplicable.


2.4 Roof surface set out, sarked where required andbattened to manufacturer's recommendations forspecified tile and job specifications.

2.5 Tiles loaded onto roof, supported and evenlydistributed.

3 Secure tiles 3.1 Tiles spread, secured and cut to manufacturer'sspecifications.

3.2 Hip and ridge tiles bedded using correct mortar mix toAS2701 ensuring that alignment is maintained.

3.3 Valley, hips, ridges, and gables pointed with like colourmortar to a flush, smooth finish.

Tile an irregular roof BCG3037A


4 Tile roof openings 4.1 Opening surrounds checked for soakers and flashingsin place and prepared for tiles.

4.2 Surrounds tiled and weatherproofed to AS2050 andspecifications.

5 Tile lay back surfaces orfacades

5.1 Tiles spread and secured to steep and vertical surfacesby individual tile fixing to specifications.





RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the fixing and securing of terra cotta and concrete tiles to irregular roofs which includes:

• roofs constructed to irregular shaped plans where corners are not right angled• mansard• Dutch gable and dutch hip• unequal pitch surfaces• cape cod• bellcast• pyramid

Openings in roofs include:

• chimneys• dormer windows• two storey inserts• skylights• pipes and flues

Types of terra cotta tiles include but are not limited to:

• Marseille – modern French• Swiss• Spanish• Turin• Chateau• Shingle• Ranch• Macquarie• Mitchell

Types of concrete tiles include but are not limited to:

• Elebane• Villa• Centurian



All roof tiling to be in accordance with:

• AS2049–1992 Roof Tiles• AS2050–1995 Installation of Roof Tiles• AS4046–1992 Methods of Testing Roof Tiles

Mortar for bedding and pointing to be in accordance with:

• AS2701–1984 Methods of Sampling and Testing Mortar for Masonry Construction








• measuring tape/rule• hammer• square• chisels• nail bag• hand saws• tile cutter• power saws• power drills• pinchers• elevator• ladders• power leads• trowels• concrete mixer• buckets• shovel• scaffolding• string lines• chalk lines• nail gun

Tile an irregular roof BCG3037A


• air compressor and hoses• bedding frame• broom

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by setting out, installing and fixing roof tiles to a roof incorporatingirregular shapes or unequal pitches and incorporating a dormer window with tiling all around.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of tiling an irregular roof• inspect roof framing to ensure all structural members are in place and fastened• check roof surfaces to ensure all valley guttering, flashings and soakers are in place, where

applicable• install fall safety devices to regulatory requirements• set out and fix sarking and battens to even gauge• fix load roof evenly in preparation for laying• accurately cut tiles to line for finishes around openings, gutters and gable end• lay and secure tile in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations• give attention to bedding and pointing to ensure ridges and hips finished to line and specifications• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective tiling operations



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG3036A Tile a regular roof




• relevant Australian Standards• roofing tiles and their characteristics• roof tiling procedures• mortar composition and additives• roof structure• flashing of roof surfaces• tools and equipment• calculation of material requirements• measuring and marking• scaffolding




• work safely• organise work• install safety devices• set out work• erect scaffolding• handle materials• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively• calculate material quantities• mix mortar



• completed roof structure ready for tiling• tools and equipment appropriate for installation processes• roof tiles and associated materials required to tile the roof• specifications for application of roof tiles







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 2 2 1 2 2



BCG3038A: Slate a roof


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements for company’s roofslating operations recognised and adhered to.


1.3 Quantities of timber, sarking material, slate andfixings selected and calculated accurately to jobdrawings and specifications.




2 Prepare roof surface 2.1 Scaffolding erected and/or fall safety devices installedto perimeter of roof to OH&S regulations inaccordance with job requirements.


2.3 Roof surface set out, sarked, boarded where requiredand battened to architect's drawings andspecifications.

3 Prepare slate 3.1 Slate graded, marked and holed to alignmentrequirements.

3.2 Slate loaded on to roof, supported and evenlydistributed.

4 Lay and secure slate 4.1 Slate cut, laid and secured to designed layout ofgauge, bond and line to specifications.

4.2 Finish of ridges and hips carried out in accordancewith placement of slate to specifications.

4.3 Hip covering, where required, measured, prepared,fitted and secured to specifications.


Slate a roof BCG3038A





RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to all applications of slate to roof surfaces.








• measuring tape/rule• hammer• square• chisels• nail bag• hand saws• power saws• power drills• string lines• chalk lines• nail gun• air compressor and hoses• scribers• surface ladders• ladders• scaffolding



Safety hazards include but are not limited to:

• steepness of roof• flatness of surface• adequate foot hold

Hip finishes to slate work may be:

• mitred• covered

Groundwork for slate can vary in accordance with type of roof surface and preferred specifications which maybe:

• battened and felted• boarded and felted• boarded, felted and battened• boarded, felted, counter battened and battened

Preparation of ridges and hips covering may include:

• marking for length• cutting• folding• drilling holes for securing

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by setting out, installing and fixing slate to a conventional hip and valleyroof.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of tiling a regular roof• accurately calculate quantities of sarking, battens and tiles• grade slate for consistent thickness and colour• install hand rails and scaffolding or fall safe device in accordance with regulations• set out and install groundwork accurately for slate, to specifications• lay and secure slate to designed gauge and bond• adopt safe and effective procedures in cutting slate• lay and secure slate and roof complete roof to specifications• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations




Slate a roof BCG3038A


• BCG3036A Tile a regular roof• BCG3037A Tile an irregular roof


KnowledgeA knowledge of:• workplace and equipment safety requirements including relevant statutory regulations, codes and

standards• slate and its characteristics• roof slating procedures• materials• roof tile installation• drawings and specifications• roof construction techniques• tools and equipment• calculation of material quantities• measuring and marking• scaffolding


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• set out work• handle materials• use hand and power tools• use plant and equipment• construct and install groundwork• measure and mark accurately• erect scaffolding• communicate effectively



• slate and associated materials appropriate to tasks• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to roof slating application processes• completed roof structure ready for covering• appropriate communication of documentation/specifications relevant to proposed tasks






Assessment should be while tasks are undertaken either individually or as part of a team under limitedsupervision.



KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 2 3 2 2

BCG3039A Repair and restore tile roofs


BCG3039A: Repair and restore tile roofs




1.3 Material and quantity requirements determined fromsite location, job drawings and specifications.

1.4 Supply of tiles determined from investigating closematch of removed sample.

1.5 All work to comply with specifications to matchoriginal designed finish, and where applicable,AS2049, AS2050 and AS4046.



1.8 Fall-safe equipment installed to perimeter of roof inaccordance with OH&S regulations.

2 Prepare roof area for repairand restoration of roof tiles

2.1 Damaged area identified and located in accordancewith job drawings and specifications.


2.3 Barricades and signage erected, where required, inaccordance with OH&S regulations.

2.4 Scaffolding erected to OH&S requirements, whereapplicable.

2.5 Damaged tiles to be removed carefully and safelytaken out to ensure minimum disturbance toremaining roof tiles.

2.6 Pointing or mortar to be replaced removed carefullyensuring no damage to roof tiles.

2.7 Repaired area left clean and free of loose waste.

2.8 Roof battens, sarking, boarding and flashinginstallations checked to specifications and/ormanufacturing specifications.

Repair and restore tile roofs BCG3039A


3 Replace roof tiles 3.1 Roof tiles individually examined to ensure conformityto requirements in matching original roof tiles.

3.2 Mortar mixed to assessed composition and/orspecifications.

3.3 Roof tiles laid to maintain conformity to gauge, levelalignment and plumb whilst maintaining bond tospecifications.

3.4 Roof tiles laid to produce designed features inaccordance with original design and specifications.

3.5 Replaced roof tiles, where applicable, retained andbuilt into roof to specification.

3.6 Mortar joints struck to match existing colour andloose mortar removed from roof tile surface.

4 Replace pointing material 4.1 Pointing material mixed to designed specifications.

4.2 Pointing material applied to ridge tile joints tospecification.

4.3 Joints pointed to produce matching finish to existingsurrounds and loose material removed from roof tilesurface.





RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the repair, maintenance and restoration of regular and irregular roofs.

Roofing tiles may comprise of terra cotta, concrete or other similar materials.

All roof tiling to be in accordance with:AS2049-1992 Roof TilesAS2050-1995 Installation of Roof Tiles

Mortar for bedding or pointing to be in accordance with:AS2701–1984 Methods of Sampling and Testing Mortar for Masonry Construction.


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures



• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to specifications of work


• workplace environment and safety• fall safe protection• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• working platforms and scaffolding• use of adhesives




• measuring tape/rule• hammer• trowels• square• tile cutters• pincers• elevator• power saws• ladders• buckets• concrete mixer• power leads• shovel• wheelbarrow• broom• bedding frame

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by repairing, replacing and restoring roof tiles to a conventional hip andvalley roof.



• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of tiling a roof• install hand rails and scaffolding or fall safe devices in accordance with statutory regulations• give attention to careful removal of damaged tiles• inspect roof framing to ensure all structural members are in place and fastened• lay and secure tiles in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations

Repair and restore tile roofs BCG3039A


• carefully remove loose or damaged bedding and pointing• clean gutter free of rubble and excess mortar• complete repair and renovation work to specifications• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations


BCG1005A Use hand and power toolsBCG1006A Use small plant and equipmentBCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffoldingBCG3036A Tile a regular roof



• workplace and equipment safety requirements including relevant statutory regulations codes andstandards

• roofing tiles and their characteristics• mortar composition and additives• roof structures, battening, sarking and flashing installation• roof tiling securing procedures and installation to AS2049 and AS2050• tools and equipment• scaffolding and fall safe devices


• work safely• install safety devices• use tools plant and equipment relevant to tasks• select and identify materials relevant to tasks• handle materials• fit and fix tiles• mix and apply mortar• communicate effectively



• roof work area appropriate to repair and restoration processes• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to application tasks• roof tiles and materials relevant to tiling processes• appropriate communication of documentation/specifications relative to the task



Competency may be determined concurrently based upon integrated project work.







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 2 3 2 2



BCG3040A: Carry out restoration of heritage roof tiling




1.3 Extent and scope of work identified from examinationof damaged or deteriorated area, job drawings andspecifications.

1.4 Type of tiles to be replaced identified and eithersupplier determined or method of reproductionascertained.



1.7 Fall safe equipment installed to perimeter of roof inaccordance with OH&S regulations.

2 Remove tiles fromdamaged and/ordeteriorated area of roof

2.1 Isolation provided to area below sections to beremoved and through barricades and signage orcovering protection in accordance with OH&Srequirements.

2.2 Tiles carefully removed minimising risk of damage tosurrounds.

2.3 Tiles removed so that good surrounding tiles remainintact and undamaged.

3 Prepare roof area for tiling 3.1 Cleared area cleaned free of waste material and looseparticles.

3.2 Damaged structure repaired using materials similar toexisting and finished to a flush faced surface tospecifications.

4 Prepare roof tiles for laying 4.1 Photographs or original drawings used to ensuredesign of roof surface maintained.

4.2 Tiles irregular in size cut to designated size and shapeto a tolerance of +/- 2mm.

Carry out restoration of heritage roof tiling BCG3040A


5 Lay and secure roof tiles 5.1 Tiles spread, secured and cut to job specifications.

5.2 Hips, ridges, crests and finials bedded using mortarmix to AS2701, ensuring alignment of ridges and hipsis maintained.

6 Point mortar to roof tiles 6.1 Tile face cleaned free of dust and loose material toprepare for pointing of mortar.

6.2 Mortar mixed and applied to job specifications usinglike colour and finished to a flush, smooth finish.

7 Clean up 7.1 Area cleared free of all spilled and waste material andscaffolding or fall safe devices removed.

7.2 Roof and guttering cleaned free of all waste.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the renovation and restoration of roof tiling associated with heritage buildings. Roofconstruction may be of regular or irregular shape.

Heritage tiled roofs may be constructed of the following types of roof tiles:• period pattern• ridge tiles• hip tiles• ornamental crests• ornamental finials• terra cotta• concrete• other similar materials

Quality Assurance requirements may include:• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to specifications of work

OH&S requirements to be in accordance with State/Territory legislation and regulations and may include:• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• working platforms and scaffolding• fall safe protection





Tools and equipment may include but are not limited to:• measuring tape/rule• hammer• spirit level• square• chisels• hand saws• saw stools• power saws• power drills• power leads• tile cutter• pincers• pliers• elevator• ladders• trowels• shovel• concrete mixer• buckets• string lines• chalk lines

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by carrying out heritage roof tiling to a conventional roof construction.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• show knowledge and understanding of heritage roof tiling applications and materials• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• select roof tiles to closely matching existing tiled roof• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of carrying out heritage

roof tiling• maintain groundwork/base to same structure as original• install hand rails and scaffolding in accordance with regulations• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to prepare surface areas for tiling• select each individual tile to ensure compatible with designed structure• give particular care and attention to handling and placing tiles• lay and secure tiles in accordance with specifications for work• give attention to bedding and pointing to ensure ridges and hips finished to line and in keeping

with original roof concepts• clean guttering free of rubble and excess mortar

Carry out restoration of heritage roof tiling BCG3040A


• complete roof tiling applications to roof to specifications• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations


Pre-requisites for this unit are:• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG3036A Tile a regular roof• BCG3037A Tile an irregular roof• BCG3039A Repair and restore tile roofs



• Workplace and equipment safety requirements including relevant statutory regulations, codes andstandards

• heritage tiling – tiles and characteristics• base or ground work support of heritage tiling• drawings and specifications• mortar composition and additives• roof structures, battening, sarking and flashing installation• roof tiling curing procedures and installations to AS2049 - Roof Tiling and AS2050 - Installation of

Roof Tiles• scaffolding and fall safe protection• tools and equipment• measuring and calculations


• work safely• interpret drawings, specifications and documentation• organise work• install safety devices• use tools, plant and equipment relevant to tasks• select and identify materials relevant to task• handle materials with care• set out and fix materials• calculate material quantities• communicate effectively



• heritage roof• materials selected and identified appropriate to tasks• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to restoration processes• appropriate communication of documentation/specifications relevant to tasks





Competency should be assessed directly against the performance criteria and specifications.

Competency shall be assessed while work is undertaken under limited supervision with regularchecks at various stages of the process and at the completion of the activity.




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 2 3 2 2



BCG3041A: Undertake dogging


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andcrane and dogging operations recognised andadhered to.

1.2 Site information obtained as necessary.

1.3 Hazards in immediate work environment identifiedand action taken to minimise risk.

1.4 Co-ordination and communication requirements withother site personnel determined from site operationalprocedures.

1.5 Job method determined to include hazard preventionand controls, job safety plan and safety procedures,relevant Australian Standards, codes of practice andmanufacturer's specifications.

1.6 Barricades/warning signs/overhead protectionerected to requirements of State/Territory regulatory,road traffic authorities and local governments.

1.7 Mass of loads to be lifted calculated usingmanufacturers specifications/tables or known weightsof common construction materials.

1.8 Positions of centres of gravity estimated.

2 Select equipment 2.1 Lifting equipment selected consistent withrequirements of lift and manufacturer's tables/charts.

2.2 Lifting gear inspected and damaged/worn itemslabelled, rejected and placed separate from operatingequipment.

2.3 Personal protective equipment selected, correctlyfitted and used to requirements of OH&S regulations.

3 Sling loads 3.1 Load and slings protected with suitable packing toprevent damage.

3.2 Moving/loose parts of load securely lashed to preventmovement.

3.3 Slings correctly attached to load, positioned andadjusted to requirements of lift.

3.4 Slings attached and secured to hook with hoist wirevertical.

Undertake dogging BCG3041A


3.5 Tail ropes attached to load where necessary in orderto control lateral movement.

3.6 Test lift by dogman's directions to ensure correctplacement, tensioning and angles of slings, packingand hoist wire vertical.

4 Move load 4.1 Load destination prepared to accept load.

4.2 Lifting or pulling device assembled and erected whereappropriate.

4.3 Load safely moved to required destination andsecured in position to client's specification.

4.4 Standard communication signals used to co-ordinatesafe movement of the load.

5 Remove gear 5.1 Lifting/moving gear and packing safely removed fromload and collected/lowered to ground.

5.2 Equipment cleaned, inspected for wear and damage,maintained, usage and condition recorded andstored.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the application of slinging techniques including selection and inspection of lifting gear andthe directing of crane/hoist operation in the movement of load.

Work may include:

• movement of plant and equipment• steel erection• hoist erection• placement of pre-cast concrete• movement of material

and work associated with:

• safety nets and static lines• mast climbers• perimeter safety screens/shutters• cantilevered crane loading platforms


• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• working platforms and scaffolding• dogging operations




• boots• safety glasses/goggles• dust masks• gloves• hard hat

Potential hazards may include:

• overhead powerlines• trees• overhead service lines• underground services• uneven or unstable ground• allowable floor loading• other workers and persons• surrounding buildings, structures or equipment• hazardous materials• corrosive substances• barricades• inadequate lifting• radio interference

Equipment used may include but is not limited to:

• sling-leg slings• four leg slings• chain slings• synthetic webbing slings• ropes• shackles and eye bolts• spreader beams and equalising gear clamps• cradle timbers• chocks and wedges• packers• fishplates and bolts• rigging screws• turfers and turn buckles

Signals for load moving may be given using any of the following methods:

• verbal• hand signals• whistles/hooters• two-way radios/telephones• light signals

All signalling other than verbal communication should be in accordance with Australian Standards as perAS2550 Cranes – Safe Use.

Work to be undertaken to legislative and regulatory requirements and in accordance with Worksafe AustraliaStandard for Users and Operators of Industrial Equipment.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Undertake dogging BCG3041A


Competency is to be demonstrated by the performance of carrying out dogging processes with a crane in themoving of plant and materials on a nominated project.(1) Critical Aspects of Evidence


• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable to worksiteand dogging operations

• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context ofhandling materials and valuable equipment

• identify detail or program of work involving handling and relocating of items• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• estimate load, centre of gravity and selection of equipment• apply safe and correct procedures to the slinging of loads• conduct safe and effective communication with crane operator in carrying out operations• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify



• BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements• BCG1006A Use plant and equipment• BCG1011A Handle construction materials and safe disposal of non-toxic waste• BCG1018A Prepare for construction process (steelwork)




• crane operations• design and function of lifting gear• load calculations• lifting gear and associated equipment• hand tools• methods of signalling• worksite communications


• work safely• organise work• calculate loads• handle materials• use tools and equipment• use signalling methods• communicate effectively



• worksite operation• crane operation• lifting gear and equipment appropriate to supporting dogging processes



• schedule of crane operations






Competency may be assessed in the normal or simulated workplace environment.


KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 2 3 2 2



BCG3042A: Undertake rigging


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andcrane and rigging operations, recognised and adheredto.

1.2 Site plans/drawings interpreted to ascertain jobrequirements.

1.3 Role of rigger, dogman if applicable, and tasks to beundertaken, determined.


1.5 Access, obstructions and other hazards assessed andappropriate action taken to remove/reduce risk.

1.6 Safety barricades and signs erected to requirements ofOH&S regulations where applicable.

1.7 Load dimensions and centre of gravity of loadestablished in consideration with slinging requirements.

1.8 Appropriate safe working loads calculated for liftingequipment.

1.9 Load position and destination location identified indetermining direction and distance of load movement.

1.10 Method of moving load determined by consideringhazard prevention, control procedures, relevantAustralian Standards, codes of practice andmanufacturer's specifications.

2 Select equipment 2.1 Slings, tackle, lifting/moving machine and accessoriesselected consistent with needs of lift and safe workingcapacity of equipment.

2.2 Lifting/moving gear inspected and damaged/worn itemslabelled and rejected.

2.3 Lifting/moving gear assembled consistent with needs oflift and manufacturer's specifications/tables.

2.4 Personal protective equipment selected, correctly fittedand used to the requirements of OH&S regulations.

2.5 Safety equipment for working at heights selected andused to requirements of State/Territory regulatoryauthority.

Undertake rigging BCG3042A


3 Connect gear 3.1 Anchorage points identified/located/establishedaccording to needs of lift and equipmentmanufacturer's specifications.

3.2 Load safely slung/connected and packinginstalled/secured to protect sling and load.

4 Move and position load 4.1 Load moved in accordance with planned procedure.

4.2 Load safely raised, moved and lowered onto temporarydunnage or secured into permanent position.

4.3 Stability of load maintained throughout movementprocess.

5 Remove slings and liftingaccessories

5.1 Care taken to restrain slings, accessories and packingupon removal.

5.2 Slings and lifting accessories removed, cleaned andreturned to store.

5.3 Load moving equipment dismantled and safelyremoved.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to rigging work carried out in accordance with Worksafe Australia Standards forIntermediate Rigging which incorporates Basic Rigging.

Equipment range for Basic Rigging is for dogging and rigging work associated with:

• movement of plant and equipment• steel erection• particular hoists• placement of pre-cast concrete• safety net and static lines• mast climbers• perimeter safety screens and shutters• cantilevered crane loading platforms

Equipment range for Intermediate Rigging extended on Basic Rigging range is for dogging and rigging workassociated with:

• rigging of cranes, conveyors, dredges and excavators• tilt slabs• demolition• dual lifts





• handling of materials• working platforms and scaffolding• rigging and crane operations


• boots• safety glasses/goggles• dust masks• gloves• hard hat• body harness

Equipment used in rigging processes may include but is not limited to:

• slings• ropes• shackles• eye bolts• spreaders and equalising gear• clamps• puller systems• winches• jacks• skids, skates and sliding shoes• rollers• cradle timbers• chocks and wedges• packers• fishplates and bolts• feeler gauges• rigging screws• turfers• turn belts

Signals for load moving may involve:

• verbal• hand signals to Australian Standards• whistle/hooters to Australian Standards• two-way radios/telephones• light signals to Australian Standards

Signalling other than verbal communication to be in accordance with AS2550 Cranes – Safe Use.All work undertaken to legislative and statutory regulations and in accordance with Worksafe AustraliaStandards for Users and Operators of Industrial Equipment.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the performance of carrying out rigging processes for the moving ofmaterials and equipment, and fixing of sections into place.

Undertake rigging BCG3042A




• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable to worksiteand rigging operations

• indicate compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context ofhandling materials and fixing fabricated sections into place

• identify details of work and program schedule of movement and installation• estimate load, center of gravity and method of moving load• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to move and install section• apply safe and correct procedures for connecting lifting gear and slinging loads• conduct effective communication with crane operator to ensure safe and effective operations• apply safe and effective procedures in securing sections and disconnecting crane• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use plant and equipment• BCG1011A Handle construction materials and safe disposal of non-toxic waste• BCG1018A Prepare for construction process (steelwork)• BCG3041A Undertake dogging




• rigging gear and equipment• design and function of lifting gear• crane operations• load calculations• materials and characteristics• mass of materials• plant and equipment• hand tools• fixing of structural members or components• methods of signalling• worksite communications


• work safely• organise work• handle materials• calculate loads• use signals• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively





• worksite operation• crane operation• lifting gear and equipment appropriate to supporting dogging and rigging procedures• plant and equipment to support construction processes• drawings and specifications applicable to activities








KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 2 3 2 2



BCG3043A: Operate hoist


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andoperating mechanical hoists recognised and adheredto.


1.3 Hoisting details for particular day identified fromproposed work schedule.

1.4 Signalling system confirmed with associated sitepersonnel.

1.5 Detailed daily hoist work program developed inconjunction with authorised personnel.

1.6 Site hazards identified and hazard control strategiesimplemented to minimise risk to self and others.

1.7 Precautions taken to accommodate effects ofinclement weather or night work on operating hoist.

2 Conduct daily safety check 2.1 Prior to operation, equipment and site visuallychecked for evidence of damage, structuralweakness or interference.

2.2 Standard daily safety checks onmechanical/electrical/safety functions carried out torequirements of hoist operator's manual and checklists.

2.3 Test run conducted through full height of travelwithout load at start of work to check hoist operation,security of mast and wall bolting.

3 Record results 3.1 Results of checks and tests recorded in hoist book torequirements of state regulatory authority.

3.2 Faults reported to responsible person in accordancewith company policy.

4 Operate hoist 4.1 Loads checked for conformity to safe load capacity ofhoist.

4.2 Hoist safely operated to requirements of operator'smanual and state regulatory authority.

Operate hoist BCG3043A


4.3 Hoist shut down, rendered safe and secured at end ofwork period to requirements of company andoperator's manual.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the operation of all configurations of cantilever, platform and personnel/materials hoists.

Materials platform hoists are for the hoisting of goods and materials only and may be a:

• car• bucket• platformcantilevered from and travelling up and down to the face of the support structure.

Personnel and materials hoists are for the hoisting of personnel, goods and materials and may be:

• cantilevered hoist• tower hoist• multiple winch operation

Personnel and materials hoists consist of a car, structure and machinery or other equipment associated withthe hoist.


• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• operating of hoists



Reporting of faults should be in accordance with worksite operation procedures and may be verbal or written.

All work and work practices undertaken to legislative and statutory regulations and in accordance withWorksafe Australia Standards for Users and Operators of Industrial Equipment.

EVIDENCE GUIDECompetency is to be demonstrated by operating a mechanical hoist.


It is essential that competence be observed in the following aspects:• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable to workplace

and hoist operations



• indicate compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context ofoperating mechanical hoists and handling materials

• identify work program and details of materials and equipment to be moved• correctly apply to safety check procedures for pre-operation of hoist under load• apply correct procedures in placing material loads to hoist platform• accurately record information related to checks and tests• apply safe and effective procedures applied for operational use of hoist• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with other personnel to carry out safe and effective hoist operations



• BCG1001A Carry out OH&S requirements• BCG1006A Use plant and equipment• BCG1011A Handle construction materials and safe disposal of waste• BCG2007A Operate elevating platform



• workplace and equipment safety requirements including relevant statutory regulations• regulations governing hoist operations• materials• plant and equipment• loading factors• delivery documentation• mechanical connections and maintenance• site communications


• work safely• organise work• handle materials• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively• record information



• worksite operation• mechanical hoist and maintenance equipment• daily schedule and documented details




Operate hoist BCG3043A





KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 3 2 2 1 2

BCG3044A Apply decorative finishes


BCG3044A: Apply decorative finishes


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’s paintingand decorating operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andpreparation and application processes for decorativepainted finishes, identified and adhered to.

1.3 Materials checked for conformity against specificationsand finishes schedule.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected consistent with jobrequirements, checked for serviceability and faultsreported to supervisor.

1.6 Safety hazards identified and correct procedures usedto reduce risk to self and others.

1.7 Surfaces prepared in accordance with substraterequirements and specified decorative finish.

2 Prepare application area 2.1 Area set up for application processes to suit area orunits to be painted.

2.2 Adequate ventilation ensured for application area.

2.3 Measures taken to ensure dust free area.

3 Apply mirror paint finish 3.1 Paint viscosity adjusted to suit climatic conditions andmethod of application, where necessary.

3.2 Prime and intermediate coats applied to specification,allowed to dry thoroughly and then sanded to a smootheven finish.

3.3 Final coat applied without imperfections, flowing out toan even, smooth finish.

4 Apply broken colour effects 4.1 Ground coat to specified colour and consistencyapplied evenly to prepared surface.

4.2 Apply scumble glaze to prepared ground and producedesired broken colour effect to match sample.

4.3 Clear coating, where required, applied to achieve aneven finish to specified sheen level.

Apply decorative finishes BCG3044A


5 Produce imitation marbleeffects

5.1 Ground coat to specified colour and consistencyapplied evenly to prepared surface.

5.2 Marbling medium mixed to designed proportions andcolour and correctly applied to produce veins andmarkings as per sample.

5.3 Clear coating applied to achieve an even finish tospecified sheen level.

6 Produce imitation wood graineffects

6.1 Ground coat to specified colour and consistencyapplied evenly to prepared surface.

6.2 Wood graining medium mixed to designed proportionsand colour and correctly applied to produce grainmarkings as per sample.

6.3 Specific highlights added to match sample (ifapplicable).

6.4 Clear coating applied to achieve an even finish tospecified sheen level.

7 Produce gilded finish 7.1 Whiting applied evenly to background.

7.2 Correctly mixed gold size applied evenly and withoutmisses and allowed to dry to "whistle tack" stage.

7.3 Gold leaf transfer applied to background and wiped toproduce a clean finish.

8 Apply colour fleck finishes 8.1 Specified primer or base coat evenly sprayed onto aprepared surface.

8.2 Colour fleck coating applied with spray gun as permanufacturer’s specification.

8.3 Glaze coat applied evenly to provide a uniform patternand sheen level to specification.

9 Apply stencils 9.1 Suitable stencil design selected and laid out ontorecommended material.

9.2 Specified transfer method used and design cutaccurately and repeated for multiple colours using a"register" mark.

9.3 Initial stencil placed and taped to designed location andpaint applied to produce first colour to specification.

9.4 Subsequent stencils located accurately to pattern witheach separate colour applied to specification toproduce designed finish.



10 Clean up and storeequipment

10.1 Spray equipment dismantled, cleaned and maintainedwhere applicable.

10.2 Area cleaned and waste disposed of safely.

10.3 Unused materials sealed and stored.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the application of decorative painted finishes including mirror finishing, broken coloureffects, imitation marbling, imitation wood graining, gilding, colour fleck and stencilling.


• quality of material• preparation of surfaces• application techniques• cleanliness of application areas• handling techniques

OH&S requirements may include but are not limited to:

• protective clothing• protective equipment• hazardous materials• workplace conditions and isolating areas• use of plant, equipment tools• emergency procedures


• safety goggles/glasses• gloves• boots• respirators/masks• caps• jacket


• brushes• rollers• spray equipment• sanders• scrapers• vacuum cleaner• compressor• trestles, planks, stepladders, mobile scaffold• imitation marble/wood graining – softeners, floggers, over-grainers, mottlers, fitches, brush-grainer,

cutters, rubber combs, heart grain simulator, check roller, steel combs, veining horn, chamois, stipplingbrushes, pencils, crayons, feathers

• broken colour effects – rags, chamois, hessian, paper, special rollers, sponges• stencilling – drawing/tracing materials, cutting knives/scalpels, cutting board, stencil material, stencil

brushes and rollers



• gilding – Gilders cushion, mop, knife, tip, cotton wool

Paint products may include:

• acrylic/latex grounds• alkyd/oil grounds• acrylic/latex scumble medium and associated products• alkyd/natural oil scumble medium and associated products• polyurethane, acrylic-latex, and natural oil glazes• acrylic-latex and oil based washes• solvent-borne (alkyd, urethane, urethane/alkyd, urethane oil or modified alkyd resins), latex (pva,

pva/acrylic, acrylic and styrene acrylic)• artist oils and water colours• spraying enamels and acrylic lacquers

All work must be carried out in accordance with OH&S regulations.

Reporting of faults to be in accordance with organisation’s worksite procedures and may be verbal or written

EVIDENCE GUIDECompetency is to be demonstrated by the safe and effective application of the appropriate processes toproduce mirror paint finishes plus any three of the other decorative finishes listed within the "elements".Painted finishes are to be free of defects and comply with manufacturer's and job/architect specifications.




• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and process within context of applying paint finishes• prepare surfaces in accordance with substrate requirements, job/architect’s and manufacturer’s

specifications• ensure adequate ventilation• protect adjoining surfaces by drop sheets, masking or removal of objects• materials disposed of in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• finish surfaces to specification• interactively communicate, where applicable, to ensure safe and efficient work operations


Pre-requisite for this unit are:

• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG2001A Prepare surfaces• BCG3096A Apply paint by brush/roller• BCG3097A Match specified paint colour• BCG3098A Apply clear timber finish• BCG3045A Apply paint by spray• BCG3100A Prepare surfaces for painting and decorating





• workplace and equipment safety requirements• specifications• decorative painted finishes technology• applying paint with brushes and rollers• applying paint by spray• compatibility of surface coatings to substrates• preparation of surfaces for the application of mirror finish, broken colour effects, imitation

marbling, imitation wood graining, gilding, colour fleck and stencilling• mirror finish materials and application methods – spray, brush, brush/roller, flood coating• broken colour effect materials and application techniques – rag rolling, bagging, flouncing,

sponging, dragging, stippling, blending and highlighting• colour fleck materials and application techniques• imitation marble materials and application techniques• imitation wood grain materials and application techniques• gilding materials and application techniques• stencilling materials and application techniques• hazardous materials• plant, tools and equipment


• work safely effectively and efficiently• organise and plan work• interpret specifications• identify and select materials appropriate to the job• use tools equipment and materials• prepare materials• check finished work• communicate effectively• clean an area and dispose of waste safely• store materials/components• respond to emergency situations• calculate material quantities• apply mirror finish paint work• produce a variety of broken colour effects• produce a variety of imitation marble effects• produce a variety of imitation wood grain effects• produce a gilded finish to a variety of architectural features• apply a multicoloured stencil• produce a colour fleck finish



• workplace location• tools and equipment• appropriate materials applicable to activities




Competency should be assessed through direct observation and questions related to underpinningknowledge

Competency should be assessed under general guidance checking at various stages of the processand at the completion of each activity against performance criteria and specifications


Competency may be assessed in the workplace or simulated workplace setting


KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 3 1 2 2



BCG3045A: Apply paint by spray


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 OH&S requirements for applying sprayed paintedfinishes and of workplace environment recognised andadhered to.

1.2 Quality Assurance requirements of company’s paintingand decorating operations recognised and adhered to.

1.3 Materials checked for conformity against specificationsand finishes schedule.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected consistent with jobrequirements, checked for serviceability and ant faultsreported to supervisor.


2 Prepare materials, unit andapplication area

2.1 Area set up for application processes to suit unit orapplication area.

2.2 Adequate ventilation to application area provided.

2.3 Measures taken to ensure dust free area.

2.4 Paint mixed and viscosity adjusted to allow forapplication process.

2.5 Unit/area prepared, where applicable, by covering,removing and/or masking off to specification areas notto be painted.

2.6 Erect and dismantle scaffold, where applicable, to joband OH&S requirements.

3 Set up and test sprayequipment

3.1 Compressor or airless spray unit set up in designedoperating location, where applicable.

3.2 Correct fluid tip, air cap, hoses, filters and tips selectedand fitted.

3.3 Fittings checked for secure fitting.

3.4 Safety devices checked to ensure operational.

3.5 Equipment tested and defects corrected to operationaland manufacturer’s requirements.

Apply paint by spray BCG3045A


4 Apply paint by spray 4.1 Spray gun set up approximate distance from surfaceand operated to designed requirement.

4.2 Paint applied by spray to surface using correcttechnique to achieve an even finish with opacity andsheen level to specification or Australian Standard2311 – The Painting of Buildings.

4.3 Defects in coating identified and corrective actiontaken.

5 Clean up and storeequipment

5.1 Spray equipment dismantled, cleaned and maintained.

5.2 Fittings and equipment cleaned with correct solventwithout damage and stored safely to manufacturer’sspecifications.



RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the application of pigmented coatings by spray and should be read in conjunction withAustralian Standard 2311 – The Painting of Buildings.

Spray application includes both air atomised-spray applications and airless spray units.


• quality of materials• preparation of surfaces• application techniques• cleanliness of application areas• specified finish• maintenance of equipment

as per Australian Standard 2311 – The Painting of Buildings


• protective clothing• protective equipment• hazardous materials• workplace conditions and isolating areas• use of plant and equipment• emergency procedures

Paint coatings may include:

• Solvent-borne (alkyd, urethane, urethane/alkyd, urethane oil or modified alkyd resins)• latex (PVA, PVA/acrylic, acrylic and styrene acrylic)• paving paints• roofing paints (latex and solvent-borne)• two-pack epoxy and polyurethane• chlorinated rubber



• water-repellents for timber• water-repellents for concrete or masonry• anti graffiti paints


• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• respirators including cartridge and supplied-air• ear muffs/plugs• caps• jacket• overalls


• spray guns• sanders• air compressor• hoses, tips, filters and other fittings• brushes• vacuum cleaner• drop sheets• masking equipment• diaphragm or piston airless spray unit (electrical/pneumatic/petrol)• scaffold including planks, trestles, stepladders and aluminium mobile

Reporting of faults to be in accordance with organisation’s worksite procedures and may be verbal or written.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the performance of applying a painted finish by spray that is free fromdefects and is of the specified thickness, sheen, opacity and colour.




• indicate compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context ofapplying paint using spray equipment

• select and use of appropriate process, tools and equipment• inspect fittings and hoses for serviceability prior to connection to pressure lines for spray

equipment• use safe and effective applications for spray application of paint• clean gun and fittings immediately after task completed• protect adjoining surfaces by dropsheets and/or masking• apply accurate and efficient sealing if masking abutted surfaces• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• prepare surface as per manufacturer’s specification in compliance with substrate requirements• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work procedures• calculate quantity of materials

Apply paint by spray BCG3045A




• BCG1006A Use plant and equipment• BCG2001A Prepare surfaces

This unit may be assessed concurrently with:

• BCG2019A Prepare for construction process (painting and decorating)• BCG3100A Prepare surfaces for painting and decorating• BCG3097A Match specified paint colour• BCG3098A Apply clear wood finish



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• specifications• spray equipment• paint and preparatory materials• spray application and procedures• tools and equipment• hazardous materials• maintenance of equipment• measuring, marking and masking


• work safely• interpret specifications• organise work• measure and mask work• use spray equipment• apply paint• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively• clean equipment



• workplace location• spray equipment• spray booth for air-atomised spray application• tools and equipment• specifications and appropriate materials for activity



Assessment should involve:



• observation of work processes• questioning related to underpinning knowledge




Assessment should be while tasks are undertaken either individually or as part of a team operationunder limited supervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 3 2 1 2 3



BCG3046A: Apply texture coatings


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements for company’spainting and decorating operations recognised andadhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andpainting processes and application of texturedfinishes recognised and adhered to.

1.3 Materials selected and checked against drawings andspecifications of finishes schedule.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected consistent with jobrequirements, checked for serviceability and anyfaults reported to supervisor.

1.6 Safety hazards identified and correct proceduresused to reduce risk to self and others.

2 Set up scaffold if required 2.1 Scaffolding erected where required to appropriateworking height to OH&S requirements.

3 Prepare surfaces forfinishing

3.1 Surface prepared as per manufacturer’s specificationin compliance with substrate requirements.

3.2 Filler and primer/sealer applied as per manufacturer’sspecification.

4 Apply texture material bytrowel or roller

4.1 Material mixed to manufacturer’s specifications.

4.2 Coatings applied by trowel or roller to manufacturer’sspecifications and texture profile to sample.

5 Apply finishing material byspray

5.1 Material mixed to manufacturer’s specifications.

5.2 Coating applied by spray to manufacturer’sspecifications and texture profile to sample.

6 Clean up 6.1 Equipment dismantled, cleaned and maintained.



Apply texture coatings BCG3046A


6.4 Tools and equipment cleaned with correct solventand stored to manufacturer’s instructions.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to textured finishes created by the use of trowel, roller of spray equipment. These are high-build (acrylic or styrene/acrylate) coatings formulated specifically for application over off-form concrete,fibrous cement sheeting, tilt-up concrete slabs and other brick and masonry surfaces. They may also beapplied over paper-faced plasterboard.

Quality Assurance requirements are as per Australian Standards 2311 - The Painting of Buildings and mayinclude:

• quality of materials• preparation of surfaces• application techniques• attention to colour and profile of texture• cleanliness of application areas• handling techniques• maintenance of equipment


• protective clothing• protective equipment• hazardous materials• workplace conditions and isolating areas• use of plant, equipment and tools• use of working platforms/scaffold


• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• respirators/masks• ear muffs/plugs• cap or balaclava• jacket


• trowels• roller equipment• brushes• spray equipment• mixers• compressor• hoses and fittings• vacuum cleaner• brooms• trestles and planks, step ladders or mobile scaffold




EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by carrying out each of the textured processes to finish a surface tospecification




• indicate compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context ofapplying textured finishes to surfaces

• consider as part of job planning weather, continuous area of surface to be textured, material andlabour requirements

• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply texture material with strict adherence to manufacturer’s coverage rate specification, that is,

litres per m2

• treat bond breaker according to specification when applying texture coatings to off-form concreteand tilt-up concrete surfaces

• prepare material to specifications• protect adjoining surfaces protected by dropsheets or masking• inspect fittings and hoses for serviceability prior to connection to pressure lines for spray

equipment• clean gun and fittings cleaned after task completed• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and efficient work operations• calculate quantities



• BCG 1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG 2001A Prepare surfaces• BCG 3119 A Prepare surfaces for painting and decorating


• BCG 3096A Apply paint by brush/roller• BCG 3097A Match specified paint colour• BCG 3130A Apply paint by spray• BCG 3092A Apply solid render• BCG 1017A Prepare for construction process (painting)



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• specifications• surface preparation specific to texture coatings• texture coatings and their properties, uses and limitations• preparatory materials• spray equipment• roller equipment• tools and equipment

Apply texture coatings BCG3046A


• spray application• hazardous materials• maintenance of equipment


• work safely• interpret specifications• organise work• set out work• use spray equipment• use tools and equipment including roller and trowel and associated accessories• clean equipment• communicate effectively



• workplace location• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to application tasks• appropriate materials to carry out activities• specifications relevant to activity








Assessment should be while tasks are undertaken either individually or as part of a team operationunder limited supervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 3 2 2 3 3



BCG3047A: Erect ceiling framing (pitched roof)



1.2 OH&S requirements for framing constructionprocesses and workplace environment recognised andadhered to.

1.3 Materials and quantity requirements identified from jobdrawings and specifications in accordance withAS1684-1992.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected to carry out processesconsistent with job requirements checked forserviceability and any faults reported to supervisor.

1.6 Top of wall frames checked for alignment andtemporary bracing or ties, where required, fixed tomaintain true line.

2 Install plates on masonrywalls

2.1 Timber for wall plates, not less than 75mm x 38mm,selected and cut to length to specifications.

2.2 Wall plates placed and tied down into position tomasonry wall in accordance with specifications.

3 Install ceiling joists 3.1 Location of ceiling joists checked for set out or set outon top plate to specifications for spacings for pitchedroof and ceiling members.

3.2 Ceiling joists direction designed to ensure joists areadjacent to roof rafters and clear of underneath of roofmembers.

3.3 Ceiling joists cut to length, placed and securely fixed tolocations to specifications.

3.4 Trimmers cut and fixed to required locations tospecifications.

3.5 Openings in ceiling trimmed all round to specificationsto provide full support for ceiling lining.

4 Install hanging beams 4.1 Hanging beam sizes and spacing checked inaccordance with specifications and AS1684.

4.2 Hanging beams installed with end bearing of full width

Erect ceiling framing (pitched roof) BCG3047A


of top plate and if greater than three metres in lengthpositioned above a stud on trimming joist or supportedby intermediate block.

4.3 Hanging beams on external walls placed alongsiderafter locations, where applicable.

4.4 Ceiling joists connected to hanging beams and eithersecured against deflection by metal straps or timbercleats arranged on alternate sides of hanging beam tospecifications.

4.5 Tie members installed, where necessary, to providelateral bracing to external walls.

5 Install ceiling battens 5.1 Ceiling battens, where required, of size to conform toload requirements of ceiling, fixed to ceiling joists toensure flat finish to specifications.

5.2 Battens joined on ceiling joists to specifications.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the construction of framed ceilings to suit types of pitched supported roof framing whichinclude:

• gable roofs• hip roofs• hip and valley roofs• combination of gables, hips and valleys

All work to be carried out in accordance with AS1684–1992 National Timber Framing Code.







Personal protective equipment may include

• boots• safety/goggles• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators


• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level• squares• nail bag• chisels• hand saws• saw stools• power saws• nail gun• air compressor and hoses• power leads• string lines

Work to be undertaken in a team situation.


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by setting out and installing ceiling framing to a nominated projectinvolving a hip and valley roof.




• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context oferecting ceiling framing for a pitched roof

• identify details of proposed pitched roof structure and wall framing support• ensure all walls are straight and braced prior to commencing ceiling construction• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out construction• use safe and effective procedures to install ceiling joists, trimmers and hanging beams to

AS1684• ensure hanging beams correctly supported and ceiling joists and trimmers located alongside

rafters• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work procedures• complete ceiling framing construction to proposed pitched roof and specifications



• BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry)

Erect ceiling framing (pitched roof) BCG3047A


• BCG3012A Construct and erect timber wall framing(3) Underpinning Knowledge and Skills


• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawing and specifications• Building Code of Australia and AS1684 National Timber Framing Code• materials• wall framing and roof construction• tools and equipment• fixing and fasteners• calculation of material requirements


• work safely• organise work• set out work• read and interpret drawings• interpret documentation• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively• calculate material quantities



• workplace location with erected walls in position• appropriate material to carry out construction process• tools and equipment appropriate to construction processes• drawings and specifications relevant to construction activity











KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 2 2 1 2 1



BCG3048A: Install glass blockwork



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andpreparing and installing glass blockwork recognisedand adhered to.

1.3 Materials and quantity requirements determined fromjob drawings, specifications and manufacturer'srecommendations.




1.7 Adhesive checked for manufacturer'srecommendations and conformity to specifications.

1.8 Location and dimensions of blockwork determined fromjob drawings.

2 Set out and prepare base 2.1 Area correctly located and base and abutting surfaceschecked for level/plumb and finished to specification.

2.2 Surface for blockwork checked for clean and dry andprepared according to manufacturer's and jobspecification.

2.3 Wall or section of blockwork set out to base detailsfrom job drawings.

3 Install glass blocks 3.1 Adhesive applied according to manufacturer'srecommendations and job specifications.

3.2 Spacers and connectors located and positioned inaccordance with manufacturer's and job specifications.

3.3 Glass blocks laid to set out line, plumb, level and todesigned pattern to specifications.

3.4 Scaffolding erected, where required, in accordancewith OH&S regulations.

Install glass blockwork BCG3048A


3.5 Blockwork completed to job drawings andspecifications.

3.6 Joints tool finished to achieve specified finish.

4 Clean up 4.1 Excess adhesive removed and blockwork face cleanedwith manufacturer's approved cleaning fluid.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to blockwork constructed using glass blocks with silicone type adhesive or sealant.

Glass blockwork may also be installed using cement mortar joints.






• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• respirators.


• measuring tape/rule• string lines• trowels• caulking gun• knives• jointing tools• spirit level• shovel• concrete mixer



• rubber mallet• straight edge• scaffolding• wheelbarrow

Safety hazards may include:

• noise from nearby work• other work personnel• obstructions to access• barricades• inadequate lighting• height consideration

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by laying glass blocks using both cement mortar and flexiblesealant/adhesive.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of installing glass

blockwork• check installation area for size, plumb, level obstructions, location and safety hazards• prepare surfaces for the application of jointing materials in accordance with manufacturer's

specifications• maintain bond/pattern of blockwork consistent with drawings and specifications• maintain alignment, level of courses and plumb• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work procedures• complete blockwork installation to specifications


Pre-requisites for this unit are

• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG1001A Use simple levelling devices• BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/blockwork)• BCG2001A Prepare surfaces• BCG2004A Carry out levelling• BCG 3110A Lay bricks and blocks (wall and corner)



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawings and specifications

Install glass blockwork BCG3048A


• glass blockwork construction• hazards associated with solvents and adhesives used with glass blocks• expansion joints for walls using clay, concrete or glass bricks/blocks• mortar mix specification• materials• tools and equipment• calculation of material requirements


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively• calculate material quantities



• workplace location• tools and equipment appropriate to installation processes• scaffolding applicable to installation where required• glass blocks and associate materials• drawings and specifications relevant to activity



Competency should be assessed under general guidance checking at various stages of the processand at completion of the activity against performance criteria and specifications.




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 1 2 1 2 2 2



BCG3049A: Fix stone steps and stairs




1.3 Delivered material checked against jobdrawings/concrete steps and specifications.



1.6 Safety hazards identified and correct procedures usedto minimise risks to self and others.

1.7 Location of steps/stairs identified from job drawings,formed concrete steps or base.

1.8 Rise and going of each step identified from pouredconcrete or calculated in accordance with rise ofsteps/stairs and requirements of Building Code ofAustralia.

1.9 Position locations for face of treads and risers set outto dimensions for going and rise of steps.

1.10 Face location of profile of steps/stairs set out to line tospecifications for finish.

2 Lay out for stone steps andstairs

2.1 Mortar materials proportioned and mixed tospecifications and AS3700.

2.2 Risers and treads set out and laid in mortar basestraight and level to specifications with allowance of 2-3mm fall to front edge of treads for water runoff, whereapplicable.

2.3 Profile of steps/stairs faced with like stone to designedpattern, straight and plumb to specifications, whereapplicable.

3 Clad solid stone 3.1 Stone slabs laid and fixed level and plumb, on bed ofmortar, where specified, to form treads, risers andprofile face to specifications.

Fix stone steps and stairs BCG3049A


3.2 Joints pointed up using coloured mortar whereapplicable and finished to specifications.

3.3 Steps/stairs completed to specifications fordimensions, alignment and finish.

3.4 Stonework cleaned using dry, liquid or chemical meansin accordance with type of stone laid.

4 Clean up 4.1 Area cleared with all waste and materials removed.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit covers facing to concrete steps/stairs and random and regular rubble construction either faced orfinished to step/stair design.

Types of stone may include but are not limited to:

• marble• granite• slate

Work carried out in accordance with AS3700-1988 Masonry in Buildings






• boots• safety goggles/glasses• ear plugs/muffs• dust mask/respirators



• gloves


• measuring tape/rule• mallet• spirit level• squares• trowels• mortar board• screed board• shovel• masonry saws• concrete mixer• jointing tools• brushes• broom• power leads• wheelbarrow• rollers• lifting clamps

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the safe and effective lay out and construction of stone steps or stairsto a nominated location.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of laying and fixing

stone• select stone and mortar consistent with specification of job required• accurately mark out location of treads and risers• adopt safe and effective procedures to handle and place stone• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations• complete steps/stairs and joints to specifications



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices• BCG2001A Prepare surfaces

Fix stone steps and stairs BCG3049A





• drawings and specifications• types of stone and characteristics• fixing of stone work• mortar mix composition• range of mortar additives including plasticiser/s and/or application• Building Code of Australia and AS3700– 1998 Masonry in Building• plant, tools and equipment• materials handling


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• use hand and power tools• measure and calculate quantities appropriate to the task• select materials appropriate to the task• organise and set out work• handle materials in safe manner• communicate effectively



• work location for construction of stone steps and stairs• construction materials appropriate to construction of stone steps and stairs• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to installation processes• appropriate communication of documentation relevant to task



Assessment may be by intermittent checking at various stages of each task application or at thecompletion of each task in accordance with the performance criteria and specifications.




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 1 1 2



BCG3050A: Renovate and restore stone work




1.3 Material requirements assessed against drawings,work location and specifications.




1.7 Working platform/scaffolding erected in accordancewith OH&S regulations.

2 Locate damaged section ofnatural stone moulding

2.1 Damaged section located, clearly identified andconfirmed with architect’s requirements.

2.2 Extent of damaged section and overall dimensions ofreplacement stone correctly determined.

3 Install lifting/loweringequipment

3.1 Appropriate lifting equipment installed and tested toOH&S regulations and job requirements.

4 Remove damaged stone 4.1 Damaged section accurately and safely cut out topredetermined dimensions without damage tosurrounding stone.

4.2 Waste materials safely lowered and removed from sitein accordance with job and OH&S requirements.

4.3 Bedding planes to support replacement stoneaccurately formed to minimise size of replacementstone.

5 Select matching stone 5.1 Colour and type of existing stone identified andmatched with replacement stone to architect'sspecifications.

Renovate and restore stone work BCG3050A


6 Replace stone 6.1 Dimensions and profile of replacement stone correctlydetermined and appropriate templates made.

6.2 Replacement stone accurately worked to matchdimensions and profile.

7 Fix replacement stone 7.1 Replacement stone drilled/slotted for dowels/bracketsin accordance with fixing specifications.

7.2 Replacement stone correctly handled and raised toposition for placement.

7.3 Stone placed, fixed and bedded in location withadhesive or mortar according to specification.

7.4 Vertical joints filled with mortar or sealant, whereapplicable, to specifications.

7.5 Stonework cleaned using dry, liquid or chemical meansin accordance with type of stone laid.

8 Clean up 8.1 Area cleared of waste material, equipment andscaffolding.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit covers both face and structural stonework which may be plain and flat or ornamental.

Types of stone may include but are not limited to:

• marble• granite• ashlar• sandstone

Lifting equipment may include but is not limited to:

• gin poles• shear legs• mechanical hoists• elevating work platforms

Other means of raising stone include:

• forklifts• cranes








• boots• safety goggles/glasses• ear plugs/muffs• dust mask/respirators• gloves• hard hat


• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level• squares• masonry chisels• scaffolding• rollers• power drills including impact• power grinder• air compressor and hoses• power leads

Work to be undertaken and supported in accordance with legislative and regulatory requirements andWorksafe Australia Standards for Users and Operators of Industrial Equipment.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by carrying out safe and effective restoration of damaged masonry workby replacing a nominated section.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of installing stonework

to facades• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to remove damaged stone

Renovate and restore stone work BCG3050A


• give particular attention to accuracy of measurements and templates for replacement stone• select stone consistent with specification for material and colour• use safe handling practices in moving and placing stone• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations• complete renovation process to specifications



• BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices• BCG2001A Prepare surfaces• BCG3052A Fix stone veneer cladding




• drawings and specifications• types of stone and characteristics• fixing of stone• mortar mix composition• range of mortar additives including plasticiser/s and/or application• building code of Australia and AS00–1988 masonry in buildings• lifting equipment• plant, tools and equipment• measuring and levelling• templates for stonework


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• use plant, equipment, hand and power tools• measure and set out work• select materials specific to requirements• handle materials in safe manner• erect scaffolding• communicate effectively



• work location for renovation activity• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to renovation and replacement processes• construction materials relevant to the activity• appropriate communication of documentation relevant to task• scaffolding appropriate to location and activity





Competency of this unit may be determined concurrently, based upon project work.





KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 3 2 3 2 1

BCG 3051A Install and repair stone floors


BCG3051A: Install and repair stone floors




1.3 Job material and equipment requirements determinedfrom drawings/work location and specifications.

1.4 Samples of stone provided and approved prior tocommencement of work.



1.7 Delivered stone checked prior to use to ensureconformity to sample, dimensions and tolerances,where applicable.

2 Prepare substrate to layirregular size stone

2.1 Location for stone floor identified and set out todimensions from job drawings and specification.

2.2 Area excavated to designed depth in accordance withspecifications and maximum size stone.

2.3 Allowance made for 50mm crushed rock and 50mmbedding sand base.

2.4 Crushed rock laid to acceptable foundation andcompacted in accordance with specifications.

2.5 Bedding sand laid and levelled to specification.

3 Lay stone blocks 3.1 Blocks selected for variance in shape to suit abuttingblocks.

3.2 Starting point determined and first block selected.

3.3 First block individually bedded to finish level toproposed floor level to specifications.

3.4 Blocks selected, individually bedded with close joints tofinish level to proposed level to specifications.

Install and repair stone floors BCG 3051A


4 Lay regular stone on sandbed

4.1 Bedding sand laid on top of specified base and levelledto specifications.

4.2 Starting point selected and first stone bedded tolocation and level to specification.

4.3 Stones laid individually to specified joints inaccordance with sand or mortar finish.

4.4 Stone floor laid to level and alignment in accordancewith specifications.

5 Lay regular stone on mortarbed

5.1 Concrete base poured to designed level and finishedto specifications.

5.2 Concrete base checked for discrepancies in level andvariations noted and marked, where applicable.

5.3 Base set out to determine layout of stone tospecifications.

5.4 Mortar materials and adhesives, prepared and mixedto job and manufacturer’s specifications, whereapplicable.

5.5 First stone laid to mortar bed and finished to designedlevel and location.

5.6 Stones laid individually to specified pattern, joints andtolerances in accordance with specifications.

6 Finish stone floors 6.1 Close fitting stone finished by brushing in fine sand tospecifications.

6.2 Stone laid for mortar joints cleaned to clear joints forfinish application.

6.3 Natural or coloured mortar mixed, applied and finishedto joints in accordance with specified finish.

6.4 Surface cleaned removing spillage or waste mortar.

7 Lay dressed stone 7.1 Layout design of dressed stone identified from jobdrawings and specifications.

7.2 Materials checked for conformity to design and patternwhere applicable.

7.3 Joints determined in accordance with specificationsincluding metal edge or dividing strips.

7.4 Designed layout set out on base surface to jobdrawings and specifications.



7.5 Bedding material of adhesive or mortar identified fromspecifications.

7.6 Mortar and/or adhesive prepared in accordance withmanufacturer's specifications.

7.7 Stone sections carefully handled and placed to avoiddamage to arises of laid sections.

7.8 Stone laid to designed pattern to specification toproduce true level surface.

7.9 Finished surface polished to specificationrequirements.

7.10 Finished work protected in accordance withspecification requirements.

8 Repair stone or marblefloor

8.1 Damaged stone or marble section carefully removedavoiding damage to surrounds.

8.2 Area cleaned out free of debris and adhesive/mortarremoved to make way for new.

8.3 Replacement piece trimmed/checked for conformity tosize.

8.4 Mortar/adhesive prepared where required and appliedto bed level.

8.5 Replacement piece carefully placed avoiding damageto surrounding stones/sections.

8.6 Surface polished/finished to specifications.

9 Clean up 9.1 Area cleared free of waste and materials.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the laying and repairing of all forms of stone floors which include:

• natural stone• marble• reconstituted stone



Stone floor installations include:

• internal to a building• external in surrounds of a building

Base and bedding requirements for stone floors will differ in accordance with:

• size of stone• shape of stone• existing substrate• internal or external use• characteristics of stone• designed pattern

Methods of finishing joints are dependent on:

• type of stone• size of joint• location of floor

Methods of finishing joints include but are not limited to:

• mortar• grouting• brushed sand• sealant• dry




• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• hazardous materials




• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level• squares



• screed boards• mortar boards• trowels• floats• shovels• concrete mixer• straight edge• rollers• rubber mallet• power leads• masonry chisels• sealant gun• bucket• wheelbarrow

Protection of finished work may include:

• barricades• laying of plywood/particle board sheeting• covered with polythene sheeting• covered with carpet

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by laying and/or repairing two separate types of stone floors, one to aconcrete base and the other involving crushed rock and sand bedding in accordance with the performancecriteria and range listed within the range of variables.


It is essential the competence be observed in the following aspects:


• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks• apply organisational quality procedures and process within the context of installing and repairing

stone floors• select and use appropriate procedures to lay, compact and level bedding for stone• select stone and mortar or adhesive consistent with specification of job required• give attention to accuracy of setting out of pattern for stone floor• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to handle and place sections• give particular attention to laying stone sections to line and level with joints to specification• complete stone floor installation to specification• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify



• BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices• BCG2001A Prepare surfaces• BCG3070A Dress stone manually





• types of stone and characteristics• laying of stone• workplace and equipment safety requirements• methods of bedding stone• mortar mix composition• drawings and specifications• range of mortar additives including plasticiser/s and/or their application• Building Code of Australia and AS3700-1988 Masonry in Buildings• measuring, levelling and calculations• plant, tools and equipment• handling of materials• Quality Assurance


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• select material• handle material• use tools and equipment• measure and set out work• calculate quantities• work to levels• communicate effectively



• suitable work area relevant to proposed activities for installation and repair of stone floors• materials relevant to proposed installation and repair processes• tools and equipment relevant to installation and repair processes• drawings, specifications and/or documentation relative to proposed activity




Assessment may be by intermittent checking at various stages of each task application or at thecompletion of each activity in accordance with the performance criteria and specifications.






KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 1 3 3 2



BCG3052A: Fix stone veneer cladding



1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’sconstruction operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements for application to tasks andworkplace environment recognised and adhered to.




2 Set out for stone veneercladding, dry joints

2.1 Datum or level line established.

2.2 Method of fixing determined in accordance withstructural substrate and specification requirementsfor securing slabs/panels.

2.3 Spacing and location for slabs, joints and fixingattachments established relative to level line set out.

2.4 Holes and/or slots drilled and formed in stone veneerslabs for fixing requirements to specifications.

3 Fix stone slabs 3.1 Appropriate lifting equipment installed and tested toOH&S regulations and job requirements, whereapplicable.

3.2 Stone slabs correctly handled, raised/lifted,manoeuvred and located into position.

3.3 Stone slabs fixed level to line and plumb tospecifications using appropriate designed fixing andclamping method.

3.4 Working platform/scaffolding erected in accordancewith OH&S regulations and job requirements.

3.5 Fixing connections installed when locating eachslab/panel to align and tie stone slabs together, andadjusted and secured to specifications.

3.6 Stone veneer secured to structure by use of pre/postfitted anchors/brackets fixed to specifications.

Fix stone veneer cladding BCG3052A


3.7 Veneer cladding completed with dry joints betweenstone panel to fit to specified tolerances. Faces of allpanels aligned.

4 Lay stone for veneerconstruction

4.1 Stone blocks to be laid checked for regular surfaceand size to form stone veneer wall.

4.2 Wall ties selected in accordance with wall framingstructure and AS2699-1984 Wall Ties for MasonryConstruction.

4.3 Mortar mixed to specifications and in accordancewith AS1316– 972 Masonry Cement.

4.4 Stone blocks laid facing alignment and plumb tospecifications with wall installed and engaged atspecified spacings.

4.5 Regular stone laid to alignment for bed course andgauge maintained, where applicable.

4.6 Damp proof course laid in accordance withspecifications and AS2904-1995 Damp ProofCourses and Flashings.

4.7 Mortar joints maintained to specified size, wherepracticable, and struck or finished flush inaccordance with specifications.

4.8 Stone face finished with surplus mortar brushed andremoved from surface.

5 Clean up 5.1 Stonework cleaned using dry, liquid or chemicalmeans in accordance with type of stone andspecifications.

5.2 Area cleared of waste, material, scaffolding andequipment.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the fixing of machine dressed stone slabs/panels to the face of a structure to form aveneered finish and the laying of stone walls to form the veneer in veneered construction.

Types of structures may include:

• in-situ reinforced concrete• pre-cast reinforced concrete



• structural steel frame• brickwork or blockwork

Veneered construction may include:

• timber wall framing• metal wall framing

Stone for veneered construction may be:

• regular• random regular




• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• working platforms and scaffolding• lifting equipment, cranes and hoists




• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level• squares• scaffolding• rollers• power drills including impact• power grinder• rubber mallet• air compressor and hoses• power leads• screw cramp and wedges• string line• chalk line• concrete mixer• shovels• mortar boards



• trowels• jointing tools• spanners


• obstructions to clear access for supply• barricades• other work personnel• excessive noise nearby• wind• power leads• dust

Lifting equipment includes but is not limited to:

• gin poles• shear legs• mechanised hoists• elevating work platform

Fixing connections for supporting and tying machined slabs/panels together may include but are not limitedto:

• pin bracket• corbel plate bracket• slotted bracket• turned end cramp• back cramp• fish tailed cramp• s-hook cramp• dog cramp

Methods of securing veneer to structure may include but are not limited to:

• mechanical masonry anchor• chemical masonry anchor• metal bracket for connection to steel frame• metal wall ties for connection to timber or metal wall frame

Work to be undertaken and supported in accordance with legislative and regulatory requirements andWorksafe Australia Standards for Users and Operators of Industrial Equipment.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by working with a team and fixing stone to provide the veneer cladding toone of the types of structures listed within the range of variables statement and the laying of a stone wall aspart of a veneered construction.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks



• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of fixing and installingstone veneer cladding

• select stone consistent with specification for material and colour• use safe handling practices in moving and placing stone• give particular attention to fixing stone to position and structure• fix stone to line, level and plumb• use safe and effective procedures to lay a stone wall to alignment and plumb• give attention to wall tie fixing and finish of stone face to specifications• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations



• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices• BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/blocklaying)• BCG3070A Dress stone manually




• drawings and specifications• types of stone and characteristics• methods of fixing stone as cladding• Building Code of Australia and Australian Standards 1316, 2699 and 2904• lifting equipment• tools, plant and equipment• mortar mix composition• range of mortar additives• scaffolding• measuring, levelling and calculations• worksite communication


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• use plant, equipment, hand and power tools• measure and set out work• select materials specific to requirements• calculate quantities• handle materials safely• erect scaffolding• fix materials• mix mortar• lay stone• communicate effectively




The following resources should be provided

• work location for stone veneer activity• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to installation processes• construction materials relevant to proposed activity• appropriate communication of documentation relevant to task







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 1 3 3 2



BCG3053A: Produce reconstituted stone




1.2 OH&S requirements for application to tasks andworkplace environment recognised and adhered to.

1.3 Materials selected and checked against specificationsfor stone mix.




2 Produce reconstituted stone 2.1 Forms/moulds constructed or cleaned and prepared forplacement of mix to specifications.

2.2 Aggregates measured and proportioned to design mixand mixed to specifications.

2.3 Mould filled with mix and light vibration applied toconsolidate material and eliminate/minimise voids.

2.4 Level of filled mould screeded/floated to flat surface.

2.5 Stone mix cured in accordance with specifications forcuring and stripping from mould.

2.6 Reconstituted stone section removed from mould,carefully handled and placed on table ready for grindingprocess.

2.7 Surface ground thoroughly to expose aggregate andexposed voids filled evenly with matching colourcement mortar.

2.8 Surface polished flat and free from blemish.

3 Clean up 3.1 Area cleared of waste material, dust and equipment.




Produce reconstituted stone BCG3053A


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit covers all types of reconstituted stone produced by mixing a designed proportion of aggregates bothfine and coarse, to produce a designed result in stone composition and colour.

Materials used in reconstituted stone may include but are not limited to:

• river gravel• basatt (blue stone)• igneous rocks• sand• coloured cement


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to specifications of work• quality of finish


• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• working platforms• use of mechanical plant and equipment



Tools plant and equipment may include but are not limited to:

• measuring tape/rule• hammer• spirit level• shovel• concrete mixer• screed boards• floats• wheelbarrow• grinding machine• polishing machine• gantry crane• forklift

Work to be undertaken in accordance with legislative and regulatory requirements and Worksafe AustraliaStandards for Users and Operates of Industrial Equipment.



EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by carrying out the safe and effective production of reconstituted stoneusing any of the materials listed in the range of variables statement.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes tools and equipment to carry out tasks• attention to the accurate setting up of forms or moulds for placement of mix• apply organisational quality procedures and process within the context of producing reconstituted

stone• select stone materials consistent with specification of job required• correct proportioning of materials carried out to specification for mix• give attention to safe handling and placement procedures• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to apply grinding and polishing processes• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations• complete produced stone to specifications for mix and finish



• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices• BCG1010A Carry out concrete work to simple forms• BCG3075A Machine stone




• drawings and specifications• formwork and moulds for concrete• materials and characteristics• proportioning of materials for concrete mixes• placement and compaction of concrete• polishing and grinding processes• plant, tools and equipment• handling of materials• worksite communication• measuring, levelling and calculations


• work safely• read and interpret drawings• organise work

Produce reconstituted stone BCG3053A


• use tools and equipment• calculate materials• place concrete• communicate effectively



• work area suitable to task• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to the application processes• moulds on material for formwork appropriate to activity• materials required for composition of proposed mix• drawings and specifications relevant to proposed task



Assessment may be by intermittent checking at various stages of each task application or at the endof each task in accordance with the performance criteria and specifications.




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 1 3 3 2



BCG3054A: Lay terrazzo




1.3 Drawings and specifications interpreted so that locationof terrazzo identified and material requirementsdetermined.




2 Identify materials 2.1 Appropriate materials selected to match specificationsfor colour and size of marble chips.

3 Prepare floor 3.1 Floor cleaned of residue and slurried to achievebonding with substrate.

4 Produce terrazzo work 4.1 Blue stone screenings, sand and cement mixed tospecification to ratio of 3, 2, 1 and water.

4.2 Base mix placed, spread and screeded to correct fallsor level, where applicable, to specification.

4.3 Terrazzo mixed correctly, 1/2 part marble chips to 1part of white cement.

4.4 Even coat to 15mm depth applied over the entirescreeded floor to specifications.

4.5 Heavy roller applied to surface to specifications toobtain flat, level floor area.

4.6 Drying time of 24 hours allowed prior to furtherapplications.

5 Grind and polish marble surface 5.1 Surface ground all over to expose marble usingportable grinding machine.

5.2 Voids or holes filled with like colour cement mortar to

Lay terrazzo BCG3054A


specifications.

5.3 Surface polished and finished flat and blemish free.

6 Clean up 6.1 Area cleared of waste, materials and equipment.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the laying of terrazzo to:

• floors• steps• stairs• landings

Materials used in the laying of terrazzo may include:

• marble• granite• basalt• sand• coloured cement






• boots• safety glasses/goggles• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators• gloves• hard hat• cap




• measuring tape/rule• shovel• spirit level• concrete mixer• screed boards• wheelbarrow• roller• portable grinding machine• polisher• power leads


• limited access to application area• barricades• other work personnel• excessive noise nearby• dust

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by providing a terrazzo finish to a floor area.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use of appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks• apply organisational quality procedures and process within the context of laying terrazzo• adapt and use safe and effective procedures to prepare surface for terrazzo base• select and proportion materials for composition mixes• adopt and apply safe and effective procedures to lay and screed base mix• apply topping mix to specification• apply safe and effective procedures in grinding and polishing surface to finish specification• identify typical faults that occur and corrective action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations



• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices• BCG1010A Carry out concrete work to simple forms• BCG2001A Prepare surfaces• BCG3073A Finish stone




• drawings and specifications

Lay terrazzo BCG3054A


• structure of terrazzo• method of applying terrazzo• materials• Quality Assurance• use of plant and equipment• placement and compaction of concrete• handling of materials• worksite communication


• work safely• read and interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• handle materials• select material• use plant and equipment• calculate materials• place concrete• communicate effectively



• general construction materials relevant to application of terrazzo work• plant and equipment appropriate to application of terrazzo work• suitable work area appropriate to application of terrazzo work• drawings and specifications relevant to proposed activity



Assessment may be by intermittent checking at various stages of each application task or at the endof each task in accordance with the performance criteria and specifications


Competency may be assessed in the workplace or simulated workplace settings.


KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 3 1 2 3 2

BCG3055A Carry out cemetery monument fixing


BCG3055A: Carry out cemetry monument fixing


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’s stonemasonry operations recognised and adhered to.


1.3 Job material and equipment requirements determinedfrom drawings, site location and specifications.



1.6 All work to be carried out in accordance with AS4204-1994 Headstones and Cemetery Monuments.

2 Construct footings and preparemonument stones

2.1 Monument footings set out and excavated todimensions from drawings and specifications.

2.2 Reinforcement placed, formwork fixed and concretepoured to provide footings to specifications.

2.3 Delivered stone checked for conformity to size, designand specifications.

2.4 Layout set out on footings to dimensions of design.

2.5 Appropriate lifting equipment installed and tested ormade ready to OH&S regulations and jobrequirements, where applicable.

3 Set up side stones into place 3.1 Side stones stood up into position on packing ofcement sheet or stone pieces.

3.2 Packing adjusted to provide slight fall towards frontstone.

3.3 Side stones checked for plumb and packing adjustedwhere required.

3.4 Measurement for diagonals and parallel checked to betrue.

3.5 Stones checked for alignment by levelling at both frontand back ends of side stones.

Carry out cemetery monument fixing BCG3055A


4 Prepare dowel joints 4.1 Depth of abutting dowel holes checked formeasurement.

4.2 Dowels measured and marked to length - 10mm andcut to marks.

4.3 Dowels inserted in or located near applicable holes.

5 Stand up front and back stones 5.1 Mortar mixed to specification and inserted into sidestone holes.

5.2 Designated dowels inserted into mortared holes to fulldepth.

5.3 Back stone positioned on timber packing ready forlifting into place.

5.4 Timber pieces placed against side stones to avoidchipping in lifting.

5.5 Mortar placed to fill holes and back stone raised intoposition.

5.6 Back stone manouvered into close joints and packingadjusted to ensure back stone level.

5.7 Front stone located, raised and manouvered intoposition to finish with joints to specifications and level.

6 Grout base and joints 6.1 Grout prepared and mixed to specification.

6.2 Joints between kerb stones and base packed slightlywith grout to specifications.

6.3 Kerb joints cleaned with wet cloth and grouted tospecification.

7 Fix headstone to backstone 7.1 Dowels for joints measured and cut to specifications.

7.2 Dowel holes filled with mortar and dowels placed fullyinto backstone.

7.3 Headstone raised and lowered carefully into place.

7.4 Headstone finished plumb and level to specification.

8 Fill centre and finish with chiptop

8.1 Centre area filled and finished to specified base.

8.2 Brick or concrete supports placed in each corner andmaximum 50mm thick reinforced concrete slab pouredto specification.



8.3 Bluestone and granite screening mixed and spread tospecified finished level.

9 Fit cover stone and finishmonument

9.1 Dowels for joints, where applicable, measured and cutto specifications.

9.2 Centre area filled to specifications.

9.3 Dowel holes filled with mortar and dowels placed fullyinto position.

9.4 Cover stone lifted into place and rested upon timberpacking pieces.

9.5 Cover stone lowered into place using wedges to finishin position.

9.6 Pointing/grouting material prepared and applied tojoints, finishing to specification.

10 Clean up 10.1 Monument cleaned down and polished whereapplicable to specification.



RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the fixing of monumental stone. All work is to comply with AS4204-1994 Headstones andCemetery Monuments.

Stone for monuments include but are not limited to:

• granite• marble• basalt• pre-cast concrete sections• re-constituted stone


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to specifications of work• attention to finish of monuments





• use of lifting equipment




• measuring tape/rule• hammer• spirit level• squares• concrete mixer• masonry chisel• hacksaw• power grinder• shovels• impact drill• wheelbarrow• air compressor and hoses• power leads• generator• trowels• rollers• pinch bars• fencing bars

Lifting equipment may include is not limited to:

• gin poles• shear legs• hydraulic or mechanical jacks

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by installing a cemetery monument in accordance with elements of thecompetency and using any of the materials listed within the range of variables statement.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out installation tasks• apply organisational quality procedures and process within the context of installing cemetery

monuments• install concrete footings to location and level• give attention to accurate measurement of stone sections and setting out for monument• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to fit and fix front, side and backstones• use correct procedures to place and fix headstone• complete installation and finish to specifications



• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations






• lifting equipment• workplace and equipment safety requirements including relevant statutory regulations, codes and

standards• drawings and specifications• types of stone and characteristics• concrete footings• stone monument construction methods• AS4204-1994 Headstones and Cemetery Monuments• plant, tools and equipment• measure and levelling• materials handling• adhesives and sealants


• work safely• organise work• read and interpret drawings• set out work• use tools, plant and equipment• work to measurements and levels• handle materials safely• communicate effectively


The following resources should be provided::

• site location for proposed activity• materials appropriate to required construction activity• hand/power tools, plant and equipment appropriate to application tasks• drawings and specifications relevant to proposed activity



Competence should be assessed under guidance checking at various stages of the process and atcompletion of the activity against performance criteria and specifications.






KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 1 3 3 2



BCG3056A: Construct stone arches




1.3 Job material and equipment requirements determinedfrom drawings and specifications.

1.4 Safety and protection requirements determined forwork personnel, public and environment,.



1.7 Scaffolding erected to job requirements and inaccordance with OH&S regulations.

2 Set out and prepare archwork 2.1 Location of arch set out on base/footing for stoneconstruction to job drawings and specifications.

2.2 Wall/columns constructed to specifications to level ofspringing line of arch.

2.3 Arch centre raised, located and supported to specifiedheight, level across springing line and level acrosscrown.

2.4 Supports designed for ease of release without jarringstonework.

3 Construct arch to regular cutstone

3.1 Voussoirs/wedge stones delivered pre-cut and checkedfor conformity to design and order.

3.2 Mortar, where applicable, mixed to specifications andAS3700-1988 Masonry in Buildings.

3.3 Central keystone established for gauged arch andvoussoir laid over centre to form arch to specification.

3.4 Regular stone laid to form courses and maintain bondto specification.

3.5 Stones cut or precut stones used to complete courseand abut arch stones.

Construct stone arches BCG3056A


3.6 Joints made within tolerance of specificationsmaintaining alignment and plumb of stone face.

4 Construct arch with irregularvoussoirs forming steppedestrados

4.1 Voussoirs/wedge stones delivered precut and checkedfor conformity to design and order.

4.2 Keystone of archway positioned centrally and designedvoussoirs laid around centre to form arch.

4.3 Regular stones laid where voussoirs designed tocorrespond with courses.

4.4 Random regular stones laid where voussoirs notdesigned for regular gauged courses.

5 Construct arch with irregularstones

5.1 Stones precut or stones set out and cut to suit shape ofdesigned arch.

5.2 Keystones laid at crown and other arch stones laid overcentre to form arch to specifications.

5.3 Wall constructed of random rubble or random regularto overlapping bond to abut arch stones tospecifications.

5.4 Joints made with mortar with stones selected andmatched close to abutting stones and bond strengthmaintained.

5.5 Joints made to specifications with wall maintained inalignment and plumb.

5.6 Mortar joints struck and finished in accordance withspecifications for finish.

6 Clean up 6.1 Stonework cleaned, area cleared of waste, materialsand equipment removed.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the construction of all stone arches which may vary in shape from a semi-circle to anapex or may be designed from a combination of symmetrical arcs.

Arches may be designed for walls of:

• regular gauge



• random regular• random rubble

Joints in stone arches may be:

• dry• cement mortar






• boots• safety glasses/goggles• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators• gloves• leather apron


• measuring tape/rule• hammer• spirit level• square• chisel• hand saws• power saws• masonry saws• straight edge• power leads• concrete mixer• shovels• string line• trowels• mortar board• gin poles• shear legs

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by constructing at least two separate types of arches to each of any twotypes of wall structures listed within the range of variables statement.

Construct stone arches BCG3056A





• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use tools and equipment to carry out construction process• apply organisational quality procedures and process within the context of constructing stone

arches to walls or columns• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to set out and set up arch centre to specification• give particular attention to support of centre and method of lowering when arch complete• identify and where applicable, mark each cut stone for arch location• use safe and effective procedures to handle and place each stone• form arch to specification and, where applicable, apply mortar to joints• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations• complete arch construction including finish to specifications



• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices• BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/blocklaying)• BCG3052A Fix stone veneer cladding




• drawings and specifications• design of arches• stone construction of arches• methods of constructing arches• mortar mix composition• range of mortar additives including plasticiser/s and/or their application• Building Code of Australia and AS3700-1988 Masonry in Buildings• types of stone and characteristics• cutting of stone• measuring and levelling• plant, tools and equipment• scaffolding and lifting equipment• worksite communications


• work safely• organise work



• read and interpret drawings• use plant, tools and equipment• measure and set out work• lay stone• handle materials safely• communicate effectively



• site location for proposed activity• materials relevant to proposed activity• hand/power tools, plant and equipment appropriate to construction processes• drawings and specifications relevant to proposed activity• Scaffolding appropriate to construction processes



Competency should be assessed under general guidance checking at various stages of the processand at completion of the activity performance criteria and specifications.




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 1 3 3 2



BCG3057A: Finish concrete


1 Define type of surface finish 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’sconcreting operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements for placing and finishingconcrete and workplace environment recognisedand adhered to.

1.3 Quality/pattern/type of concrete surface finishdefined from job plans and specifications.

2 Select tools and equipment 2.1 Concrete finishing tools and equipment selected tocarry out processes consistent with jobrequirements, checked for serviceability and anyfaults reported to supervisor.


3 Finish concrete 3.1 Screeded concrete surface wood floated or giveninitial trowel application using mechanical trowellingmachine.

3.2 Control/structural joints defined and edges trowelledto specified location according to engineer'sdrawings and specifications.

3.3 Concrete surface given final trowel/finish toarchitects design and/or engineers specifications.

4 Clean up 4.1 Area cleared and waste material removed.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the finishing of surfaces of placed concrete.

Finishes to concrete surfaces include:

• steel trowelled• wood floated• broomed• brushed to expose aggregate

Finishing of concrete to be in accordance with SAA HB67-1995 Concrete Practice on Building Sites.

Finish concrete BCG3057A



• workplace operations and procedures• application procedures for finishing concrete• protection to finished surfaces• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to specifications of work




• boots• safety glasses/goggles• ear plugs/muffs• gloves

Tools, plant and equipment may include but are not limited to:

• power trowel• wood float• steel float• brooms• hoses• edging tools

Reporting of faults should be in accordance with company’s worksite procedures and may be verbal orwritten.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by finishing concrete in at least three of the types of finishes listed withinthe range statement.



• demonstrate compliance with occupational health and safety regulations applicable to workplaceand concrete placing operations

• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of placing and finishing

concrete• finish concrete surface in accordance with specifications• take measures to protect concrete surface from either pedestrian or vehicular traffic and weather• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work procedures





• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1010A Carry out concrete work to simple forms• BCG2009A Carry out concrete work

This competency may be assessed concurrently with:

• BCG3059A Place concrete• BCG3060A Cure concrete




• work organisation factors affecting concrete setting time• concrete finishing techniques• specifications• tools and equipment


• work safely• organise work• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively



• freshly screeded concrete• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to the finishing processes• specifications for concrete finish







Finish concrete BCG3057A


KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 2 2 2



BCG3058A: Transport concrete


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’sconcreting operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andhandling and placing concrete and workplaceenvironment recognised and adhered to.

1.3 Method of transporting identified in accordance withjob requirements and Quality Assuranceprocedures.


1.5 Concrete transportation equipment selectedconsistent with job requirements, checked forserviceability and any faults reported to supervisor.

1.6 Concrete pour sequence and starting pointidentified consistent with site layout, access andtransport system.

2 Take delivery of concrete 2.1 Delivery advice checked for accuracy to orderedmaterial.

2.2 Concrete delivery vehicle directed to location ofdischarge.

3 Discharge concrete and taketests and samples

3.1 Concrete discharged via chute into wheelbarrow,kibble, pump or hopper.

3.2 Slump tests and samples taken in accordance withspecifications, Quality Assurance requirements andAS1012 and AS1012.1.

4 Transport concrete 4.1 Discharged concrete transported to location viawheelbarrow, crane kibble or concrete boom/linepump.

4.2 Concrete transported and monitored, minimisingspillage.

5 Clean up 5.1 Area cleared of waste and equipment.

5.2 Waste concrete removed and placed into job wastebins or rubbish stockpile.


Transport concrete BCG3058A


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit covers the transportation of concrete from the delivery vehicle to the pour location on site.

Methods of transportation may include:

• wheelbarrow• kibble• dumper• chute• pumping• concrete placing boom


• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• respirators/dust masks• jackets

Delivery advice should reflect quantity and mix specification.


• specifications for mix• method of transporting concrete• control of handling and spillage• placing control• use and maintenance of equipment


• protective clothing and equipment• workplace environment and safety• working platforms• working from scaffolding• safety hazards• use of plant and equipment

Slump tests and samples of concrete to be carried out in accordance with:

• AS1012 Methods of Testing Concrete• AS1012.1-1993 Sampling of Fresh Concrete

Reporting of faults should be carried out in accordance with organisations’ workplace procedures and may beverbal or written.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the transportation of concrete on site using at least two separatemethods of those listed in the range of variables.





• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable to worksiteoperations

• indicate compliance with organisational quality policies and procedures within the context ofhandling and placing of concrete

• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• inspect pour location and delivery site to ensure most effective and safe route for transportation

method• communicate to confirm information on delivery docket conforms with ordered concrete:

strength, slump and volume• discharge concrete to transport equipment without segregation• interactively communicate with other personnel to ensure safe and effective transport of concrete

to location



• BCG1006A Use plant and equipment• BCG1010A Carry out concrete work to simple forms• BCG2009A Carry out concrete work


• BCG3059A Place concrete




• concrete mix specifications• cause and effect of concrete segregation• factors effecting setting time of concrete• concrete slump ranges for pumping of concrete• effect of additional water on water cement ratio and design strength• delivery documentation• plant and equipment


• work safely• interpret documentation from a wide range of sources• use tools and equipment• organise work• communicate effectively



• site location for concrete pour• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to transportation process

Transport concrete BCG3058A


• documentation on concrete material applicable to pour







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 1 2 2 2 1



BCG3059A: Place concrete



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andpreparing for and placing of concrete recognisedand adhered to.

1.3 Method of placement and consolidation identified inaccordance with job requirements and engineer'sspecifications.


1.5 Plant, tools and equipment selected to carry outprocesses consistent with job requirements,checked for serviceability and any faults reported tosupervisor.

2 Define and prepare work area 2.1 Location of concrete placement defined from jobdrawings and specifications and checked to be freeof debris and waste.

2.2 Safe working area maintained around pour locationusing barriers and signage consistent with OH&Sregulations.

2.3 Plants, tools and equipment located to designedrequirement for planned placement.

3 Place concrete 3.1 Concrete poured in horizontal layers into location tolevels as indicated by markers, level pegs or lines.

3.2 Height of vertical drop minimised to avoidsegregation.

3.3 Poured concrete consolidated during process usingapproved compaction or vibration method to SAAHB67-1995 Concrete Practice On Building Sites.

3.4 Finished levels checked against designed levelsusing appropriate levelling device.

4 Screed/level concrete 4.1 Concrete screeded to correct levels and/or gradesusing appropriate straight edged tool/formworkmounted screed.


Place concrete BCG3059A


5.2 Waste and unwanted material removed and placedinto job waste bins or rubbish stockpiles.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the placing of concrete into forms or foundations including:

• slab on ground• suspended slab• columns• beams• piers• strip footings• pads


• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• respirators/masks


• shovels• rakes• screed boards• levels• measuring tape/rule• compressor• vibrator• wheelbarrows• kibble• dumper• chute• concrete placing boom


• method of transporting• control of handling and spillage• placement control• cleaning of equipment


• protective clothing and equipment• working platforms• working from scaffolding• safety hazards• use of plant and equipment



Debris and waste may include:

• offcut material• loose soil• empty containers• paper and cardboard

Reporting of faults should be in accordance with organisations workplace procedures and may be verbal orwritten.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by placing concrete into prepared formwork or foundation.


It is essential that competence is demonstrated in the critical aspects of:

• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable toworkplace and concrete placing operations

• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of concrete placement• select and use appropriate concrete handling/transportation method• place concrete ensuring no segregation and adequate compaction• check formwork and support system periodically during the pour• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective placement of concrete





• BCG 3058A Transport concrete




• concrete mix specifications• cause and effect of segregation• effect of over or under compaction of concrete• plant and equipment• reinforcement of concrete

SkillsThe ability to:• work safely• organise work

Place concrete BCG3059A


• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively



• pour location for concrete placement• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to placement processes• concrete relevant to proposed pour







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 3 2 1 2



BCG3060A: Cure concrete


1 Select curing method 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’sconcreting operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andcuring concrete recognised and adhered to.

1.3 Concrete curing method selected in accordancewith engineer's specification and AS3600-1994Concrete Structures.

1.4 MSDS requirements checked in association withdesigned curing agent to be used, if applicable.

2 Select curing and personalprotective equipment

2.1 Curing equipment selected consistent with curingrequirements and checked for sound and safeworking order.


3 Cure concrete 3.1 Concrete cured to engineer's approval and inaccordance with SAA HB67-1995 Concrete Practiceon Building Sites.

3.2 Curing agent/method maintained on concretesurface to specifications and, where applicable, inaccordance with AS3799-1990 Liquid MembraneForming Curing Compounds for Concrete.

3.3 Protection provided to concrete during curingprocess by isolating and/or barricading area.

4 Clean up 4.1 Area of concrete cure cleared and waste materialremoved.

4.2 Curing equipment cleaned, maintained tomanufacturer's specifications and stored.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the curing of concrete in an on-site environment.

Curing methods may include:

• hosing• sprinklers• ponding• applied chemical curing agent• plastic film



• workplace operations and procedures• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to specifications of work


• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• working platforms and scaffolding• hazardous materials


• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• respirators/masks

Tools/equipment may include:

• hoses and sprinklers• tarpaulins/covers• rollers• spray applicators

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by carrying out the initial curing process to a nominated poured concretesection.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable toworkplace and concrete pouring operations

• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of placing and curing of

concrete• apply concrete curing method safely and effectively to designed application• interactive communicate with others to ensure safe and effective curing operations







• BCG3057A Finish concrete



• workplace and equipment safety requirements including relevant statutory regulations and codes• influence of curing process on strength of concrete• methods of curing concrete• safe handling of curing chemicals• plant and equipment• specifications


• work safely• organise work• use plant and equipment• communicate effectively



• freshly poured concrete location.• tools, plant and equipment, appropriate to curing processes.• specifications for curing application.







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 1 2



BCG3061A: Apply reinforcement schedule


1 Plan and prepare for concreteconstruction

1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’sconcreting operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andhandling of reinforcement recognised and adhered to.

1.3 Reinforced concrete construction schedule identifiedfrom project schedule.

1.4 Elements of structure identified from projectconstruction schedule and job drawings.

1.5 Job drawings checked for date of production andprobability of being latest amendment.

1.6 Reinforcement schedule and delivery documentationobtained from supervisor/supplier.

1.7 Location of stored, delivered reinforcement identifiedand/or delivered reinforcement checked againstdelivery docket to ensure at directed project.

1.8 Scheduler contact identified for any queries ordiscrepancies.

2 Read and interpret schedule 2.1 Structural element to be constructed, identified fromsite and structural detail drawings.

2.2 Type and features of reinforcement and number ofpieces/sheets identified from structural detail drawings.

2.3 Reinforcement schedule read to identify appropriatereinforcement for structural element.

2.4 Reinforcement schedule read to identifycoding/number related to labels on reinforcementbundles.

2.5 Appropriate reinforcement bundle located inaccordance with like relationship between scheduleand label/s coding and numbering.

2.6 Non-identification of similar coding and numberingreported and contact made with Schedule Contact forclarification.

2.7 Where coding/numbering not related tocoding/numbering of available on-site drawings,marked drawings obtained from supplier/scheduler.

Apply reinforcement schedule BCG3061A


3 Check contents of identifiedbundle/s

3.1 Content of bundle/s checked for conformity to scheduleand proposed element.

3.2 Number of pieces or sheets determined.

3.3Where discrepancies in quantities, determine whether:• shortfall is somewhere else• excess is for similar elements• excess does not relate• it is an inappropriate bundle

3.4 Cranked or bent items of reinforcement or lengths andsizes checked for conformity to structural detaildrawings.

3.5 Where discrepancies in shape, length or sizes,determine whether wrong bundle has been selected orcontact supplier/scheduler for clarification.

3.6 Where contents conform to schedule and element’srequirements, mark schedule accordingly.

4 Locate reinforcement forelement construction

4.1 Identified reinforcement marked or placed and noted,ready for transportation to element location.

4.2 Reinforcement directed to structural location forplacement and fixing.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the practical application of relating a reinforcement schedule to a construction processand identifying and selecting the appropriate reinforcement.

Coding and numbering of reinforcement bundles can vary between different suppliers who use their ownidentification system.

Tags on bundles do not relate all similar details to those listed in the Reinforcement Schedule.

Structural elements include:

• footings• slabs• columns• beams• walls

Identification characteristics about reinforcement include:

• location for material• size of bar• size of mesh• type of steel bar• cranks and bends• number of bars in a bundle• length of material• shape of formed bars• grade of steel reinforcing – surface markings




• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• attention to specifications of work• placement of reinforcement



Steel reinforcement for concrete construction to be in accordance with:

• AS3600-1994 Concrete Structures• AS1302-1991 Steel Reinforcing Bars for Concrete

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by reading and interpreting a reinforcement schedule to identify andselect the required reinforcement for at least two of the separate types of structural elements listed within therange of variables statement.




• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of constructingreinforced concrete

• identify coding and numbering related to a reinforcement schedule• identify structural details of reinforced concrete elements• use safe and effective procedures to handle materials• identify relevant drawings and specifications• interactively communicate with others to ensure effective operations



• BCG1003A Read and interpret plans• BCG2006A Carry out steel fixing• BCG2009A Carry out concrete work



• relevant State/Territory OH&S legislation, standards and codes of practice• workplace and equipment safety requirements• site drawings and specifications• reinforced concrete structure• reinforcement schedules• reinforcing characteristics

Apply reinforcement schedule BCG3061A


• Australian Standards AS1302 and AS3600


• work safely• interpret drawings and documentation• organise work• calculate material quantities• fix reinforcing• communicate effectively



• workplace location• materials appropriate to application activity• appropriate documentation related to tasks


Competency shall be assessed while tasks are undertaken.





Competency should be assessed in the normal or simulated workplace setting.

Assessment should be while tasks are undertaken under limited supervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 2 1 2 2



BCG3062A: Carry out special finishes to concrete



1.2 OH&S requirements for application to tasks andworkplace environment, recognised and adhered to.


1.4 Safety and protection requirements determined forwork personnel, public and environment.



2 Carry out false brickwork finish 2.1 Concrete poured, compacted and screeded tospecification.

2.2 Stencil for brickwork finish prepared so that any lappingwill maintain alignment and bond.

2.3 Stencil carefully laid on screeded surface tospecifications ensuring alignment, bond and flat.

2.4 Prepare dry topping mix of colour, stonedust andcement and sprinkle evenly over surface tospecifications.

2.5 Surface finished with wood or steel float to consistenttexture in accordance with specifications.

2.6 Critical time of lifting stencil carried out at setting timeto manufacturer's recommendations.

3 Carry out slate and patternpaving

3.1 Concrete poured, compacted and screeded tospecifications.

3.2 Method of applying pattern determined in accordancewith designed finish and specifications.

3.3 Roller or stamped pattern equipment checked forcleanliness and serviceability.

3.4 Layout design planned and initial starting pointdetermined to specifications and design.

Carry out special finishes to concrete BCG3062A


3.5 Base colour and topping dust prepared and sprinkledevenly over surface to specifications.

3.6 Base colour floated into surface to specification.

3.7 Random colour(s), where applicable, sprinkled ontosurface at random locations to create slate typecolourings.

3.8 Release agent prepared and sprinkled evenly overwhole surface to specifications.

3.9 Roller and stamp used prior to initial set to createdesigned pattern and surface effect to specification.

3.10 Construction joints cut into roller applied finish aftersetting, where applicable, to specification.

4 Carry out exposed aggregatefinish

4.1 River gravel aggregate incorporated in concrete mix tospecification.

4.2 Concrete poured, compacted and screeded tospecifications.

4.3 Following set of concrete, strong water jet and stiffbrush applied to brush and wash fines from surface toexpose aggregate.

4.4 Exposed aggregate left clean and free to designedeffect and specifications.

5 Cure concrete 5.1 Curing application applied to concrete to specificationsfollowing set.

5.2 Curing maintained to period in accordance withspecifications.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to special finishes to concrete surfaces providing a distinct featured face finish.

Special finishes can be obtained on both horizontal and vertical faces, the latter being applied following thestripping of formwork shutter with textured finish provided off form.

Special finishes may include the following:



• false brickwork stencil finish• false slate or similar patterned paving finish• exposed aggregate finish• other special finishes applied with a trowel using concrete as a base material• off form textured finish• coloured concrete






• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• respirators/dust masks• cap or hat


• trowels• power trowels• floats• brooms• hoses• rollers• stencils• shovels• wheelbarrows• concrete mixers

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is demonstrated by finishing concrete in at least three of the types of finishes listed within therange of variables.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks• apply organisational quality procedures and process within the context of finishing concrete

Carry out special finishes to concrete BCG3062A


• accurately align stencil/roller to provide continuity of pattern• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to spread colour• finish concrete surface in accordance with design to specifications• take measures to protect concrete surface from either pedestrian or vehicular traffic and weather• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations

(2) Pre-requisites Relationship of Units


• BCG1010A Carry out concrete work to simple form• BCG2009A Carry out concrete work• BCG3059A Place concrete• BCG3057A Finish concrete• BCG3060A Cure concrete



• workplace equipment safety requirements including relevant statutory regulations and codes• concrete and its characteristics• placing and finishing of concrete• mortar mix composition• range of mortar additives including plasticiser/s and/or application• control and articulation of joints• AS3600-1994 Concrete Structures• concrete finishing techniques• specifications• tools and equipment


• work safely• organise and set out work• use tools and equipment• select materials• handle materials safely• communicate effectively



• work location appropriate to process of applying special finishes to concrete• tools and equipment appropriate to finishing processes• construction materials appropriate to process of special finishes to concrete work• appropriate communication of documentation relevant to task



Competency of this unit may be determined concurrently, based upon project work.



Competency should be assessed under general guidance, checking at various stages of the processand at the completion of the activity against performance criteria and specifications.




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 1 3 3 2



BCG3063A: Carry out tilt slab construction




1.3 Work schedule, material and equipment requirementsdetermined from project program, drawings andspecifications.

1.4 Construction and erection planned in accordance withAS3850.1 and AS3850.2-1990. Tilt Up Concrete AndPre-cast Concrete Elements For Use In Buildings.


1.6 Plant, tools and equipment selected to carry outprocesses consistent with job requirements andchecked for serviceability.

2 Set out and prepare formworkfor slab

2.1 Location and size of slab set out to requirements of jobdrawings and specifications.

2.2 Slab base prepared and sheeted to face level andalignment in accordance with specifications.

2.3 Edge formwork prepared, placed and fixed to plumband alignment to specification requirements and setout.

2.4 Form oil/separative applied to formwork withmop/brush to specifications.

3 Place and tie reinforcement andcast in fittings

3.1 Reinforcement, accessories and cast-in fittingschecked for conformity to design and specifications.

3.2 Reinforcement and accessories located in position toengineer's drawings and specifications.

3.3 Reinforcement tied and/or welded in correct placementin accordance with engineer's drawings, specificationsand AS1554.3-1983 Welding of Reinforcing Steel.

4 Place, finish and cure concrete 4.1 Concrete slump tested and samples taken for test tocheck conformity to specification for concrete.

4.2 Concrete placed evenly and consolidated usingapproved vibration method to specification andAS3600-1994 Concrete Structures.

Carry out tilt slab construction BCG3063A


4.3 Concrete surface screeded and finished tospecification ensuring cast-in fittings clear.

4.4 Curing process of concrete applied in accordance withspecification.

5 Tilt, position and hold slabs 5.1 Edge formwork stripped carefully ensuring no damageto slab.

5.2 Braces prepared and located ready for erectionprocess.

5.3 Crane and lifting equipment located in position for safeand efficient operation.

5.4 Barricades and signage, where applicable, erected toisolate safe working area.

5.5 Lifting points checked and lifting equipment attached toslab and connected to crane in accordance withdesigned lifting arrangement.

5.6 Slab/panel raised and located safely into true position.

5.7 Braces fitted, fixed to floor or alternative location andsecured, maintaining plumb and alignment position ofpanel in accordance with specifications.

5.8 Lifting equipment and crane removed and remainingformwork stripped and dismantled safely.



6.3 Serviceable and unused materials stored/stacked.

6.4 Plant, tools and equipment cleaned, maintained andstored.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to reinforced concrete panels poured onsite alongside the position to which they are raisedand located. The reinforced concrete slab/panels may be poured on concrete slab or sheet formwork.

Bracing to hold slabs/panels in vertical positions may be fixed to internal slab floor, internal columns orexternal anchors.

Construction and erection governed by AS3850.1 and AS3850.2-1990. Tilt-up concrete and pre-castconcrete elements for use in buildings.


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment



• attention to specifications of work• formwork for concrete






• measuring tape/rule• hammer• spirit level• squares• saw stools• power saws• masonry drills• spanners• nail gun• air compressor and hoses• power leads• shovels• rakes• screed boards• vibrators• wheelbarrows

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by working with a team and pouring, placing, raising and locatingconcrete panels on-site.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of tilt slab construction• give attention to accurate construction of formwork to specifications• accurately place reinforcement, blockouts and attachments for slab• select and use appropriate concrete handling/transportation method• place concrete ensuring no segregation and adequate compaction• check formwork and support system periodically during pour• screed and finish concrete to specifications

Carry out tilt slab construction BCG3063A


• construct and erect in accordance with AS3850.1 and AS3850.2-1990• adopt safe and effective procedures in lifting and placement processes• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations



• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG2006A Carry out steel fixing• BCG2009A Carry out concrete work• BCG3057A Finish concrete• BCG3060A Cure concrete• BCG3059A Place concrete

This unit may be concurrently assessed with:

• BCG3057A Place concrete• BCG3059A Finish concrete• BCG3060A Cure concrete



• workplace and equipment safety requirements including relevant statutory regulations and codes• reinforced concrete construction• methods of finishing concrete• formwork for concrete• factors affecting concrete bonding, curing and strength• crane operations• plant, tools and equipment• measuring and levelling• Australian Standards 3850.1 and 3580.2, 1554.3 and 3600• basic signalling• Quality Assurance• worksite communications


• work safely• organise work• set out work• use hand tools and equipment• select and identify materials• work to measurements and levels• fix materials• assist with crane operations• communicate effectively



• work location to carry out proposed activity• materials appropriate to application tasks



• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to construction and erection processes• appropriate communication of documentation relevant to proposed activity




Assessment may be by intermittent checking at various stages of each task application or at thecompletion of each activity in accordance with the performance criteria and specifications.



Assessment should be while tasks are undertaken either individually or as part of a team undersupervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 3 2 3 2

BCG3064A Weld using manual metal arc welding process (MMAW)


BCG3064A: Weld using manual metal arc welding process(MMAW)



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andusing of manual metal arc welding process identifiedand adhered to.


1.4 Plant, tools and equipment selected to carry outprocesses consistent with requirements of job andchecked for serviceability.

1.5 Weld requirements identified from specifications and/orjob drawings.

2 Prepare materials for welding 2.1 Material correctly prepared for welding usingappropriate tools and techniques.

2.2 Materials assembled/aligned to specification andclamped or weighted, where required.

3 Select welding machine settingsand electrodes

3.1 Welding machine settings and electrodes identified andselected against pre-determined welding proceduresand specifications.

4 Assemble and set up weldingequipment

4.1 Welding equipment assembled and set up safely andcorrectly in accordance with standard operatingprocedures.

4.2 Test runs undertaken and verified in accordance withspecification requirements.

5 Implement control measures fordistortion

5.1 Distortion prevention measures identified and noted.

5.2 Appropriate action taken to minimise and rectifydistortion.

6 Weld materials by correctprocess

6.1 Welds deposited correctly in flat and vertical position tospecifications.

6.2 Distortion of metal minimised.

Weld using manual metal arc welding process (MMAW) BCG3064A


6.3 Joints cleaned free of slag, to specifications, usingappropriate tools and techniques.

7 Inspect welds and correct faults 7.1 Weld joints visually inspected against specificationrequirements.

7.2 Weld defects identified.

7.3 Defects removed with minimum loss of sound metalusing correct and appropriate techniques and tools



8.3 Plant, tools and equipment cleaned, maintained andstored/stacked.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to welding carried out using a range of material for heavy or light fabrication structure.

Preparation of materials may include but are not limited to:

• pre-heating• set up of jigs• fixtures• clamps• grinding of edges

Test procedures may include:

• voltage drop• amperage setting• earthing• electrode and wire conductivity• electrode flux condition etc




• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• working platforms• safety with welding processes

BCG3064A Weld using manual metal arc welding process (MMAW)



• safety glasses• ear plugs/muffs• face shield• boots• leather gloves• leather apron• cap


• measuring tape/rule• hammers• squares• cylinders• regulators• gas tubing• blow pipes• support stands• clamps• grinder• power leads

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence may be assessed by completing vertical and horizontal welds using both oxy acetylene and arcequipment with either heavy or light material.




• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of welding• adopt and use correct procedures in setting up welding equipment for operation• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to start up and operate equipment for welding• use correct procedures in welding material to specification• give particular attention to safety and start up and shut down procedures for welding equipment• demonstrate safe handling procedures in handling materials• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations



• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG2002A Oxy acetylene cutting

Weld using manual metal arc welding process (MMAW) BCG3064A


(3) Underpinning Knowledge & Skills



• drawings and specifications• effect of uneven heating on materials• appropriate settings for various thicknesses of materials• properties of materials• plant and equipment• welding procedures


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• use plant and equipment• set out work• communicate effectively



• workplace location• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to welding applications• materials relevant to application activity• drawings and specifications relevant to activity



Competency should be assessed under general guidance, checking at various stages of the processand at completion of the activity against performance criteria and specifications.



Assessment should be while tasks are undertaken under limited supervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 3 2 3 3



BCG3065A: Carry out monostrand post tensioning




1.3 Job material and equipment requirements identifiedfrom site drawings and engineer's specifications.

1.4 Work area of stressing operation identified and locatedfrom site and engineer's drawings.



2 Mark and fix anchorages 2.1 Tendons and recess formers fixed in locationaccording to job plans and drawings.

3 Lay and fix post tensioningcables

3.1 Required ducting laid, profiled and specified number ofstrands pushed through and verified according to jobdrawings.

3.2 Anchorages profiled to specifications.

3.3 Head and anchorages formed in accordance withengineer's specifications.

3.4 Installed cables inspected in accordance with AS3600–1994 Concrete Structures.

4 Fix grout tubes 4.1 Grout tubes fixed in accordance with manufacturer'sand engineer's specifications.

4.2 Grout tubes monitored during concrete pour.

5 Define work area 5.1 Safe working area defined according to safe workingpractice and OH&S regulations.

5.2 Barricades erected where required to isolate safeworking areas.

6 Set up for stressing and stresstendons

6.1 Recess formers removed.

Carry out monostrand post tensioning BCG3065A


6.2 Anchor blocks and wedges set up to manufacturer'sdesign.

6.3 Stressing operations carried out to nominated loadsspecified to engineer using designed calibratedstressing equipment.

6.4 Extensions measured and recorded on standardQuality Assurance forms for approval by engineer.

7 Cut and seal strand andrecesses

7.1 Protruding strands cut and sealed according tomanufacturer's specifications.

8 Mix and pump grout 8.1 Cement grout mixed and pumped to the requirementsof engineer's specification and AS3600.


9.2 Waste material removed and placed into job wastebins or rubbish stockpiles.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the monostrand post tensioning process used to apply stress to a concrete structure orelement in its designed construction.

Type of structures include:

• buildings• bridges• towers• tanks• silos• stayed structures• offshore platforms• underground and submerged structures

Types of structural elements include:

• slabs• beams• columns


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to specifications of work• post tensioning operation and procedures






• safety goggles/glasses• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators• boots• gloves• hard hat


• measuring tape/rule• concrete mixer• grouting equipment• shovel• hammer• spanners• stressing equipment• trowel• air compressor and hoses

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by working with a team and carrying out the post tensioning of a structureor element from those listed within the range of variables statement.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of post tensioning of

concrete• check materials for conformity with specifications• determine and follow assembly location and placement sequence• use safe and effective procedures in stressing tendons and locking anchorages to specifications• carry out grouting application safely and effectively to specified requirements• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations• complete of post tensioning process to specifications



• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG2006A Carry out steel fixing

Carry out monostrand post tensioning BCG3065A





• post tensioning of concrete• drawings and specifications• safe stressing procedures with monostrand technique• calibration procedures• maintaining stressing records• visual inspection procedures• factors affecting concrete bonding, curing and strength• grouting equipment and procedures• tools, plant and equipment



• structure/structural element ready for post tensioning process• materials, plant and equipment relevant to post-tensioning processes• drawings and specifications relevant to activity• material appropriate to application process



Competency shall be assessed while work is undertaken under limited supervision with regularchecks at the various stages of the process and at the completion of the overall task in accordancewith the performance criteria.




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 3 2 3 2 2

BCG3066A Carry out stressbar post tensioning


BCG3066A: Carry out stressbar post tensioning


1 Plan job setout 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’sconstruction operations recognised and adhered to.


1.3 Job material and equipment requirements identifiedfrom site drawings and engineer's specifications.

1.4 Work area of stressing operation identified and locatedfrom site and engineer's drawings.



1.7 Ducting located and laid in position to requirements ofdrawings and specifications.

2 Place bar and fit components 2.1 Bar and components placed and fitted according tomanufacturer's specification.

3 Inspect bar layout and seal ducts 3.1 Bar layout inspected for compliance in accordance withAS3600-1994 Concrete Structures.

3.2 Ducts sealed in accordance with manufacturer'sspecification.

4 Define work area 4.1 Safe working area defined according to manufacturer'sdesign and OH&S regulations.

4.2 Barricades erected where required to isolate safeworking area.

5 Set up jack, accessories andstress bars

5.1 Stressing jack and accessories placed and stressingcarried out in accordance with manufacturer's andengineer's specifications.

5.2 Nuts tightened and locked off during stressingprocedure in accordance with normal stressing safetystandards.

6 Record extensions and sealanchorages

6.1 Extensions measured and recorded on standardQuality Assurance forms for approval by engineer.

Carry out stressbar post tensioning BCG3066A


6.2 Anchorages sealed to prevent grout loss.

7 Mix and pump grout 7.1 Cement grout mixed and pumped to the requirementsof engineer's specifications and AS3600.


8.2 Waste materials removed and placed into job wastebins.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the stressbar post tensioning process used to apply stress to a concrete structure orelement in its designed construction.


• buildings• bridges• anchors• wharves• jetties

Types of structural elements include:

• pre-stressed beams and columns• stay cable hangers• tension piles and caissons• stressed deck planks• permanent and temporary ground anchors


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to specifications of work• post tensioning operation and procedures




• safety goggles/glasses• ear plugs/muffs

BCG3066A Carry out stressbar post tensioning


• dust masks/respirators• boots• gloves• hard hat


• measuring tape/rule• concrete mixer• hammers• stressing equipment• shovels• spanners• grouting equipment• trowels• air compressor and hoses

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by working with a team and carrying out the post tensioning of any of thestructures or elements listed within the range of variables.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment relevant to tasks• apply of organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of post tensioning of

concrete• check materials for conformity with specifications• determine and follow assembly location and placement sequence• install, stress and lock off stressbars to specification• carry out grouting operations safely and effectively to engineers’ specifications• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations• complete of post tensioning process to specifications



• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG2006A Carry out steel fixing




• post tensioning of concrete• safe stressing procedures with stress bar technique• calibration procedures• maintaining stressing records

Carry out stressbar post tensioning BCG3066A


• factors affecting concrete bonding, curing and strength• grouting equipment and procedures• tools, plant and equipment


• work safely• organise work• interpret drawings and specifications• use plant, tools and equipment• measure and record information• communicate effectively



• structure/structural element ready for post tensioning process• construction materials appropriate to post tensioning process• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to application processes• appropriate communication of documentation relevant to tasks





Competency should be assessed in the work place.


KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 3 2 3 2 3

BCG3067A Construct corbels and decorative brickwork


BCG3067A: Construct corbels and decorativebrickwork




1.3 Material and equipment requirements determined fromjob drawings and specifications.

1.4 All work to comply with AS1316, AS2904, AS3700 andAS2699.



2 Set out for featured brickwork 2.1 Location and structural feature details of blockworkdetermined from drawings and specifications.

2.2 Brickwork set out to location to dimensions fromdrawings and specifications.

2.3 Scaffolding erected where required to OH&Srequirements.

3 Lay bricks and form corbels andprotusions

3.1 Mortar mixed to specifications.

3.2 Corbelling design checked from specifications withoverhang design not to exceed 1/4 width of brick.

3.3 Bricks laid to maintain bond and level alignment to formcorbels to design and specifications.

3.4 Bricks laid to form featured protrusions in accordancewith job drawings and specifications.

4 Construct brickwork to acuteand obtuse angled corners

4.1 Junction at corners determined in accordance withspecifications.

4.2 Standard bricks laid to line and level to form dogtoothjunctions in accordance with specifications.

4.3 Squints and standard bricks laid to line and level toform designed flush junctions to specifications.

Construct corbels and decorative brickwork BCG3067A


4.4 Bond and gauge maintained to specification.

5 Lay plinth bricks or squints toform plinth areas or sills

5.1 Plinth bricks laid to level and alignment to formprotruding plinth to specification.

5.2 Plinth bricks/squints laid to sill locations to form featurefinish to level and alignment to specifications.

6 Rake/rule joints 6.1 Joints in laid brickwork raked or ruled to correct depthin accordance with job specification.

6.2 Brickwork brushed down prior to drying usingappropriate brushing tool.

7 Carry out tuck pointing 7.1 Brickwork joints finished and cleaned out to designeddepth to specifications to receive pointing.

7.2 Pointing material mixed and applied to brick joints inaccordance with specifications.

7.3 Joints pointed to produce designed finish tospecifications and loose material removed from brickface.

8 Clean up 8.1 Area cleared of waste, material and equipment.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to brickwork involving:

• corbelling• protrusions• irregular corner junctions• special bricks• plinth• sill finishes• tuck pointing

All brickwork construction to be in accordance with:

• AS1316-1972 Masonry Cement• AS2699-1984 Wall Ties For Masonry Construction• AS2904-1995 Damp-Proof Courses And Flashings• AS3700-1988 Masonry in Buildings




• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to specifications of work• bricklaying operations and procedures




• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• respirators/dust masks


• measuring tape/rule• concrete mixer• wheelbarrows• masonry saws• trowels• mortar boards• pointing and/or raking tools• shovels• string lines• straight edge• brushes• hammers• buckets• hoses• power leads

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by laying bricks into walls and piers as specified within the performancecriteria of the standard.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of constructing

decorative brickwork

Construct corbels and decorative brickwork BCG3067A


• select of bricks and mortar consistent with specifications of job required• accurately set out and lay bricks to specification• lay bricks to line level and gauge• complete featured brickwork to specification• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations



• BCG1007 Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG1015 Prepare for construction process (brick/blocklaying)• BCG3110 Lay bricks and blocks (wall and corner)• BCG3111 Lay multi-thickness walls and piers



• site drawings and specifications• brick expansion and growth• brick bond patterns• brick reinforcing• workplace and equipment safety requirements including relevant statutory regulations, codes and

standards• mortar mix composition• range of mortar additives including plasticiser/s and/or their application• Building Code of Australia and Australian Standards 1316, 2699, 2904 and 3700• control and articulation joints• materials• measuring, levelling and calculations• tools and equipment• scaffolding

Skills:The ability to:

• set out work• work safely• organise work• erect scaffolding• interpret drawings and specifications• use tools and equipment• measure and calculate quantities• lay bricks• communicate effectively



• workplace location• materials appropriate to construction process• tools and equipment appropriate to application processes• drawings and specifications, relevant to activity









KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 1 3 3 2



BCG3068A: Construct battered masonry surfaces



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andlaying masonry to sloping surfaces recognised andadhered to.


1.4 Safety and protection requirements determined forwork personnel, public and environment.



2 Prepare base for masonry orstone

2.1 Battered slope compacted and finished to specification.

2.2 Rock or stone slope faced with cohesive soil andreinforcing to form flat base or rendered tospecification.

2.3 Crushed rock spread to thickness of 50mm andcompacted to form base to specification.

2.4 Steep slopes and mortar bedded masonry and stonebases finished to flat surface with sprayed concreteover reinforcement sheets.

2.5 Impervious or permeable membrane laid, whererequired, in accordance with specifications.

3 Lay masonry or stone to sandbedding

3.1 Bedding sand laid and screeded to specified depth.

3.2 Layout of masonry or stone determined and set out inaccordance with drawings and specifications.

3.3 First stone or masonry unit laid into place to proposedface and alignment of batter to specifications.

3.4 Stone or masonry units laid individually into positionmaintaining pattern or bond and surface alignment tospecifications.

3.5 Joints maintained to tolerance in accordance withspecifications.

Construct battered masonry surfaces BCG3068A


3.6 Random shaped stones selected in accordance withabutting stones and maximum specified joints.

4 Lay masonry or stone to mortarbed

4.1 Mortar materials proportioned and mixed tospecifications.

4.2 Layout of masonry or stone determined and set out inaccordance with drawings and specifications.

4.3 Stone laid into place to pattern/bond and surfacealignment to specifications.

4.4 Mortar joints struck or raked in accordance withspecifications.

5 Clean up 5.1 Masonry surface cleaned free of waste.

5.2 Area cleared and waste material disposed safely.



RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the facing of battered surfaces using masonry units.

Masonry units may include but are not limited to:

• clay bricks/pavers• concrete blocks• concrete pavers• slate• stone (regular and random)

Joints may be:

• dry• brush sanded• mortar

Mortar used should be in accordance with AS1316-1972 Masonry cement







• working platforms




• measuring tape/rule• concrete mixer• wheelbarrows• masonry saws• trowels• mortar boards• shovels• straight edge• spirit level• hammers• string lines• power leads• buckets

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by carrying out the safe and effective preparation and laying of at leasttwo separate types of masonry materials to construct battered masonry surfaces, using any of those listedwithin the range of variables statement.


Competence should be observed in the following aspects:


• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks• apply organisational quality procedures and process within the context of masonry work• prepare base to specification requirements• select masonry units and mortar consistent with specifications of job required• apply safe and effective procedures to set out and lay masonry units to specifications• lay bricks/blocks/pavers/stones/ to line and gauge where applicable• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify



• BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/block laying)• BCG2009A Carry out concrete work• BCG3011A Carry out basic setting out• BCG3115A Lay segmental paving

Construct battered masonry surfaces BCG3068A




• drawings and specifications• brick expansion and growth• control and articulation joints• characteristics of masonry materials• workplace and equipment safety requirements• mortar mix composition• range of mortar additives including plasticiser/s and or their application• Building Code Of Australia• laying of masonry• tools and equipment


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• use hand and power tools• measure and calculate quantities appropriate to task• select materials appropriate to task• set out work• communicate effectively



• battened surface appropriate to proposed activity• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to construction processes• appropriate communication of documentation relevant to task• construction materials relevant to tasks



Assessment may be by intermittent checking at various stages of each task application inaccordance with the performance criteria or may be at the completion of the process.




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 2 3 3 2

BCG3069A Construct fireplace and chimney


BCG3069A: Construct fireplace and chimney



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andconstructing chimneys and fireplaces recognised andadhered to.




1.6 Materials and quantities checked for conformity toordered quantities and specification.

2 Set out and prepare base 2.1 Footing checked for conformity to dimensions andlocation as per job drawings and specifications and inaccordance with AS2870 – 1996 Residential Slabs andFootings – Construction.

2.2 Fireplace base set out to correct measurements andlocation in association with adjoining wall if applicable,to job drawings.

3 Construct base 3.1 Mortar mixed and bricks/blocks/stone laid to set out forbase, to specifications.

3.2 Bricks/stone laid to line and level and constructed inaccordance with AS3700–1998 Masonry in Buildings.

3.3 Bricks/stone laid to job drawings and specifications.

4 Construct hearth and firebox 4.1 Damp proof courses built in to specifications and inaccordance with AS2901–1995 Damp-proof Coursesand Flashings

4.2 Bricks/blocks/stone laid to form hearth to designedshape, pattern and specifications.

4.3 Brick/stone laid to job drawings and specifications.

5 Construct fire box and facebrickwork

5.1 Specified stone for fire box and face brickwork wheredifferent, selected to specifications.

Construct fireplace and chimney BCG3069A


5.2 Firebox constructed with stone laid to form curvatureand shape or rear and side walls to specifications.

5.3 Face brickwork laid to form shape of openings todesigned dimensions and finish of drawings andspecifications.

5.4 Lintel, where applicable, installed to specifications.

5.5 Facework laid to bond/pattern/colour finish to wall andaligned to specification.

5.6 Protrusions and/or mantlepiece formed and finished todesigned shape and specifications.

5.7 Plumb and level maintained for straight work.

6 Form throat and chimney shaft 6.1 Throat formed, rendered and shaped to design andspecifications for fire box and chimney.

6.2 Parging to flue completed to specifications.

6.3 Brick/stone laid to build outer skin and form chimneyshaft to specifications.

6.4 Baffles built in, where designed, to location andspecifications.

7 Complete chimney 7.1 Chimney constructed to extend minimum 600mmabove the highest roof ridge or point.

7.2 Head of chimney completed to designed finish todrawings and specifications.

7.3 Scaffolding erected as required in accordance with jobrequirements and OH&S regulations.

8 Rake/rule joints 8.1 Joints to laid brickwork/blockwork/stonework raked orruled to designed depth in accordance with the jobspecifications.

8.2 Joints to laid brickwork/blockwork/stonework raked outfor provision of apron and stepped flashing at roof line.

8.3 Brickwork/blockwork/stonework brushed down prior todrying using appropriate brushing tool.

9 Clean up 9.1 Area cleaned and waste, materials and equipmentremoved.




9.3 Waste and unwanted material removed and placed intojob waste bins or rubbish stockpile.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit covers the construction of open fireplaces and chimneys constructed in timber, brick/block veneerand solid brick/block/stone wall structured buildings.

All construction should comply with:

• AS1316–1972 Masonry Cement• AS2699–1984 Wall Ties For Masonry Construction• AS1904–1995 Damp–Proof Courses and Flashings• AS3700–1988 Masonry in Buildings

Brick/block types may include:

• clay wire cut bricks• clay pressed bricks• fire-rated concrete blocks

Stone sections may be:

• regular size• random size


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to specifications of work• brick/block laying operation and procedures




• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• cap• respirator/dust masks


• measuring tape/rule• concrete mixer

Construct fireplace and chimney BCG3069A


• wheelbarrows• masonry saws• trowels• mortar boards• shovels• spirit level• string lines• straight edge• hammers• pointing and raking tools• brushes• hoses

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by carrying out the safe and effective construction of a fireplace andchimney using any of the materials listed within the range of variables.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment consistent with requirement of

activity• apply organisational quality procedures and process within the context of constructing masonry

fireplaces and chimneys• demonstrate accurate measuring and setting out techniques• determine chimney and fireplace location and set out accurately• select bricks/blocks/stones and mortar consistent with specification or job required• lay bricks or blocks to line, level and gauge• apply safe and effective procedures in erecting scaffolding• give attention to correct forming and size of throat related to fireplace• identify typical faults that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective construction operations• complete chimney and fireplace to specifications



• BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/block laying)• BCG3011A Carry out basic setting out• BCG3107A Carry out veneer construction• BCG3108A Carry out solid brick construction



• site drawings and specifications• brick expansion and growth• characteristics of masonry materials• workplace and equipment safety requirements including relevant statutory regulations, codes and

standards



• mortar mix composition• range of mortar additives including plasticiser/s and/or application• Building Code of Australia and Australian Standards 2870, 3700,2699 and 1316• use of tools and equipment• scaffolding• measuring, levelling and calculations


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• use tools and equipment• measure and calculate quantities• select materials appropriate to the task• set out work• lay bricks or blocks or stone• erect scaffolding• communicate effectively


• workplace location• tools plant and equipment appropriate to construction processes• materials relevant to activity• scaffolding• drawings and specifications relevant to activity







Assessment shall be while tasks are undertaken either individually or as part of a team undersupervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 1 3 3 2



BCG3070A: Dress stone manually


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’sstonemasonry operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements for application tasks andworkplace operation recognised and adhered to.


1.4 Safety and protective requirements for work personnel,public and environment determined and adhered to.

1.5 Tools, equipment and work space selected to carry outprocesses consistent with job requirements andchecked for serviceability.

1.6 Information relating to size, shape and finish collectedfrom available sources.

1.7 Working drawings prepared as required at each stageof job.

1.8 Materials selected in accordance with specificationsand job.

2 Prepare stone for dressing 2.1 Stone checked for defects or natural inclusionsconsidered inappropriate for job.

2.2 Dimensions of stone checked for accuracy as requiredby job and specifications.

2.3 Bedding plane checked (where relevant) for correctorientation to suit function and location of finished job.

3 Mark details on stone 3.1 Profile and reverse templates made accurately todesigned shape and dimensions of end, whererequired.

3.2 Templates applied square to stone or appropriate tojob requirements.

3.3 Templates marked on adjacent ends of stone.

3.4 Templates checked for twist/wind.

3.5 Required template details, scribed or marked so linesremain indelible for duration of job.

Dress stone manually BCG3070A


4 Dress a simple moulding 4.1 Dress mouldings in a staged sequence of fillets andchambers, or as required by job.

4.2 Mark-out stage of dressing accurately and as requiredby job before proceeding with dressing.

4.3 Dress material using appropriate tools for each stageand working to set out lines or reverse templates.

4.4 Check each stage upon completion for accuracy beforeproceeding.

5 Finish moulded stone surfaces 5.1 Finish stone surfaces using chisels or other hand toolsas required by job specifications.

5.2 Use abrasives to finish surfaces if required by job andspecifications.

6 Clean up 6.1 Clean stone using water and brush or other appropriatenon-corrosive method.


6.3 Clear work area and dispose of waste materials in anappropriate manner and in accordance with EPArequirements.

6.4 Templates cleaned, labeled and stored for reuse.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the dressing of stone by manual application to form simple mouldings

A range of simple mouldings may include:

• straight sections• curved segments• ashlar stopped with external mitre• internal mitres• pediment springers• ramp and twist, etc

Moulding types may depend on local industry requirements, existing heritage structures or other factors.








• safety goggles/glasses• boots• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators• gloves• cap


• measuring tape/rule• scriber• spirit level• squares• straight edge• range of hammers• mallets• pitching tools• range of chisels• granite kobbler• tooth chisels• punches• pneumatic chisels• pneumatic grinders• pneumatic polishers• bevels• cocks combs• drags• brushes

Templates may be made of:

• cardboard• zinc sheet• aluminium sheet• plywood• plastic sheet

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by dressing stone to at least three simple moulds from those listed in therange of variables in both hard and soft stone.



Dress stone manually BCG3070A


• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable to workplace operations

• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of dressing stone• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• accurately set out template to each end of stone• dress both hard and soft stone• select appropriate sequencing of tasks associated with shaping of stone• safely and effectively use of hand and pneumatic tools• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to dress stone• regularly check dressing process to ensure working to profile• dress and finish stone finished to specification



• BCG1002A Organise work• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1011A Handle construction materials and safe disposal of waste• BCG2012A Make set outs



• types of stone and their characteristics• methods of dressing stone• workplace and equipment safety requirements including relevant statutory regulations• working drawings and specifications• material handling• regulations related to safe disposal of waste and dust suppression• tools and equipment• measuring and marking


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• use tools and equipment• handle material• measure and set out work• communicate effectively



• workplace location• hand tools and equipment appropriate to setting out and dressing processes• stone appropriate to activity• drawings and specifications/documentation relevant to activity





Evidence should be collected over time allowing for demonstration in a range of workplace activities.



Assessment should be while tasks are undertaken under limited and intermittent supervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 2 2 2 1



BCG3071A: Assemble fabricated components


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’sfabrication operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andassembling fabricated components recognised andadhered to.


2 Identify assembly method andconstruct jigs if required

2.1 Assembly method identified and jigs constructed fromengineering drawings according to workshop practice,where required.

2.2 Distortion prevention/control techniques correctlyapplied.

3 Check all components to beassembled are available

3.1 All components checked against drawings andmaterials list for conformity to design specifications.

4 Select tools and fixtures forfabrication assembly


5 Assemble fabricated components 5.1 Materials and/or fabricated components correctlypositioned for assembly.

5.2 Jigs, fixtures, tools and measuring equipment correctlyadjusted and applied.

5.3 Datum line correctly determined if necessary.

5.4 Assembled components checked for square, level andalignment to specified tolerance.

5.5 Temporary fixing/joining techniques applied to holdcomponents together, as necessary.

5.6 Assembly checked for compliance with job drawing.

5.7 Relevant codes/standards applicable to unit assemblyinterpreted and applied.


6.2 Unused material stored.


Assemble fabricated components BCG3071A


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the assembling of fabricated components in preparation for welding processes toconstruct a structural unit.

Applies to general fabricated components in either:

• plate• pipe• section• sheet

Typical applications are:

• transitions• pipeworks• pipeworks and simple structural fabrication• ductwork• general jobbing work• fired and unfired pressure vessels






• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• cap


• measuring tape/rule• wedges• spirit level• straight edge• weights• string lines• jigs• clamps



EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by the assembling of two separate types of components from thoseapplications listed in the range of variables in either sheet or plate materials.




• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of the assembly offabricated components

• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• use safe and effective procedures to assemble components• identify faults and problems and necessary action taken to rectify• complete assembly to all requirements of drawings and specifications



• BCG1018A Prepare for construction process (steelwork)• BCG2002A Oxy acetylene cutting



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• drawings and specifications• jointing methods of a range of material• australian Standards relevant to welding and pressure vessels etc• fabricated components and materials• tools and equipment


• work safely• organise work• interpret drawings and specifications• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively



• workplace location• tools and equipment to carry out assembling processes• fabricated parts and sections appropriate to component assembling process• drawings and specification of proposed constructed unit



Assemble fabricated components BCG3071A





Competency may be assessed in the work place or simulated workplace setting.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 3 1 3 2



BCG3072: Split stone manually


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’s stonemasonry operations recognised and adhered to.



1.4 Safety and protective requirements for work personnel,public and environment determined and used.

1.5 Tools, measuring and marking instruments, equipmentand work space selected to carry out processesconsistent with job requirements.

1.6 Drawings, specifications, plans and schedules for jobadhered to.

1.7 Equipment inspected for serviceability, maintenanceundertaken and adjustments made (as required by job)prior to operation.

2 Use a range of methods forsplitting stone

2.1 Alternative methods identified for drilling and splittingstone.

2.2 Stone split and squared by drilling and using plugs andfeathers.

2.3 Holes set out to line and spacings and drilled to depthsas specified for type and size of stone.

2.4 Guillotine principles applied and used for splittingvarious thicknesses of slabbed stone as required byjob or organisation.

2.5 Stone split using natural lines of cleavage.

3 Clean up work 3.1 Stone surfaces finished as required by job andspecifications.

3.2 Work cleaned on completion with fresh water andbrushes if necessary.

3.3 Waste materials disposed in an appropriate mannerand in accordance with EPA requirements.

Split stone manually BCG3072A


RANGE OF VARIABLES

Methods used to split and shape stone may include but are not limited to:

• freezing• v-cut and wedging• hydra splitting• expanding grout• plugs and feathers


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to specifications of work• procedures in splitting stone




• safety goggles/glasses• boots• ear plugs/muffs• gloves• dust masks/respirators• cap

Tools and equipment used to split and shape stone may include but are not limited to:

• bush hammers• chisels• poky• spalling hammers• axes• patent axes• splitting wedges• plugs and feathers• masonry drills• sledge hammers

Material may include both hard and soft stones such as:

• limestone• sandstone• granite• basalt (blue stone)



EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency may be assessed by splitting both with and against the grain (eg. flag stones split to thicknessthen to size by splitting across the grain).




• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of splitting stone• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• split both hard and soft stone• sequence tasks associated with splitting of stone• adopt and use safe and effective procedures with use of power tools and splitting of stone



• BCG1002A Organise work• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1011A Handle construction material and safe disposal of waste



• types of stone and their characteristics• methods of splitting stone• workplace and equipment safety requirements including relevant statutory regulations• workings drawings and specifications• material handling• regulations related to safe disposal of waste and dust suppression• tools and equipment• measuring and marking


• work safely• interpret drawings• use hand tools• handle material• measure and set out work• communicate effectively



• workplace location• hand tools and equipment appropriate to splitting stone processes• stone appropriate to activity• drawings and specifications/documentation relevant to activity

Split stone manually BCG3072A




Evidence should be collected over time allowing for demonstration in a range of workplace activities.



Assessment should be while tasks are undertaken under limited and intermittent supervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 2 2 2 1



BCG3073A: Finish stone



1.2 OH&S requirements for application to tasks andworkplace environment, identified and adhered to.

1.3 Stone selected in accordance with job requirementsand specifications.

1.4 Required tools and equipment identified and selectedto carry out finishing processes.


1.6 Drawings, specifications and schedules for job adheredto.

1.7 Stone hardness identified using "Moh's scale".

2 Use abrasives 2.1 Coolant used as required by selected abrasives, stonesand job requirements.

2.2 Range of grades of abrasives used in accordance withjob requirements and specifications.

2.3 Polishing compounds used in accordance with jobrequirements and specifications.

2.4 Various polishing heads used in correct sequence toprovide finish to specification.

3 Use stone cutting equipment 3.1 Stone set into place on cutting table to obtainmaximum efficiency in cutting.

3.2 Stone wedged or fixed into place by nailed timber stripsto ensure stable and aligned correctly to cutting blade.

3.3 Adjustments made to machinery as required bymaximum depth of cut and size of stone.

3.4 Primary cutting machines used appropriate to theircutting capacity.

3.5 Secondary cutting machines used appropriate to theircutting capacity.

3.6 Stone marked out and cut according to job drawings,specifications and schedules.

Finish stone BCG3073A


4 Polish stone and form edges 4.1 Adhesives applied as fillers to stone as required by job(eg. laminate edges, fill natural fissures, applyreinforcing to slabs, etc.).

4.2 Grinding and polishing heads set up and operated asrequired by job.

4.3 Adjustments made to machinery in accordance with jobrequirements.

4.4 Polishing machinery used in a manner appropriate toits capacity.

4.5 Various hand operated polishing machines used asrequired by job to achieve specified finish.

5 Use adhesives and fillers 5.1 Various filling compounds selected and used accordingto job requirements.

5.2 Various types of adhesives selected and usedaccording to job requirements.

5.3 Tinting procedures for fillers and adhesives selectedand used, where required.

5.4 Various reinforcing materials and techniques selectedand used, where required.

6 Clean up 6.1 Surfaces cleaned as required by job in preparation fortransport or installation.

6.2 Surface finishes applied as required by job (eg. wax).

6.3 Work area cleaned up and waste materials disposedof in an appropriate manner and in accordance withEPA requirements.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the cutting and polishing processes used to finish stone.







• working platforms and scaffolding• hazardous materials


• safety goggles/glasses• boots• ear plugs/muffs• gloves• dust masks/respirators• cap

Machinery and equipment may include but is not limited to:

• frame saw• circular saw• rotating or transverse tables• twin tables• rise and fall saws• wire saws• water jet• hole saws• line polishers• stationary slab polishers• Jenny Lind type polishers• edge polishers• milling machines• buffs• drills• angle grinders

Adhesives and fillers may include but are not limited to:

• cementious material• plaster• epoxy and polyester resins• chemical adhesive

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence may be assessed by finishing stone using at least two pieces of equipment listed in the range ofvariables on both hard and soft stone.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable tomachinery equipment and workplace operations

• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of finishing stone.• stablilise stone or equipment, prior to cutting or polishing• select cutting and polishing processes appropriate to stone shape size and specified finish• use polishing heads in a logical sequence to achieve specified finish• demonstration of polishing using both hand held and static polishing machinery• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations• complete finishing process to stone to specifications

Finish stone BCG3073A




• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1011A Handle construction material and safe disposal of waste• BCG3075A Machine stone



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• types of stone and characteristics• OH&S regulations relating to guarding and use of static and hand held power tools and

equipment on stone• methods of finishing stone• role of coolant in the stone polishing process• Moh's scale of stone hardness• range and grades of polishing compounds• machinery and equipment• regulations related to safe disposal of waste and dust suppression• adhesives and fillers


• work safely• read and interpret drawings and documentation• select and use hand held power tools and equipment• handle chemical adhesives and fillers• handle materials• use machinery• communicate effectively



• workplace operations• access to equipment and materials for cutting and polishing stone• stone relative to cutting and polishing proposed activity• drawings, specifications and/or documentation relevant to activity


Competency should be assessed while tasks are undertaken and should involve:

• direct observation of use of at least three types of machines• questions related to underpinning knowledge• inspection of final product

Competency shall be assessed while working under intermittent supervision and direction at variousstages of the cutting and polishing process.




Competency shall be assessed in the workplace or simulated workplace setting.

Assessment should be while tasks are undertaken under intermittent supervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 2 2



BCG3074A: Carry out profile work



1.2 OH&S requirements for application tasks and workplaceenvironment recognised and adhered to.

1.3 Job requirements and scope of work identified fromworking drawings and specifications.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected to carry out processesconsistent with needs of job and checked forserviceability.

1.6 Stone section identified and checked for conformity tooverall dimensions and colour to specifications.

2 Transfer dimensions from anengineering drawing to work

2.1 Specifications and work requirements determined inaccordance with material and drawings.

2.2 All marking off of material carried out to requirements forprofile work to specifications.

2.3 Datum points correctly established on stone forapplication of profile set-out.

3 Develop patterns 3.1 Consideration of dressing procedures analysed andmost appropriate development method chosen andapplied.

3.2 Calculations carried out and accurately performed todevelop true shape of profile mould.

3.3 Patterns set out accurately for profile mould, reversemould and bed mould to dimensions and specifiedshapes.

3.4 Allowances for fabrication processes with guide/rollerworking off template, correctly determined andtransferred to bed mould.

4 Use hand or hand held powercutting tool

4.1 Tool adjusted for operation in consideration ofapplication work.

4.2 Hand tool or power cutting tool used safely and correctlyto cut patterns for templates.

Carry out profile work BCG3074A


4.3 Materials cut to size in accordance with drawings andjob requirements, minimising wastage.

4.4 Templates trimmed to set out, where required, tospecifications.

5 Shape and form stone 5.1 Equipment set up and adjusted to meet job requirementsand standard operating procedures.

5.2 Stone located and fixed into place on table ready formachine operation.

5.3 Appropriate cutter set to machine to carry out initialcutting processes and cutters changed as requiredduring overall process.

5.4 Bed template located and aligned with stone andmachine operation to requirements of job andmanufacturer’s specifications.

5.5 Machine start up and shut down operations carried outin accordance with standard operating procedures tomanufacturer’s specifications.

5.6 Machine set up and operated with allowances forthickness of template and gauges.

5.7 Machine operated and stone shaped and formed todesigned requirements, to specifications.

5.8 Material checked for accuracy against requireddimensions and shape, to specifications.

6 Clean up 6.1 Finished stone removed and stored.

6.2 Machine and allied equipment cleaned and maintained.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to machining processes carried out in profile work to produce stone to a designed shapeand form.

Operations may include:

• sawing• grinding• bevelling



Types of stone include but are not limited to:

• marble• granite• sandstone• basalt (blue stone)• igneous rock

Profiling follows straight or curved lines.




• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• working platforms• use of machinery




• measuring tape/rule• dividers/wing compasses• scriber• squares• power grinder• portable cutter/grinder• cutter/grinder machine• jigs• clamps• travelling arm saw• power leads• diamond cutters• carborundium cutters

Templates may be made of:

• cardboard• zinc sheet• aluminium sheet

Carry out profile work BCG3074A


• plastic sheet• plywood

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by carrying out profiling work using at least three of the tools/equipmentprocesses listed within the range of variables.




• select and use appropriate tools, equipment and processes consistent with requirements of theactivity

• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of profiling work• transfer critical dimensions and reference points to work accurately• develop required patterns, accurate to job details• accurately produce templates for job requirements• apply correct procedures with use of templates to set up machines and equipment with stone to

carry out machining processes• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to cut and shape stone• carry out safe and effective operations with use of equipment and machines• complete profile work to accuracy of shape and specifications



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG2012A Make set outs• BCG3070A Dress stone manually• BCG3075A Machine stone



• workplace and equipment safety requirements including relevant statutory regulations and codes• types of stone and their characteristics• methods of dressing stone• working drawings and specifications• material handling• regulations related to safe disposal of waste and dust suppression• tools and equipment• use of machinery and equipment• measuring and marking• templates for stonework


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• organise work



• use tools and equipment• machine material• handle material• measure and set out work• apply templates to machinery processes• communicate effectively



• workplace location with access to machinery• tools and equipment appropriate to proposed profile work• stone relevant to proposed activity• materials appropriate to setting out processes• drawings and specifications relevant to proposed activity





Competence may be assessed in the workplace or simulated workplace setting.


KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 2 2 2

BCG3075A Machine Stone


BCG3075A: Machine stone




1.3 Appropriate personal protection equipment selected,correctly fitted and used.

1.4 Stone machining/shaping requirements determinedfrom drawings and specifications or instructions.

1.5 Machine, tools and equipment selected to carry outprocesses consistent with job requirements andchecked for serviceability.

1.6 Equipment correctly set up and adjusted for operationto standard operating procedures.

1.7 Water provision checked for connection and operationwith machine.

2 Operate stone machiningequipment

2.1 Stone machining equipment safely started up and shutdown to standard operating procedures in accordancewith manufacturer’s specifications.

2.2 Materials and safety guards correctly positioned, fittedand used to designed applications.

2.3 Stone machining equipment operated, monitored andadjusted to achieve specified size, shape and finish.

2.4 Measurements and/or tolerances checked forconsistency with job requirements and specifications.

3 Operate static diamond saw 3.1 Stone located on movable table aligned with saw bladein accordance with designed cut.

3.2 Stone fixed or secured into position on table by use ofwedges or nailed timber sections to provide stability forsawing.

3.3 Cutting blade adjusted for depth of first cut inaccordance with type of blade and hardness of stone.

3.4 Safety considerations in location of operator and otherpersons recognised and carried out.

3.5 Water turned on for operating of machine.

Machine Stone BCG3075A


3.6 Saw started up and operated in accordance withmanufacturer’s safe working and operatingprocedures.

3.7 Stone moved by table movement so that blade cuttingis at efficient rate without affecting designed operatingrevolutions of machine.

3.8 Additional cuts made by lowering of saw after each cutand then cutting on return movement of table, untilcomplete.

4 Operate travelling beam saw 4.1 Stone located on adjustable table and fixed into stableposition.

4.2 Table adjusted to align designed cut with saw blade.

4.3 Settings for operation designed for length of stone pluswidth of blade carried out on digital panel.

4.4 Blade set to initial cut for operation.

4.5 Machine switched on and automatically operated inaccordance with manufacturer’s specifications.

5 Operate multi-functionalcutter/grinder/polisher

5.1 Machine and equipment set up with appropriatehead/plate fitted and secured to operating spindleaccording to work application.

5.2 Stone fixed into location on table to requirements formachining processes.

5.3 Template set into place, where applicable, for profilework and cutting and moulding operations.

5.4 Machinery set up with cutting head set to initial cut andaligned with template in accordance withmanufacturer’s specifications for setting up andoperating machine.

5.5 Machinery operations carried out to machinemanufacturer’s specifications and job processes fordressing stone to requirements.

6. Carry out grinding and polishing 6.1 Appropriate grinding plate selected and fitted tomachine according to machine manufacturer’sspecifications and stone surface to be cut andpolished.

6.2 Machine set up for grinding operations and operated inaccordance with job and machine manufacturer’sspecifications.

6.3 Polishing processes carried out using change of gritabrasive pads fitted in accordance with type of stonebeing finished.



6.4 Machine operations monitored and water supportmaintained to cutting and polishing applications.

7 Shut down machine operations 7.1 Machine shut down procedures carried out to machinemanufacturer’s specifications.

7.2 Supporting material, wedges and clamps removedfrom stone and machine table.

7.3 Finished or machined stone removed carefully withoutdamage and stored.

7.4 Machine and supporting equipment and accessoriescleaned, maintained and checked for wear ordeterioration in accordance with manufacturer’sspecifications.

8 Clean up 8.1 Waste material disposed of safely.

8.2 Unused material stored/stacked safely.


8.4 Work area left clean.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the use of machinery in the cutting, dressing and finishing of stone.

Operations may include:

• drilling• sawing• grinding• bevelling• polishing

Types of machines include but are not limited to:

• static diamond circular saws• travelling beam circular saws• frame or gang saws• block squaring machines• multi blade saws• slab splitting machines• multi head static polishers• “Jenny Lind” type polishers• multi functional cutter/grinder/polisher (Jenny Lind type)• drilling machines• shaping machines• planing machines



Blades and cutters may be:

• diamond• carborundium


• marble• granite• sandstone• limestone• basalt• igneous rock


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to specifications of work• machinery operations


• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• working platforms and scaffolding• guarding of machines• use of machinery• cutting of stone


• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• dust masks/respirators• cap


• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level• squares• spanners• clamps• jigs• wedges• brushes• brooms• shovels

Work undertaken in accordance with AS4024-1996 Safeguarding of Machinery and Worksafe AustraliaStandards for Users and Operators of Industrial Equipment.



EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the safe and effective operation of appropriate machines to carry outthe following processes to designed requirements:

• sawing• cutting or moulding• grinding• polishing



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable toworkplace and machinery operations

• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of machining stone• select and use appropriate tools, equipment and processes to set up stone and machine for

machining activity• select appropriate machine to carry out required processes• check and/or adjusted guards prior to operating machinery• check and carry out start up and shut down procedures to manufacturer’s specifications• give attention to initial depth of cut for sawing or moulding• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to operate machinery• identify typical faults or problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations• complete machinery process with stone finished to specifications• carry out safety check and clearing operation to manufacturer’s specifications.



• BCG3074A Carry out profile work


• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices• BCG1011A Handle construction materials and safe disposal of waste• BCG2011A Use static machines



• drawings and specifications• types of machines• machine operations• maintenance and sewing of machinery• types of stone and characteristics• workplace and equipment safety requirements including relevant statutory regulations, codes

and standards• application of a range of cutting and finishing equipment• stone grain and the influence on machining techniques• tools and equipment• hydraulics• measuring and levelling




• work safely• organise work• operate machinery• set up for machine operations• place and level stone• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively



• workplace location with access to machines• tools and equipment appropriate to supporting machining processes• stone relative to machinery processes• drawings and specifications relevant to activity




Competency should be assessed under general guidance, checking at various stages of the processand at completion of the activity against performance criteria and specifications




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 2 1 1 2



BCG3076A: Inlay lead to stone



1.2 OH&S requirements for application to tasks andworkplace operations recognised and adhered to.


1.4 Tools and equipment selected to carry out processesconsistent with needs of job and checked forserviceability.

2 Prepare background surface 2.1 Appropriate equipment selected and used for removingexcess material so that surface is even and flat.

2.2 Surface made suitable for designed treatment as perspecifications for setting out and cutting letters.

2.3 Protection to surrounds of lettering area applied usingappropriate masking and covering technique.

2.4 Surface painted with weak water based paint tospecifications for ease of marking out letters andshapes.

3 Identify and draw to scalevarious type of lettering,insignias and monograms

3.1 Drafted designs set out and drawn to appropriate scaleon set out material.

3.2 Designs transferred to prepared surface either directly orby using templates or stencils.

3.3 Designs marked by pencils or scribers accurately tostencil/template or direct set out.

4 Use hand and/or power tools forcutting letters

4.1 Material safely held in most suitable position ready forcutting and/or shaping operation.

4.2 Stone, less than 30mm thick, fixed to a larger section ofstone to minimise risk of breaking.

4.3 Tools/equipment selected for cutting/shaping process inaccordance with size and shape of letters.

4.4 Tools/equipment adjusted correctly for operation tostandard operating procedure and in accordance withwork to be undertaken.

Inlay lead to stone BCG3076A


4.5 Start up and shut down procedures for use of equipmentcarried out in accordance with specifications, whereapplicable.

4.6 Tools used or equipment operated to carefully cut lettersto set out.

4.7 Letters cut to size and depth specified.

4.8 Holes drilled for cut out letters to specifications, toprovide keying for securing load.

5 Perform lead in process onlettering of stone surfaces

5.1 Pre-cut lettering inlaid with solid or melted lead usingappropriate tools or method, without damage to stone.

5.2 Molten lead heated and handled safely in accordancewith job and OH&S requirements.

5.3 Lead inlaid to give a flat or raised finish to stone inaccordance with specifications.

5.4 Letters or insignias finished clean on their edges andsurface finished to specifications.


6.2 Re-usable and recyclable materials salvaged andstored.


6.4 Personal protective equipment removed, inspected,cleaned and stored.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the laying of lead to recesses carved in stone to form lettering, insignias and monograms.

Operations for inlaying lead may include:

• cutting• melting• shaping• forming


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to specifications of work• finishing of stone surfaces








• measuring tape/rule• hammer• straight edge• squares• power grinder• mallets• lettering chisels• sculptor’s chisels• pneumatic lettering chisels• scribers• masonry drill• clamps• punch• power leads

Templates or stencils may be made of:

• cardboard• zinc sheet• aluminium sheet• plywood• plastic sheet

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by carrying out lead inlay to lettering or shapes carved in stone, usingboth solid and melted material.



• select and use appropriate tools, equipment and processes consistent with requirements ofactivity


• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of inlaying lead to stone• prepare face for lettering, finished to specification

Inlay lead to stone BCG3076A


• accurately set out lettering to form balanced presentation• check spelling prior to cutting of letters• to provide appropriate protection to surrounding area• use safe and effective procedures to inlay lead to recesses• complete inlaying of lead and finishing of surface to specifications• accurately cut letters on design to specifications• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG2012A Make set outs• BCG3070A Dress stone manually



• workplace and equipment safety requirements including relevant statutory regulations and codes• types of stone and their characteristics• methods of working stone• methods of inlaying lead• drawings and specifications• effect of lead on the human body and organs• most common pathway by which lead enters workers bodies• traditional and contemporary font styles• tools and equipment• measuring and marking• making of templates or stencils


• work safely• organise work• set out work• interpret drawings and specifications• work safely with lead• use tools and equipment• work stone• make templates and stencils• communicate effectively



• workplace location• tools and equipment appropriate to inlaying processes• stone relevant to proposed activity• drawings and specifications/documentation relevant to activity




Competency should be assessed through observation of application to tasks and questions relatedto underpinning knowledge.



Competency should be demonstrated in inlaying lead to stone as required in the workplace.



KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 2 1 2

BCG3077A Lay and repair wall and floor tiles


BCG3077A: Lay and repair wall and floor tiles


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’s tilingoperations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andpreparing for and laying and repairing tiled surfacesidentified and adhered to.

1.3 Materials checked for conformity against drawings andspecifications and, where applicable, sample tile.



2 Set out tiling job 2.1 Prepare area to be tiled to requirements ofspecifications.

2.2 Tile work set out to be symmetrical, balanced andinvolve minimal waste to specifications and AS3958.1-1991 Guide to the Installation of Ceramic Tiles.

2.3 Waterproof membrane fitted and laid in wet areas tolocal government regulations.

3 Cut tiles as required 3.1 Tiles cut without jagged or flayed edges.

3.2 Recess hole or curve cut by hand or machine to shapeand size within 1mm.

3.3 Tile jolly-edged to form a mitre so that biscuit is notexposed at the joint.

4 Fix wall tiles 4.1 Mortar and/or adhesive prepared, where applicable,and applied to tile/surface in accordance withmanufacturer’s recommendations.

4.2 Tiles prepared and fixed with pad tiles set to levelalignment.

4.3 Horizontal joint checked for straightness and tile edgesand surface alignment checked.

4.4 Tiles fixed to alignment maintaining designed pattern tospecification.

4.5 Even margins shown around openings, frames andfittings where feasible.

Lay and repair wall and floor tiles BCG3077A


4.6 Bottom course cut and fixed to rake, if required.

4.7 Splayed, manufactured, formed or aluminium coversfixed, as required.

4.8 All vertical tiles finished plumb and true to squarecorners.

4.9 All joints maintained straight and uniform in width withdue allowance for tolerance of tile.

4.10 Expansion gaps built in, in accordance withspecifications.

4.11 Mitre joints made, maintaining glazing on mitre with nochips and uniform mitre.

5 Grout tile face 5.1 Joints cleaned and prepared to receive grout accordingto manufacturer's specifications.

5.2 Grout mixed and applied to manufacturer'sspecifications.

5.3 Tiles cleaned and polished to specifications, removingall dust from surface and joints.

6 Fix vertical mosaic sheets 6.1 Surface rendered to manufacturer's specifications andAS3958.1.

6.2 Sheets pre-grouted if required and paper faced andmesh backed mosaics fixed to background withadhesive.

6.3 Adjustments made to ensure spacings uniform andpattern and alignment maintained.

6.4 Area finished with mosaics level to line, if applicable,surface straight and flat and grout finished tospecifications.

7 Lay floor tiles using screededmortar

7.1 Floor checked for level/falls and square andmembranes and reinforcing installed if required.

7.2 Surface prepared free from contaminants and residuesto receive screeded mortar.

7.3 Cement mortar prepared to appropriate consistencyand floor slurried as per specifications.

7.4 Floor area tiled to AS3958. Expansion gaps insertedas specified by manufacturer.

7.5 Grout mixed and applied to job and manufacturer’sspecifications.



7.6 Finished tile work polished and cleaned tospecifications.

8 Lay floor tiles using adhesives 8.1 Adhesive correctly matched with tile type according tousage and climatic conditions.

8.2 Surface prepared free from residue and protrusions.

8.3 Adhesive mixed to manufacturer's specifications,where applicable.

8.4 Tiles fixed to manufacturer's specifications and toAS3958. Expansion gaps left as specified betweenwalls and tiles.

8.5 Grout mixed and applied to clean joints and surfaceaccording to manufacturer's specifications.

8.6 Finished tile work polished and cleaned tospecifications.

9 Fix slate 9.1 Slate prepared by dusting or washing tiles tospecifications.

9.2 Colours/characteristics identified as per architect’sdrawings and specifications.

9.3 Slate laid, maintaining bond if applicable, with jointsuniform in size and surface as flat as practicable.

9.4 Grout or mortar applied and slate surface cleaned andsealed to manufacturer's specifications.

10 Tile treads, risers, steps andthresholds

10.1 Rises and goings calculated according to BuildingCode of Australia or determined from formed concretesteps/stairs.

10.2 Steps set out for uniform rise and take even cut onboth sides.

10.3 Packing or render support fixed where applicable andriser tiles fixed to true alignment.

10.4 Treads infill and thresholds fixed in line with the topedge of risers within -1mm.

10.5 Grout applied to wet joints and finished flush with tilesto a smooth finish.

10.6 Finished tilework cleaned and polished and free ofpitted, chipped, cracked or scratched tiles resultingfrom fixing operation.



11 Repair damaged tilework 11.1 Damaged tiles/s carefully removed avoiding damage tosurrounding tiles.

11.2 Old bedding cleaned and cleared to allow placement ofreplacement tile.

11.3 Replacement tiles selected and cut where applicable tomatch existing face and pattern.

11.4 Tiles fitted and fixed to maintain alignment with joints touniform spacing.

11.5 Grouting carried out and tile face cleaned to specifiedfinish.





RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the laying and fixing of floor and wall tiles.

Applies to walls, floors and steps and includes the following types of tiles:

• ceramic• terra cotta• granite• slate• mosaics

Repair work to include heritage tiling.

Laying and fixing of ceramic tiles to be in accordance with:

• AS2358-1990 Adhesives for fixing ceramic tiles• AS3958.1-1991 Guide to the installation of ceramic tiles• AS3958.2-1992 Guide to the selection of ceramic tiling system

Surfaces to which tiles may be fixed include:

• plasterboard• fibre cement sheet• brickwork• blockwork• concrete• rendered face


• safety goggles/glasses• boots



• gloves• respirators/dust masks• knee pads• ear plugs/muffs


• tile cutters and scribers• masonry drill bits• measuring tape/rule• trowels• straight edge• levels• wet saw• scrapers


• condition of tile• quality of prepared surfaces• quality of materials• setting out procedures• application procedures• specified finish• attention given to specifications of work• workplace operations and procedures


• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• hazardous materials• use of tools and equipment• working platforms

Methods of fixing tiles include:

• adhesives• cement mortar• cement mortar with adhesive additive

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by carrying out both wall and floor tiling on both solid and sheetbackgrounds using at least three separate types of tiles, one of which is to be mosaics, from those listed inthe range of variables statement.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable toworkplace and tiling operations

• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of laying and repairing wall

and floor tiles• inspect background surface for conformity with requirements of job and specified adhesives• set tiles symmetrical and accommodating fittings and fixtures where possible



• mark and cut holes and curves accurately to required locations• cut tiles to conform to size and shape to ensure consistent joint size is achieved• ensure tiles finished to line, level, square and flush face• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify



• BCG 1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG 1008A Use simple levelling devices• BCG 1012A Prepare for construction process (wall and floor tiling)• BCG 2001A Prepare surfaces• BCG 2004A Carry out levelling


• BCG 3078A Tile corners



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• drawings and specifications• Australian Standards 2358, 3958.1 and 3958.2• preparation of surfaces• setting out and levelling• types of tiles and material characteristics• adhesives and methods of application• mortar composition• hazards associated with solvents, adhesives and cement/epoxy basd grouts• tools and equipment• cutting of tiles• finishing techniques• calculation of material requirements


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• set out work area• use tools and equipment• lay and fix tiles• calculate material quantities• communicate effectively



• workplace location with surface/s prepared for tasks• tools and equipment appropriate to tile laying and fixing processes• tiles and materials appropriate to proposed tasks• drawings and specifications/documentation relevant to activity





Competency in this unit may be determined concurrently, based upon integrated work.

Competency should be assessed under guidance, checking at various stages of the process and atcompletion of the activity against performance criteria and specifications.



Assessment should be while tasks are undertaken individually under limited supervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 3 1 2 3 2



BCG3078A: Tile corners




1.3 Materials checked for conformity against drawings andspecifications.



2 Tile external corners 2.1 Setting out checked for plumb, level and square, withinspecified tolerance.

2.2 External corners checked to ensure surfaceintersections are straight.

2.3 Curved bead angle trim or tiles fixed so that externalreturn and bead is square and measurements accurateto junction with tiles and set out, where applicable.

2.4 Tiles fixed with minimum voids in tile bed and fullybedded maintaining alignment to specifications.

2.5 Corner maintained square within specified toleranceand finished to specifications.

3 Tile internal corners 3.1 Internal corner checked to ensure surfaces flat andintersection straight.

3.2 Tiles fitted, cut where required and fixed to one wallmaintaining alignment to set out and specifications.

3.3 Tiles fitted, cut where required and fixed abuttingadjacent wall tiles to line, set out and specifications.

3.4 Joints for abutting tiles made in accordance withdesigned margin for grouting or for expansion joint,where applicable, to specifications.

3.5 Coved internal wall or wall and floor junctions installedwith either coved tiles or coved trim.

3.6 Coved tiles or trim fitted and fixed so that line is straightand, where applicable, aligned with set out.

Tile corners BCG3078A


3.7 Tiles fixed to cove tiles or trim and finished toalignment and specifications.





RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to tiling vertical and horizontal surfaces as well as external and internal corners.

Material tiles may include:

• ceramic• terracotta• granite• slate• mosaic• ceramic tiles specifically designed for finishes at corners


• AS2358-1990 Adhesives-for fixing ceramic tiles• AS3958.1-1991 Guide to the installation of ceramic tiles• AS3958.2-1992 Guide to the selection of ceramic tiling system

External corners may involve:

• curved plastic bead/trim• curved external corner tiles• mitred tiles

Internal corners may involve:

• coved internal corner tiles• coved plastic bead/trim• butt joints


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to specifications of work• quality of prepared surfaces





• handling of materials• working platforms• hazardous materials


• adhesives• cement mortar• cement mortar with adhesive additive




• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• respirators/dust masks• knee pads


• tile cutter and scribers• masonry drill bits• measuring tape/rule• trowels• straight edge• levelling equipment• wet saw• scrapers

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by laying and fixing corner tiles to internal and external wall junctions andbetween floor and wall junctions using any of the materials listed within the range of variables statement.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of laying wall and floor tiles• inspect background surface for conformity with job requirements and specified adhesives• give attention to specific positioning of tiles for junctions at corners• use safe and effective procedures to fix tiles at corners to set out and specified alignment• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• complete of corner tiling aligned to specifications

Tile corners BCG3078A


(2) Pre-requisites Relationship of Units:


• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices• BCG1012A Prepare for construction process (wall and floor tiling)• BCG2001A Prepare surfaces


• BCG3077A Lay and repair wall and floor tiles



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• types of tiles and material characteristics• drawings and specifications• Australian Standards 2358, 3958.1 and 3958.2• hazards associated with solvents, adhesives and cement/epoxy based grouts• external and internal corner tiles• plastic trims for tile work• substrate preparation• cutting of tiles• setting out of grids for laying tiles• tools and equipment• adhesives and methods of application


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• use tools and equipment• select and effectively use tiles and materials• measure and calculate quantities• lay and fix tiles• communicate effectively



• work location set out for tiling• materials relevant to application tasks• tools and equipment appropriate to laying and fixing processes• drawings and specifications/documentation relevant to proposed activity






Competency should be assessed under guidance, checking at various stages of the process and atthe completion of the activity against performance criteria and specifications.




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 3 1 2 3 2



BCG3079A: Tile curved surfaces






1.5 Materials checked for conformity against drawings andspecifications and in accordance with curvature of wall.


2 Tile curved wall and floor surfaces 2.1 Extent of curve accurately established from siteinspection.

2.2 Level line set out around wall by intermediate markingusing either spirit level, water level or levellingequipment.

2.3 Location of tiles set out to determine balanced designand identify cutting requirements, if applicable.

2.4 Template made to form accurate curve line for tiledsurface around wall.

2.5 Method of laying tiles determined with identification oflocation of first tile.

2.6 Mortar and/or adhesive prepared where applicable tomanufacturer’s specifications.

2.7 Pad tiles fixed to level set out and template curve, tospecifications.

2.8 Minimum voids ensured in mortar tile beds and tilesfixed level, plumb (wall), flush and square.

2.9 Floor tiles laid to set out grid with perimeter tilesmarked and cut accurately to fit curved wall.

2.10 Grout mixed and applied to joints according tospecifications, to provide flush and smooth finish.

2.11 Tiled surface polished and finished to specifications.

Tile curved surfaces BCG3079A


3 Tile circular volume, wall andarches

3.1 Template set out, cut, accurately positioned andchecked to ensure conformity to tile surface for curve.

3.2 Pad tiles accurately positioned and fixed to line,maintaining uniform spacing.

3.3 Tiles accurately marked and cut where applicable andfixed into place, to specifications.

3.4 Tiles fixed on walls, plumb and maintaining levels andcurvature of wall to specifications.

3.5 Tiles fixed to archways, maintaining line and curvatureto specifications.

3.6 Grout mixed and applied to joints and tiled surfacefinished to specifications.

4 Render and mosaic a circularcolumn

4.1 Surface prepared by removing protrusions andcleaning surface for render application.

4.2 Template prepared for diameter profile of column, tospecifications.

4.3 Mortar mixed to specifications for render material.

4.4 Render applied evenly to specified thickness andfinished to curve to prepared template, tospecifications.

4.5 Template prepared for diameter profile of finished tiledface.

4.6 Mosaic tiles fixed to column maintaining even spacingand level finish, to specifications.

4.7 Grout mixed and applied to tiled surface and finished tospecifications.

5 Clean up 5.1 Area cleared to specification with waste, materials andequipment removed.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the tiling of all curved wall, column and arch surfaces

Material tiles may include:

• ceramic



• terra cotta• marble• granite• slate• mosaics


• AS2358-1990 Adhesives-for fixing ceramic tiles• AS3958.1-1991 Guide to the installation of ceramic tiles




• tile cutters and scribers• masonry drill bits• measuring tape/rule• trowels• straight edge• spirit level• levelling equipment• light hand roller• scrapers• jig saw• dividers• file• power lead• scaffolding• squares• string or chalk line






• plasterboard



• fibre cement sheet• brickwork• blockwork• concrete• rendered face

Templates may be made from:

• plywood• hardboard• sheet metal


• adhesives and their use• dust• noise from cutting or nearby work• working from platforms• working around curved surfaces


• adhesives• cement mortar• cement mortar with adhesives additive

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by tiling curved surfaces on both solid and sheet backgrounds.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of tiling curved surfaces• inspect background surface for conformity with job requirements and specified adhesives• set out accurately to ensure lines level and straight• check tile set out is symmetrical and accommodates fittings and fixtures where possible• accurately set out and prepare profile templates• cut holes and curves using both manual and mechanical methods• check cut tile conforms to size and shape to ensure consistent joint size is achieved• ensure all joints level plumb or square and even as appropriate to the job requirement• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• complete curved tiled surface to specifications• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective tiling operations



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices• BCG2001A Prepare surface• BCG2004A Carry out levelling



• BCG3077A Lay and repair wall and floor tiles



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• drawings and specifications• Australian Standards 2358 and 3958.1• types of tiles and material characteristics• hazards associated with solvents, adhesives and cement/epoxy based grouts• adhesives and methods of application• mortar composition• setting out and levelling• tools and equipment• templates• tile installation procedures• calculation of material requirement


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• organise and set out work• set out levels• select material• fit and fix tiles• prepare accurate templates• measure and calculate quantities• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively



• work area prepared for the tiling of curved surfaces• tiles and associated materials relevant to tiling of curved surfaces• tools and equipment appropriate to tiling processes• drawings and specifications/documentation relevant to activity




Competency should be assessed under general guidance, checking at various stages of the processand at the completion of the activity against performance criteria and specifications.






KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 3 1 2 3 2



BCG3080A: Carry out decorative mosaic tiling




1.3 Design and scope of mosaic work determined from jobdrawings and specifications.

1.4 Materials and quantities determined from job drawingsand specifications.



2 Set out and prepare materials formosaic

2.1 Design pattern produced on paper to full size anddetails checked and sharpened to shape.

2.2 Size of tile chosen in accordance with mosaic design.

2.3 Colour co-ordination selected as close as practical tospecified colour samples.

2.4 Paper pattern laid out face down on flat board or tableand taped firmly at edges.

3 Form mosaic design on paperpattern

3.1 Mosaic tiles cut to designed regular size in accordancewith colour design.

3.2 Shaped and smaller mosaic tiles marked to fit patternand cut to shape.

3.3 Paper glue applied to each tile and tile fitted to patternmaintaining designed spacing.

3.4 Process continued to complete mosaic design.

4 Prepare substrate to fix mosaicpattern

4.1 Brick or masonry surfaces rendered to specificationsand AS3958.1-1991 Guide to the Installation ofCeramic Tiles.

4.2 Plasterboard and/or cement sheet surface cleaned freeof dust.

Carry out decorative mosaic tiling BCG3080A


4.3 Location of mosaic set out to dimensions from jobdrawings and specifications or marked directly ontosurface by tracing full size set out.

5 Fix mosaic to designed location 5.1 Appropriate colour adhesive chosen to ensure lightcoloured tiles not darkened by adhesive.

5.2 Large mosaic carefully cut into smaller sheets ofmanageable size.

5.3 Adhesive applied to set out area and sheets located inappropriate position related to overall design.

5.4 Separated mosaic pieced together to form total mosaicwith lines consistent to design.

5.5 Paper pattern washed off carefully prior to adhesivefinal set and adjustments made to ensure mosaic linesand spaces consistent.

5.6 Surface finished so that face of tiles flush and surfaceflat, to specification.

6 Grout tile face 6.1 Tiled face cleaned free of dust and adhesive toprepare for grouting.

6.2 Grout mixed and applied to mosaic surface tomanufacturer's specifications.

6.3 Finished mosaic surface cleaned and polished with drycloth to specifications.





RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to decorative mosaic tiling which may be formed by glueing mosaic tiles to a paper patterneither face up or face down or directly fixing into place on a wall or board, later to be hung or fixed to a wall.

Mosaic designs are produced from provided designs by enlarging through photocopying processes untilactual size is achieved. Actual design pattern involves joining of a number of sheets.

Mosaic tiles may be fixed into place by use of an adhesive or directly bedded onto a mortar or renderedbase.

Laying and fixing of ceramic tiles be in accordance with:

• AS2358-1990 Adhesives-for fixing ceramic tiles• AS3958.1-1991 Guide to the installation of ceramic tiles




• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to specifications of work• quality of prepared surfaces






• adhesives• cement mortar• cement mortar with adhesives additive




• tile cutters and scribers• masonry drill bits• measuring tape/rule• trowels• straight edge• levelling equipment• light hand roller• scrapers• shovel• concrete mixer

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by carrying out mosaic tiling applications to a given design using either ofthe two methods outlined in the range of variables statement.

Carry out decorative mosaic tiling BCG3080A





• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks• apply organisational quality procedures and process within context of laying and fixing mosaic

wall and floor tiles• accurately reproduce design to specified dimensions• inspect background surface for conformity with job requirements and specified adhesives• accurately interpret and select tile sizes, shapes and colours• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to cut tiles to shape• ensure each cut tile conforms to shape and colour to match design• accurately set out location of mosaic design either by dimensional limits or designed shape and

lines• accurately produce design to surface location• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective installation operations• complete mosaic to design to specifications



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices• BCG2001A Prepare surfaces• BCG3077A Lay and repair wall and floor tiles



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• drawings and specifications• Australian Standards 2358 and 3958.1• design reproduction methods• mosaic application methods• hazards associated with solvents, adhesives and cement/epoxy based grouts• adhesives and methods of application• mortar composition• setting out and proportioning• tools and equipment• substrate preparation• cutting of tiles• scaffolding• grouting and finishing of tile work


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• reproduce design drawings• select materials to suit design



• cut tiles to suit design• use tools and equipment• fit and fix tiles• grout and finish tile work• communicate effectively



• workplace location prepared for tiling of surface• materials required for the tiling activity• tools and equipment appropriate to application processes• drawings and specifications relevant to mosaic design



Competency should be assessed under guidance checking at various stages of the process and atthe completion of the activity against performance criteria and specifications.




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG3081A: Apply/install waterproofing anddamproofing



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andthe preparation and application of waterproofingprocesses identified and adhered to.

1.3 Type of waterproofing material identified in accordancewith job specification, state of structure and job safetyrequirements.

1.4 Area of structure to be water proofed identified from jobdrawings and specifications or diagnosed damp faultarea.

1.5 Area of structure to be water proofed inspected fordefects and soundness in accordance with job andmanufacturer's specifications.



1.8 Hazardous materials stored in accordance with OH&Slegislation.

2 Maintain safe working area 2.1 Safe working area maintained in accordance withMSDS directions where applicable and OH&Sregulations.


3 Prepare surface 3.1 Defects including caulking corrected and made good torequirements of manufacturer's specifications.

3.2 Surface of structure to be water proofed, prepared tomanufacturer's specification.

3.3 Prepared surface of structure prime coated tomanufacturer’s specification, where applicable.

4 Apply waterproofing membrane 4.1 Waterproofing membrane applied to primed surface ofstructure to correct thickness in accordance withmanufacturer's job specification.

Apply/install waterproofing and damproofing BCG3081A


4.2 Sheeting membrane laid and lapped to location withjoints taped or welded to job and manufacturer’sspecifications.

4.3 Sprayed material applied to location to a consistentthickness cover to job specifications.

4.4 Membrane applications turned up or over, whereverapplicable, in accordance with job specifications.

4.5 Waterproofing membrane cured to structure inaccordance with manufacturer's specification.

4.6 Waterproofing membrane protected using methodsand materials consistent with manufacturer'sspecification.

5 Apply waterproofing towalls/floor/roof

5.1 Materials prepared for application to manufacturer'srecommendations.

5.2 Waterproofing material applied to surface inaccordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

5.3 Sheeted materials laid, lapped and welded or joined tomanufacturer’s specifications.

5.4 Sprayed material applied to face using appropriateequipment and producing a consistent thickness coverto manufacturer’s and job specifications.

5.5 Spread and applied compounds screeded and floatedor rolled to manufacturer’s and job specifications.

5.6 Moisture barrier material turned up or down asapplicable to job specifications.

5.7 Moisture barrier installed to internal or external surfaceto manufacturer's specifications.

6 Apply waterproofing throughinjection method to damp proofcourse

6.1 Materials prepared for application to manufacturer'srecommendations.

6.2 Equipment prepared and set up for injection process tomanufacturer's recommendations.

6.3 Damproof course made water resistant using injectionmethod to specifications.

7 Clean up 7.1 Surface cleaned and area cleared to specification.

7.2 Waste materials removed and placed into job wastebins or to requirements of MSDS.





RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to waterproofing materials applied on site to concrete and masonry structures which may beexisting or new and under construction.

Waterproofing and damproofing application, where applicable, should be in accordance with:

• AS2904-1995 Damp proof courses and flashings• AS4347-1995 Damp proof courses and flashings - Method of Test• AS4200-1994 Pliable building membranes and underlays• AS4201-1994 Pliable building membranes and underlays - Method of Test• AS99-1959 Bituminous felt roofing

Types of construction include:

• brickwork• blockwork• stonework• reinforced in situ concrete• pre-cast concrete

Waterproofing applications include:

• concrete roofs• wall surfaces• floor surfaces• basements (tanking)• damp proof through walls

Waterproofing materials include but are not limited to:

• polyethylene sheeting• bitumenous sheeting• bitumen• plastic strip• aluminium strip• liquid sealants• mastic sealants• mortar additives

Surface preparation may include but are not limited to:

• filling holes or depressions• washing down• chipping or scraping of protrusions• cleaning free of dust• priming or sealing of surface• removing sharp edges

Liquid waterproofing material applications include:

• spraying• brushing• rolling• pressure injection• floated or screeded




• work procedures• safety requirements• control of handling• condition of material• application procedures• specification finish


• protective clothing• protective equipment• working platforms• working from scaffolding• safety hazards• use of plant and equipment• hazardous materials


• mixing• stirring• batching and mixing• cutting sheet material to length• heating material


• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• masks• respirators


• air compressors and spray equipment• trowels• rollers• brushes• angle grinders• electric drills• shovels• concrete mixer• wheelbarrows• knives or cutting blades• hammers• brooms• vacuum cleaner

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by applying waterproofing to both horizontal and vertical surfaces using amembrane in one situation and a separate material application for the other, and applying of waterproofing toa mortar joint.




It is essential that competence be observed in the following aspects.


• apply organisational quality procedures and process within context of installing or repairingwaterproofing to a building

• identify location and details of waterproofing materials and application• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks• use safe and effective procedures to handle materials• use safe and effective procedures to prepare surfaces for application• seal or weld joints between materials in accordance with manufacturer's specifications• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective operations• complete waterproofing application to job specifications



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use plant and equipment• BCG1011A Handle construction materials and safe disposal of waste• BCG2001A Prepare surfaces




• drawings and specifications• construction of buildings• requirements in waterproofing of buildings• waterproofing methods• materials and characteristics• tools and equipment• plant and equipment• Australian Standards 2904, 4347, 4200 and AS99


• work safely• organise work• prepare surfaces• set out work• use tools and equipment• use plant• communicate effectively





• workplace location• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to application processes• materials relevant to the proposed activity• appropriate documentation relevant to work activity









KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 1 3 2 2 2 2



BCG3082A: Tile pools and spas




1.3 Materials and quantities determined from assessmentof actual job, job drawings and specifications.

1.4 Practical size of tile determined in accordance withcurvature of surface of pool or spa.



2 Set out tiling job 2.1 Assessment undertaken to divide pool or spa surfaceinto sectional shapes involving whole tiles and cut tiles.

2.2 Sections determined considering sheet sizes of tilesapplicable, and maintaining straight lines throughlength and width.

2.3 Cross centre lines marked out on pool/spa surface.

2.4 Curved surface set out to form regular shapes runningdown and through base.

2.5 Tapered sections set out in most severe curved areaswhereby tiles will be cut leading to base.

3 Tile straight lines and full sheetsections of surface

3.1 Paper patterns marked and cut to shape of section ordirect layout undertaken to prepare sheets/tiles forlayout.

3.2 Spacing determined and/or adjusted to ensure no orminimum cutting in these sections.

3.3 Prepared sheets or tiles marked to identify with sectionof application, where applicable.

3.4 Specified waterproof adhesive prepared for applicationto manufacturer's specifications.

3.6 Tiles laid working from coping down, maintainingparallel to cross centre lines and regular face alignmentto specifications.

Tile pools and spas BCG3082A


4 Lay tiles to tapered sections 4.1 Tapered areas, where applicable, set out to smallertapered sections allowing for full tile at top.

4.2 Tile sizes and shapes determined and set out to linesetout.

4.3 Shaped tiles accurately cut to designed setout totolerance of 1mm.

4.4 Adhesive applied and tiles laid maintaining alignment toset out lines and face surface of tiles, to specifications.

5 Grout tile surface 5.1 Tile spacings cleaned and all excess adhesiveremoved from face surface to receive grout accordingto manufacturer's specifications.

5.2 Specified grout mixed and applied according tomanufacturer's specifications.

5.3 Tiled surface cleaned and polished with dry cloth tospecifications.





RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the tiling of pools and spas whereby the surfaces are not readily recognisable as specificshapes but in fact flow or curve from side to end and base.


• AS2358-1990 Adhesives for Fixing Ceramic Tiles• AS3958.1-1991 Guide to the Installation of Ceramic Tiles








• adhesives• cement mortar with adhesive additive



Tools and equipment may include but are limited to:

• tile cutters and scribers• pincers• measuring tape/rule• trowels• straight edge• spirit level• light hand roller• scrapers• files• squares• scissors

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by the performance of tiling a pool or spa with the design conceptdescribed in the range of variables statement.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks• apply organisational quality procedures and process within context of laying and repairing wall

and floor tiles• accurately set out pool or spa to mark centre lines• give attention to design layout of tiles and patterns made to cover tapered areas• mark and accurately cut tiles to size• code tile areas for identification and sheets of tiles and single tiles coded accordingly• fix tiles to maintain lines and spacings• take care not to knock or move freshly placed tiles• check cut tiles conform to size and shape to ensure consistent joint size is achieved• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective tiling operations• use safe and effective procedures to apply grout and finish tiled surface to specifications




Tile pools and spas BCG3082A


• BCG2001A Prepare surfaces• BCG3077A Lay and repair wall and floor tiles• BCG3079A Tile curved surfaces• BCG3080A Carry out decorative mosaic tiling



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• drawings and specifications• Australian Standards 2358 and 3958.1• design methods for curved pools and spas• mosaic application methods• hazards associated with solvents, adhesives and cement/epoxy based grouts• adhesives and methods of application• mortar composition• cutting of tiles• tools and equipment• substrate preparation• fixing of tiles• grouting and finishing of tile work


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• set out pool or spa work• use tools and equipment• cut tiles• fit and fix tiles• grout and finish tile work• communicate effectively



• pool or spa ready for tiling• materials appropriate to proposed activity• tools and equipment appropriate to preparation and tiling processes• appropriate communication of documentation relevant to tasks



Competency should be assessed under guidance, checking at various stages of the process and atthe completion of the activity against performance criteria and specifications.






KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 3 1 3 3 2



BCG3083A: Apply guilding to stone



1.2 OH&S requirements for application tasks and workplaceenvironment recognised and adhered to.


1.4 Tools and equipment selected to carry out processesconsistent with job needs and checked for serviceability.

2 Prepare background surface 2.1 Correct equipment selected and used for removingexcess material so that surface is finished flat and evento specification.

2.2 Surface made suitable for treatment as perspecifications for setting out and cutting of letters.

2.3 Protection to surrounds applied where lettered face isrecessed or raised with surrounding surface.

2.4 Surface painted with weak water based paint tospecification for ease of marking out of letters andshapes.

3 Identify and draw to scale varioustype of lettering, insignias andmonograms

3.1 Drafted designs set out and drawn to appropriate scale.

3.2 Designs transferred to prepared surface either directly orby using templates ensuring balanced with centre ofstone.

3.3 Designs marked accurately by pencil or scriber tostencil/template or direct set out.

4 Use hand and/or power tools forcutting letters

4.1 Material safely held in most suitable position ready forcutting and/or shaping operation.

4.2 Stone, less than 30mm thick, fixed to larger section ofstone to minimise risk of breaking.

4.3 Tools/equipment selected for cutting/shaping process.

4.4 Tools/equipment adjusted correctly for standardoperating procedure.

4.5 Start up and shut down procedures used with equipmentin accordance with standard operating procedure.

Apply guilding to stone BCG3083A


4.6 Letters cut to shape, size and depth specified inaccordance with specifications for lettering.

5 Applying guilding to stone 5.1 Painted surface cleaned off by use of cuttlefish andwater or other approved method to specifications.

5.2 Base for guilding prepared by mixing 1 part of goldsizewith 3 parts of artist colour to specifications.

5.3 Paint carefully applied to lettering with appropriate sizebrush in accordance with specifications and two coatapplications.

5.4 Guilding material handled carefully and cut to requiredsize and shape as specified.

5.5 Application of guilding determined by checking paint stillsticky in accordance with specificiations.

5.6 Guilding material applied to surface by use of fine bristlebrush and excess material trimmed and removed atedges to specifications.

5.7 Appropriate cleaning procedure and materials selectedand applied to stone surface.


6.2 Re-usable and recyclable materials salvaged andstored.


6.4 Personal protective equipment removed, inspected,cleaned and stored.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the guilding of letters and designed insignias or monograms.


• marble• granite• sandstone• basalt (bluestone)• igneous rock






• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• hazardous materials




• measuring tape/rule• hammers• mallets• squares• drawing equipment• lettering chisels• pneumatic lettering chisels• fillet and moulding chisels• scriber• straight edge• paint brushes• guilding brushes• sanders• chisels

Suitable position for cutting of letters may be:

• inclined surface• level surface

Templates or stencils may be made from:

• paper• zinc plate• alumimium plate• cardboard

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency should be demonstrated by carrying out guilding to lettering or shapes carved in stone.




Apply guilding to stone BCG3083A


• select and use appropriate tools, equipment and processes consistent with requirements ofactivity

• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of applying guilding• prepare stone surface to specifications prior to setting out processes• reproduce accurate designs and lettering to finished sizes• check spelling and balance of lettering prior to cutting of letters• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to cut letters and designs accurately• apply correct procedures to mixing of paint and application without overmarking or spillage• give attention to handling and application of gold leaf for guilding• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• complete guilding and finish of stone to specifications


• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1004A Carry out measurements and calculations• BCG3070A Dress stone manually



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• drawings and specifications• types of stone and their characteristics• dressing of stone• guilding techniques• materials• effect of various metals on the human body and organs• traditional and contemporary font styles• measurement and balancing of lettering• tools and equipment• hazardous materials


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• set out work including drafting• dress stone• use tools and equipment• apply guilding• communicate effectively



• workplace location• tools and equipment appropriate to setting out and application processes• stone and appropriate materials required for activity• drawings and specifications relevant to proposed activity







Competency should be demonstrated in guilding as required in the workplace.



KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 2 1 2

BCG3084A Install framed ceiling (sheet and boards)


BCG3084A: Install framed ceiling (sheet and boards)


1 Prepare for installation 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’sconstruction operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andinstalling a framed ceiling recognised and adhered to.

1.3 Materials and quantities checked for conformity againstdrawings and specifications.



1.6 Unwanted material and obstructions removed to makework area safe.

1.7 Existing works protected by covering or laying sheetsagainst, where applicable.

2 Erect scaffolding 2.1 Appropriate rigid frame/mobile scaffolding or trestleserected and planked to OH&S regulations.

2.2 Ceiling heights established to specifications.

3 Set out 3.1 Ceiling grid set out as shown on drawings and inaccordance with manufacturer's specifications or jobspecifications.

3.2 Alignment levels for ceiling set out on walls todimensions from drawings and specifications.

4 Install supporting framework 4.1 Method of joining framework identified and provision forjoints carried out prior to commencement ofinstallation.

4.2 Framework members against wall fixed to line byappropriate fixing to wall.

4.3 Timber/steel ceiling framework members measuredand cut/prepared to length for assembling and fixing.

4.4 Timber/steel framework assembled and fixed into placeto designed straight line or curve within +/- 2mm overany 3 metre length.

4.5 Bridging framework fixed to both sides of service ducts.

Install framed ceiling (sheet and boards) BCG3084A


4.6 Battens/furring channels or rows of trimmers fitted andfixed to line, where specified, to provide fixing forsheets or boards.

5 Fix sheets 5.1 Designed layout of sheets and requirements for cuttingand joining identified from materials and specifications.

5.2 Sheets measured, marked and cut where applicablefor joints to occur on centre of framework members.

5.3 Sheets fixed to abutting joints by nails or screws torecommended centres with adhesive applied inaccordance with manufacturer's instructions.

5.4 Sheets fixed to specifications and to design pattern asshown on drawings.

5.5 Sheets cut/dressed to abut neatly against otherelements, where required. Longitudinal butt jointsbackblocked between framing members, whereapplicable.

5.6 Joints flush finished where required with approvedtaping or filling material and jointing compounds toprovide finished surface to specification.

5.7 Panelled ceilings finished with cover straps or beamsfitted and fixed to specifications.

5.8 Openings provided for lighting, diffuser, hatches,sprinkler heads and the like as shown on drawings andin specifications.

5.9 Fibreglass insulation blanket or batts installed tospecified thickness above ceiling sheets, whereapplicable.

6 Fix boards to ceiling framework 6.1 Designed layout for lining boards and requirements forcutting and end joining identified from specifications.

6.2 Lining boards installed to line with closed longitudinaland butt joints and fixed to framework to specifications.

7 Clean up 7.1 Scaffolding removed and area cleaned.






RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the installation of framed ceilings to existing rooms or buildings by fixing of framework toface of walls.

Framework for ceiling may be fixed to:

• timber framed wall• steel framed wall• brickwork• blockwork• reinforced concrete

Material applications are to be in accordance with:

• plasterboard to AS2589.1 Gypsum Plasterboard• plywood and blockboard to AS2270 Plywood and Blockboard for Internal Use• plasterglass to AS2590 Glass Fibre Reinforced Gypsum Plasterboard• fibre cement to manufacturer's instructions• strawboard to manufacturer's instructions• adhesive to AS2753 Adhesives - Mastic - for bonding gypsum plaster linings to wood and metal framing

members• lining boards to manufacturer’s instructions








• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level• levelling equipment• squares• chisels

Install framed ceiling (sheet and boards) BCG3084A


• hand saws• saw stools• power saws• power drills including impact drills• power planer• nail gun• air compressor and hoses• power leads• string lines• chalk lines• scaffolding

Fixing to walls may involve:

• nails• screws• self tapping screws• masonry nails• masonry anchors• coach screws• nail gun• explosive power tools

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by the performance of installing a framed ceiling to a nominated roomarea and fixing out using a sheeted material of those listed in the range of variables statement.




• indicate compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within context ofinstalling a framed ceiling to a room area

• identify location and details of framed ceiling to be installed• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• accurately set out levels for ceiling structure• use safe and effective procedures to construct ceiling and fix and finish ceiling lining• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work procedures• complete installation of framed ceiling to specifications



• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry)• BCG2004A Carry out levelling






• working drawings and specifications• framed ceiling construction• Australian Standards 2270, 2589.1, 2590 and 2753• materials and their characteristics• wall construction• tools and equipment• scaffolding• measuring and levelling• Calculation of material requirements


• work safely• read and interpret drawings• organise work• set out work• use tools and equipment• construct framework• communicate effectively



• workplace location appropriate to activity• scaffolding• tools and equipment appropriate to construction and installation processes• materials required to carry out activity• drawings and specifications relevant to activity









KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 3 2 1 1 1



BCG3085A: Install plasterboard, plasterglass, fibre cement/cornice to wall/ceiling


1 Select and prepare materials andequipment


1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andinstalling plasterboard/plasterglass and fibre cementsheeting recognised and adhered to.

1.3 Delivered materials checked against drawings andspecifications for quantity and description.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected consistent withrequirements of installing plasterboard, plasterglass, fibrecement, cornice to wall, ceiling and checked forserviceability.

1.6 Safety hazards identified and correct procedures used toeliminate hazards to self and others according to OH&Slegislation and company policy.

2 Erect/prepare wall and ceilingframing

2.1 “A” fixing clips fixed to locations and spacings specified bymanufacturer.

2.2 Furring channels installed to manufacturer’s specificationswith ends connected to channel joints.

2.3 Timber/metal ceiling battens and trimmers, if applicable,installed to sheet to manufacturer’s specifications.

2.4 Ceiling framing checked and straightened.

2.5 Steel floor and ceiling wall track fixed in position andalignment to manufacturer’s specifications.

2.6 Steel studs located and aligned to manufacturer’sspecifications.

2.7 Timber wall framing checked for straightness to +/- 2mmover 3 metres and plumb +/- 2mm over 2.4 metres andremedied where necessary.

3 Fix plasterboard, plasterglass,fibre cement to walls

3.1 In-wall services located and position marked on floor.

3.2 Corner angles/beads installed to manufacturer’sspecification.

Install plasterboard, plasterglass, fibre cement/cornice to wall/ceiling BCG3085A


3.3 Wall and ceiling sheets cut to fit specified locations withclearance to manufacturer’s specifications.

3.4 Fire rated walls and ceilings installed to requirements ofBuilding Code of Australia and AS1530 Methods for FireTests on Building Materials, Components and Structures.

3.5 Wall and ceiling sheets fixed to specified locations withmechanical fastenings (nails and screws) or combinedadhesive/fasteners to manufacturer’s specifications andAS2589 Gypsum Linings in Residential and LightCommercial, Construction – Application and Finishing.

3.6 Clearances allowed for back blocking and at floor/walljunctions.

3.7 All work carried out to manufacturer’s specifications andrelevant Australian Standards.

4 Finish joints 4.1 Backblocks applied and joints cleaned.

4.2 Base coat/cement applied and tape bedded tomanufacturer’s specifications.

4.3 Surface of joint compounded smooth, flat, free fromscratches and blemishes, edges feathered and jointsanded to smooth finish.

5 Install waterproof construction towet areas

5.1 All sheet installation work to be carried out in accordancewith AS3740-1994. Waterproofing of wet areas withinresidential buildings.

5.2 Corner angles/beads and apron flashings installed tofitment surrounds to job specifications and AS3740.

5.3 Wall sheets of fibre cement/water resistant plasterboard,cut and fitted to locations to job specifications.

5.4 Sheets fixed to specified locations to specifications forfixing and AS3740.

5.5 Fixing locations and joints between sheetsstopped/caulked using appropriate compatible sealant andfinished in accordance with job specifications.

5.6 Junction between wall sheets and floor material caulkedusing appropriate flexible sealant in accordance with jobspecifications and AS3740.

6 Fix cornice to internal and externalwall angles

6.1 Cornices accurately cut to length and mitres cut to form aneat fit.

6.2 Adhesive applied to secure cornice, excess removed andall mitres stopped to an even finish.

6.3 Joints checked for movement.







RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the fixing and finishing of plasterboard, plasterglass and fibre cement sheeting andcornice to steel and timber framed walls and ceilings.

Relevant Australian Standards/Codes include:

• AS1530 Methods for Fire Tests on Building Materials, Components and Structures• AS2589 The Application and Finishing of Gypsum Plasterboard in Framed Dwelling Construction• AS2591 The Erection and Fixing of Glass Fibre Reinforced Gypsum Plaster Products• AS3740 Waterproofing of Wet Areas Within Residential Buildings.







Materials include:

• plasterboard• plasterglass sheets• fibre cement sheets• water resistant plasterboard• plasterboard cornice• plaster moulded cornice• corner beads• casing beads• apron flashing• adhesives



• perforated paper tape• base and finishing material• caulking• sealants

Material applications are to be in accordance with:

• plasterboard to AS2589• plasterglass to AS2591• fibre cement to manufacturer's instructions• wet areas to AS3740

Fixing applications include:

• timber framing• timber or steel battens• steel framing• steel furring channels• battened masonry surfaces

Fixing methods for sheets may involve:

• screws• clouts• nails• threaded nails• adhesive

Fixing methods for framing may involve:

• power (explosive) driven fasteners• expansive anchors• easy drive masonry anchors• expanding fasteners• toggle bolts


• measuring tape/rule• hatchet type hammer• broad knives• plasterer's trowels• taping knives• internal angle taping tool• internal angle finishing tool• sanding float• electric screw gun• t-square• mixer (jointing cement)• key hole saw• mitre box• hand saw• trestles• scaffold planks• paint brushes



Wet area fitments include:

• baths• shower bases• vanity units• sinks• troughs


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by installing at least two separate types of materials from those listed inthe range of variables statement, along with cornicing to nominated projects involving wall and ceiling fixing.




• display compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within context ofinstalling plasterboard, plasterglass or fibre cement to walls and ceilings

• identify location and details of materials to be installed• demonstrate accurate measuring and setting out techniques• select and safely use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• use safe and effective procedures to fix and finish materials to design specifications• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work procedures• complete installation of plasterboard, plasterglass and fibre-cement walls and ceilings to

specification• complete wet area lining installation to AS3740



• BCG1014A Prepare for construction process (dry-wall plastering)• BCG2000A Assemble simple partition frames



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• drawings and specifications• materials and characteristics• methods and installations• materials/schedules• Australian Standards 1530, 2589, 2591, 3740• tools and equipment• wall and ceiling framing• adhesives and fixings




• work safely• select and handle material safely• interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• use tools and equipment• measure relative to the process• communicate effectively• erect restricted height scaffolding



• suitable wall and ceiling framed structure• workplace location• tools and equipment appropriate for installation of pasterboard, plasterglass and fibre-cement

walls and ceilings• materials appropriate to proposed activities• drawings and specifications relevant to activity







Competency should be assessed in the normal or simulated workplace setting.

Assessment should be conducted while tasks are undertaken either individually or while working witha partner.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 3 1 1 1 1



BCG3086A: Install pre-cast decorative mouldings



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andinstalling decorative pre-cast fibrous plaster recognisedand adhered to.

1.3 Delivered materials selected and checked againstdrawings and specifications for quality and description.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected consistent withrequirements of installing pre-cast decorativemouldings, checked for serviceability and any faultsreported to supervisor.

1.6 Safety hazards identified and correct procedures usedto eliminate hazards to self and others according toOH&S legislation and company policy.

2 Fix and stop plasterboard and/orplasterglass archway

2.1 Plasterboards/glass wall sheets fitted and fixed toposition.

2.2 Archway profile located, set out and cut to architect'sdrawings and specifications.

2.3 Timber arch soffit templates cut and fixed to position.

2.4 Plasterboard strip cut and fixed to arch soffit andreveals of opening.

2.5 Arch beads cut and fixed to arch soffit.

2.6 External corner beads cut and fixed to vertical reveals.

2.7 Archiving jointed to specified finish.

3 Fix and stop plaster panelledceiling

3.1 Scaffolding erected, where required, to OH&Srequirements.

3.2 Ceiling battens for cornice margins and flush mountedpanels correctly positioned and spaced, straight andlevel to requirements of job drawings.

3.3 Panels centrally located on ceiling, flush joints levelledand panel placed members in line, nailed andscrimmed in position to architect’s specifications.

Install pre-cast decorative mouldings BCG3086A


3.4 Suspension rods, clips and top/bottom rails forsuspended panels assembled and fixed in position tomanufacturer’s specifications.

3.5 Furring channels spaced and fixed according todimensions of panels.

3.6 Ceiling panels located and screwed to suspensionframe.

3.7 Jointing applied and finished smooth and level to flushjoints.

4 Fix ornamental cornice 4.1 Cornice fixed by clouting or bonding with adhesive,straight and level to architect’s specifications.

4.2 Cornice fixed with accurate butt joints and mitredcorners with ornamentation matched and in alignment.





RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the installation of all decorative and ornate plaster features.

Decorative applications include:

• cornices• panels• roses• arches

All work undertaken in accordance with AS2591-1983 The Erection and Fixing of Glass Fibro ReinforcedGypsum Plaster Products.

Installation processes will vary in accordance with the following aspects of a decorative feature:

• shape and size• volume/weight of sections• fixed whole or in segments

Protruding or recessed features require ceiling structural support.








• safety goggles/glasses• boots• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators• cap


• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level• squares• nail bag• hand saws• key hole saw• mitre box• broad knives• plasterer's trowel• curved trowels• taping knives• internal angle finishing tool• sanding float• t-square• jointing cement mixer• power drills• electric screw gun• power leads• explosive power gun and fasteners• trestles• scaffolding• planks

Materials include:

• plasterboard• plasterglass• glass fibro reinforced moulding panels• corner beads• adhesives• perforated plastic tape• jointing material• scrim

Fixing methods may include:

• screws• clouts• nails

Install pre-cast decorative mouldings BCG3086A


• threaded nails• adhesive

Fixing applications may include:

• timber and steel framing• concrete walls and ceilings• masonry walls


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by installing decorative plaster to at least one of each of the applicationelements within the competency standard.




• display compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within context ofinstalling decorative fibrous plaster to archways, ceilings and cornices

• identify location and details of each proposed decorative plastering installation• select and safely use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• demonstrate accurate measuring and setting out techniques• use safe and effective procedures to construct framework for fixing of plaster• use safe and effective procedures to install and finish plaster to designed specification• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective installation operations• complete installation of plasterboard arch to specification• complete installation of panelled ceiling and ornamental cornice to specification



• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG1014A Prepare for construction process (dry-wall plastering)• BCG3085A Install plasterboard, plasterglass, fibro cement/cornice to wall/ceiling



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• dry wall plastering• types of decorative mouldings• methods of installing decorative mouldings• structural support to decorative mouldings• working drawings and specifications• materials/schedules• Australian Standard 2591• tools and equipment• scaffolding• adhesives and fixings




• work safely• select and handle material safely• read and interpret drawings• organise work• measure relative to the process• use tools and equipment• fix plaster• communicate effectively• erect restricted height scaffolding



• workplace location• scaffolding• tools and equipment appropriate to installation of pre-cast decorative mouldings• materials appropriate to proposed installation• drawings and specifications relevant to proposed installation








Assessment should be conducted while tasks are undertaken either individually or as part of a teamoperation.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 3 2 3 2 1 1

BCG3087A Carry out firerated wall and ceiling construction


BCG3087A: Carry out firerated wall and ceilingconstruction



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andframing construction and lining processes recognisedand adhered to.

1.3 Type of fire resistant construction and materialrequirements determined from job drawings andspecifications.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected consistent withrequirements of construction of firerated walls andceilings and checked for serviceability.

1.6 Materials checked for conformity to quantities andspecifications.

1.7 All construction and materials to comply with theBuilding Code of Australia and AS1530 Methods forFire Tests on Buildings and Structures, Materials andComponents.

1.8 Location and composition of wall structure identifiedfrom job drawings and specifications.

2 Construct steel stud wall system -non-loading bearing

2.1 Steel structural frame constructed, erected andfastened into place and sheeted in accordance withsheet manufacturer's design specifications.

2.2 Fire resistant plaster board sheets fixed vertically tometal studs using steel screws to manufacturer'sspecification.

2.3 Double thickness sheets, where required, fitted andfixed with vertical joints staggered to joints ofunderneath sheets.

3 Construct steel stud walls with firedoors

3.1 Structural frame constructed with boxed doors studserected and fastened into place and sheeted inaccordance with sheet manufacturer's designspecifications.

3.2 Fire door assembly fitted and fixed to designed locationin wall to specification.

Carry out firerated wall and ceiling construction BCG3087A


3.3 Fire resistant plasterboard sheets fixed vertically tometal studs using steel screws to manufacturer'sspecification.

3.4 Double thickness sheets, where required, fitted andfixed with vertical joints staggered to those ofunderneath sheets.

4 Construct staggered steel wallsystem

4.1 Steel structural frame constructed with staggeredstuds, erected and fastened into place and sheeted inaccordance with sheet manufacturer’s designspecifications.

4.2 Fire resistant plaster board sheets fixed vertically tometal studs using specified screws to manufacturer'sspecification.


5 Construct steel studded chasewalls

5.1 Steel structural frames constructed, erected andfastened in place with space between for serviceducting and sheeted in accordance with sheetmanufacturer's design specification.

5.2 Fire resistant plasterboard sheets fixed vertically tometal studs using specified screws to manufacturer'sspecification.


6 Construct shaftwall systems - nonload bearing

6.1 Shaftwall structure constructed of steel framingcomponents and two types of plasterboard sheets tojob and manufacturer's specifications.

6.2 Shaftwall erected and fixed in location to job drawingsand sheets to manufacturer's specification.

6.3 Fire door assembly fitted and fixed to designed locationin shaftwall to specification.

6.4 Fire resistant access panels and dampers with accesspanels built into locations in shaftwall to specification.

6.5 Lift landing doors and frames built in to locations inshaftwall to specification.

7 Construct masonry wall systems 7.1 Masonry wall constructed at location using specifiedbricks/blocks laid to specification.



7.2 Plasterboard sheeting fixed vertically direct to masonryface by specified adhesive or by screwing to metalfurring channel affixed to masonry to job specification.

7.3 Upgrading of existing fire resistant level carried out byfixing sheeting to existing masonry wall to job andmanufacturer's specifications.

8 Construct timber stud wall system- non-load bearing

8.1 Structural timber frame constructed, erected and fixedinto place and sheeted horizontally in accordance withsheet manufacturer's design specifications.

9 Construct timber stud wall systemload bearing

9.1 Structural timber frame constructed, erected into placeand fixed to job specifications.

9.2 Fire resistant plasterboard sheets fixed vertically to wallframe to manufacturer’s specification in accordancewith specified fire resistant level.

9.3 Double stud walls constructed for separating wallerected with specified space between.

9.4 Firestops, where applicable, installed usingcompressed rockwool, timber or fire resistantplasterboard to specified minimum thickness tomanufacturer’s specification.

9.5 Rockwool batts fitted to one inner face of separatingwall structure to provide acoustic requirement, wherespecified.

10 Construct ceiling system 10.1 Design of timber or metal ceiling constructiondetermined from job drawings and specifications.

10.2 Fire resistant plasterboard sheets fixed to ceilingjoists/bottom chord/upper floor joists in accordancewith manufacturer's specifications.

10.3 Metal furring channels, where specified, fixed tounderneath floor joists or ceiling joists to line and level.

10.4 Plasterboard sheets fixed to furring channels usingscrews to manufacturer’s specifications.

11 Construct suspended ceilingsystem

11.1 Suspension/framework system installed to line andlevel in accordance with job drawings andspecifications.

11.2 Plasterboard sheets fixed to furring channels usingscrews to manufacturer’s specifications.

12 Finish joints and junctions 12.1 Fireseal rockwool compressed to form continuousfireblock between separating wall structure and roofcovering.



12.2 Service penetrations made to architect’s specificationsto maintain integrity of design.

12.3 Fireseal strip fixed full length to gap between stud walland cladding.

12.4 Vermiculite plaster applied to stop gaps betweenceiling sheets and wall sheets.

12.5 Vermiculite plaster filled and fitted to ceiling and walljunctions to close gap behind cornice moulding.

12.6 Screw and nail holes stopped using specified materialto flush finish.

12.7 Plaster joints stopped using perforated paper tape andbase coat applied to manufacturer’s specifications.

12.8 Joints finished with finishing coat applied tomanufacturer's specification.


13.2 Waste and unwanted material disposed of into jobwaste bins or rubbish stockpile.



RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the fixing of plasterboard to timber and steel wall and ceiling framing to form a fireresistant construction.

The unit covers fire resistant levels of construction through the range of 30/30/30 to 240/240/240.

All work undertaken in accordance with:

• AS1530 Methods on Fire Tests on Building Materials, Components and Structures.• Building Code of Australia







• working platforms and scaffolding


• safety goggles/glasses• boots• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators• cap


• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level• squares• nail bag• hand saws• key hole saw• mitre box• broad knives• plasterer's trowel• curved trowels• taping knives• internal angle taping tool• internal angle finishing tool• sanding float• t-square• jointing cement mixer• power saws• power drills• electric screw gun• power leads• explosive power gun and fasteners• trestles• scaffolding• planks

Materials include:

• steel wall framing• timber wall framing• steel suspended ceiling systems• fire resistant plasterboard sheets• fire resistant doors and jamb• plasterboard adhesive• jointing compound• perforated paper jointing tape• fire seal• vermiculite stopping plaster


• screws• clouts• nails• threaded nails• adhesive



• explosive powered fastenings• expansion anchors• toggle bolts


• timber steel framing• concrete walls and ceilings• masonry walls

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by carrying out at least six of the firerated construction elements referredto in the competency standard.




• display compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within context ofconstructing firerated walls and ceilings

• identify location and details of materials and firerated construction• demonstrate accurate measuring and setting out techniques• select and safely use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• use safe and effective procedures to construct framework and fix lining materials• employ appropriate attention and application to finishing joints and junctions• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work operations• complete installation of safe firerating application to specifications



• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG1014A Prepare for construction process (dry-wall plastering)• BCG3085A Install plasterboard, plasterglass, fibro cement/cornice to wall/ceiling• BCG3084A Install framed ceiling (sheets and boards)



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawings and specifications• Building Code of Australia and relevant Australian Standard including AS1530• materials/schedules• tools and equipment• scaffolding• plastering• calculating material requirements• fixing and fasteners




• work safely• select and handle materials safely• read and interpret drawings• organise work• measure relative to process• interpret documentation from a wide range of sources• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively• calculate material quantities• erect restricted height scaffolding



• workplace location• scaffolding• tools and equipment appropriate for installation of fire resistant walls and ceilings• materials appropriate to construction processes• drawings and specifications relevant to tasks









KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 3 1 1 1 1

BCG3088A Install suspended ceiling (tiles, panels and strips)


BCG3088A: Install suspended ceiling (tiles, panels andstrips)


1 Prepare for installation 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’sconstruction operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andinstalling suspended ceilings recognised and adheredto.

1.3 Delivered materials checked against drawings andspecifications for quantity and description.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected consistent withrequirements of installing suspended ceilings, checkedfor serviceability and any faults reported to supervisor.

1.6 Debris and obstructions removed to make work areasafe.

1.7 Existing works protected.

2 Erect scaffolding 2.1 Appropriate rigid frame/mobile scaffolding or trestleserected and planked to OH&S regulations.

3 Set out 3.1 Ceiling grid set out as shown on job drawings and inaccordance with manufacturer's specifications.

3.2 Alignment levels for ceiling set out as shown on jobdrawings.

4 Install suspension system 4.1 Suspension rods fixed to underside of soffit/structuralmembers with masonry anchors/bolts/screws atprescribed centres to manufacturers' instructions.

4.2 Suspended framework assembled and connected tosuspension rods in accordance with specifications andmanufacturer's instructions.

4.3 Suspension system checked and fastened forlooseness and rattles.

4.4 Bridging framework fixed to both sides of service ductsto support suspension system.

5 Install tiles 5.1 Tiles installed according to design pattern as set out onjob drawings and to specifications.

Install suspended ceiling (tiles, panels and strips) BCG3088A


5.2 Cut tile edges concealed or finished to match pre-finished edges.

5.3 Openings/penetrations provided for lighting, diffuser,hatches, sprinkler heads and the like as shown on thejob drawings.

5.4 Trims and beads fixed at junctions with other buildingelements and surfaces as shown on job drawings.

6 Clean up 6.1 Scaffolding removed and area cleaned up.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to all patented suspended ceiling systems consisting of lightweight metal sections.

Members of suspended systems include:

• anchors/bolts• droppers/suspension rods• main beams/rails/runners• cross beams/rails/runners• furring channels• spacer bars

Ceiling tiles and panels to comply with AS2785-1985 Suspended Ceilings – Design and Installation.

Sheeting fixed to suspended systems as per manufacturer's recommendation.








• boots• safety glasses/goggles• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators• cap


• measuring tape/rule• hammer• spirit level• squares• spanners• nail bag• power saws• power drills• electric screw gun• explosive powered gun• nail gun• pop riveter• air compressor and hoses• power leads• trestles• system scaffolding• planks

Materials include:

• suspended ceiling components• plasterboard• infill panels/various surfaces


• screws• threaded nails• threaded rods/nuts• system brackets/clips


• timber/steel floor/ceiling/rod framing• reinforced concrete ceiling/floor slabs


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by installing nominated suspended ceiling in accordance with thestandard and the range of variables statement.




Install suspended ceiling (tiles, panels and strips) BCG3088A


• display compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within context ofinstalling a suspended ceiling

• identify location and details of structure components and materials for suspended ceiling• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• demonstrate accurate measuring and setting out techniques• use safe and effective procedures to fix and install suspension framework• use safe and effective procedures to fit and finish ceiling to design• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective installation operations• complete installation of suspended ceiling framework and lining



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG2006A Carry out levelling



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawings and specifications• suspended ceilings• materials/schedules• tools and equipment• measuring and marking• levelling• scaffolding• calculation of material requirements


• work safely• select and handle material safely• read and interpret drawings• organise work• measure relative to process• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively• calculate material quantities• erect restricted height scaffolding



• workplace location• scaffolding appropriate to activity• tools and equipment appropriate for to installation processes• materials appropriate to proposed activity• drawings and specifications relative to activity











KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 3 2 2 1 1



BCG3089A: Install cast plaster blockwork



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andinstalling cast plaster blockwork recognised andadhered to.



1.5 Tools and equipment selected consistent withrequirements of installing cast plaster blockwork,checked for serviceability and any faults reported tosupervisor.

1.6 Materials checked for conformity to quantityrequirements and specifications.

2 Set out and prepare base 2.1 Location of blockwork set out to position in accordancewith job drawings.

2.2 Base location prepared so that surface is dry,horizontal, clean and flat to specifications.

3 Lay plaster blockwork 3.1 Plaster adhesive prepared in accordance with practicalquantity requirements and block manufacturer'srecommendations.

3.2 Adhesive applied and plaster blocks laid to set out line,level and plumb in accordance with job drawings andspecifications.

3.3 Vertical abutments with other walls adhered/joined towalls plumb and alignment to specification.

3.4 Blockwork laid and completed with surplus adhesivefrom joints removed to specification requirements.

3.5 Scaffolding erected, where required, in accordancewith job requirements and OH&S regulations.




Install cast plaster blockwork BCG3089A


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit covers the installation of all pre-cast gypsum plaster blockwork which may be single or multi-thickness wall construction.






• boots• safety glasses/goggles• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators• gloves• hard hat• cap


• measuring tape/rule• hammer• spirit level• levelling equipment• trowels• caulking gun• shovels• mortar boards• builder's lines• line pins• brick saw• scaffolding• planks• concrete mixer• power leads


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by laying cast plaster blocks to construct a straight and plumb wall withcorners.





• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable toworkplace and plaster blockwork operations

• select and safely use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of installing cast plaster

blockwork• check installation area for size, plumb, level obstructions, location and safety hazards• prepare surfaces for application of jointing materials in accordance with manufacturer's

specifications• check bond/pattern of blockwork consistent with drawings and specifications• identify faults and problems and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work procedures• complete installation of cast plaster blockwork to specification



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/blockwork)• BCG2001A Prepare surfaces• BCG2004A Carry out levelling



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawings and specifications• Building Code of Australia and relevant Australian Standards• construction requirements of plaster blockwork fire rated structures• materials/schedules• tools and equipment• scaffolding


• work safely• select and safely handle materials• interpret drawings and specifications• measure and set out relative to process• organise work• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively• erect restricted height scaffolding



• workplace location• scaffolding

Install cast plaster blockwork BCG3089A


• tools and equipment suitable for installation of cast plaster blockwork• appropriate materials to carry out proposed activity• drawings and specifications relevant to activity






Assessment shall be conducted while tasks are undertaken either individually or as part of a teamunder limited supervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 1 2 1 2 2 2

BCG3090A Install acoustic and thermal insulation


BCG3090A: Install acoustic and thermal insulation


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’sconstruction requirements recognised and adhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andinstalling insulation recognised and adhered to.

1.3 Type of insulation and quantities required identifiedfrom job drawings and specifications.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected consistent withrequirements of installing acoustic and thermalinsulation, checked for serviceability and any faultsreported to supervisor.

1.6 Safety hazards identified and correct procedures usedto minimise risk to self and others according to OH&Slegislation and company policy.

2 Install blanket insulation toroofs/walls

2.1 Safety wire mesh, where specified, installed to roofframe members to job specifications.

2.2 Insulating blanket installed in full length runs wherepracticable or, if joined, joints made at centre of framemember, to specifications.

2.3 Adjacent runs of blanket insulation abutted with closedjoints.

3 Install batt-insulation 3.1 Insulation batts installed firmly between framingmember and against lining material in accordance withmanufacturer’s specifications.

3.2 Batts abutted with closed joints and end of runcompleted with batt cut to size and fitted.

4 Install loose-fill insulation 4.1 Loose-fill insulation blown or emptied into spacebetween structural frame members to depth inaccordance with job specifications.

4.2 Area of insulation completed minimising spillage intowall cavities.

5 Install rigid insulation 5.1 Rigid insulation sheets installed to external face ofstructural framework or between framework membersas specified by job requirements.

Install acoustic and thermal insulation BCG3090A


5.2 Sheets for face fixed and abutted with closed joints oncentre of structural member or taped and fixed tomanufacturer's specifications.

5.3 Rigid insulation installed between structural membersand cut and fitted neatly with abutted joints closed andfinished to job specifications.

6 Install polystyrene sheets to roofsheeting

6.1 Appropriate adhesive selected and used in accordancewith manufacturer's specifications.

6.2 Adhesive applied and polystyrene sheets/boards fixedto soffit of metal sheeting with joints close butted to jobspecifications.

6.3 Sheet/boards cut where required and fitted with closedjoints against purlins/battens.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the installation of insulating materials to buildings including:

• industrial buildings• commercial type buildings• domestic buildings• fixed partitions• demountable partitions








• boots• safety glasses/goggles• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators• gloves• cap• overalls


• measuring tape/rule• hammer• trimming knife• pneumatic staple gun and staples• air compressor and hoses• ladders• planks

Fixing application may include:

• between steel and timber floor• wall• ceiling and roof framing• metal roof decking

Materials may include:

• steel safety mesh• insulation blankets• insulation batts• loose fill insulation• rigid sheet insulation• polystyrene sheets• staples• adhesive• jointing tape


Handling and installation processes to be carried out in accordance with manufacturer's recommendationsand OH&S requirements.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by installing insulation to nominated projects in each of the typeapplications as shown in the elements of the standard.




• display compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within context ofinstalling acoustic and thermal insulation

Install acoustic and thermal insulation BCG3090A


• identify location and details of insulation to be installed• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• use safe and effective procedures to install insulation to locations• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work procedures• complete installation of acoustic and thermal insulation as described in competence statement

above



• BCG1011A Handle construction materials and safe disposal waste



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• structure of building• insulation of building• drawings and specifications• materials/schedule• handling of materials• tools and equipment• scaffolding• calculation of material requirements


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• select and handle material safely• organise work• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively



• workplace location• tools and equipment appropriate for installing acoustic and thermal insulation• materials appropriate to proposed tasks• drawings and specifications relevant to tasks










Assessment should be conducted while tasks are undertaken under minimal supervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 1 1 1

BCG3091A Apply float and set coats for hard plaster – flat surfaces


BCG3091A: Apply float and set coats for hard plaster –flat surfaces



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andpreparing for and rendering surfaces recognised andadhered to.

1.3 Delivered materials selected and checked againstspecifications/instructions for quantity and description.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected consistent withrequirements of applying float and setting coats forhard plaster to flat surfaces, checked for serviceabilityand any faults reported to supervisor.

1.6 Safety hazards identified and correct procedures usedto eliminate hazards and reduce risk to self and othersaccording to OH&S legislation and company policy.

2 Prepare background ofconcrete, concrete block orbrickwork surface

2.1 Background surface identified and wire-brushed ifrequired.

2.2 Dash coat mixed and applied liberally to wettedsurface.

3 Apply floating (using sand andcement) to flat surfaces

3.1 Applied coat dotted and lined (screeded) to plumb orlevel tolerance of +/- 2mm over 2.4 metres.

3.2 Type of render used and applied to architect’sspecifications and Australian Standard CA27.

3.3 Floating coat applied and ruled off to screed.

3.4 Surface finished plumb/level and/or to alignmenttolerance of +/- 2mm over 3metres.

3.5 Heads, reveals and sills finished square off wall faceand back into opening.

3.6 All internal angles, ceiling and floor lines accurately cut.

4 Apply floating coat to piers 4.1 Floating coat applied using floating rules/profiles, dutchpins or hooks so that face of pier is plumb and ruledoff.

Apply float and set coats for hard plaster – flat surfaces BCG3091A


4.2 Face squared off to form returns, rules removed and aplough form bullnose applied to external angles.

5 Apply floating coat within metalbeading

5.1 Metal beading fixed to base surface to form a panelwith expansion joint so that panel is plumb and squarein specified position.

5.2 Panels finished with plaster and lime to a smooth, flat,fine finish.

6 Apply setting coat to flatsurfaces

6.1 Background surface prepared and cleaned free ofresidue then wetted down thoroughly.

6.2 Thin scratch coat applied, using 60% plaster and 40%lime to architect’s specifications.

6.3 Second coat applied, 2-3mm thick and worked untilfirm.

6.4 Fine finish coat applied and steel trowelled to smootheven finish to architect’s specifications.





RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit involves the application of floating and set coats to provide solid plaster finishes to flat surfaceswhich include, walls, reveals, sills, piers and columns.

Render mix to be in accordance with ASCA27 – Internal Plastering On Solid Background








• boots• safety glasses/goggles• dust masks/respirators• gloves• cap


• measuring tape/rule• spirit level• squares• trowels• floats• brushes• screed boards• scaffolding• straight edge• grinder• concrete mixer• mortar boards and stands• shovels• wheelbarrows• hawks• joint rules• small tools• plumb bob• mason’s square• buckets• sieve• power leads

Application may be to horizontal or vertical surfaces:

Background surfaces for application include:

• concrete• concrete blockwork• brickwork• stonework• timber or metal lathing

Cleaning of surfaces may involve:

• wire brushing• grinding• blast cleaning• chipping• washing down

Dash coat may be applied using:

• trowel• brush• nozzle spray

Apply float and set coats for hard plaster – flat surfaces BCG3091A



EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the performance of applying both floating and setting coats to providea finished surface to either one of the backgrounds listed in the range of variables statement.


It is essential that competence be demonstrated in the following aspects.

• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable toworkplace and solid plastering operations

• display selection and safe use of appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of floating and setting solid

plaster-flat surfaces• locate surfaces and inspect for bonding requirements prior to application of splash coat• determine surface finish from specification or site inspection• check render mix conforms to specification and Australian Standard CA27 – Internal Plastering

on Solid Backgrounds• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work procedures• check surface is finished plumb/level to tolerance of +2mm over 2.4metres• finish reveals and returns square to wall surface• apply setting coat to achieve texture or finish specified• mix render coat and apply in accordance with Australian Standards CA27 and architect’s

specifications• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG1013A Prepare for construction process (solid plastering)• BCG2001A Prepare surfaces• BCG2004A Carry out levelling



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• drawings and specifications• mix composition• render and setting coats• additives including plasticisers, colour and waterproofing agents• Building Code of Australia and Australian Standard CA27• materials• tools and equipment• calculation of material quantities




• work safely• select and handle material safely• organise work• interpret drawings and specifications• interpret documentation from a wide range of sources• set out work• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively



• workplace location• tools, plant and equipment suitable for applying float and set coats to flat surface• scaffolding• appropriate materials



Competency should be assessed through direct observation of the application process and questionsrelated to underpinning knowledge.




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 1 2 2 2



BCG3092A: Apply solid render



1.2 OH&S requirements for the workplace environmentand preparing for and applying solid render recognisedand adhered to.

1.3 Area to receive solid render determined from jobdrawings.

1.4 Correct mix for solid render determined from jobspecifications.

1.5 Materials and required quantities calculated from jobdrawings and specifications.


1.7 Tools and equipment selected consistent withrequirements for applying solid render to flat surfaces,checked for serviceability and any faults reported tosupervisor.

2 Prepare surface area 2.1 Scaffolding erected in accordance with jobrequirements and OH&S regulations.

2.2 Surface area to be rendered prepared in accordancewith job specifications.

2.3 Dash coat mixed and applied liberally to wettedsurface.

3 Mix materials for render/solidplaster

3.1 Mortar for render mixed to designed proportion andconsistency in accordance with the job specifications.

3.2 Render coat dotted and lined (screeded) to plumb orlevel tolerance of +/- 2mm over 2.4 metres.

4 Apply render 4.1 Render applied to dried splash, dotted and linedsurface and screeded to correct thickness inaccordance with job drawings and specifications.

4.2 Screeded solid render trowelled to specified surfaceaccording to job finishes schedule.

4.3 Surface finished plumb/level and to an alignmenttolerance of +/-2mm over 3 metres.

Apply solid render BCG3092A


5 Cure applied surface 5.1 Finished surface cured using curing method inaccordance with the job requirements and architect’sspecifications.

6 Clean up 6.1 Work area cleared.

6.2 Waste materials removed from job area and placedinto job waste bins or rubbish stockpile.



RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the application of one or two coat cement mortar render to masonry or concrete surfaces.

Render mix to be in accordance with AS CA27- Internal Plastering On Solid Background.





Application may be to horizontal or vertical surfaces.

Background surfaces for application include:

• concrete• concrete blockwork• brickwork• stonework• timber or metal lathing

Cleaning of surfaces may involve:

• wire brushing• grinding• chipping• washing down



Dash coat may be applied using:

• trowel• brush• nozzle spray




• measuring tape/rule• trowels• brushes• screed boards• scaffolding• straight edges• grinder• concrete mixer• mortar boards and stands• shovel• wheelbarrows• hawks• joint rules• small tools• plumb bob• masons square• buckets• sieve• power leads


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by applying solid render to either brick, block or concrete backgroundsurfaces.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable toworkplace and solid plastering operations

• display compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of applying solid plastering• locate surfaces and inspect for bonding requirements prior to application of splash coat or render

or set coat• prepare render mix to architect’s specification and Australian Standard CA27 – Internal

Plastering on Solid Backgrounds

Apply solid render BCG3092A


• finish reveals and returns square to surface• employ safe and efficient techniques in the use of tools and equipment• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• finish surface plumb/level to tolerance of +/-2mm over 2.4 metres• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work procedures



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices• BCG1013A Prepare for construction process• BCG2001A Prepare surfaces• BCG2004A Carry out levelling



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• drawings and specifications• mix composition• render and setting coats• additives including plasticisers, colour and waterproofing agents• Building Code of Australia and Australian Standard CA27• materials• tools and equipment• calculation of material quantities


• work safely• select and handle material safely• organise work• interpret drawings and specifications• interpret documentation from a wide range of sources• set out work• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively



• workplace location• tools, plant and equipment suitable for applying cement rendering coats to flat surface• scaffolding• appropriate materials



Assessment should be conducted while tasks are undertaken either individually or as part of a teamunder limited supervision.






KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 1 2 2 2

BCG3093A Restore and renovate solid plasterwork


BCG3093A: Restore and renovate solid plasterwork



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment and inrestoring and renovating solid plasterwork recognisedand adhered to.


1.4 Tools and equipment selected consistent withrequirements of restoring and renovating solidplasterwork, checked for serviceability and any faultsreported to supervisor.

1.5 Safety hazards identified and correct procedures usedto eliminate hazards and minimise risks to self andothers according to OH&S legislation and companypolicy.

2 Identify damaged plasterwork 2.1 Scaffolding erected, where required, to OH&Sregulations.

2.2 Extent and type of restoration required identified byexamination and from location indicated in jobdrawings and specifications.

2.3 Drawing and/or template of damaged area preparedaccurately to profile/moulding shape.

3 Restore plaster walls, cornices,cement chimney, curved wall,archway or fluted column

3.1 Damaged plasterwork restored to original conditions orspecifications.

3.2 Sand/cement mortar and gypsum plaster settingapplied as required

3.3 Materials applied and finished to match originalsurfaces, details and alignment.

4 Renovate lettering 4.1 Surface prepared for renovation to architect’sspecifications.

4.2 Monograms and lettering panels constructed in sandand cement mortar to match detail for restorations.

4.3 Materials applied to fine finish, with sharp arises,square returns and plumb/level to requirements of jobdrawings.

Restore and renovate solid plasterwork BCG3093A


5 Clean up 5.1 Area cleaned to specification.




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit covers all restoration and renovation to damaged surfaces of cement render, hard plaster andconcrete.






• boots• safety glasses/goggles• dust masks/respirators• gloves• cap• hard hat

Application may be to solid plaster or cement render surface and may include but is not limited to:

• walls – straight• ceilings – curved• chimneys• archways• columns• centre panels• cornices• other decorative features


• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level• squares• trowels

BCG3093A Restore and renovate solid plasterwork


• floats• brushes• screed boards• scaffolding• concrete mixer• mortar boards and stands• shovel• wheelbarrows• hawks• joint rules• small tools• plumb bob• masons square• buckets• sieve• power leads


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by restoring damage to all types of cement rendered, hard plastered andconcrete surfaces.




• display compliance with organisational policies and quality procedures and processes withincontext of restoring and renovating solid plasterwork

• identify location and details of proposed solid plaster work restorations/renovations• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• use safe and efficient procedures to apply and finish plaster to designed specification• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• ensure restoration materials conform to Australian Standard CA27 – Internal Plastering on Solid

Backgrounds• complete restoration/renovation of damaged walls and decorative components to specification• demonstrate interactive communication with others to ensure safe and effective work procedures



• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG1013A Prepare for construction process (solid plastering)• BCG3091A Apply float and set coats for hard plaster – flat surfaces• BCG3092A Apply solid render• BCG3094A Construct plaster mouldings

Restore and renovate solid plasterwork BCG3093A




• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawings and specifications• solid plaster techniques• material selection and identification• tools and equipment• scaffolding• substrate preparation


• work safely• read and interpret drawings• organise work• use tools and equipment• erect restricted height scaffolding• communicate effectively



• work area suitable for solid plastering• tools, plant and equipment suitable for application of solid plaster• materials suitable to the process of solid plastering• scaffolding• drawings and/or specifications relevant to tasks




Assessment may be by intermittent checking at various stages of each tasks application or at thecompletion of each task in accordance with the performance criteria.




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 3 2 3 2 1 1



BCG3094A: Construct plaster mouldings


1 Design/draw mould 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’sconstruction operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 Profile and extent of mould established correctly fromdrawings and/or architect’s specifications.

1.3 Sheet steel template cut to specified tolerance of +/-1mm from drawing.

2 Select and prepare materialsand equipment to constructplaster mouldings

2.1 OH&S requirements in accordance with workplaceenvironment and constructing plaster mouldingsrecognised and adhered to.

2.2 Materials selected in accordance with jobrequirements.


2.4 Tools and equipment selected consistent withrequirements of constructing plaster mouldings,checked for serviceability and any faults reported tosupervisor.

2.5 Safety hazards identified and correct procedures usedto eliminate hazards and minimise risk to self andothers according to OH&S legislation and companypolicy

3 Construct running mould 3.1 Running mould constructed accurately to specifiedprofile.

4 Construct a length of in-situmoulding in sand/lime

4.1 Surface cleaned and wetted down.

4.2 Key coat applied and moulding constructed accuratelyto profile in specified location.

4.3 Moulding finished to a fine even finish.

5 Construct arches insand/cement

5.1 Semi-circular mouldings set out to requirements ofdrawings and specifications.

5.2 Semi-circular/segmental arches constructed insand/cement mortar to job drawings and specifications.

5.3 Moulding finished to a fine even finish.

Construct plaster mouldings BCG3094A






RANGE OF VARIABLES

Mouldings may be plain, patterned or ornamental, straight or curved and developed for cornices, panels,roses and arches.





Decorative applications include:

• cornices• panels• roses• arches

Application of plaster may be to horizontal, vertical or inclined surfaces.

Background surfaces for application include hard plaster or cement render on:

• brickwork• blockwork• concrete• stonework


• boots• safety glasses/goggles• dust masks/respirators• gloves• cap• hard hat




• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level• squares• trowels• floats• brushes• screed boards• scaffolding• concrete mixer• mortar boards and stands• shovel• wheelbarrows• hawks• joint rules• small tools• plumb bob• masons square• buckets• sieve• power leads• trammel• tin snips• files


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by the safe and effective construction of decorative plaster moulds to atleast one of each of the application elements within the competency standard.




• display compliance with organisational policies and procedures and processes within context ofinstalling decorative solid plaster to archways, ceilings and cornices

• identify location and details of each proposed decorative plastering applications• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• use safe and effective procedures to install and finish plaster to designed specification• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• complete construction of running mould, length of mouldings in-situ and sand/cement arch


• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG1013A Prepare for construction process (solid plastering)• BCG3091A Apply float and set coats for hard plaster – float surfaces• BCG3092A Apply solid render

Construct plaster mouldings BCG3094A




• workplace and equipment safety requirements• solid plastering techniques and applications• working drawings and specifications• materials• tools and equipment• scaffolding• base surface preparation


• work safely• read and interpret drawings• organise work• use tools and equipment• erect restricted height scaffolding• communicate effectively



• work location for construction applications• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to application tasks• materials appropriate to construction processes• scaffolding• drawings and specifications relevant to tasks




Assessment may be by checking at various stages of each task application or at the completion ofeach tasks in accordance with the performance criteria.


Competency may be assessed in the workplace or simulated workplace environment.


KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 3 2 3 2 1 1



BCG3095A: Carry out conite construction



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andapplying conite recognised and adhered to.

1.3 Delivered materials checked against job drawings andspecifications for quantities and description.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected to carry out processesconsistent with requirements of conite construction,checked for serviceability and any faults reported tosupervisor.

1.6 Safety hazards identified and correct procedures usedto eliminate hazards and minimise risk to self andothers.

2 Prepare surface 2.1 Timber/metal wall framing checked for solidity andsecurity of fixing.

2.2 Building paper fixed taut to face of framing tospecifications.

2.3 Specified timber or metal lathing selected fitted andfixed to framing according to job and manufacturer’sspecifications.

3 Carry out conite application 3.1 Scaffolding erected as required in accordance with jobrequirements and OH&S regulations.

3.2 Scratch coat of sand, cement and lime mixed andevenly applied to architect’s specifications.

3.3 Floating coat applied to specifications and allowed toset.

3.4 Sand finish or other specified finish coat applied toarchitect’s specifications.

3.5 Surface finished plumb/straight +/- 3mm over any 3metres length.



Carry out conite construction BCG3095A




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit concerns sand, cement and lime conite applied to timber or wall framing or fibre-cement cladding.





Lathing may be:

• timber• expanded metal• stamped/deformed metal

Building paper fixing may be:

• staples• galvanized clouts• adhesive• fixing buttons

Lathing fixing may be:

• nails• staples• clouts


• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• dust masks/respirators• hard hat• cap


• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level



• squares• nail bag• trowels• floats• brushes• screed boards• scaffolding• straight edges• concrete mixer• mortar boards and stands• shovels• wheelbarrows• hawks• plum bob• buckets• sieve• power leads• pneumatic staple gun• tin snips• air compressor and hoses• scaffolding


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by the safe and effective conite application to walls and surfaces usingeach of the materials and substrates listed in the range of variables statement.




• display compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use tools appropriate processes and equipment consistent with requirements applying

conite• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context applying conite surfaces• locate and inspect surfaces for bonding requirements prior to application of mortar• determine surface finish from drawing specification or site inspection• secure and tautly fix building paper• securely fix lathing to wall framing• check render mix conforms to architect’s specification and Australian Standards• finish surface plumb/level and straight to specified tolerance• finish reveals and returns square to surface• apply finish coat to achieve texture or finish specified• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work practices• complete conite application to specification



• BCG1013A Prepare construction process (solid plastering)• BCG2001A Prepare surfaces• BCG3092A Apply render

Carry out conite construction BCG3095A




• workplace and equipment safety requirements• drawings and specifications• mix composition• render and setting coat• additives including plastercisers colour and dampproofing• efflorescence and its cause and effect• Building Code of Australia and Australian Standards• substrate preparation• calculation of material quantities


• work safely• select and handle material safely• use hand and power tools• identify and select material appropriate to task• interpret drawings and specifications• calculate quantities



• work area suitable to the task• tools, plant and equipment appropriate for applying conite• drawings and specifications relative to the task• scaffolding• appropriate materials



Competency shall be assessed while work is undertaken under limited supervision with regularchecks, but may include some autonomy when working as part of a team.




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 1 2 2 2



BCG3096A: Apply paint by brush/roller



1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’s paintingoperations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andpreparing and applying paint by brush and roller arerecognised and adhered to.

1.3 Materials checked for conformity against specifications.

1.4 Appropriate personal protective equipment selected,correctly fitted and used in accordance with safeworking standards.

1.5 Tools and equipment selected consistent withrequirements of job, checked for serviceability and anyfaults reported and/or rectified.


2 Prepare two-pack material 2.1 OH&S requirements for preparing and applying two-pack paint by brush and roller recognised and adheredto.

2.2 Each component thoroughly stirred using separatestirring sticks.

2.3 Correct amounts of each material mixed in a thirdcontainer to manufacturer's specified ratio with dryingtime recognised.

3 Erect work platform (if required) 3.1 Work platform erected where required to appropriateworking height and OH&S requirements.

4 Prepare surface for finishing 4.1 Surface prepared as per manufacturer’s specificationin compliance with substrate requirements.

5 Apply paint with brush/roller 5.1 Job location checked to ensure provision of adequateventilation and precautions taken to prevent fire and/orexplosion.

5.2 Select brush, roller or brush/roller combination for jobas per surface profile, size of area and type of paintand finish specified.

5.3 Paint applied as per job/architect/paint manufacturerspecifications to achieve required level of opacity, finishtexture and sheen.

Apply paint by brush/roller BCG3096A


6 Clean up 6.1 Area cleaned.



6.4 Equipment cleaned safely using the correct solvent inaccordance with MSDS instructions. Equipmentmaintained and stored correctly.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the application of surface coatings by brush, roller or a combination of brush and rollerand should be read in conjunction with Australian Standard 2311 – The Painting of Buildings.

Types of paint include:

• solvent-borne (alkyd, urethane, urethane/aklyd, urethane oil or modified alkyd resins)• latex (PVA, PVA/acrylic, acrylic and styrene acrylic)• polyurethane clear• paving paints• roofing paints (latex and solvent-borne)• bituminous paint• two-peak epoxy and polyurethane• chlorinated rubber• water-repellents for timber• water repellents for concrete or masonry• anti-graffiti paints

Paint products can be classified as:

• sealers• primers• sealer/undercoats• undercoats/intermediate coats• finish coats

Surfaces to be painted include:

• all common profiles encompassing the full range natural timber products• ply• building boards (including mdf and particle board)• fibre cement products• iron and steel• zinc coated• zinc alloy coated steel products• aluminium products• copper and brass• lead• masonry products• clay bricks• concrete blocks• in-situ-concrete• cement render• set plaster• plaster glass products• paper-faced gypsum plaster board



• paintable plastic products• previously coated/treated surfaces in a sound or unsound condition.

Horizontal or vertical surface application.


• scrapers• filling knives/blades• putty knives• duster brushes• hand sanders• mechanical sanders• paint stirrers• drop sheets• heat and flame paint removal equipment• wire brushes• hammer• nail punches• paint pots/buckets• brush-ware and brush-ware accessories• roller frames• covers• buckets• roller accessories

Work platforms can include:

• ladders• step ladders• trestles• planks• hop-ups• aluminium mobile scaffold• scissor-lift• cherry picker

OH&S requirements can include:

• those associated with exposure to hazardous materials• solvents• lead• chemicals• fumes/gases• asbestos fibres• confined spaces• manual handling• falling objects• electrical• fire• equipment and machinery faults• faults associated with work access platforms• faults related to poor “house keeping”





• gloves• respirators including cartridge and supplied-air• ear muffs/plugs• caps• jacket• overalls

Australian Standard 2311 – The Painting of Buildings. This standard provides a guide to procedures for thepainting of buildings for general construction, commercial and (light) industrial use. This Standard should beconsulted in the absence of an architect’s specification or job specification as a guide to accepted proceduresand products used in the painting and decorating industry.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by the application of a range of surface coatings under workingconditions and over time including solvent borne, latex and two-pack to a range of surfaces using brushes,rollers and a combination of brush/roller.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and process within context of painting• mix paint thoroughly prior to use• protect surrounding surfaces by drop sheets or masking or removal of objects• prepare surface as per manufacturer’s specification in compliance with substrate requirements• check colour and finish against specifications before appling paint• choose correct paint system in accordance with environment, finish and substrate requirements• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• calculate quantities of materials


Pre-requisite skills:



• BCG3100A Prepare surfaces for painting and decorating• BCG3097A Match specified paint colour• BCG3098A Apply clear wood finish• BCG1019A Prepare for construction process (painting and decorating)



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• specifications• surface coatings technology including specification of paint systems for interior and exterior

painting projects to maximise durability, protection and aesthetic considerations• compatibility of preparatory materials and paint systems



• hazards associated with solvents, chemicals and dust• tools and equipment• variances in work carried out within sectors of painting and decorating industry

- new building (residential/commercial/high rise) - maintenance/renovation/refurbishment - shop-fitting - restoration - conservation - industrial/protective coatings

• responsibilities with regard to: - heritage listed buildings - conservation areas - environmental requirements


• work safely, efficiently and effectively• organise work• interpret specifications• take off dimensions, quantities, types of materials, position of materials and application

requirements• identify and select materials for application• use tools equipment and materials• prepare materials• apply materials• check finished work• clean an area and dispose of waste• store materials/components• respond to emergency situations• communicate effectively


• workplace or simulated workplace location.• tools and equipment appropriate to processes• paint and material required for activity• specification for proposed tasks









KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 3 3 1 2

BCG3097A Match specified paint color


BCG3097A: Match specified paint colour


1 Prepare materials andequipment


1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andhandling and mixing of paint recognised and adheredto.


1.4 Appropriate personal protective equipment selected,correctly fitted and used in accordance with safeworking practices.



2 Match paint colour to specifiedsample

2.1 Base colour identified from analysis of sample.

2.2 Paint type, tint base and sheen level of sampleestablished.

2.3 Colorants suitable for colour match selected.

2.4 Colour mixed and matched against sample andallowed to dry to establish accuracy of colour match.

2.5 Full quantity of paint mixed and colour match testedagain prior to application.





RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the mixing and matching of colour to sample in the area of commercial painting anddecorating.

Mixing colour in surface coatings includes

• solvent-borne (alkyd, urethane, urethane/alkyd, urethane oil or modified alkyd resins)

Match specified paint color BCG3097A


• latex (PVA, PVA/acrylic, acrylic and styrene acrylic)• roofing paints (latex and solvent-borne)• some timber stains• decorative “single-pack” materials

The term sample refers to:

• in-situ previously painted unit or area• paint manufacturer’s colour card• fan deck


• protective clothing and equipment• handling of hazardous materials• working environment• emergency procedures• operating equipment


• safety goggles/glasses• respirators• gloves• overalls• boots


• stirring implements• colorant dispenser• mechanical paint mixer (shaker)

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by the successful eye matching of a colour to a given sample usingsingle-pack proprietary surface coatings and universal colorants.


It is essential that competence be demonstrated in the following aspects:


• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply to organisational quality procedures and process within context of matching specified paint

colour• identify base colour by analysis of sample• mix paint thoroughly after colorant is added• add tints gradually to achieve colour match to ensure minimal waste• record formula for future reference (if applicable)• check properties of the paint are not affected by addition of colorant (especially drying process)• observe Australian Standards related to colour where applicable

BCG3097A Match specified paint color






• BCG3124A Apply paint by spray• BCG3125A Apply decorative finishes• BCG3096A Apply paint by brush/roller



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• specifications• paint types and uses• hazards associated with surface coatings• tools and equipment related to mixing paint• basic colour theory• colour harmony and colour schemes• colour measurement systems• Australian Standards applicable to the use of colour in painting and decorating

- AS2700 – Colour Standards for General Purposes- AS1318 – The Use of Colour for Marking Physical Hazards and the Identification of Certain Equipment in Industry- AS1345 – Identification of the Contents of Piping, Conduits and Ducts- AS2633 – Guide to the Specification of Colours

• factors that effect the apparent colour of paint including- the gloss level and paint type- colour and opacity of the paint- age and deterioration of painted sample if in-situ- lighting conditions- colour of surface covered by paint- colour of drapes and other furnishings

• colour considerations regarding durability of colours in exterior locations• colours used in heritage painting or restoration


• work safely• organise work• interpret specifications• use tools and equipment• identify the base paint and colorants required to match a colour• mix and match by “eye” a range of colours in a range of surface coatings and sheen levels to

specification• estimate quantities of material• use a colorant dispenser



• workplace location or simulated workplace location

Match specified paint color BCG3097A


• tools and equipment appropriate to application tasks• materials appropriate to tasks• specifications and samples






Assessment shall be while tasks are undertaken under limited supervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 3 3 2 2



BCG3098A: Apply clear timber finish




1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andpreparing for and applying timber stains and clearfinishes recognised and adhered to.



1.5 Tools and equipment selected consistent with jobrequirements and checked for serviceability.


2 Stain bare timber surface 2.1 Correct stain selected for type of timber taking intoaccount aesthetics and durability considerations.

2.2 Surface prepared to specifications.

2.3 Stain applied to bare timber surface as perspecifications and/or manufacturer’s instructions.

2.4 Wood filler applied as per specifications and/ormanufacturer’s instructions and, when dry, sanded to asmooth finish.

3 Apply clear finishes 3.1 Coats of selected clear finish applied to specificationand manufacturer's instructions.

3.2 Recommended drying time allowed between coats.





RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the application of timber stains, grain fillers and clear finishes for timber includinglacquers, single and two-pack polyurethane, acrylic clear, and two-pack epoxy clear.

Apply clear timber finish BCG3098A


Types of materials may include:

• stains (water, spirit, oil or slightly pigmented varnish/polyurethane)• grain fillers (water, spirit, oil)• clear finishes (lacquers, single and two-pack polyurethane, long oil varnish, acrylic clear and two-pack

epoxy clear)

Types of finish include:

• flat• satin• semi-gloss• full gloss

Application methods may include:

• brush• roller• spray• rag• paint pad (sponge)

Surfaces to be finished may include:

• floors• panelling• stairs• doors• fitments


• ladders• step ladders• trestles• planks• hop-ups• aluminium mobile scaffold• scissor-lift• cherry picker• scrapers• filling knives/blades• putty knives• duster brushes• hand sanders• mechanical sanders• paint stirrers• drop sheets• heat paint removal equipment• hammer• nail punches• paint pots/buckets• brush-ware• brush-ware accessories• roller frames• covers• buckets• roller accessories



• spray equipment


• those associated with exposure to hazardous materials (including solvents, lead, chemicals,fumes/gases, asbestos fibres)

• confined spaces• manual handling• falling objects• electrical• fire• equipment and machinery faults• spraying• faults associated with work access platforms• faults related to poor “house-keeping”

Australian Standard 2311 – The Painting of Buildings. This standard provides a guide to procedures for thepainting of buildings for general construction, commercial and (light) industrial use. This standard should beconsulted in the absence of an architect’s or job specification as a guide to accepted procedures andproducts used in the painting and decorating industry.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the application of timber stains and fillers over a range of differenttimbers and the subsequent application of a variety of clear finishes.




• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of applying timber stains,

fillers and clear finishes• prepare timber surfaces for staining and clear finish• remove marks by sanding “with the grain”• select and apply appropriate stains to a specified timber surface• stop and fill open grained timbers to a specified colour/shade• apply a range of clear timber finishes by brush, roller and spray to selected timber surfaces• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify





• BCG3100A Prepare surfaces for painting and decorating• BCG1019A Prepare for construction process (painting and decorating)

Apply clear timber finish BCG3098A




• workplace and equipment safety requirements• specifications• surface preparation for clear wood finishing• surface coatings technology• timber stains and their properties• hazards associated with solvents, chemicals and dust• tools and equipment


• work safely• organise work• interpret specifications• use tools and equipment• prepare timber surfaces for staining and clear• select and apply appropriate stains to a specified timber surface• stop and fill open grained timbers to a specified colour/shade• apply a range of clear timber finishes by brush, roller and spray to selected timber surfaces• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify



• workplace location or simulated location• tools and equipment appropriate to processes• materials required for proposed tasks• specification of proposed activity






Assessment shall be while tasks are undertaken under limited supervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 1 2



BCG3099A: Set and anchor stone facades




1.3 Design of stone facade and method of fixing identifiedfrom site drawings and engineer’s structural details.

1.4 Stone facade erection planned consistent withAS3850.3–1992 Guide to the Erection of Pre-castConcrete Members

1.5 Delivered stone checked for conformity to size andcolour against specifications and provided materialsample.



1.8 Safe working area isolated and maintained inaccordance with job safety requirements and AS3850.

1.9 Area below construction face cleared and isolated withdesigned barricade to OH&S and job requirements

1.10 Scaffolding erected, where required, to jobrequirements and OH&S regulations.

1.11 Slings, clutches and other pre-determined riggingequipment selected to job requirements and inspectedfor correct function.

2 Set out and prepare structureand stone components

2.1 Area of structure to receive stone for façade set out forline and level in accordance with job drawings anddimensions.

2.2 Datum or level line established for base course ofstone components.

2.3 Area of structure to receive stone componentsprepared consistent with manufacturer’s fixingrecommendations, site drawings and specifications.

2.4 Brackets or anchors installed to structure for line ofplacement to specifications for structural fixing.

Set and anchor stone facades BCG3099A


2.5 Steel dowels fitted to base where specified to providekey for base course of components

2.6 Stone checked for faults prior to installation

2.7 Stone components prepared, lifting locations checkedand lifting gear attached in accordance withmanufacturer’s requirements and AS3850.

3 Lift, erect and fix stone. 3.1 Stone component test lifted at delivery location toensure crane capacity adequate.

3.2 Stone component lifted and transferred safely to fixinglocation at structure in accordance with job safetyrequirements.

3.3 Base components prepared for placement by drilling ofholes for dowels where applicable, and placement ofwedges or packers for adjustment.

3.4 Initial stone manoeuvered, placed and adjusted inposition to be fixed level, to line and plumb.

3.5 Base course of stone components placed and fixed tolines, level, aligned on face and plumb tospecifications.

3.6 Lifting gear/rigging equipment removed from stonefaçade upon engineer’s or site authority’s approval offixings.

3.7 Stone components fitted using designed fixing andclamping method to ensure joints closed andcomponents secured to structure to engineer’sspecifications.

3.8 Fixing connections installed during location of eachstone component to align and tie components together,adjusted and secured to specifications.

3.9 Corners of stone facade joined and fixed to designedjunction, to specifications.

3.10 Stone facade installed to engineers specifications.

3.11 Lifting gear/rigging equipment removed from stonefacade upon engineers or site authority’s approval offixings.

4 Caulk/seal/flash stone facade 4.1 Stone facade caulked/sealed and/or flashed inaccordance with job drawings and engineer’sspecifications.




5.2 Waste material removed and placed into job wastebins.

5.3 Tools and equipment cleaned, inspected, maintainedand stored.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the fixing of stone to provide finished facades to multi– storey structures.

Types of structures may include:

• in-situ reinforced concrete• pre-cast reinforced concrete• structural steel frame




• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• working platforms and scaffolding• lifting equipment, cranes and hoists




• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level• squares• masonry chisels• scaffolding• rollers• power drills including impact• power grinder• rubber mallet• air compressor and hoses• power leads



• clogging tool• screw cramp and wedges• string line• chalk line• lifting gear and equipment


• obstructions to clear access for supply• barricades• other work personnel• excessive noise nearby• wind• power leads• dust

Fixing connections for supporting and tying stone components together may include but are not limited to:

• pin bracket• corbel plate bracket• slotted bracket• turned end cramp• back cramp• fish tailed cramp• shook cramp• dog cramp

Methods of securing stone to structure may include but are not limited to:

• mechanical masonry anchor• chemical masonry anchor• metal bracket for connection to steel frame

Work to be undertaken in a team situation and supported by crane and plant operators in accordance withlegislative and regulatory requirements and Worksafe Australia Standards for Users and Operators ofIndustrial Equipment.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by working with a team and plant operators to place and fix a stonefacade to one of the types of structures from those listed within the range of variables statement.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within the context of setting and

anchoring stone facades• select stone consistent with specification for material and colour• accurately set out and install fixing brackets• give attention safe handling practices in moving and placing stone• give particular attention to fixing stone to position and structure• fix stone to line, level and plumb with clamps securing components• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify



• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace• operations• complete of stone facade to specifications







• drawings and specifications• types of stone and characteristics• methods of fixing stone to structures• Building Code of Australia and Australian Standard 3850• crane operation• lifting equipment• tools, plant and equipment• scaffolding• measuring, levelling and calculations• worksite communication


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• use plant, equipment, hand and power tools• measure and set out work• select materials specific to requirements• calculate quantities• handle materials safely• fix materials• communicate effectively



• work location for installation of stone• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to installation processes• construction materials relevant to proposed activity• appropriate communication of documentation relevant to task





Assessment may be by intermittent checking at various stages of each task application or at thecompletion of each task in accordance with the performance criteria and specification.




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 2 1 1 2



BCG3100A: Prepare surfaces for painting anddecorating




1.2 OH&S requirements for preparing new and previouslypainted surfaces for painting and decorating arerecognised and adhered to including lead and asbestosfibres.


1.4 Appropriate personal protective equipment selected,correctly fitted and used in accordance with safeworking standards.

1.5 Tools and equipment selected consistent with jobrequirements, checked for serviceability and any faultsreported and/or rectified.


2 Erect work platform 2.1 Work platform erected where required to appropriateworking height to OH&S requirements.

3 Prepare new or un-coatedsurfaces for painting or clearfinish

3.1 Specific substrate properties identified and precautionstaken to ensure maximum adhesion of subsequentsurface coatings.

3.2 Surface prepared as per manufacturer’s specificationin compliance with substrate requirements, hazardousmaterials warnings and paint systems detailed inAS2311 – The Painting of Buildings.

3.3 Surface imperfections stopped, filled and sanded to asmooth finish ready for painting

4 Prepare previously coatedsurfaces for painting or clearfinish

4.1 Surface to be painted identified as either sound orunsound for painting.

4.2 Where surface deemed to be unsound, remove bymost appropriate method.

4.3 Where surface is deemed to be sound, preparesurface by most appropriate method.

4.4 Surface imperfections stopped, filled and sanded tosmooth finish ready for painting.

Prepare surfaces for painting and decorating BCG3100A


5 Prepare surface for wallpaper 5.1 Determine condition and texture of surface and itssuitability to wallpaper application.

5.2 Where surface to be wallpapered deemed to beunsound, remove by most appropriate method.

5.3 Where surface deemed to be sound, prepare surfaceby most appropriate method.

5.4 Surface imperfections stopped, filled and sanded tosmooth finish ready for application of wallpaper.

6 Remove wallpaper and preparesurface for painting

6.1 Determine type of wallpaper to be removed.

6.2 Wallpaper removed by dry stripping and/or soaking orby steam stripper observing all OH&S and safetyprecautions.


6.4 Where surface deemed to be unsound, preparesurface by most appropriate method.

6.5 Surface imperfections stopped, filled and sanded tosmooth finish ready for application of paint.

7 Prepare surface for decorativepainted finishes

7.1 Determine condition of surface and its suitability towallpaper application

7.2 Where surface to be wall papered deemed to beunsound, remove by most appropriate method.


7.4 Surface imperfections stopped, filled and sanded to asmooth finish ready for application of specifieddecorative painted finish.




8.4 Equipment and machinery maintained and storedcorrectly.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the preparation of surfaces for painting and decorating processes. It should be read inconjunction with Australian Standard 2311 – The Painting of Buildings.



New surfaces to be prepared may include:

• all common profiles encompassing the full range natural timber products• ply• building boards (including MDF and particle board)• fibre cement products• iron and steel• zinc coated• zinc coated steel products• aluminium products• copper• brass• lead• masonry products• clay bricks• concrete blocks• in-situ-concrete• cement render• set plaster• plaster glass products• paper-faced gypsum plaster board• paintable products• previously coated/treated surfaces

Horizontal or vertical surface application.

Previously coated surfaces in a sound condition may include:

• Painted surfaces in good condition or surfaces that are covered in a film of grease, dust, mould, mildefflorescence, mild chalking or smoke damaged

Previously coated surfaces in an unsound condition may include:

• Paint films which are blistering, flaking, peeling or cracking

Preparation of previously coated surfaces in a sound condition may include:

• sanding• washing down using sugar soap• solvents• detergent• use of water blaster

Preparation of previously coated surfaces in an unsound condition may include:

• burning off• heat gun• abrasive grit• water blasting• grinding• sanding• scraping (mechanical or hand)• chemical stripping• hammer gun





• gloves• respirators including cartridge and supplied-air• ear muffs/plugs• caps• jacket• overalls


• scrapers• filling knives/blades• putty knives• duster brushes• hand sanders• mechanical sanders• paint stirrers• drop sheets• heat and flame paint removal equipment• wire brushes• hammer• nail punches• paint pots/buckets• brush-ware and brush-ware accessories• roller frames• covers• buckets and roller accessories• water blaster• spray equipment

Work platforms can include:



• those associated with exposure to hazardous materials• solvents• lead• chemicals• fumes/gases• asbestos fibres• confined spaces• manual handling• falling objects• electrical• fire• equipment and machinery faults• faults associated with work access platforms• faults related to poor “house-keeping”



Australian Standard 2311 – The Painting of Buildings this standard provides a guide to procedures for thepainting of buildings for general construction, commercial and (light) industrial use. This standard should beconsulted in the absence of an architect’s specification or job specification as a guide to accepted proceduresand products used in the painting and decorating industry.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by the safe and effective preparation of a range of sound and unsoundsurfaces for painting and decorating processes.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and process within context surface preparation for

painting and decorating processes• identify requirements for surface preparation for specific examples in sound, unsound and

wallpaper• choose correct method of surface preparation in accordance with environmental, finish and

substrate requirements• remove corrosion by hand or mechanical means• strip paint by heat removal• remove paint by flame removal• use solvent-based paint stripper• wash surfaces prior to application of coatings• dry and wet abrading by hand and mechanical application• remove a range of wallpaper products from walls and/or ceilings• stop, fill and sand surfaces to a smooth finish• protect surrounding surfaces by drop sheets, masking or removal of objects• identify surface defects and subsequent rectification of each• identify surface coatings defects and subsequent rectification of each• prepare surface prior to application of decorative finishes to a high standard


Pre-requisite skills:

• BCG1006A Use plant and equipment


• BCG1017A Prepare for construction process (painting)• BCG2001A Prepare surfaces• BCG3096A Apply paint by brush/roller• BCG3124A Apply paint by spray• BCG3125A Apply decorative finishes• BCG3101A Apply wallpaper• BCG3098A Apply clear wood finish



• workplace and equipment OH&S standards and requirements



• specifications interpretation• hazards associated with lead, solvents, chemicals and dust• variances in work carried out within sectors of painting and decorating industry and associated

standards in relation to preparation of surfaces: - new building (residential/commercial/high rise) - maintenance/renovation/refurbishment - shop-fitting - restoration - conservation - industrial/protective coatings

• responsibilities with regard to: - heritage listed buildings - conservation areas - environmental requirements

• surface coatings technology• properties and surface preparation requirements of new substrates• surface coatings defects – prevention and/or rectification procedures• preparatory products• capability and maintenance of hand and power tools• differing procedures and products associated with removal of wallpaper• differing procedures and products associated with removal of defective coatings• differing procedures and products associated with preparation of sound surfaces• corrosion process and protection of metals


• work safely, efficiently and effectively• organise work• interpret specifications• take off dimensions, quantities, types of materials, position of materials, application requirements

for a wide range of surfaces• identify and select materials for surface preparation• use tools equipment and materials• prepare materials• check prepared surface for defects• remove corrosion by hand or mechanical means• strip paint by heat removal• remove paint by flame removal• remove paint using solvent-based paint stripper• wash surfaces prior to application of coatings by hand or using equipment• abrade surfaces using dry and wet hand and mechanical methods• remove range of wallpaper products from walls and/or ceilings• stop, fill and sand prepared surfaces to a smooth finish• protect surrounding surfaces by using drop sheets, masking or removal of objects• identify range of common surface defects and rectify each• identify range of surface coatings defects and rectify each• prepare surfaces for application of decorative finishes to high standard• clean area and dispose of waste• store materials/components• respond to emergency situations



• workplace or simulated workplace location.• tools and equipment appropriate to application processes



• materials relevant to application processes• specifications relevant to surface preparation activities




(6) Context Assessment

Competency should be assessed in the normal or simulated workplace environment


KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 3 3 2 3

BCG3101A Apply wallpaper


BCG3101A: Apply wallpaper



1.1 Quality Assurance requirements for company’s paintingand decorating operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andpreparing for and application of wallpaper identified andadhered to.

1.3 Materials checked for conformity with specifications.

1.4 Appropriate personal protective equipment selected,correctly fitted and used in accordance with safeworking conditions.

1.5 Tools and equipment selected consistent with jobrequirements, checked for serviceability and any faultsreported and/or rectified.


2 Erect work platform 2.1 Work platform erected to appropriate working height tojob and OH&S requirements.

3 Prepare surface and wallpaper 3.1 Surface prepared as per manufacturer’s specificationin compliance with substrate requirements. Defectsrepaired to an even, sound finish and lining paperapplied where required to achieve a clean, even finish.

3.2 Application plan determined and paper selected tospecification or client requirements.

3.3 Adhesives selected as per wallpaper manufacturer’sspecification where applicable.

3.4 Wallpaper checked for defects and shading problemsand rectified where applicable.

3.5 Size applied to surface where applicable tomanufacturer’s specifications.

4 Apply wallpaper 4.1 Wallpaper applied to manufacturer’s specificationsensuring seams are butted, paper is plumb, pattern ismatched (if applicable), free of defects and trimmingaround fittings is precise.



Apply wallpaper BCG3101A


5.3 Tools and equipment safely cleaned, maintained andstored.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the application of a range of wallpaper and selected wall coverings to all common interiorbuilding substrates.

Application to walls and ceilings constructed of the following materials: (painted/previously painted in soundand unsound condition)

• set plaster• paper-faced gypsum plaster board• plaster glass• masonry products (including clay bricks, concrete blocks, in-situ concrete, cement render)• medium density fibre-board (MDF) and particle board• fibre-cement products• polystyrene


• lay brush• smoothing block• plastic spreader• plastic trowel• rubber roller• scissors• sponge• seam roller• trimming knives and cutters• broad knife• tape measure• plumb bob and string line• spirit level• scrapers• filling blades• putty knives

Elevated work platforms to include:

• step ladder• trestles and plank• mobile scaffold

Wall covering materials may include:

• unpasted and ready-pasted wallpapers (simplex and duplex)• washable wallpaper• vinyl wallpaper• lining paper• suede grass weaves• photomurals• lyncrusta• flock• metallic foils• front runner• anaglypta

BCG3101A Apply wallpaper


• borders• 1350 mm wide linen-backed vinyl• commercial grade materials

Adhesives may include:

• cellulose• starch• PVA• latex• special blends as per manufacturer’s recommendation

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the application of a range of wall coverings to a range of substrates tomanufacturer and architect/client specifications.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable toworkplace and wallpaper application operations

• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate process, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of applying wallpaper• carry out adequate surface preparation to ensure maximum adhesion of wallpaper• use safe and effective procedures to apply standard width and commercial width wall coverings

to ceilings, walls, partitions, archways• calculate quantities of materials• identify faults and problems that occur and corrective action taken to rectify



• BCG1008 Use simple levelling devices• BCG1006 Use plant and equipment• BCG2001 Prepare surfaces


• BCG1019 Prepare for construction process (painting and decorating)• BCG2001 Prepare surfaces• BCG3100 Prepare surfaces for painting and decorating



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• specifications• surface preparation for the application of wallpaper• compatibility of preparatory materials and wallpaper• types and properties of wall coverings and their suitability to various substrates• hazards associated with wallpaper, chemicals and dust• tools and equipment• procedures used to apply straight pattern match, drop pattern match and random match

wallpapers

Apply wallpaper BCG3101A


• procedures used to apply commercial width and special purpose wall coverings• responsibilities with regard to:

- heritage listed buildings - conservation areas - environmental requirements

• calculate quantities of materials


• work safely, efficiently and effectively• organise/plan work• interpret specifications• take off dimensions, quantities, types of materials, application requirements• identify and select materials appropriate to job• use tools, equipment and materials• prepare materials• apply wall coverings to manufacturer’s specification and quality standards• check finished work• communicate effectively• clean area and dispose of waste safely• store materials/components• respond to emergency situations• calculate material quantities



• workplace location• tools and equipment appropriate to processes• materials appropriate to activity• specifications of proposed activity







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 3 2 3 2 1



BCG3102A: Install glazing



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andpreparing for and installing glazing identified andadhered to.

1.3 Sizes, thickness, types and location of glass installationidentified from job drawings, specifications and glazingschedule.

1.4 Glass and job requirements determined from drawings,specifications, unit to be glazed and method ofinstallation.



1.7 Opening to receive glass inspected and prepared tomanufacturer's requirements.


2 Select and install glass 2.1 Basic scaffold or ladder set up to job and OH&Srequirements, where applicable.

2.2 Timber or metal beading, where applicable, removedfor glass placement without damaging or markingframe.

2.3 Correct sheet of glass selected consistent with openingdimensions and glazing schedule.

2.4 Glass to be cut, scored and snapped safely to accuratemeasurement with allowance of 4mm for width andheight.

2.5 Putty or silicone firmly applied to rebate and glasspressed in firmly and evenly to bedding, whereapplicable.

2.6 Timber bead or metal bead fitted and fixed to frame tospecification, where applicable.

2.7 Glass installed into opening using appropriate glazingmethod in accordance with AS1288-1994 Glass inBuildings – Selection and Installation.

Install glazing BCG3102A


3 Maintain safe working area 3.1 Safe working area around glass installation maintainedin accordance with site or workshop requirements andOH&S regulations.

4 Clean up 4.1 Glazed surface cleaned and cleared of waste materialaccording to job specifications.

4.2 Waste materials disposed of safely into job waste bin.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to glass installed into the following situations:

• timber frame• aluminium frame• aluminium frame double glazed• steel frame

and assumes glass thickness 3mm single glazed unit to 4.5mm double glazed unit.

Glazing methods include:

• glazing beads nailed or screwed• putty, fixed with pins/brads• silicone, fixed with pins/brads• rubber seal• aluminium section, snap fitted

Glass may be installed:

• in a workshop• on site to installed unglazed frame









• spats and gauntlets


• screwdrivers• chisels• hammers• measuring tape/rule• glass cutters• square• straight edge• putty knife• trestles• planks• silicone gun• nail punch

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by installing glass, sealants and beading to a range of nominated glazingjobs using at least three separate glazing methods from those listed in the range of variables statement.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable toworkplace and glazing operations

• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of glass installation• apply safe and effective procedures in preparation, handling and installing of glass• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• complete of installation and finish to specifications



• BGC1005A Use hand and power tools• BGC1011A Handle construction materials and safe disposal of waste• BGC2001A Prepare surfaces




• drawings, specifications and glazing schedules• glass• methods of installing glass• Australian Standards 1288• materials and characteristics• tools and equipment• ladders and basic scaffolding

Install glazing BCG3102A



• work safely• interpret drawings, specifications and glazing schedules• organise work• use tools and equipment• cut glass• fix beading• communicate effectively



• workplace location• tools and equipment appropriate to installation process• glass and material required for tasks• drawing and specifications/documentation relevant to tasks






Assessment should be while tasks are undertaken either individually or working with a partner/teamunder indirect supervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 1 1 2 2



BCG3103A: Apply industrial protective coatings


1 Select and prepare materials andequipment

1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’sconstruction operations recognised and adheredto.

1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environmentand preparation of surfaces and application andstorage of protective industrial coatingsrecognised and adhered to.

1.3 Materials selected and checked for conformityagainst job specifications.

1.4 Appropriate personal protective equipmentselected, correctly fitted and used.

1.5 Tools and equipment selected to carry outprocesses consistent with job requirementschecked for serviceability and any faults reportedand/or rectified.


2 Erect work platform 2.1 Work platform erected to appropriate workingheight and OH&S requirements, where required.

3 Prepare iron and steel surfaces forthe application of protective coatingsystems

3.1 Specific substrate properties identified and correctmethod of surface preparation selected as perAS1627 and AS2312.

3.2 Personal protective equipment selected, correctlyfitted and used in accordance with preparatorywork application and in compliance with relevantAustralian Standard.

3.3 Surface prepared as per job and manufacturer’sspecification in compliance with substrate andcoatings requirements and hazardous materialswarnings as per AS2312 and AS1627.

4 Apply protective coating system 4.1 Job location checked to ensure provision ofadequate ventilation and precautions taken toprevent fire and/or explosion.

4.2 Most appropriate method of application selected,based on the job location, type of paint, type andcondition of surface and climatic conditions.

Apply industrial protective coatings BCG3103A


4.3 Personal protective equipment selected, correctlyfitted and used in accordance with material andmethod of application and in compliance with therelevant Australian Standard.

4.4 Paint system applied as per job/manufacturer’sspecification.


5.2 Waste and unwanted material disposed of safelyas per Environmental Protection Authority’s (EPA)Code of Practice.

5.3 Unused materials sealed and stored as perAS1940-1993 The Storage and Handling ofFlammable and Combustible Liquids.

5.4 Equipment and machinery maintained and storedcorrectly.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the surface preparation of iron and steel surfaces and subsequent application of “wet”industrial protective coating systems (paint) as a protective measure against atmospheric corrosion. It shouldbe read in conjunction with Australian Standard 2312 – Guide to the Protection of Iron and Steel againstExterior Atmospheric Corrosion and Australian Standard 1627 – Code of Practice for the Preparation andPre-treatment of Metal Surfaces Prior to Protective Coating. It involves the coating of new structures and themaintenance of existing structures coated with paint.

Surface Preparation Treatments must be compliant with conditions detailed in AS1627 Parts 0-10 andAS2312 – Section 5 and may include:

• abrasive blast cleaning• degreasing• cleaning and preparation using acid solutions• pickling (chemical de-scaling)• phosphate conversion coatings• flame cleaning• power tool cleaning• hand tool cleaning


• scrapers• hand sanders• mechanical sanders• mechanical grinders• abrasive blasting equipment• needle gun• de-scaling chisels• paint stirrers• drop sheets• flame cleaning equipment• hand and mechanical wire brushes• chipping hammer



• paint pots/buckets• brush-ware and brush-ware accessories• roller frames• covers• buckets and roller accessories• high pressure water blaster• conventional air spray equipment• airless spray equipment• rags• duster brushes

Work platforms may include but are not limited to:


In-situ scaffold erected by qualified personnel.

Personal protective equipment may include but are not limited to:

• safety goggles/glasses• safety boots• gloves and mittens• respiratory protection devises including dust masks• cartridge and supplied air-mask• ear muffs/plugs• caps• jacket• overalls• abrasive blasting apparel• industrial safety helmets• industrial safety belts and harnesses

OH&S requirements may include those associated with exposure to hazardous materials during thepreparation of surfaces and subsequent application of coatings.

Hazards include:

• inhalation of solvent vapour• chemicals fumes• gases• harmful dusts• metal chips• abrasive grit• asbestos fibres• exposure to lead products• waste containing lead• skin contact with harmful chemicals and paint products• ingestion of harmful chemicals and paint products• eye damage due to solvents and dusts• high noise levels• confined spaces



• manual handling• falling objects• electrical• fire• equipment and machinery faults• faults associated with work access platforms• faults related to poor “house-keeping”

Emergency procedures related to the above.

Due to the potentially hazardous environment of the industrial protective coatings industry, regulatoryauthorities require enterprises meet stringent OH&S regulations that relate to the health and welfare of theoperative, the health and welfare of the general public and the welfare of the environment. There areAustralian Standards for most operations/procedures.

Surfaces to be prepared and coated may include iron and steel structures – new and previously coated.

Methods of application are outlined in AS2312 – Section 8.6 and may include:

• brush• roller• brush/roller combination• woollen glove• conventional air-spray or airless spray

Paint coatings are outlined in AS 2312 – Section 7 and may include:

• inorganic zinc silicate paint• organic zinc primer• polyurethane primer (two-pack• high-build alkyd primer• alkyd primer• epoxy primer (two-pack• vinyl primer• chlorinated rubber primer• zinc dust – zinc oxide primer• etch primer (two-pack• acrylic latex primer• coal tar primer (two-pack• high-build epoxy• high-build chlorinated rubber• high-build polyurethane (two-pack• high build vinyl• alkyd micaceous iron oxide• alkyd undercoat• aluminium paint• gloss alkyd paint• acrylic latex paint• bitumen and coal tar paint• vinyl gloss• catalysed epoxy gloss (two-pack• chlorinated rubber gloss• polyurethane gloss (two-pack)• silicone acrylic paintalkyd zinc primer• zinc dust graphite paint• silicone aluminium



Australian Standards documents referenced within this Unit.

AS1627 – Code of Practice for the Preparation and Pre-treatment of Metal Surfaces Prior to ProtectiveCoating. Parts mentioned in bold type are industry specific relevant

Part 0 – Method Selection Guide for Preparation and Pre-treatment of Metal Surfaces prior toProtective Coating

Part 1 – Degreasing of Metal Surfaces using Solvent or Alkali SolutionPart 2 – Power Tool Cleaning of Steel SurfacesPart 3 – Flame Cleaning Steel SurfacesPart 4 – Abrasive Blast Cleaning of Steel SurfacesPart 5 – Pickling Steel SurfacesPart 6 – Phosphate Treatment of Iron and Steel SurfacesPart 7 – Hand Cleaning of Steel SurfacesPart 8 – Wash Primer Pre-treatment of Metal SurfacesPart 9 – Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel SurfacesPart 10 – Cleaning and Preparation Standards for Metal Surfaces Using Acid Solutions

AS1715 – Selection, Use and Maintenance of Respiratory Protective Devices

AS1716 – Respiratory Protective Devices

AS1800 – The Selection, Care and Use of Industrial Safety Helmets

AS1801 – Use of Industrial Safety Helmets

AS1891 – Industrial Safety Belts and Harnesses

AS1940 – The Storage and Handling of Flammable and Combustible Liquids

AS2161 – Industrial Safety Gloves and Mittens

AS2210 – Safety Footwear

AS2312 – Guide to the Protection of Iron and Steel against Exterior Atmospheric Corrosion

AS2865 – Safe Working in Confined Spaces

AS3765 – Clothing for Protection against Hazardous ChemicalsPart 1 – Protection Against General and Specific ChemicalsPart 2 – Limited Protection Against Specific Chemicals

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by the application of the most appropriate surface preparation andcoating system to a given new or previously coated iron or steel surface, in compliance with all relevantOH&S and environmental regulations and considerations.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable toworkplace operations in compliance with the relevant Australian Standard/s

• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of application of industrial

protective coatings• identify most suitable surface preparation treatment for specific examples• carry out surface preparation in accordance with OH&S, environmental, finish and substrate

requirements



• prepare surfaces by abrasive blast cleaning to Classes 1, 2, 2½, and 3 as required by jobspecification

• select most appropriate coating system for specific examples• apply appropriate coating system for a specific job using most appropriate method of application

and in accordance with OH&S, environmental, finish and substrate requirements• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace and coating

operations• complete of application process and finished surface to specifications



• BCG1006 Use plant and equipment• BCG2001 Prepare surfaces• BCG3096 Apply paint by brush/roller• BCG3124 Apply paint by spray• BCG3119 Prepare surface for painting and decorating



• Workplace and equipment OH&S Australian Standards and requirements, WorkSafe regulationsand Codes of Practice

• safe work practices• job planning• specifications interpretation• planning and design for corrosion protection• atmospheric environments• hazards associated with solvent vapour, chemicals fumes, gases, harmful dusts, metal chips,

abrasive grit, asbestos fibres;- exposure to lead products and waste containing lead- skin contact with harmful chemicals and paint products- ingestion of harmful chemicals and paint products- eye damage due to solvents and dusts- high noise levels- confined spaces- manual handling- falling objects- electrical- fire- equipment and machinery faults- faults associated with work access platforms

• variances in work carried out within industrial protective coatings industry• surface preparation treatments and associated equipment including:

- abrasive blast cleaning- degreasing- cleaning and preparation using acid solutions- pickling (chemical de-scaling- phosphate conversion coatings- flame cleaning- power tool cleaning- hand tool cleaning

• corrosion process and protection of metals• protective surface coatings technology for corrosion protection• capability and maintenance of hand and power tools• inspection and testing procedures for protective coatings for iron and steel• maintenance of protective coating systems




• plan work• work safely, efficiently and effectively• interpret specifications, drawings and Australian Standards relevant to industrial protective

coatings and associated OH&S procedures• take off dimensions, quantities, types of materials and application requirements for a wide range

of iron and steel surfaces and profiles• identify and select processes and materials for surface preparation/treatment in compliance with

relevant OH&S and EPA Standards• use tools and equipment safely, efficiently and effectively• prepare materials with strict adherence to OH&S & EPA Standards• apply appropriate coating system for specific job using most appropriate method of application in

accordance with OH&S, environmental, finish and substrate requirements• clean area and dispose of waste with strict adherence to OH&S and EPA Standards• store materials/components with strict adherence to OH&S and EPA Standards• respond to emergency situations



• workplace or simulated workplace location• tools and equipment appropriate to application processes• materials relevant to application tasks• drawings and specifications relevant to proposed tasks



Competency should be assessment under general guidance, checking at various stages of theprocess and at completion of the activity against performance criteria and specifications.


Competency should be assessed in the normal or simulated workplace environment

Assessment should be while tasks are undertaken either individually or while working with a partneror as part of a team.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 1 2



BGC3104A: Install curtain walling



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andinstalling curtain walling, recognised and adhered to.

1.3 Design of curtain walling and structural connectionsidentified from site drawings and specifications.



1.6 Location of curtain wall installation connections set outto job drawings and specifications.

17 Area below construction face cleared and isolated withdesigned barricade to OH&S and job requirements.

1.8 Surface of structure to receive curtain walling inspectedfor conformity and prepared to receive fixingsaccording to job detail drawings and specifications.

1.9 Scaffolding erected in accordance with jobrequirements and OH&S regulations.

1.10 Slings, clutches and other pre-determined lifting gearand equipment selected to job requirements andinspected for serviceable condition.

2 Install curtain walling 2.1 Curtain wall fixing brackets installed correctly to set outpoints in accordance with manufacturer’s specificationsand site structural drawings.

2.2 Curtain walling sections lifted and raised to installationlocation by crane operations.

2.3 Curtain walling located and fixed into correct position inaccordance with job drawings, specifications andmanufacturer’s requirements.

2.4 Installed curtain walling plumbed/levelled aligned andfinally fixed into place to specifications.

2.5 Junctions between placed sections of curtain wallingfitted and secured to specifications for fixing.

Install curtain walling BCG3104A


2.6 Curtain wall trims installed in accordance withmanufacturer’s specifications and detail drawings,where applicable.

3 Caulk seal curtain walling 3.1 Installed curtain walling and trims caulk sealed inaccordance with job specifications, where applicable.

4 Clean Up 4.1 Area cleaned to specification.

4.2 Waste materials removed and placed into waste bins.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the fitting and fixing of curtain walling facades to multi– storey structures

Curtain wall types include:

• fabricated framework and metal cladding• fabricated framework and glass panels• pre-cast concrete panels• manufactured and natural stone panels


• structural steel• in-situ reinforced concrete• pre cast concrete


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to work specifications• crane operations and procedures


• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• working platforms and scaffolding• working with cranes





• hard hat


• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level• levelling equipment• squares• spanners• power grinder• explosive power tool• power drills including impact drills• wedges• power leads

Preparation to structure for fixings may include:

• drilling of holes• installing masonry anchors• fixing of brackets to steelwork• trimming of concrete surfaces for flatness

Support plant and equipment may include

• cranes• compressors, hoses and fittings• winches• elevating work platforms• scaffolding• welding equipment

Work to be carried out in a team situation working with plant operators.

Plant to be run by operators with appropriate credentials and in accordance with Worksafe AustraliaStandards for Users and Operators of Industrial Equipment.

Reporting of faults should be in accordance with organisation's worksite procedures and may be verbal orwritten.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the performance of working as part of a team with plant operators toinstall a curtain walling system.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations and State/Territorylegislation applicable to workplace operations

• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures including quality assurancerequirements

• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of installing curtain walling• check external surfaces receiving fixings for conformity with tolerances for plumb and line• accurately set out and fix supporting and securing brackets or fittings• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to place and fix sections

Install curtain walling BCG3104A


• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective installation operations• complete installation and finish to specifications



• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG2001A Prepare surfaces• BCG2004A Carry out levelling• BCG2007A Operate elevating work platforms




• curtain walling systems• drawings and specifications• tools and equipment• plant and equipment• structures• crane and general plant operations• scaffolding• materials and fixing methods• basic signalling• measuring and levelling


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• set out work• use power tools and hand tools• fix materials• work to levels and alignment• communicate effectively



• workplace location for installation activity• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to installation processes• scaffolding required for activity• materials or components relevant to curtain walling installation• drawings and specifications relevant to activity





Competency should be assessed under general guidance at various stages of the process and atcompletion of the activity against performance criteria and specifications.


Competency shall be assessed in the workplace or simulated workplace.

Assessment shall be while task is undertaken either individually or as part of a team under limitedsupervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 2 2 2 2 2

BCG3105A Install aluminium framework – glazed panelled


BCG3105A: Install aluminium framework – glazed panelled



1.2 OH&S requirements for installing glazed/panelledaluminium framework recognised and adhered to.

1.3 Design of aluminium framework and method of fixingidentified from site drawings and specifications.



1.6 Opening/structure and framework to be installedchecked for size in accordance with job drawings andmethod of installing.

1.7 Safe working area isolated using designed barricadeand maintained to job safety plan, manufacturer’srecommendations and OH&S regulations.

1.8 Scaffolding erected where required in accordancewith job requirements and OH&S regulations.

2 Set out and prepare forfixings

2.1 Opening/structure to receive aluminium frameworkset out in accordance with job drawings and methodof fixing.

2.2 Opening/structure prepared to receive aluminiumframework fixings to job specifications.

3 Install aluminium fixings 3.1 Aluminium fixings/brackets installed in accordancewith job specification, manufacturer’s requirementsand AS2047.2 – 1996 Windows in Buildings –Construction, Installation and Maintenance.

4 Install aluminiumframework

4.1 Aluminium framework installed to correct set outpositioning to line, level and plumb within + or –1mmin accordance with manufacturer’s recommendationsand AS2047.2.

4.2 Aluminium framework assembled with all joints offrame members tight fitting and flush on face.

Install aluminium framework – glazed panelled BCG3105A


4.3 Aluminium fittings and trims fixed to installedaluminium framing in accordance with job drawings,specifications, manufacturer’s recommendations andAS2047.2.

4.4 Glazing or panelling not fitted prior to installation,fitted and fixed to specifications.

5 Caulk/seal aluminiumframework

5.1 Aluminium framework caulked/sealed to jobspecification requirements and AS2047.2.

6 Clean up 6.1 Area cleaned to specification

6.2 Waste material removed and placed into job wastebins.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This applies to the installation of aluminium framework to commercial type structures to provide a facade orenclosed area. The aluminium framework applies to glazed or glazed and panelled designed finishes.

Installation to be in accordance with AS2047.2 -1996 Windows Buildings – Construction, Installation andMaintenance.

Type of structures include:

• structural steel• in-situ reinforced concrete• pre cast concrete• tilt slab construction


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to work specifications



Fitting and fixing of aluminium framework to structures may be to:

• face of building• wall opening



• between opposite walls

Fixing and fasteners may include but are not limited to:

• metal plugs• metal brackets• bolts and nuts• bolts• self tapping screws• masonry anchors• wall plugs• coach screws

Aluminium framework may be:

• fully assembled on delivery• assembled prior to installing• assembled during installing process


• safety goggles, glasses• ear plugs• boots• gloves• respirators/dust masks• hard hat


• measuring tape/rule• electric or pneumatic hammer drill• power drills and screwdrivers• levelling equipment• string lines• scaffolding• range of general hand and power tools• air compressor and hoses• power leads

Work is to be undertaken in a team situation


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by installing a prefabricated aluminium frame to a nominated structure,either to the face or to an opening in accordance with performance criteria and specifications for installation.



• demonstrate compliance with OH&S regulations applicable to workplace operations• show compliance with organisational policies and procedures in worksite operations• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out installation

Install aluminium framework – glazed panelled BCG3105A


• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of installing aluminiumframework

• check frames for conformity with schedule, drawings and specifications, with non-conformingitems reported to supervisor

• accurately set out and fix fittings to specifications• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to install framework to designed position• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective installation operations• complete installation of framework to specification



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use plant and equipment• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG2001A Prepare surfaces• BCG2004A Carry out levelling



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• drawings and specifications• glazed and panelled aluminium framework• AS2047.2 Windows in Buildings – Construction, Installation and Maintenance• materials• plant and equipment• measuring and levelling• methods of fixing• tools and equipment• scaffolding


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• set out accurately• use plant, tools and equipment• communicate effectively• carry out measuring and levelling



• installation location• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to installation processes• scaffolding suitable for prepared activity• aluminium framework, drawings and specifications for proposed activity










KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 2 2 2 1 1 1

BCG3106A Erect pre-cast cladding


BCG3106A: Erect pre-cast cladding



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andhandling and installing pre-cast cladding, recognisedand adhered to.

1.3 Design of pre-cast cladding and method of fixingidentified from site drawings and engineer's structuraldetails.

1.4 Pre-cast cladding erection planned consistent withAS3850.3-1992 Guide to the Erection of Pre-castConcrete Members.



1.7 Safe working area isolated and maintained inaccordance with job safety requirements, AS3850-1990 Tilt-Up Concrete and Pre-Cast ConcreteElements for Use in Buildings - Safety Requirements.

1.8 Area below construction face cleared and isolatedwith designed barricade to OH&S and jobrequirements.

1.9 Scaffolding erected where required to jobrequirements and OH&S regulations.

1.10 Slings, clutches and other pre-determined riggingequipment selected to job requirements andinspected for correct function.

2 Set out and preparestructure and pre-castcomponents

2.1 Area of structure to receive pre-cast cladding set outin accordance with job drawings and method ofsecuring to structure.

2.2 Area of structure to receive pre-cast componentsprepared consistent with manufacturer's fixingrecommendations, detail drawings and specifications.

2.3 Pre-cast components prepared, lifting locationschecked and lifting gear attached in accordance withmanufacturer's requirements and AS3850.

3 Lift, erect and fix pre-castcladding

3.1 Pre-cast cladding test lifted at delivery location toensure crane capacity is adequate.

Erect pre-cast cladding BCG3106A


3.2 Pre-cast cladding lifted and transferred safely to fixinglocation at structure in accordance with job safetyrequirements.

3.3 Pre-cast cladding levelled, plumbed, aligned to faceand temporarily braced in accordance with job set outand engineer's specification.

3.4 Pre-cast cladding anchored/bolted/welded tostructure to engineer's specification.

3.5 Lifting gear/rigging equipment removed from pre-castcladding upon engineer's or site authority's approvalof fixings.

4 Caulk/seal/flash pre-castcladding

4.1 Pre-cast cladding caulked/sealed and/or flashed inaccordance with job drawings and engineer'sspecifications.


5.2 Waste materials removed and placed into job wastebins.

5.3 Tools and equipment cleaned, inspected, maintainedand stored.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to precast concrete components which have been cast off-site and delivered via appropriatetransport to be erected and installed as cladding to building structures.

Erection and installation work to be in accordance with:

• AS3850-1990 Tilt-Up Concrete And Pre-cast Concrete Elements For Use In Buildings• AS3850.1-1990 Safety Requirements• AS3850.3-1990 Guide To The Erection Of Pre-cast Concrete Members

Does not apply to tilt up form of cladding.


• structural steel• in-situ reinforced concrete• pre-cast concrete


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to specifications of work• crane operations and procedures




• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• working platforms and scaffolding• working with cranes

Types of securing or fixing methods may include:

• brackets screwed or welded to steelwork• pins or lugs welded to steelwork• masonry anchors• hook bolts• interlocking joints

Preparation to structure for fixing may include:

• drilling holes• installing masonry anchors• fixing plate to slab• welding brackets to columns/beams• bolting brackets


• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• respirators/masks• hard hat• ear plugs/muffs

Support plant and equipment may include:

• compressors, hoses and fittings• elevating work platforms• scaffolding• welding equipment• lifting gear and equipment


• measuring tape/rule• hammer drills• power drills• hammers• spirit levels• squares• power leads• ladders• screw drivers• levelling equipment• spanners• string lines

Work is to be undertaken in a team situation working with plant operators.

Erect pre-cast cladding BCG3106A


Plant to be run by operators with appropriate credentials and in accordance with Worksafe AustraliaStandards for Users and Operators of Industrial Equipment.

Fault reporting to be in accordance with organisation's workplace procedures and may be verbal or written.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by placing and securing pre-cast concrete panels to a nominated projectin accordance with drawings and specifications.




• indicate compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of erecting pre-cast

cladding• isolate work area in accordance with as3850• check installation location to determine access requirements, fixings location and potential

hazards• accurately set out and fit fixings to structure• check pre-cast components for conformity with drawings and specifications• report non conforming components to supervisor• protect panels from damage by slings and chains during lift• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective erecting operations• install pre-cast cladding and finish to specifications



• BCG1006A Use plant and equipment• BCG2001A Prepare surfaces• BCG2004A Carry out levelling




• drawings and specifications• pre-cast concrete construction and characteristics of panels• erection and installation of pre-cast concrete cladding• crane operations• Building Code of Australia and Australian Standards 3850.1 and 3850.3• licensing/regulatory requirements for dogging• effective temporary bracing techniques• plant and equipment• fixing methods for structures• basic signalling• measuring and levelling




• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• interpret documentation from a wide range of sources• organise work• use plant, tools and equipment• communicate effectively



• workplace location for erection and installation activity• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to application tasks• scaffolding required for activity• pre-cast panels relevant to proposed activity• drawings and specifications relevant to installation





Competency may be assessed in the normal workplace or simulated workplace setting.


KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 3 2 3 2 2 2



BCG3107A: Carry out veneer construction



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andpreparing for and laying bricks/blocks for veneerconstruction identified and adhered to.


1.4 All work to comply to AS1225-1984 Clay BuildingBricks, AS2904-1986 Damp Proof Courses AndFlashings, AS3700-1988 Masonry Code And AS2699-1984 Wall Ties On Masonry Construction andAS2733-1984 Concrete Masonry.


1.6 Tools and equipment selected consistent withrequirements of brick and block veneer construction,checked for serviceability and faults reported tosupervisor.

2 Set out brickwork/blockwork 2.1 Location and structural details of brickwork/ blockworkidentified from drawings and job specifications.

2.2 Brickwork/blockwork set out to location and dimensionsfrom drawings and specifications.

3 Construct base brickwork/blockwork

3.1 Mortar mixed and bricks/blocks laid to set out, tospecifications.

3.2 Brickwork/blockwork gauge determined and set out rodprepared.

3.3 Base brickwork/blockwork constructed for veneerconstruction to requirements of AS3700.

4 Construct veneer walls 4.1 Timber/steel structural frame checked to ensurecompleted ready for brick/block veneer with noprotrusions into cavity requirements.

4.2 Brickwork/blockwork laid and completed to jobdrawings and specifications.

4.3 Damp proof courses laid/built in to job specifications.

Carry out veneer construction BCG3107A


4.4 Ventilation for veneer construction built in tospecifications to requirements of as per AS1684 andBuilding Code of Australia.

4.5 Wall ties positioned and correctly fixed to timber/steelframework to AS2699.

4.6 Openings constructed and flashings installed to jobspecifications.

4.7 Cavities kept clear of mortar droppings and bridging.

4.8 Lintels installed to job specifications.

4.9 Top brickwork/blockwork constructed to eaves level torequirements of AS3700.


4.11 Walls built to gauge straight and true in plumb, line andlevel within tolerances set out in AS3700.

4.12 Control joints formed in accordance with locations onjob drawings and specifications and requirements ofAS3700.

4.13 Weepholes, brick/block reinforcing, vermin proofingand wall flashing located and built in, where required, tojob specifications.

4.14 Sill bricks cut where required and laid to line inaccordance with job specifications.

5 Rake/rule joints 5.1 Joints of laid brickwork/blockwork raked or ruled tocorrect depth and profile in accordance with jobspecifications.

5.2 Brickwork/blockwork brushed down prior to drying toremove unwanted mortar.


6.2 Cavities cleaned free of mortar and debris.

6.3 Waste and unwanted materials removed and placedinto job waste bins or rubbish stockpile.





RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit covers all straight, square and plumb brick/block veneer construction incorporating wall ties andreinforcement as specified.


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to work specifications• colour and shape of bricks/blocks• mortar mix/composition• control of handling procedures• application procedures• specified finish


• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• working platforms and scaffolding• safety hazards


• safety goggles/glasses• overalls• boots• gloves• dust masks/respirators• cap• overalls


• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level• dumpy level• concrete mixer• bolsters• wheelbarrows• shovels• masonry saw• trowels• straight edges• plumb rule• jointing tools• string line• line pins• profiles• scaffolding• mortar boards• masons square• angle grinder

Carry out veneer construction BCG3107A


• power leads


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by laying brickwork/blockwork to provide a veneer construction to atimber or metal stud framed structure.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable toworkplace and brick laying operations

• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment for carrying out veneer construction• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of brick/block veneer

construction• select bricks/blocks and mortar consistent with specification of required job• demonstrate accurate measuring and setting out techniques• determine wall location and set out accurately• lay bricks to line level, plumb and gauge• apply safe and effective procedures in erecting of scaffold• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work operations are carried

out• clean up cavities, wall and work area• complete base and brick/block veneer construction to specification

(2) Concurrent Assessment and Pre-requisite Relationship of Units


• BCG1006A Use plant and equipment• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices• BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/blockwork)• BCG2004A Carry out levelling.• BCG3110A Lay bricks and blocks (wall and corner)



• workplace and equipment safety requirements including regulations, codes and standards• job drawings and specifications• brick and block expansion and growth• control and articulation joints• mortar mix composition• range of mortar additives including plasticisers and their application• Building Code of Australia and Australian Standards 1225, 2699, 2733, 2904, 3700• materials and their characteristics• tools and equipment• quantities• scaffolding




• work safely• read and interpret drawings• interpret documentation from a wide range of sources• use tools and equipment suitable for erection of brick/block veneer construction• set out work• lay bricks and blocks• communicate effectively• calculate quantities• erect restricted height scaffolding



• workplace location• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to installation of brick/block wall in veneer construction• scaffolding• appropriate materials required for activity• drawings and specifications relevant to task


Competency should be assessed through direct observation of practical application and questionsrelated to underpinning knowledge.





KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 3 2 3 2 2

BGC3108A Carry out solid brick construction


BCG3108A: Carry out solid brick construction



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andconstructing brick walls identified and adhered to.

1.3 Material and quantity requirements identified from jobdrawings and specifications.

1.4 All work to comply with AS1225-1984 Clay BuildingBricks, AS2904-1986 Damp Proof Courses AndFlashings, AS3700-1988 Masonry Code, AS2699-1984 Wall Ties For Masonry Construction, AS2733-1984 Concrete Masonry and AS1684-1992 TimberFraming Code.


1.6 Tools and equipment selected consistent withrequirements of solid brick and block construction,checked for serviceability and any faults reported tosupervisor.

2 Set out brickwork 2.1 Location and structural details of brickworkdetermined from job drawings and specifications.

2.2 Base brickwork below floor construction set out tolocation and dimensions from job drawings andspecifications.

2.3 Load bearing brickwork including engaged piers,dwarf walls and isolated piers set out to job drawingsand specifications.

2.4 Cavity brick wall set out to requirements of jobdrawings.

3 Construct base brickwork 3.1 Mortar mixed and bricks laid to set out for brickworkto job specifications.

3.2 Brickwork/blockwork gauge determined and set outrod prepared.

3.3 Base brickwork constructed to specifications andrequirements of AS3700.

4 Position door and windowframes

4.1 Timber, aluminium and steel window frames locatedand built in to cavity walls to specification andprotected from mortar droppings during construction.

Carry out solid brick construction BGC3108A


4.2 Timber and steel door jambs located, built in andfixed to cavity walls and single leaf walls to jobdrawings and specifications.

5 Construct cavity and singlebrick walls

5.1 Cavity and single brick walls constructed accurately tojob specifications and AS3700.

5.2 Damp proof courses laid/built in to job specifications.

5.3 Ventilation for solid brick construction built torequirements of job specification and Building Codeof Australia.

5.4 Walls to be straight and true in plumb, line and levelwithin tolerances specified in AS3700-1988.

5.5 Scaffolding erected as required in accordance withjob requirements and OH&S regulations.

5.6 Wall ties positioned in accordance with AS2699.

5.7 Openings constructed and flashing installed to jobspecifications.

5.8 Lintels installed to job specifications.

5.9 Control joints formed in accordance with locations onjob drawings and AS3700.

5.10 Weepholes, brick reinforcing, vermin proofing andwall flashing located and built in, where required, tojob specifications.

5.11 Sill bricks cut where required and laid to line inaccordance with job specifications.

5.12 Tie downs for ceiling/roof structure built in to walls inaccordance with AS1684-1992.

6 Rake/rule joints 6.1 Joints of laid brickwork raked or ruled to correct depthand profile in accordance with job specifications.



7.2 Cavities cleaned free of mortar and debris.



7.5 Tools and equipment cleaned, maintained and



stored.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit covers all standing solid brick constructions including cavity and single wall constructions.

This unit also covers all straight, square level and plumb solid brickwork constructions incorporatingopenings, wall ties and reinforcement.


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to work specifications• colour and shape of bricks/blocks• mortar mix/composition• application procedures• specified finish



Bonds may include:

• english• flemish• stretcher• stack


• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• dust masks/respirators• hard hat• overalls


• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level• dumpy level• concrete mixer• bolsters• wheelbarrows• shovels• masonry saw• straight edge

Carry out solid brick construction BGC3108A


• plumb rule• jointing tools• string line• line pins• line blocks• profiles• scaffolding• mortar boards• buckets• mason’s square• angle grinder


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by constructing solid brick walls including a return end using at least twodifferent bonds of those listed in the range of variables statement.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable toworkplace and bricklaying operations

• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment for carrying out solid brickconstruction

• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of solid brick construction• select bricks and mortar consistent with specification of required job• correctly set out wall location• lay bricks to line, level, plumb and gauge• install flashings to all openings in accordance with specifications• safely erect scaffolding• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work operations• correctly positioned doors, and window/frames and jambs• clean cavities/wall face and work area to specification• complete solid brick construction to specifications



• BCG1006A Use plant and equipment• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices• BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/blockwork)• BCG2004A Carry out levelling• BCG3110A Lay bricks and blocks (wall and corner)



• workplace and equipment safety requirements including regulations, codes and standards



• job drawings and specifications• mortar mix composition• range of mortar additives including plasticisers and their application• Building Code of Australia and Australian Standards 1225, 2904, 3700, 2699, 2733, 1684• brick reinforcing• brick bond patterns• control and articulation joints• materials• tools and equipment• quantities• scaffolding


• work safely• read and interpret drawings• interpret documentation from a wide range of sources• organise work• use tools and equipment• lay bricks• communicate effectively• calculate quantities• erect restricted height scaffolding



• workplace location• tools, plant and equipment appropriate for solid brick construction processes• scaffolding• appropriate materials required for activity• drawings and specifications relevant to task






Assessment should be conducted while tasks are undertaken either individually or as part of a teamunder indirect supervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 2 3 2 2

BCG3109A Construct masonry steps and stairs


BCG3109A: Construct masonry steps and stairs



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andconstructing masonry steps and stairs recognised andadhered to.

1.3 Materials and quantities checked against job drawingsand specifications.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected consistent withrequirements of constructing masonry steps and stairs,checked for serviceability and any faults reported tosupervisor.

1.6 Safety hazards identified and correct procedures usedto eliminate hazards to self and others according toOH&S legislation and company policy.

2 Set out steps 2.1 Location and relative level of prepared footing checkedfrom job drawings and specifications.

2.2 Rise and going of flight and individual steps calculatedto requirements of the Building Code of Australia.

2.3 Flight and individual steps set out from calculations andjob drawings.

3 Lay bricks/blocks and formsteps

3.1 Mortar mixed to specifications of AS3700-1988Masonry Code and applied evenly to set out.

3.2 Bricks/blocks laid to correct line and set out with gaugemaintained to specifications.

3.3 Base brickwork/blockwork constructed and built up torequirements of job drawings and specifications.

3.4 Steps formed square, level, plumb and true and laid tospecified bond.

3.5 Profile of steps constructed to bond and design,aligned and plumb to specifications, where applicable.

3.6 Jointing carried out to job specifications.

3.7 Brickwork/blockwork laid and completed to jobdrawings, specification and AS3700.

Construct masonry steps and stairs BCG3109A


3.6 Brick/block faces cleaned free of mortar.





RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to both internal and external construction of steps and stairs in both brickwork andblockwork.

Stairs involve straight flights only and may incorporate landings.

Brickwork or blockwork to be in accordance with AS3700-1988 Masonry Code.


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to work specifications• color and shape of bricks/blocks• specification of mix• specified finish






• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level• dumpy level• concrete mixer• bolsters• wheelbarrows

BCG3109A Construct masonry steps and stairs


• shovels• masonry saw• straight edge• plumb rule• jointing tools• string line• line pins• line blocks• profiles• scaffolding• mortar boards• buckets• mason’s square• angle grinder


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated constructing a straight flight and landing of a nominated brick or blockstair.




• display compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment for laying brick/block steps• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of masonry step and stair

construction• select bricks and mortar consistent with specification and job required• locate position of stairs and accurately set out• calculate rise accurately ensure all rises between landings are of equal height• lay bricks/blocks to line and gauge• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work operations• complete construction of flight of masonry steps to specifications



• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/blockwork)• BCG2004A Carry out levelling• BCG3011A Carry out basic setting out• BCG3108A Carry out solid brick construction• BCG3110A Lay bricks and blocks (wall and corner)


KnowledgeA knowledge of:• workplace and equipment safety requirements including regulations, codes and standards• working drawings and specifications

Construct masonry steps and stairs BCG3109A


• design of masonry steps and stairs• mortar mix composition• range of mortar additives including plasticisers and their application• Building Code of Australia and Australian Standard 3700• materials and their characteristics• tools and equipment• quantities• scaffolding


• work safely• read and interpret drawings• interpret documentation from a wide range of sources• use tools and equipment suitable carrying out masonry step/stair construction• lay bricks• set out work• organise work• communicate effectively• calculate quantities• erect restricted height scaffolding



• workplace location ready for stair or steps installation• tools, plant and equipment appropriate for constructing masonry steps/stairs• scaffolding• appropriate materials to carry out proposed construction• drawings and specifications relevant to the task







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 1 2 3 2

BCG3110A Lay brick and blocks (wall and corner)


BCG3110A: Lay bricks and blocks (wall and corner)



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andlaying bricks and blocks identified and adhered to.

1.3 Job materials and equipment requirementsdetermined from drawings, site location andspecifications.

1.4 All work to comply with: AS1225-1984 Clay BuildingBricks, AS2904-1986 Damp Proof Courses AndFlashings, AS3700-1988 Masonry Code and AS2733-1984 Concrete Masonry.

1.5 Appropriate personal protective equipment selectedcorrectly fitted and used.


1.7 Tools and equipment selected to carry out processesconsistent with any job requirements, checked forserviceability and faults reported to supervisor.

2 Select bricks/blocks andmortar materials

2.1 Bricks/blocks selected according to qualityrequirements, specifications and AS1225 or AS2733.

2.2 Materials for mortar selected to requirements ofspecification and AS3700.

3 Prepare location andmaterials

3.1 Location of blockwork/brickwork set out on reinforcedconcrete footing slab in accordance with dimensionsand details from job drawings

3.2 Mortar mixed in accordance with the jobspecifications and AS3700.

3.3 Brickwork/blockwork gauge determined and set outrod prepared to gauge dimensions.

4 Lay bricks/blocks 4.1 Mortar applied evenly to job and set out location.

4.2 Bricks/blocks laid to line, level and plumb withperpends consistent in size to specifications.

4.3 Bricks/blocks laid maintaining stretcher bondthroughout construction, to specifications.

Lay brick and blocks (wall and corner) BCG3110A


4.4 Bricks cut neatly and accurately to work bond.

4.5 Corners formed maintaining bond and perpendicularintersection of both surfaces.

4.6 Reinforcement placed and laid to bed joints tospecifications, where applicable.

4.7 Blockwork/brickwork laid and completed to jobdrawings, specifications and AS3700.

4.8 Scaffolding erected as required in accordance withjob requirements and OH&S regulations.

4.9 Joints of laid brickwork/blockwork raked or ruled tocorrect profile and depth to job specifications.





RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit covers all concrete block and brick masonry units.


• wire cut bricks• pressed bricks• concrete blocks• hollow concrete blocks


• workplace operations and procedures• colour and quality of bricks or blocks• control of handling procedures• specification of mix• attention to work specifications• specified finish


• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• working platforms and scaffolding• safety hazards• use of tools and equipment




• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• respirators


• measuring tape/rule• hammers• bolster• shovels• wheelbarrows• spirit level• trowels• jointing tools• mortar boards• scaffolding• straight edges• profiles• line blocks• builders line• masonry saw

Construction may include reinforcement which may involve:

• wire strands• welded wire fabric

Reporting of faults to be in accordance with organisation's workplace procedures and may be verbal orwritten.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by constructing a masonry wall and corners in two separate projects, onewith bricks and the other using blocks.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable to worksiteoperations

• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of laying brickwork or

blockwork• select masonry units and mortar materials in accordance with specifications and job

requirements• accurately set out dimensions and alignment of work• proportion and mix mortar materials to specification• identify, minimise and eliminate safety hazards• erect scaffold in accordance with OH&S regulations• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others, where applicable, to ensure safe and effective work

operations• complete wall construction to specifications

Lay brick and blocks (wall and corner) BCG3110A




• BCG1003A Read and interpret drawings• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices• BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/blockwork)• BCG2004A Carry out levelling

Part of this competency may be assessed concurrently with:

• BCG3107A Carry out brick veneer construction



• workplace and equipment safety requirements including regulations, codes and standards• working drawings and specifications• bricks and blocks and material characteristics• laying of bricks or blocks• mortar mix composition• range of mortar additives including plasticisers and their application• Building Code of Australia and Australian Standards 1225, 2904, 2733, 3700• materials• tools and equipment• measuring and levelling• quantities• scaffolding


• work safely• read and interpret drawings• interpret documentation from a wide range of sources• organise work• use tools and equipment• set out work• lay bricks or blocks• communicate effectively



• workplace location• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to construction processes• scaffolding required for activity• material relevant to the proposed activity• drawings and specifications relevant to the tasks










KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 1 3 2 2 2 1

BCG3111A Lay multi-thickness walls and piers


BCG3111A: Lay multi-thickness walls and piers



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andconstructing brick walls and piers recognised andadhered to.

1.3 Material and quantity requirements identified from jobdrawings and specifications.

1.4 All work to comply with, AS1225-1984 Clay BuildingBricks, AS2904-1986 Damp Proof Courses AndFlashings, AS3700-1988 Masonry Code, AS2699-1984Wall Ties For Masonry Construction, AS1684-1992Timber Framing Code.


1.6 Tools and equipment selected consistent withrequirements of multi-thickness wall and pierconstruction, checked for serviceability and any faultsreported to supervisor.

2 Set out brickwork 2.1 Location and structural details of brickwork determinedfrom drawings and specifications.

2.2 Location and relative level of prepared footing checkedfrom job drawings and specifications.

2.3 Brickwork set out to location to dimensions fromdrawings and specifications.

3 Construct walls andattached piers

3.1 Mortar mixed to requirements of AS3700-1988 andbricks laid to set out for brickwork and specified bond.

3.2 Multi-thickness wall constructed maintaining bond andcompleted to job specifications and AS3700.

3.3 Attached piers, where required, bonded to wall to jobspecifications.

3.4 Walls to be straight and true in plumb line and levelwithin tolerance set in AS3700-1988.

3.5 Damp proof courses built in to specifications andrequirements of AS2904-1986.


Lay multi-thickness walls and piers BCG3111A


3.7 Openings constructed and lintels installed to jobspecifications and requirements of AS3700-1988.

3.8 Tie downs for ceiling/roof structure built into walls inaccordance with AS1684-1992.

4 Construct isolated piers 4.1 Bricks laid to set out and specified bond.

4.2 Piers constructed to line, level and plumb and bondmaintaining to job specifications.

5 Rake/rule joints 5.1 Joints to laid face brickwork raked or ruled to correctprofile and depth in accordance with job specifications.

5.2 Brickwork brushed down prior to drying to removeunwanted mortar.





RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to multi-thickness brick construction incorporating laying of bricks to a specified bond toprovide a designed structural stability and/or designed brick featured face.

This unit covers all straight, square and plumb multi-thickness blockwork/brickwork constructions includingwalls, columns, attached piers and incorporating wall ties and reinforcement.


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to specifications of work• color and shape of bricks/blocks• specification of mix• specified finish





Bond types for brickwork may include:

• english• flemish• stretcher




• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit levels• dumpy level• concrete mixer• bolsters• wheelbarrows• shovels• masonry saw• trowels• straight edges• plumb rule• jointing tools• string line• line pins• line blocks• profiles• scaffolding• mortar boards• buckets• mason’s square• angle grinder


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the performance of laying bricks to construct a triple thickness wallwith a corner and a multi-thickness isolated pier. The nominated projects are to be constructed maintainingthe specified bond.




• display compliance with organisational policies and procedures

Lay multi-thickness walls and piers BCG3111A


• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment for laying multi thickness walls andpiers

• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of constructing multi-thickness brick walls and piers

• select bricks and mortar consistent with specification of laying multi-thickness walls and piers• correctly locate and set out walls and piers with designed bond• lay brick to line and gauge with bond maintained• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work procedures• complete construction of multi-thickness wall and isolated pier to specification



• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/blockwork)• BCG2004A Carry out levelling• BCG3110A Lay bricks and blocks (wall and corner)• BCG3108A Carry out solid brickwork



• workplace and equipment safety requirements including regulations, codes and standards• working drawings and specifications• mortar mix composition• range of mortar additives including plasticisers and their application• Building Code of Australia and Australian Standards 1225, 2904, 3700, 2699, 1684• multi thickness wall construction• brick bond patterns• materials• tools and equipment• quantities• scaffolding


• work safely• read and interpret drawings• interpret documentation from a wide range of sources• organise work• set out work• erect restricted height scaffolding• use tools and equipment• lay bricks• communicate effectively• calculate quantities• erect restricted height scaffolding



• workplace location



• tools, plant and equipment appropriate for construction processes• scaffolding• appropriate materials for construction activity• drawings and specifications relative to tasks







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 1 3 3 2

BCG3112A Construct masonry arch - semi-circular and segmental


BCG3112A: Construct masonry arch - semi-circular andsegmental



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andconstructing masonry arches recognised and adheredto.

1.3 Delivered materials selected and checked against jobdrawings and specifications for quantity anddescription.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected consistent withrequirements of constructing semi circular andsegmental arches, checked for serviceability and anyfaults reported to supervisor.

1.6 Safety hazards identified and correct procedures usedto eliminate hazards and minimise risk to self andothers.

2 Set out first course 2.1 Location and line of brickwork /blockwork wall set outon concrete footing/slab to job drawings.

2.2 Span of arch determined from prepared allotted archcentre plus 4mm.

2.3 Arch span set out to location on concrete footing forfirst course, to job drawings.

3 Construct wall to arch level 3.1 Mortar mixed and bricks/blocks laid to form wall to setout.

3.2 All work carried out to specifications and requirementsof AS3700-1988 Masonry Code.

3.3 Gauge of abutting walls maintained within specifiedtolerance of AS3700 at each course level.

3.4 Vertical wall face maintained plumb and in alignment.

3.5 Bricks cut neatly and accurately.

3.6 Bricks/blocks laid level and to line over length of wall.

3.7 Abutment jambs/piers laid vertical up to springing line.

Construct masonry arch - semi-circular and segmental BCG3112A


3.8 Bricks/blocks laid in stretcher bond to springing line ofarch with perpendicular joints to be maintained invertical line.

4 Set up arch centre 4.1 Height to springing line accurately determined andheight to crown of arch to be within tolerance specifiedin AS3700.

4.2 Timber arch centre set up and supported to determinedheight on toms and wedges or adjustable metal props.

4.3 Supports adjusted to ensure arch centre level at rightangles to wall face and level across springing line.

4.4 Props, toms, packers and wedges located in order tobe easily removed.

4.5 Position of central key brick/blocks established forgauged arch and tape used to mark gauge.

5 Cut and lay bricks/blocks to formarch

5.1 Bricks/blocks cut and laid on centre to form arch tospecification.

5.2 All joints maintained to equal size on extrados.

5.3 Same size wedge shape maintained on face.

5.4 Centreline of key brick/block wedge maintainedthrough vertical centre line of arch.

5.5 Even joint thickness maintained around extrados forcut brickwork/blockwork.

5.6 All bricks cut and laid accurately to maintain evenjoints.

5.7 All joints, struck evenly to depth and shape toarchitect’s specifications.





RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to arches formed within walls and above columns/attached piers.

Construction may be of brick masonry or concrete block units and is to be in accordance with AS3700-1988Masonry Code.

Arch shapes are related to curves generated by a single radiating point.




• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to work specifications• color and shape of bricks/blocks• specification of mix• specified finish


• wire cut bricks• pressed bricks• concrete blocks






• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level• dumpy level• concrete mixer• wheelbarrows• shovels• masonry saw• angle grinder• trowels• straight edges• plumb rule• jointing tools• string line• line pins• line blocks• scaffolding• mortar boards• buckets• mason’s square• timber and centre

Construct masonry arch - semi-circular and segmental BCG3112A


• timber toms, packers and wedges• adjustable metal props


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the safe and accurate construction of arches using specified masonrymaterial of the types listed in the range of variables as the components for the installation.




• display compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate tools, equipment and processes consistent with requirements of

constructing masonry arches• select bricks and mortar consistent with the specification for constructing masonry• apply organisational quality procedures within context of constructing arches• select bricks/blocks and mortar consistent with specification or job required• correctly locate wall and arch and set out with designed bond• correctly set up arch centre• lay bricks to line and gauge with bond maintained• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work procedures• complete wall and archway to specifications



• BCG2004A Carry out levelling• BCG3011A Carry out basic setting out• BCG3108A Carry out solid brick construction• BCG3110A Lay bricks and blocks (wall and corner)• BCG3111A Lay multi thickness walls and piers



• working drawings and specifications• brick expansion and growth• control and articulation joints• workplace and equipment safety requirements including regulations, codes and standards• mortar mix composition• range of mortar additives including plasticiser/s and/or application• Building Code of Australia and Australian Standard 3700• materials• tools and equipment• quantities• scaffolding



• drawings and specifications relevant to task


• work safely• read and interpret drawings• use hand and power tools suitable for constructing masonry arches• measure and calculate quantities appropriate to construction of masonry• select materials appropriate to construction of masonry arches• prepare work• erect scaffolding (restricted height)• lay bricks



• suitable work area appropriate to construction process• tools, plant and equipment suitable for constructing masonry arches• suitable materials relevant to constructing masonry arches• scaffolding




Competency shall be assessed while work is undertaken under limited supervision with regularchecks, but may include some autonomy when working as part of a team.




KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 1 3 3 2



BCG3113A: Construct curved wall



1.2 OH&S requirements for application tasks andworkplace environment , recognised and adhered to.

1.3 Delivered materials selected and checked against jobdrawings and specifications for quantity anddescription.


1.5 Tools and equipment selected consistent withrequirements of constructing curved masonry walls,checked for serviceability and any faults reported tosupervisor.


2 Set out 2.1 Key plan curve points plotted from job drawings andtrammel centres established on footing slab.

2.2 Plan curve of wall drawn to specified location fromtrammel points and marked on footing slab.

3 Lay first course 3.1 Mortar mixed to specifications and spread evenly towall location as established.

3.2 Bricks laid to plan set out for line and specified bondaccording to job specification.

3.3 All work carried out to job specifications andrequirements of AS3700-1988 Masonry Code.

4 Lay subsequent courses andcomplete wall

4.1 Gauge maintained within tolerance specified byAS3700 at every course level.

4.2 Vertical face maintained in alignment.

4.3 Neat and accurate cuts made to bricks.

4.4 Bricks laid level over the length of the wall toestablished plan profile.

4.5 Bricks laid to specified bond with perpendicular joints(perpends) maintained in vertical line.

Construct curved wall BCG3113A


4.6 Restricted height scaffolding erected as required inaccordance with job requirements and OH&Sregulations.

4.7 Construction completed to requirements of jobdrawings and specifications.

4.8 Brickwork face brushed down and cleaned free ofmortar.





RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to walls curved constructed of clay brick or concrete masonry units.

All work to be in accordance with AS3700–1988 Masonry Code


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to work specifications• colour, shape and quality of bricks• specification of mortar mix• specified finish

Wall may be constructed of:

• pressed clay bricks• extruded clay bricks• concrete masonry blocks




• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• dust masks/respirators• hard hat



• overalls


• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level• dumpy level• concrete mixer• wheelbarrows• shovels• masonry saw• angle grinder• trowels• straight edges• plumb rule• jointing tools• string line• line pins• line blocks• scaffolding• mortar boards• buckets• mason’s square


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the safe and accurate construction of a specified curved wall using anyof the masonry types listed in the range of variables.




• display compliance with organisational policies and procedures• demonstrate appropriate selection and use of tools and equipment consistent with the

requirements of constructing a curved wall• set out wall to requirements of job drawings• apply organisational quality procedures and process within context of curved wall construction• selection of bricks and mortar consistent with job specification• lay bricks to specified curve• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work procedures• complete construction of curved masonry wall to specification



• BCG2084A Carry out levelling• BCG3011A Carry out basic setting out• BCG3111A Lay/bricks and blocks (wall and corner)

Construct curved wall BCG3113A


• BCG3108A Carry out solid brick construction



• brick expansion and growth• control and articulation joints• workplace and equipment safety requirements• mortar mix composition• range of mortar additives including plasticiser/s and/or application• Building Code of Australia and Australian Standard AS3700-1988 Masonry code• materials• tools and equipment• quantities• scaffolding


• work safely• use hand and power tools• measure and calculate quantities appropriate to the task• select materials appropriate to the task• organise work• set out work• lay bricks• erected restricted height scaffolding• communicate and effectively



• suitable work area appropriate to construction process• tools, plant and equipment suitable for constructing curved walls• appropriate communication of documentation relevant to task• appropriate construction materials relevant to bricklaying process




Competency shall be assessed while work is undertaken under direct supervision with regularchecks, but may include some autonomy when working as part of a team, in order to achieveoutcomes within time constraints.






KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 1 3 3 2



BCG3114A: Construct masonry blockwork



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andconstructing masonry blockwork identified and adheredto.


1.4 All work to comply with AS3700-1988 Masonry Code.


1.6 Tools and equipment selected consistent withrequirements of constructing concrete masonryblockwork, checked for serviceability and any faultsreported to supervisor.

1.7 Safe working area established and isolated, whereapplicable.

2 Set out blockwork 2.1 Location and structural details of blockwork determinedfrom job drawings and specifications.

2.2 Blockwork set out to location to dimensions from jobdrawings and specifications.

3 Construct masonry blockwork 3.1 Door and window frames located in position and built into blockwork to job specifications.

3.2 Concrete blocks laid using mortar to job specificationsand AS3700-1988.

3.3 First course of blockwork laid to set out line and level.

3.4 Where cavity construction involved, proceduresadopted to keep cavity clean.

4 Place reinforcement andconcrete

4.1 Horizontal mesh/wire reinforcing placed to engineersspecifications.

4.2 Vertical reinforcing rods placed to job specificationswith jointing/splicing made to engineer’s specifications.

4.3 Concrete mixed to specifications and placed andcompacted in hollow blockwork to specifications.

4.4 Openings constructed and bond beams formed as

Construct masonry blockwork BCG3114A


lintels.

4.5 Walls to be straight and true in plumb, line and levelwithin tolerances set in AS3700-1988.

4.6 Damp proof courses, vents, expansion joints andweepholes installed, where required, to jobspecifications.

4.7 Perpendicular joints (perpends) laid to vertical line.


4.9 Blockwork raked/ruled/struck to job specifications.

5 Install bond beam 5.1 Details of bond beam and reinforcement identified inaccordance with engineer's design and specifications.

5.2 False work constructed to job requirements to supportbond beam blocks over opening.

5.3 Bond beam blocks laid on falsework in conjunction withblockwork and in accordance with job drawings.

5.4 Mortar fins of bond blocks removed carefully tomanufacturer's requirements.

5.5 Reinforcement placed into bond beam and supported,providing correct cover in accordance with engineer'sspecifications.

5.6 Bond beam installation checked for placement andalignment in accordance with job drawings andengineer’s specifications.

5.7 Concrete mixed, placed into bond beam blocks andconsolidated to engineer's specifications.

6 Clean up 6.1 Blockwork face cleaned free of unwanted mortar andconcrete.

6.2 Cavity cleaned free of mortar and debris.

6.3 Supports within bond beam openings removed safelyonce bond beam design strength achieved.



RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit covers all hollow block masonry units manufactured of lightweight materials or concrete whichincorporate infilling of hollows to provide bonding strength to construction.

Reinforcement of structure can be either or both vertical or horizontal reinforcing.



This unit covers all straight, square and plumb blockwork construction which includes:

• walls• columns• attached piers• bond beams• incorporation of wall ties and reinforcement


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to work specifications• shape and quality of masonry blocks• specification of mortar mix• specified joint finish






• measuring tape/rule• hammers• spirit level• dumpy level• concrete mixer• wheelbarrows• shovels• masonry saw• angle grinder• trowels• straight edges• plumb rule• jointing tools• string line• line pins• line blocks• scaffolding• mortar boards

Construct masonry blockwork BCG3114A


• buckets• mason’s square• adjustable steel props• timber beam bearers


EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the construction of a masonry blockwork wall, including return cornersand a bond beam for a lintel.


Competence is to be observed in the following critical aspects:

• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable to worksiteand masonry block laying operations

• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment for masonry block laying• apply organisational quality procedures and process within context of masonry block construction• set out wall to requirements of job drawings• select blocks and mortar consistent within specifications for job• erect scaffold in accordance with OH&S regulations• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective work procedures• complete construction of masonry blockwork wall to job drawings and specifications



• BCG1003A Read and interpret drawings• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices• BCG1010A Carry out concrete work to simple forms• BCG1015A Prepare for construction process (brick/blockwork)• BCG2004A Carry out levelling



• workplace and equipment safety requirements including regulations, codes and standards'• block expansion• control and articulation joints• mortar mix composition• range of mortar additives including plasticisers and their application• Building Code of Australia and Australian Standard 3700• materials for constructing masonry blockwork walls• tools and equipment suitable for masonry blockwork construction• measuring and levelling


• work safely



• read and interpret drawings• interpret documentation from a wide range of sources• use tools and equipment• set out work• communicate effectively• organise work• lay masonry blockwork• erect restricted height scaffolding



• workplace location• tools, plant and equipment appropriate for constructing masonry blockwork walls• scaffolding• materials appropriate for masonry blockwork construction• drawings and specification relevant to tasks







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 2 2 2 3 2



BCG3115A: Lay segmental/unit paving


1 Define soil type and determinepaving material

1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’s pavingoperations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 Area and location of paving identified from jobdrawings.

1.3 Sub-soil and footing type identified and classifiedaccording to AS1289–Methods of Testing Soils forEngineering Purposes.

1.4 Base material selected according to type of paver,manufacturer's specifications and identified substrate.

1.5 Paving material selected to specification in accordancewith required finish of surface and paving/stoneworkpattern.

1.6 Bedding sand selected free from deleterious materiallikely to cause efflorescence or reduce skid resistance.

1.7 Required quantity of materials calculated from detailsfrom project drawings/site location and specifications.

2 Prepare to lay paving 2.1 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andprocesses of preparing base and laying paversidentified and adhered to.



2.4 Safety hazards identified and correct procedures usedto eliminate hazards and reduce risks to self andothers.

3 Construct paving 3.1 Location and shape of paving area set out todimensions from job drawings.

3.2 Excavation carried out to required depth, allowing forbase and thickness of unit and specified finished level.

3.3 Drainage pipes positioned in sub soil to localregulations or specification requirements.

3.4 Mortar for masonry paving mixed to specifications andAS3700 – Masonry in Buildings, where applicable.

3.5 Base material spread and compacted to specifications,where applicable.

Lay segmental/unit paving BCG3115A


3.6 Bedding material spread and screeded to designedlevel and alignment, where applicable.

3.7 Edge boards positioned to set out and specifications,where applicable.

3.8 Where drainage is necessary, paving surface is gradedto fall evenly without ponding to outlets or surface run-off system provided.

3.9 Paving units/segments cut and laid to designed patternand specifications.

3.10 Initial starting line of laying pavers determined andpavers layed to designed line conforming with specifiedpattern.

3.11 Paving units/segments laid with joints to specificationsand surface finish aligned.

3.12 Finished level maintained across junctions betweendifferent finishes.

3.13 Paving installation completed with joints finished tospecifications.

3.14 Paving surface cleaned on completion to requirementsof specifications.





RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit covers the laying of all types of segmental paving to both level and inclined surfacing, where thepaving material may be:

• clay bricks• clay pavers• stone segments• slate (random and regular)• concrete blocks• concrete pavers

Areas for paving may include:

• footpaths• roads• cycle and walking tracks• malls• podiums



• sports arenas• platforms• ramps• inclined surfaces

Pavers may be laid on different substrates which include:

• compacted crushed rock• concrete

Bedding of pavers may be of:

• bedding sand• cement mortar• adhesives• mortar with adhesive additive

Finishing of joints of pavers may be:

• closed joints• closed with sand brushed in• mortar joints


• workplace operations and procedures• quality of materials• control of handling procedures• use and maintenance of equipment• attention to work specifications• finishing of paved surfaces




• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• respirators• knee pads


• measuring tape/rule• rakes• vibrating plate• concrete mixer• wheelbarrows• masonry saws• trowels• screed board• shovels

Lay segmental/unit paving BCG3115A


• mallets• string lines• hammers• spirit level• power leads

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by laying two separate types of segmental/unit paving from those listed inthe range of variables, one to be laid to mortar bedding and the other to sand.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable toworkplace and paving operations

• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of laying segmental/unit

paving• adopt and use safe and effective procedures to prepare substrate and bedding material• ensure pattern consistent with drawings and specification• give attention to levels and ensuring no ponding on paved area• finish paved areas to even surface and to line either level or to specified gradient• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use plant and equipment• BCG1010A Carry out concrete work to simple forms• BCG2004A Carry out levelling• BCG3011A Carry out basic setting out



• workplace and equipment safety requirements• types of pavement units and material characteristics• methods of laying pavement units• working drawings and specifications• mortar mix specification• range of mortar additives including plasticisers, colours and waterproofing agents• base preparation and materials• tools, plant and equipment• calculation of material requirements• measuring and levelling


• work safely• organise work• interpret drawings and specifications• set out area



• operate basic plant and equipment• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively• calculate material quantities



• workplace location for proposed activity• tools and equipment appropriate to installation processes• materials relevant to proposed installation• drawings and specifications relevant to activity







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 2 3 2 3 1 2

BCG3116A Install marble floors and wall/column tiling


BCG3116A: Install marble floors and wall/column tiling



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment and ofhandling and fixing marble recognised and adhered to.


1.4 Samples of marble provided and approved prior tocommencement of work.



1.7 Delivered marble checked prior to use to ensureconformity to sample, dimensions and tolerances,where applicable.

1.8 Bedding and fixing materials selected in accordancewith structural drawings and specifications.

2 Prepare floor substrate 2.1 Location for marble tiled floor identified and set out todimensions from job drawings and specifications.

2.2 Structural floor checked for level and discrepanciesmarked and noted.

2.3 High sections checked with finished texture and whererequired, ground down to base requirements.

2.4 Area cleaned ready for laying of marble.

3 Lay marble 3.1 Layout of marble set out to designed pattern fromdrawings and specifications.

3.2 Materials checked for conformity to design and pattern,where applicable.

3.3 Joints determined in accordance with specificationsincluding metal strips.

3.4 Bedding material of adhesive/mortar identified fromspecifications.

3.5 Mortar and/or adhesive prepared in accordance withmanufacturer's specifications.

Install marble floors and wall/column tiling BCG3116A


3.6 Bedding material applied and marble carefully handledin placing process.

3.7 Marble and metal strips laid to specification to producetrue level surface where applicable.

3.8 Grouting mixed and carried out to specification, whereapplicable.

3.9 Finished surface polished to specification for finish.

3.10 Finished work protected in accordance withspecification requirements.

4 Prepare column/wall for marbletiling

4.1 Method of fixing determined in accordance withstructural substrate.

4.2 Datum or level line established.

4.3 Locations for fixings set out to line in accordance withsize of marble panels/tiles.

4.4 Holes for anchors/dowels drilled to required depths oranchor brackets fixed to framework to set outlocations.

4.5 Wall anchors fitted and fixed into place by chemicalanchorage.

4.6 Dowels for floor fixing, if applicable, chemically/groutfixed to position.

5 Fix marble panels/tiles 5.1 Marble panels/tiles carefully handled in positioning intoplace.

5.2 Scaffolding erected to OH&S requirements, whereapplicable.

5.3 Skirting or first panels fixed into place to line, level andplumb to specification.

5.4 Anchor brackets fitted and fixed into place tospecifications.

5.5 Panels/tiles installed using cramps for face alignmentand ties between edges.

5.6 Marble tiling installed with dry joints betweenpanels/tiles to specified tolerances and finish.

5.7 Panels/tiles adjusted with clamps to ensure face flushand plumb.

5.8 Corner joints made to specified finish.



5.9 Marble face cleaned and polished to finishspecification.



6.3 Unused materials, stored/stacked.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the laying of marble to floor surfaces and fixing of marble panels/tiles to walls or columns.

Walls or columns may be constructed of:

• reinforced concrete• brickwork• structural steel sections

Anchors to concrete or brickwork may be expanding sockets or chemically anchored bolts.

Anchor brackets for fixing of marble include:

• pin• corbel plate• slotted

Types of cramps include:

• turned end• back• fish tailed• s-hook• dog

Corner joints for panels/tiles may be:

• straight or butt joint• birds beak







• working platforms• use of adhesives



Protection of finished work may involve:

• covering with plywood or particle board• covering with old carpet• isolated with barricades around• covered and taped with plastic sheeting


• measuring tape/rule• spirit level• straight edge• chalk line• trowel• grinding machine• bedding mallet• hammer• clogging tool• screw cramp and wedges• g-clamps• hammer drill and drill bits

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competence is to be demonstrated by laying a marble floor and fixing marble tiling/panelling in accordancewith any of the conditions listed within the range of variables statement.




• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of laying and fixing ofmarble

• identify location and details of method of fixing marble• identify hazards and control measures selected prior to commencing activities• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks• use safe and effective procedures to handle materials• accurately set out and install fixings to substrate• use safe and effective procedures to complete surfaces to finish specifications• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective operations• complete of installation to alignment and finish to specifications





• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices• BCG2001A Prepare surfaces• BCG2004A Carry out levelling


KnowledgeA knowledge of

• marble and its characteristics• methods of laying and fixing marble• relevant State/Territory OH&S legislation, standards and codes of practice• workplace and equipment safety requirements• site drawings and specifications• scaffolding• measuring and levelling• tools and equipment• fixing of materials• adhesives

SkillsThe ability to

• work safely• interpret drawings and documentation• organise work• calculate material quantities• set out work• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively



• workplace location• materials appropriate to installation activities• scaffolding components appropriate to tasks• tools and equipment appropriate to application tasks• appropriate documentation related to activity











KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 1 2 2 2 2 2



BCG3117A: Fix shingles - roofs and facades


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’s roofingoperations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements for work environment and fixingshingles to roof and other surfaces recognised andadhered to.

1.3 Surfaces to be covered identified from job drawingsand quantities of shingles/shakes calculated.

1.4 Quantities of battens, sarking materials and boards, ifspecified, calculated and selected to job drawings andspecifications.


1.6 Tools and equipment selected to carry out processesconsistent with job requirements, checked forserviceability and any faults reported.

1.7 Roof/wall surface checked to ensure complete andready for covering.


2 Prepare roof surface 2.1 Fall safe devices installed to roof perimeter to OH&Sregulations.

2.2 Scaffolding erected to OH&S regulations, whereapplicable.

2.3 Elevator assembled to manufacturer’s specificationsand used in accordance with OH&S regulations.

2.4 Roof surface set out, sarked and boarded whererequired to specifications.

2.5 Battens cut, fitted and fixed to line and spacing toshingle manufacturer's and job specifications.

2.6 Metal valley sheets laid and fixed into place by nailingon edge extremities to specification.

2.7 Protrusions prepared for installation of flashing withcovered roof surface.

3 Lay and secure shingles/shakes 3.1 Shingles/shakes loaded on to roof, supported andevenly distributed.

Fix shingles – roofs and facades BCG3117A


3.2 Bituminous felt laid below initial course of shingles, tojob specifications.

3.3 Shingles/shakes fixed in double thickness to linespecified spacing between and guttering overhang tospecification.

3.4 Subsequent courses laid with bituminous felt and fixedto shingle to manufacturer's recommendations and jobspecifications.

3.5 Staggered joints with overlapping shingles/shakesmaintained to +40mm.

3.6 Singles/shakes split/cut to work junctions with walls orroof surfaces.

3.7 Valleys finished to specification.

3.8 Gable ends finished to line to minimum 50mmoverhang.

4 Finish hips and ridges 4.1 Same size shingles/shakes selected for hips andridges.

4.2 Edges of shingles/shakes bevel cut to provide buttjoints in capping sections.

4.3 Hips and ridges covered using capping sections andmetal flashing to specification.

4.4 Hips and ridges fixed and finished to line tospecifications.

5 Clad walls and facades 5.1 Method of finishing shingles/shakes on wall/facadeidentified from specifications.

5.2 Sheathed surfaces sheeted and fixed to framework tojob specifications.

5.3 Wall/facade set out to spacing for battens, ifapplicable, and specified exposure of shingles/shakes.

5.4 Permeable building paper and shingles/shakes fittedand nailed to specified method for fixing.

5.5 Junctions at corners constructed to specified finishes.

6 Clean up 6.1 Flashings finished to specification.

6.2 Roof and guttering cleaned free of debris.

6.3 Re-usable material removed and stored.



6.4 Waste material and debris removed and work area leftclean.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the fixing of timber shingles or shakes to provide a waterproof covering to roofs andwalls/facades.




• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• working platforms and scaffolding• fall safe devices


• safety goggles/glasses• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators• gloves• cap


• measuring tape/rule• hammer• spirit level• squares• nail bag• chisels• hand saws• saw stools• power saws• power drills• power planer• nail gun• air compressor and hoses• power leads• string lines• chalk lines• ladders• cutting blades



Lengths of shakes and shingles may be:

• 450mm• 600mm

Widths for shingles/shakes vary from 100mm – 300mm.

Types of shakes include:

• straight - split• taper split• handsplit and resawn

Roofs are best covered providing a triple thickness with less than 50% of shingle/shake exposed to theelements. Exposure tables provide batten spacing.

Minimum recommended pitch of roofs is 18 degree or 1 in 3 slope.

Groundwork for shingles/shakes on roof surfaces may be:

• battened and felted• board and felted• boarded, battened and felted

Junctions at roof valleys may be:

• open• closed

Sarking material should be vapour permeable.

Types of roof protrusions include:

• chimneys• dormed windows• two-storey insert• skylights• pipes and flues

Wall/facade covering methods include:

• single coursing• double coursing

Joining at wall corners may be:

• butted against boards - external• butted against timber stop - internal or external• laced - external• laced with flashing behind - internal

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by covering a roof surface and a wall using either shingles or shakes, inaccordance with any of the conditions listed within the range of variables statement.





• demonstrate compliance with OH&S regulations applicable to workplace roofing operations• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of fixing shingles to a roof• identify location and details of methods of fixing shingles/shakes• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks• accurately set out and install boarding, sarking and battens• use safe and effective procedures to ensure specified fixing and carry out covering of fixing• use safe and effective procedures to complete surfaces to finish specifications• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective operations



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG3036A Tile a regular roof



• relevant State/Territory Occupational Health and Safety legislation, standards and codes ofpractice

• workplace and equipment safety requirements• site drawings and specifications• scaffolding and fall safe devices• materials and characteristics• tools and equipment• flashing of surfaces• fixing of materials


• work safely• interpret drawings and documentation• organise work• calculate material quantities• set out work• use tools and equipment• communicate effectively



• workplace location• materials appropriate to installation activities• scaffolding components appropriate to tasks• tools and equipment appropriate to installation processes• appropriate documentation related to tasks











KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 1 3 2 3 2 1



BCG3118A: Erect and dismantle scaffolding - basic


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 OH&S requirements for workplace environment anderecting and dismantling scaffolding recognised andadhered to. Purpose for scaffolding/equipment andvarious work tasks confirmed.

1.2 Expected loading on scaffold/equipment andsupporting structure determined using load tables.

1.3 Site plans, scaffolding/equipment designs anddrawings interpreted as necessary to industrypractices.

1.4 Work specifications interpreted in conjunction withdrawings as necessary.

1.5 Potential hazards identified from plans, drawings andspecifications.

1.6 Types and quantities of components estimated forappropriate types of scaffolding/equipment.


1.8 Potential hazards identified.

1.9 Optimum prevention/control measures selected.

1.10 Adequate site access and egress identified.

1.11 Site sketches drawn and dimensions taken asnecessary.

1.12 Check for appropriate approvals for work and forpersons.

1.13 Job method developed to include hazard prevention,control measures and safety procedures.

1.14 Appropriate scaffolding and equipment componentsselected and inspected with damaged componentslabeled and rejected.

1.15 Rejected components repaired or sent for repair orscrapped.

1.16 Tools selected and inspected. Faulty tools repaired orsent for repair or scrapped.

1.17 Scaffolding/equipment gear prepared in accordancewith codes of practice and guides.

Erect and dismantle scaffolding – basic BCG3118A


1.18 Transport of equipment and tooling co-ordinated andunloading sequenced to suit job method.

2 Erect scaffolding/equipment 2.1 Site isolated using barriers as necessary.

2.2 Safety procedures implemented, including necessarysignage.

2.3 Lifting device, where applicable, assembled anderected.

2.4 Adequate footing to Australian Standards establishedfor scaffolding/equipment.

2.5 Scaffolding/equipment erected in accordance withplanned hazard prevention and control measures,acceptable safe work practices, Australian Standardsand manufacturer's requirements.

2.6 Work performed safely while platforms incomplete.

2.7 Erection carried out for appropriate types ofscaffolding/equipment.

2.8 Completed scaffolding/equipment inspected for safetyand compliance with design and statutoryrequirements.

2.9 Site left clear of all surplus components, equipment,tools and debris.

2.10 Scaffolding/equipment gear used in accordance withcodes of practice and guides.

2.11 Safety nets and static lines erected as necessary.

3 Inspect, repair and alterscaffolding/equipment

3.1 Critical structural and safety areas ofscaffolding/equipment inspected for damage, corrosionand wear.

3.2 Current use of scaffolding/equipment checked againsttype of scaffolding equipment.

3.3 Inspection log completed, if applicable.

3.4 Proposed change reviewed to determine if wascovered in original planning.

3.5 Scaffolding/equipment inspected to confirm stability.

3.6 Alteration or repair carried out using same principlesas for erecting scaffolding/equipment.

3.7 Alteration or repair performed with due regard forcritical safety and structural areas ofscaffolding/equipment.



4 Dismantle scaffolding/equipment 4.1 Proposed dismantling reviewed to determine ifscaffolding/equipment remains as detailed in originalplanning.

4.2 Dismantling carried out using same competencies asfor erecting scaffolding/equipment.

4.3 Dismantling performed with due regard for criticalstructural and safety areas of scaffolding/equipment.

5 Clean up 5.1 Site clearance co-ordinated or undertaken with surplusmaterial, equipment, tools and debris removed and siteleft in safe condition.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the range of scaffolding equipment classified under "Basic" in accordance with WorksafeAustralia Standards.

Equipment range includes and is limited to:

• prefabricated scaffolds• cantilevered hoist with maximum working load limit not exceeding 500 kilograms (materials only)• ropes• gin wheels• safety nets and static lines• bracket scaffolds (tank and formwork)


• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• working platforms and scaffolding• use of ladders




• measuring tape/rule• hammer• spirit level• block spanners• nail bag• spanners



• shovels• power saws• power leads

Work to be undertaken as an individual or as part of a team and carried out to State/Territory regulatory andlegislative requirements.

Potential hazards include:

• overhead powerlines• trees• overhead service lines such as steam, gas, water, telephone• underground services• uneven and/or unstable ground• allowable floor loading as appropriate• other workers and persons• surrounding buildings/vessels/structures/equipment• hazardous materials• corrosive substances• barricades• inadequate lighting• dynamic loading such as concrete pump lines

Scaffolding equipment components include:

• steel and aluminium tubes• couplers and accessories• scaffolding planks• prefabricated components• ropes• gin wheels• portable ladders and stairs

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by carrying out all elements in accordance with the scaffolding/equipment listed within the range of variables statement.




• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of erecting and dismantlingscaffolding

• identify location and details of scaffolding requirements• identify hazards and control measures selected prior to commencing activities• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment to carry out tasks• use safe and effective procedures to handle materials• use safe and effective procedures to erect and dismantle scaffolding to regulatory requirements• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective operations





• BCG1007A Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding• BCG1008A Use simple levelling devices


KnowledgeA knowledge of

• relevant State/Territory OH&S legislation, standards and codes of practice• workplace and equipment safety requirements• site drawings and specifications• scaffolding/equipment components• materials and characteristics• tools and equipment• levelling and measuring

SkillsThe ability to

• work safely• interpret drawings and documentation• organise work• use tools and equipment• erect scaffolding• communicate effectively



• workplace location• scaffolding components appropriate to tasks• tools and equipment appropriate to scaffolding processes• appropriate communication of documentation related to tasks








Assessment shall be while tasks are undertaken either individually or working with a team underlimited supervision.



KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

1 1 1 1 1 1 1



BCG3119A: Operate pulveriser



1.1 OH&S requirements for operating a pulverisor incrushing plant operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 Daily crushing plant operations, size and type ofmaterials to be crushed defined from crushingschedule.

1.3 Appropriate personal protective equipment selected,correctly fitted and used in accordance with AS1270and AS1336.

2 Inspect and maintain pulverisorequipment

2.1 Pulverisor checked prior to start up to ensure correctfunction according to manufacturer's specifications andoperator's manual.

2.2 Lubrication of pulverisor plant and equipment carriedout to manufacturer's specifications.

3 Pulverise raw materials andmaintain quality control

3.1 Pulverisor operated correctly on raw material stockpile.

3.2 Feed of pulverised material to loader maintainedaccording to daily crushing plant schedule.

3.3 Appropriate standard of pulverised material maintainedas required by engineer’s specification.

4 Maintain safe working area 4.1 Pulverisor/stock pile area maintained safely inaccordance with crushing plant safety plans and OH&Sregulations.

5 Shut down pulverisor equipment 5.1 Pulverisor equipment safely turned off and positionedin accordance with manufacturer's recommendationsand operator's manual.

RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to crawler operated excavators using pulverising equipment on raw material stock piles ondemolition sites.


• noise control• dust control• inspection of plant and equipment• pre start up and post start up checks• operating procedures• safe working area• manual handling techniques

Operate pulveriser BCG3119A


• maintenance and servicing


• jacket• boots• gloves• safety glasses/goggles• ear plugs/muffs• dust masks/respirators


• AS1270-1988 Acoustics – Hearing Protection• AS1336-1997 Recommended practices for Occupational Eye Protection

Pulverisors to be operated by operators with appropriate credentials and in accordance with WorksafeAustralia Standards for Users and Operators of Industrial Equipment.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by the performance of operating a pulverisor in crushing plant operations.



• demonstrate compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable to worksiteand crushing plant operations

• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within context ofoperating a crushing plant

• identify and correctly apply requirements to daily crushing schedule• give appropriate to inspection, routine maintenance and start up procedures to pulverisor• demonstrate safe and effective operation of pulverisor on raw materials to maintain appropriate

standard of material• supply of pulverised material to loader maintained to daily crushing schedule• maintain safe working area around stock pile and pulverisor operations• demonstrate safe and effective shut down and positioning of pulverisor equipment at completion

of work• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective operations of crushing

operations



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG2003A Carry out general demolition




• mechanical plant



• plant operation• tools and equipment• servicing equipment• documentation


• work safely• interpret documentation• use tools, plant and equipment• prepare for work application• solve problems• communicate effectively



• crushing plant



Assessment may be made by intermittent checking at various stages of each task application or atthe completion of each task in accordance with the performance criteria.






KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 1 1 3



BCG3120A: Fix linings and panelling



1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andfitting and fixing of linings and panelling identified andadhered to.

1.3 Surface areas to be lined and type of material specifiedidentified from drawings and specifications.

1.4 Materials for lining selected and checked for conformityagainst drawings and specifications.



2 Locate and prepareframe/surface

2.1 Surface to be lined located from job drawings andprepared to specifications.

2.2 Surface set out, where required, to provide balancedpanel or board effect.

2.3 Fixing procedures for specified lining materialscorrectly identified from specifications.

3 Install lining to frame/surface 3.1 Lining material marked, cut to length and/or shape,fitted and positioned to specifications.

3.2 Lining installed with no gaps and vertical joints v-jointedto specified size, where applicable.

3.3 Panelling fixed so that panel sections fit tightly againsteach other with edges planed where necessary toobtain specified joint.

3.4 Securing and fixing of lining carried out to job andmanufacturer’s specifications.

3.5 Surrounds/edging marked, cut, fitted and finished tospecifications, where applicable.

3.6 Lining installed to within +/- 1mm over any 2.4m lengthfor straightness and within 0.5mm gaps for beadedjoints.

4 Clean up 4.1 Area cleared free of all waste material and tools.


Fix linings and panelling BCG3120A




RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to the lining of framed walling or battened surfaces to provide a finished surface.

Lining and panelling materials include:

• lining boards• veneer panelling• plywood• hardboard• MDF board• particle board• fibre cement sheet








• measuring tape/rule• hammer• spirit level• squares• chisels• hand saws• saw stools• power saws• power drills• power planer• nail gun• air compressor and hoses• power leads• hand plane



• string line• straight edge

Preparation of surface may involve:

• fixing of battens to surface• trimming of frame members to line• fixing of additional noggings• packing of frame members

Methods of fixing may include:

• nails• screws• adhesives

Surrounds/edging to provide finish may include:

• flat beading• quad beading• architrave• skirting

Lining materials may be fixed vertically, horizontally or at an angle.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by installing lining boards, veneered panelling and another sheetedmaterial from those listed in the range of variables statement, to nominated areas to be lined.



• demonstrated compliance with Occupational Health and Safety regulations applicable toworkplace operations

• show compliance with organisational quality procedures and processes within the context ofinstalling lining materials

• identify location and details of lining materials to be installed• select and use of appropriate processes, tools and equipment• accurately set out, mark and cut material• use safe and effective procedures to set out, prepare and fix materials to areas• identify typical faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective workplace operations• complete installation of materials to specifications



• BCG1002A Plan and organise work• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1016A Prepare for construction process (carpentry)• BCG2000A Assemble simple partition frames• BCG2001A Prepare surfaces


• BCG3029A Fix timber mouldings

Fix linings and panelling BCG3120A




• workplace and equipment safety requirements• working drawings and specifications• quality assurance with lining of surfaces• materials• tools and equipment• fixing and fasteners• adhesives• calculation of material requirements• measuring and leveling


• work safely• interpret drawings and specifications• organise work• use tools and equipment• use adhesives, fixings and fasteners• calculate material quantities• measure and level relevant to lining processes• communicate effectively



• workplace location with prepared surface ready for lining• lining materials appropriate to application activities• tools and equipment appropriate to installation processes• drawings and specifications applicable to proposed activities




• observation of the application process• inspection of installed area• questioning related to underpinning knowledge







KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 1 2 2 2



BCG3121A: Apply waterproofing for wall and floortiling


1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 Quality Assurance requirements of company’s wall andfloor tiling operations recognised and adhered to.

1.2 OH&S requirements for workplace environment andwaterproofing processes identified and adhered to.

1.3 All work to be carried out in accordance with AS3740-1994 Waterproofing of Wet Areas Within ResidentialBuildings.

1.4 Type of waterproofing material identified in accordancewith job specification, type of construction surface andjob safety requirements.

1.5 Surface area/s to be waterproofed identified from jobdrawings, specifications and job location.

1.6 Area to be waterproofed inspected for defects andsurface irregularities in accordance with job andmanufacturer’s specifications.



1.9 Hazardous material stored in accordance with OH&Slegislation.

2 Prepare for work application 2.1 Waterproofing material checked for conformity tospecification and compatibility with surface materialand proposed tile adhesive.


2.3 Safe working area established and maintained inaccordance with MSDS, directions where applicable,and OH&S regulations.

3 Prepare surface 3.1 Defects including caulking made good to requirementsof waterproofing material manufacturer’s specifications.

3.2 Surface/surfaces to be waterproofed prepared tomanufacturer’s specification.

3.3 Prepared surface/s prime coated to waterproofingmaterial manufacturer’s specification, where

Apply waterproofing for wall and floor tiling BCG3121A


applicable.

3.4 Perimeter and corner flashings, where applicable,prepared to job requirements and placed and fixed tojob specifications and AS3740.

4 Apply material to formwaterproof membrane

4.1 Material mixed or prepared in accordance withmanufacturer’s specifications.

4.2 Matt material reinforcing set out and cut torequirements of area waterproofing junctions andsurface requirements, where applicable.

4.3 Waterproofing material applied to surface inaccordance with manufacturer’s specifications and jobrequirements.

4.4 Reinforcement material worked into locations inaccordance with manufacturer’s specifications andAS3740.

4.5 Waterproof membrane installed in accordance withmaterial manufacturer’s recommendations andspecified thickness and finish.

4.6 Bondbreaker used in installation to ensure no adhesionbetween floor and framed walls in accordance withAS3740.

4.7 Waterproof membrane cured to surface in accordancewith manufacturer’s specifications.

4.8 Installed waterproofing protected using methods andmaterials consistent with manufacturer’s specifications.

5 Install tap and drainage seals 5.1 Recess for tap seals formed and tap seal/flange fittedand installed to manufacturer’s and job specifications,sealing surrounds of tap.

5.2 Recess for leak control flange in floor waste formedand flange fitted and sealed to job specifications flushwith surface of waterproof membrane.

5.3 Correct sealant/adhesive used for flange fitting inaccordance with compatibility of membrane and flangematerials.

6 Clean Up 6.1 Surface cleaned and area cleared to specification.

6.2 Waste materials removed and placed into job bins or torequirements of MSDS.





RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to waterproofing materials applied to surfaces to provide a waterproof seal for wall and floortiling.

All waterproofing construction is to be in accordance with:

• AS3740-1996 Waterproofing of Wet Areas Within Residential Buildings• Building Code of Australia• ‘membrane materials must be compatible with tile adhesives’

Types of construction surfaces include:

• render over brickwork• blockwork• fibre cement sheeting on wall/floor framing• waterproof plywood/particleboard on floor framing• concrete

Waterproofing applications include:

• shower areas• bathroom areas• laundry areas• floors, walls and hob walls

Surface preparation may include but is not limited to:

• filling of holes or depressions• washing down• chipping or scraping of protrusions• cleaning free of dust• punching nails

Waterproofing materials include but are not limited to:

• fibreglass reinforced plastic• epoxy resins• acrylic emulsions• sheet synthetic rubber• sheet plastic

Liquid waterproofing material applications include:

• brushing• rolling

Reinforcing material may include:

• fibreglass mat• polyester mat• chop fibre mat


• work procedures• safety requirements



• control of handling• condition of material• application procedures• specification finish


• protective clothing• protective equipment• safety hazards• use of plant and equipment• hazardous materials


• mixing• stirring• batching and mixing• cutting sheet material to length


• safety goggles/glasses• boots• gloves• masks• respirators


• rollers• brushes• pots• cutting blades• scissors• straight edge• measuring tape/rule• spirit level• chisels• hammer• cold chisel• angle grinders• electric drills• buckets• broom

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by applying waterproofing material to form an in-situ liquid membrane,and installing seals to tap locations and a leakage control waste to a nominated shower area.






• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of installing waterproofingto a wet area

• identify location and details of waterproofing materials and application• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• use safe and effective procedures to handle materials• use safe and effective procedures to prepare surfaces for application• seal joints between sheet materials and floors and walls in accordance with manufacturer’s

specifications• identify waterproofing material’s compatibility with surface and proposed tile adhesive• demonstrate correct techniques in preparing and applying waterproofing material to surfaces to

manufacturer’s specifications• demonstrate compliance with material application for turn-ups, junctions with frame construction

and junctions between walls and floors to AS3740• complete waterproofing material application to job specifications, thickness and AS3740• identify typical faults and problems that occur and the necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective operations• demonstrate effective installation of tap seals and leakage control wastes to waterproof

membrane



• BCG1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG1011A Handle construction materials and safe disposal of waste• BCG2001A Prepare surfaces



• workplace and equipment safety requirements including regulations, codes and standards• AS3740-1996 Waterproofing of Wet Areas Within Residential Buildings• drawings and specifications• waterproofing materials• types of tiles and tile adhesives• structure of adhesives and waterproofing materials• methods of applying materials to surfaces• tools and equipment• waste and tap fittings


• work safely• read and interpret drawings, specifications and documentation• organise work• use tools and equipment• recognise and safely handle hazardous material• communicate effectively



• workplace location• tools and equipment relevant to application processes



• materials relevant to the proposed waterproofing activity• drawings, specifications and documentation relevant to activity








Assessment should be while tasks are undertaken either individually or as part of a team underindirect supervision.

KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

3 1 2 1 2 2 2



BCG3122A: Erect/dismantle slip form formwork




1.3 Design of formwork structure identified from site andengineering detailed drawings.



2 Set out 2.1 Set out points and lines located according toengineering drawings, survey datum points and siteplan.

2.2 Formwork positioning located to predetermined set out.

3 Assemble core form system 3.1 Internal pre-fabricated system wall form shutterserected and fixed into locations to engineeringdrawings and specifications.

3.2 Concrete nib walls poured to heights consistent withengineer's requirements.

3.3 Erected shutters fitted to nib walls.

3.4 Shear key feet installed to manufacturer'sspecifications.

3.5 Platforms and assembly fitted into core tomanufacturer’s specifications.

3.6 Structural steel systems gridwork and hydraulic hoselines fitted to manufacturer's specifications.

3.7 Wall form shutters suspended and system claddingand platforms fitted and completed to manufacturer’sspecifications and engineer's requirements.

3.8 Temporary lighting and emergency electrical workcarried out according to specifications and authorityrequirements.

4 Locate and install penetrations 4.1 Locations and dimensions of penetrations set out inline with designated tolerance from engineeringdrawings.

Erect/dismantle slip form formwork BCG3122A


4.2 Penetration block outs constructed where required toengineering drawings and specifications.

4.3 Penetrations installed to requirements of engineeringdrawings and specifications.

4.4 Penetration block outs installed as slop form reacheslocations, to engineer’s specifications.

5 Install reinforcement 5.1 Reinforcement bars and/or mesh installed and fixed toconform to engineer's specifications.

5.2 Jacking rods installed and fixed to designed locationsto engineer’s specifications.

6 Close shutters 6.1 External prefabricated system wall shutters erectedand fixed into location to engineer's and manufacturer'sspecification.

7 Locate yokes, jacks and connecthydraulic system

7.1 Systemised yokes installed to jacking rods withinreinforcement and wall form shutters in accordancewith engineer’s specifications.

7.2 Jacks installed on yokes to requirements in accordancewith system design and engineer’s specifications.

7.3 Hydraulic hose lines fitted to jacks and central controlsystem to engineer’s specifications.

8 Place concrete 8.1 Concrete placed and consolidated within system wallform shutters to engineer's requirements.

8.2 Rate of placement of concrete maintained to rate ofslip of formwork to engineer’s specifications andinstructions.

8.3 Concrete cured to engineer's specification.

9 Activate jacking system 9.1 Hydraulic jacking system activated in accordance withengineer’s specifications and design to slip formwork.

10 Slip system 10.1 Formwork systems hydraulically jacked intoprogressive position according to engineer’sspecifications.

10.2 Trailing platforms installed to engineer’s specifications.

10.3 Stairs and access ways installed according to drawingsand engineer’s specifications.

10.4 Formwork progressively slipped to completion of pour.



10.5 Reinforcement and jacking rods extended duringprogress of slip operation, to engineer’sspecifications/directions.

11 Dismantle system 11.1 System dismantled in accordance with manufacturer'sand engineer's specifications.

11.2 Safe working area maintained to OH&S regulations.

12 Clean up 12.1 Waste materials removed and placed into job wastebins or rubbish stockpiles.

12.2 System components cleaned, maintained tomanufacturer's specified condition and stored.


RANGE OF VARIABLES

This unit applies to systemised formwork constructed and operated to engineer’s specifications for slipformwork.

Applications of slip formwork include:

• cores• walls• silos




• workplace environment and safety• protective clothing and equipment• use of tools and equipment• handling of materials• working platforms and scaffolding• working with hydraulic equipment






• measuring tape/rule• hammer• spirit level• nail bag• levelling equipment• chisels• hand saws• saw stools• power saws• power drills• air compressor and hoses• power leads• spanners• pneumatic wrenches

Formwork to be in accordance with AS3610-1995 Formwork for Concrete.

Reporting of faults should be in accordance with worksite operational procedures and may be verbal orwritten.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

Competency is to be demonstrated by working with a team to carry out the safe and effectiveerecting/dismantling of slip form formwork to engineer’s design and industry standards on a designed project.




• show compliance with organisational policies and procedures• select and use appropriate processes, tools and equipment• apply organisational quality procedures and processes within context of erection and operation of

slip formwork to form concrete• demonstrate accurate setting out for location of formwork• adopt and use safe and effective procedures in the assembling of shutters• display compliance with specification details in erecting formwork and structural steel support• apply correct procedures in connecting hydraulic hose lines• demonstrate safe and effective procedures in assembling and installing all platforms, walkways

and stairs supporting formwork operation• apply correct procedures in setting up blockouts and placing reinforcement to specifications• demonstrate sound procedures in effectively supporting team operation with processes of

pouring concrete to slip formwork operation• identify faults and problems that occur and necessary action taken to rectify• interactively communicate with others to ensure safe and effective worksite operations



• BCG 1005A Use hand and power tools• BCG 1006A Use small plant and equipment• BCG 2004A Carry out levelling• BCG 3034A Erect and dismantle formwork






• systemised formwork construction• slip formwork design• understanding of hydraulic pressure on formwork by concrete when placed• safe handling and storage of chemicals and flammable liquids• AS3610 – Formwork for Concrete• materials and components• company’s quality system and role of individual within that system• understanding of hydraulic jacking systems• plant, tools and equipment• reinforcement in concrete• worksite communication


• work safely• interpret drawings, specifications and documentation• organise work• use tools plant and equipment• select and identify materials relevant to task• handle materials• fit and secure materials• measure accurately• communicate effectively



• worksite location developed to base slab• materials and components appropriate to proposed activity• tools, plant and equipment appropriate to construction and installation processes• appropriate communication of documentation relevant to activity and tasks




Competency should be assessed under general guidance, checking at various stages of theprocesses and at the completion of each activity against the performance criteria and specifications.






KEY COMPETENCIES




information



teams

Solvingproblems

Usingmathematical

ideas andtechniques

Usingtechnology

2 1 2 2 3 2 2

Documents

BCG98 General Construction Training Package · 2006. 4. 5. · BCG31098 Certificate III in General Construction (Demolition) BCG31198 Certificate III in General Construction ... AMP